Nondiscrimination on the Basis of Disability by Public Accommodations and in Commercial Facilities, 56236-56358 [2010-21824]
Download as PDF
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56236
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
disabilities, including those who are blind or
have low vision. Commenters argued that the
cost of making Web sites accessible, through
Web site design, is minimal, yet critical to
enabling individuals with disabilities to
benefit from the entity’s programs and
services. Internet Web sites, when accessible,
provide individuals with disabilities great
independence, and have become an essential
tool for many Americans. Commenters
recommended that the Department require
covered entities, at a minimum, to meet the
section 508 Standard for Electronic and
Information Technology for Internet
accessibility. Under section 508 of the
Rehabilitation Act of 1973, Federal agencies
are required to make their Web sites
accessible. 29 U.S.C. 794(d); 36 CFR 1194.
The Department agrees that the ability to
access, on an equal basis, the programs and
activities offered by public entities through
Internet-based Web sites is of great
importance to individuals with disabilities,
particularly those who are blind or who have
low vision. When the ADA was enacted in
1990, the Internet was unknown to most
Americans. Today, the Internet plays a
critical role in daily life for personal, civic,
commercial, and business purposes. In a
period of shrinking resources, public entities
increasingly rely on the web as an efficient
and comprehensive way to deliver services
and to inform and communicate with their
citizens and the general public. In light of the
growing importance Web sites play in
providing access to public services and to
disseminating the information citizens need
to participate fully in civic life, accessing the
Web sites of public entities can play a
significant role in fulfilling the goals of the
ADA.
Although the language of the ADA does not
explicitly mention the Internet, the
Department has taken the position that title
II covers Internet Web site access. Public
entities that choose to provide services
through web-based applications (e.g.,
renewing library books or driver’s licenses)
or that communicate with their constituents
or provide information through the Internet
must ensure that individuals with disabilities
have equal access to such services or
information, unless doing so would result in
an undue financial and administrative
burden or a fundamental alteration in the
nature of the programs, services, or activities
being offered. The Department has issued
guidance on the ADA as applied to the Web
sites of public entities in a 2003 publication
entitled, Accessibility of State and Local
Government Web sites to People with
Disabilities, (June 2003) available at https://
www.ada.gov/websites2.htm. As the
Department stated in that publication, an
agency with an inaccessible Web site may
also meet its legal obligations by providing
an alternative accessible way for citizens to
use the programs or services, such as a
staffed telephone information line. However,
such an alternative must provide an equal
degree of access in terms of hours of
operation and the range of options and
programs available. For example, if job
announcements and application forms are
posted on an inaccessible Web site that is
available 24 hours a day, seven days a week
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
to individuals without disabilities, then the
alternative accessible method must also be
available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Additional guidance is available in the Web
Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG),
(May 5, 1999) available at https://www.w3.org/
TR/WAI–WEBCONTENT (last visited June
24, 2010) which are developed and
maintained by the Web Accessibility
Initiative, a subgroup of the World Wide Web
Consortium (W3C®).
The Department expects to engage in
rulemaking relating to website accessibility
under the ADA in the near future. The
Department has enforced the ADA in the area
of website accessibility on a case-by-case
basis under existing rules consistent with the
guidance noted above, and will continue to
do so until the issue is addressed in a final
regulation.
Multiple chemical sensitivities. The
Department received comments from a
number of individuals asking the Department
to add specific language to the final rule
addressing the needs of individuals with
chemical sensitivities. These commenters
expressed concern that the presence of
chemicals interferes with their ability to
participate in a wide range of activities.
These commenters also urged the Department
to add multiple chemical sensitivities to the
definition of a disability.
The Department has determined not to
include specific provisions addressing
multiple chemical sensitivities in the final
rule. In order to be viewed as a disability
under the ADA, an impairment must
substantially limit one or more major life
activities. An individual’s major life
activities of respiratory or neurological
functioning may be substantially limited by
allergies or sensitivity to a degree that he or
she is a person with a disability. When a
person has this type of disability, a covered
entity may have to make reasonable
modifications in its policies and practices for
that person. However, this determination is
an individual assessment and must be made
on a case-by-case basis.
Examinations and Courses. The
Department received one comment
requesting that it specifically include
language regarding examinations and courses
in the title II regulation. Because section 309
of the ADA 42 U.S.C. 12189, reaches ‘‘[a]ny
person that offers examinations or courses
related to applications, licensing,
certification, or credentialing for secondary
or post secondary education, professional, or
trade purposes,’’ public entities also are
covered by this section of the ADA. Indeed,
the requirements contained in title II
(including the general prohibitions against
discrimination, the program access
requirements, the reasonable modifications
requirements, and the communications
requirements) apply to courses and
examinations administered by public entities
that meet the requirements of section 309.
While the Department considers these
requirements to be sufficient to ensure that
examinations and courses administered by
public entities meet the section 309
requirements, the Department acknowledges
that the title III regulation, because it
addresses examinations in some detail, is
PO 00000
Frm 00074
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
useful as a guide for determining what
constitutes discriminatory conduct by a
public entity in testing situations. See 28 CFR
36.309.
Hotel Reservations. In the NPRM, at
§ 36.302(e), the Department proposed adding
specific language to title III addressing the
requirements that hotels, timeshare resorts,
and other places of lodging make reasonable
modifications to their policies, practices, or
procedures, when necessary to ensure that
individuals with disabilities are able to
reserve accessible hotel rooms with the same
efficiency, immediacy, and convenience as
those who do not need accessible guest
rooms. The NPRM did not propose adding
comparable language to the title II regulation
as the Department believes that the general
nondiscrimination, program access, effective
communication, and reasonable
modifications requirements of title II provide
sufficient guidance to public entities that
operate places of lodging (i.e., lodges in State
parks, hotels on public college campuses).
The Department received no public
comments suggesting that it add language on
hotel reservations comparable to that
proposed for the title III regulation. Although
the Department continues to believe that it is
unnecessary to add specific language to the
title II regulation on this issue, the
Department acknowledges that the title III
regulation, because it addresses hotel
reservations in some detail, is useful as a
guide for determining what constitutes
discriminatory conduct by a public entity
that operates a reservation system serving a
place of lodging. See 28 CFR 36.302(e).
18. Revise the heading to Appendix B
to read as follows:
■
Appendix B to Part 35—Guidance on
ADA Regulation on Nondiscrimination
on the Basis of Disability in State and
Local Government Services Originally
Published July 26, 1991
Dated: July 23, 2010.
Eric H. Holder, Jr.,
Attorney General.
[FR Doc. 2010–21821 Filed 9–14–10; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 4410–14–P
DEPARTMENT OF JUSTICE
28 CFR Part 36
[CRT Docket No. 106; AG Order No. 3181–
2010]
RIN 1190–AA44
Nondiscrimination on the Basis of
Disability by Public Accommodations
and in Commercial Facilities
Department of Justice, Civil
Rights Division.
ACTION: Final rule.
AGENCY:
This final rule revises the
Department of Justice (Department)
regulation that implements title III of
the Americans with Disabilities Act
SUMMARY:
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
(ADA), relating to nondiscrimination on
the basis of disability by public
accommodations and in commercial
facilities. The Department is issuing this
final rule in order to adopt enforceable
accessibility standards under the
Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990
(ADA) that are consistent with the
minimum guidelines and requirements
issued by the Architectural and
Transportation Barriers Compliance
Board, and to update or amend certain
provisions of the title III regulation so
that they comport with the Department’s
legal and practical experiences in
enforcing the ADA since 1991.
Concurrently with the publication of the
final rule for title III, the Department is
publishing a final rule amending its
ADA title II regulation, which covers
nondiscrimination on the basis of
disability in State and local government
services.
DATES: Effective Date: March 15, 2011.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT:
Janet L. Blizard, Deputy Chief, or
Christina Galindo-Walsh, Attorney
Advisor, Disability Rights Section, Civil
Rights Division, U.S. Department of
Justice, at (202) 307–0663 (voice or
TTY). This is not a toll-free number.
Information may also be obtained from
the Department’s toll-free ADA
Information Line at (800) 514–0301
(voice) or (800) 514–0383 (TTY).
This rule is also available in an
accessible format on the ADA Home
Page at https://www.ada.gov. You may
obtain copies of this rule in large print
or on computer disk by calling the ADA
Information Line listed above.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
The Roles of the Access Board and the
Department of Justice
The Access Board was established by
section 502 of the Rehabilitation Act of
1973. 29 U.S.C. 792. The Board consists
of 13 public members appointed by the
President, the majority of whom must be
individuals with disabilities, and the
heads of 12 Federal departments and
agencies specified by statute, including
the heads of the Department of Justice
and the Department of Transportation
(DOT). Originally, the Access Board was
established to develop and maintain
accessibility guidelines for facilities
designed, constructed, altered, or leased
with Federal dollars under the
Architectural Barriers Act of 1968
(ABA). 42 U.S.C. 4151 et seq. The
passage of the ADA expanded the
Access Board’s responsibilities.
The ADA requires the Access Board to
‘‘issue minimum guidelines that shall
supplement the existing Minimum
Guidelines and Requirements for
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
Accessible Design for purposes of
subchapters II and III of this chapter
* * * to ensure that buildings,
facilities, rail passenger cars, and
vehicles are accessible, in terms of
architecture and design, transportation,
and communication, to individuals with
disabilities.’’ 42 U.S.C. 12204. The ADA
requires the Department to issue
regulations that include enforceable
accessibility standards applicable to
facilities subject to title II or title III that
are consistent with the ‘‘minimum
guidelines’’ issued by the Access Board,
42 U.S.C. 12134(c), 12186(c), but vests
in the Attorney General sole
responsibility for the promulgation of
those standards that fall within the
Department’s jurisdiction and
enforcement of the regulations.
The ADA also requires the
Department to develop regulations with
respect to existing facilities subject to
title II (Subtitle A) and title III. How and
to what extent the Access Board’s
guidelines are used with respect to the
barrier removal requirement applicable
to existing facilities under title III of the
ADA and to the provision of program
accessibility under title II of the ADA
are solely within the discretion of the
Department.
Enactment of the ADA and Issuance of
the 1991 Regulations
On July 26, 1990, President George
H.W. Bush signed into law the ADA, a
comprehensive civil rights law
prohibiting discrimination on the basis
of disability.1 The ADA broadly protects
the rights of individuals with
disabilities in employment, access to
State and local government services,
places of public accommodation,
transportation, and other important
areas of American life. The ADA also
requires newly designed and
constructed or altered State and local
government facilities, public
accommodations, and commercial
facilities to be readily accessible to and
usable by individuals with disabilities.
42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq. Section 306(a) of
the ADA directs the Secretary of
Transportation to issue regulations for
demand responsive or fixed route
systems operated by private entities not
1 On September 25, 2008, President George W.
Bush signed into law the Americans with
Disabilities Amendments Act of 2008 (ADA
Amendments Act), Public Law 110–325. The ADA
Amendments Act amended the ADA definition of
disability to clarify its coverage of persons with
disabilities and to provide guidance on the
application of the definition. This final rule does
not contain regulatory language implementing the
ADA Amendments Act. The Department intends to
publish a supplemental rule to amend the
regulatory definition of ‘‘disability’’ to implement
the changes mandated by that law.
PO 00000
Frm 00075
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56237
primarily engaged in the business of
transporting people (sections
302(b)(2)(B) and (C)) and for private
entities that are primarily engaged in the
business of transporting people (section
304). See 42 U.S.C. 12182(b), 12184,
12186(a). Section 306(b) directs the
Attorney General to promulgate
regulations to carry out the provisions of
the rest of title III. 42 U.S.C. 12186(b).
Title II applies to State and local
government entities, and, in Subtitle A,
protects qualified individuals with
disabilities from discrimination on the
basis of disability in services, programs,
and activities provided by State and
local government entities. Title II
extends the prohibition on
discrimination established by section
504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as
amended, 29 U.S.C. 794 (section 504), to
all activities of State and local
governments regardless of whether these
entities receive Federal financial
assistance. 42 U.S.C. 12131–65.
Title III, which this rule addresses,
prohibits discrimination on the basis of
disability in the activities of places of
public accommodation (businesses that
are generally open to the public and that
fall into one of 12 categories listed in
the ADA, such as restaurants, movie
theaters, schools, day care facilities,
recreation facilities, and doctors’ offices)
and requires newly constructed or
altered places of public
accommodation—as well as commercial
facilities (privately owned,
nonresidential facilities such as
factories, warehouses, or office
buildings)—to comply with the ADA
Standards. 42 U.S.C. 12181–89.
On July 26, 1991, the Department
issued rules implementing title II and
title III, which are codified at 28 CFR
part 35 (title II) and part 36 (title III).
Appendix A of the 1991 title III
regulation, which is republished as
Appendix D to 28 CFR part 36, contains
the ADA Standards for Accessible
Design (1991 Standards), which were
based upon the version of the
Americans with Disabilities Act
Accessibility Guidelines (1991 ADAAG)
published by the Access Board on the
same date. Under the Department’s 1991
title III regulation, places of public
accommodation and commercial
facilities currently are required to
comply with the 1991 Standards with
respect to newly constructed or altered
facilities.
The Access Board’s publication of the
2004 ADA/ABA Guidelines was the
culmination of a long-term effort to
facilitate ADA compliance by
eliminating, to the extent possible,
inconsistencies among Federal
accessibility requirements and between
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56238
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal accessibility requirements and
State and local building codes. In
support of this effort, the Department is
amending its regulation implementing
title III and adopting standards
consistent with ADA Chapter 1, ADA
Chapter 2, and Chapters 3 through 10 of
the 2004 ADA/ABA Guidelines. The
Department is also amending its title II
regulation, which prohibits
discrimination on the basis of disability
in State and local government services,
concurrently with the publication of
this rule in this issue of the Federal
Register.
Development of the 2004 ADA/ABA
Guidelines
In 1994, the Access Board began the
process of updating the 1991 ADAAG by
establishing an advisory committee
composed of members of the design and
construction industry, the building code
community, and State and local
government entities, as well as
individuals with disabilities. In 1998,
the Access Board added specific
guidelines on State and local
government facilities, 63 FR 2000 (Jan.
13, 1998), and building elements
designed for use by children, 63 FR
2060 (Jan. 13, 1998). In 1999, based
largely on the report and
recommendations of the advisory
committee, the Access Board issued a
notice of proposed rulemaking (NPRM)
to update and revise its ADA and ABA
Accessibility Guidelines. See 64 FR
62248 (Nov. 16, 1999). In 2000, the
Access Board added specific guidelines
on play areas. See 65 FR 62498 (Oct. 18,
2000). The Access Board released an
interim draft of its guidelines to the
public on April 2, 2002, 67 FR 15509,
in order to provide an opportunity for
entities with model codes to consider
amendments that would promote
further harmonization. In September of
2002, the Access Board set forth specific
guidelines on recreation facilities. 67 FR
56352 (Sept. 3, 2002).
By the date of its final publication on
July 23, 2004, the 2004 ADA/ABA
Guidelines had been the subject of
extraordinary review and public
participation. The Access Board
received more than 2,500 comments
from individuals with disabilities,
affected industries, State and local
governments, and others. The Access
Board provided further opportunity for
participation by holding public
hearings.
The Department was involved
extensively in the development of the
2004 ADA/ABA Guidelines. As a
Federal member of the Access Board,
the Attorney General’s representative
voted to approve the revised guidelines.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
ADA Chapter 1 and ADA Chapter 2 of
the 2004 ADA/ABA Guidelines provide
scoping requirements for facilities
subject to the ADA; ‘‘scoping’’ is a term
used in the 2004 ADA/ABA Guidelines
to describe requirements that prescribe
which elements and spaces—and, in
some cases, how many—must comply
with the technical specifications. ABA
Chapter 1 and ABA Chapter 2 provide
scoping requirements for facilities
subject to the ABA (i.e., facilities
designed, built, altered, or leased with
Federal funds). Chapters 3 through 10 of
the 2004 ADA/ABA Guidelines provide
uniform technical specifications for
facilities subject to either the ADA or
the ABA. This revised format is
designed to eliminate unintended
conflicts between the two sets of Federal
accessibility standards and to minimize
conflicts between the Federal
regulations and the model codes that
form the basis of many State and local
building codes. For the purposes of this
final rule, the Department will refer to
ADA Chapter 1, ADA Chapter 2, and
Chapters 3 through 10 of the 2004 ADA/
ABA Guidelines as the 2004 ADAAG.
These amendments to the 1991
ADAAG have not been adopted
previously by the Department as ADA
Standards. Through this rule, the
Department is adopting revised ADA
Standards consistent with the 2004
ADAAG, including all of the
amendments to the 1991 ADAAG since
1998. For the purposes of this part, the
Department’s revised standards are
entitled ‘‘The 2010 Standards for
Accessible Design’’ and consist of the
2004 ADAAG and the requirements
contained in subpart D of 28 CFR part
36. Because the Department has adopted
the 2004 ADAAG as part of its title II
and title III regulations, once the
Department’s final rules become
effective, the 2004 ADAAG will have
legal effect with respect to the
Department’s title II and title III
regulations and will cease to be mere
guidance for those areas regulated by
the Department. In 2006, DOT adopted
the 2004 ADAAG. With respect to those
areas regulated by DOT, these
guidelines, as adopted by DOT, have
had legal effect since 2006.
Under this regulation, the Department
of Justice covers passenger vessels
operated by private entities not
primarily engaged in the business of
transporting people with respect to the
provision of goods and services of a
public accommodation on the vessel.
For example, a vessel operator whose
vessel departs from Point A, takes
passengers on a recreational trip, and
returns passengers to Point A without
ever providing for disembarkation at a
PO 00000
Frm 00076
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Point B (e.g., a dinner or harbor cruise,
a fishing charter) is a public
accommodation operated by a private
entity not primarily engaged in the
business of transporting people. This
regulation covers those aspects of the
vessel’s operation relating to the use and
enjoyment of the public
accommodation, including, for example,
the boarding process, safety policies,
accessible routes on the vessel, and the
provision of effective communication.
Persons with complaints or concerns
about discrimination on the basis of
disability by vessel operators who are
private entities not primarily engaged in
the business of transporting people, or
questions about how this regulation
applies to such operators and vessels,
should contact the Department of
Justice.
Vessels operated by private entities
primarily engaged in the business of
transporting people and that provide the
goods and services of a public
accommodation are covered by this
regulation and the Department of
Transportation’s passenger vessel rule,
49 CFR part 39. A vessel operator whose
vessel takes passengers from Point A to
Point B (e.g., a cruise ship that sails
from Miami to one or more Caribbean
islands, a private ferry boat between two
points on either side of a river or bay,
a water taxi between two points in an
urban area) is most likely a private
entity primarily engaged in the business
of transporting people. Persons with
questions about how this regulation
applies to such operators and vessels
may contact the Department of Justice or
the Department of Transportation for
guidance or further information.
However, the Department of Justice has
enforcement authority for all private
entities under title III of the ADA, so
individuals with complaints about
noncompliance with part 39 should
provide those complaints to the
Department of Justice.
The provisions of this rule and 49
CFR part 39 are intended to be
substantively consistent with one
another. Consequently, in interpreting
the application of this rule to vessel
operators who are private entities not
primarily engaged in the business of
transporting people, the Department of
Justice views the obligations of those
vessel operators as being similar to
those of private entities primarily
engaged in the business of transporting
people under the provisions of 49 CFR
part 39.
The Department’s Rulemaking History
The Department published an
advance notice of proposed rulemaking
(ANPRM) on September 30, 2004, 69 FR
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
58768, for two reasons: (1) To begin the
process of adopting the 2004 ADAAG by
soliciting public input on issues relating
to the potential application of the
Access Board’s revisions once the
Department adopts them as revised
standards; and (2) to request background
information that would assist the
Department in preparing a regulatory
analysis under the guidance provided in
Office of Management and Budget
(OMB) Circular A–4 sections D
(Analytical Approaches) and E
(Identifying and Measuring Benefits and
Costs) (Sept. 17, 2003), available at
https://www.whitehouse.gov/OMB/
circulars/a004/a-4.pdf (last visited June
24, 2010). While underscoring that the
Department, as a member of the Access
Board, already had reviewed comments
provided to the Access Board during its
development of the 2004 ADAAG, the
Department specifically requested
public comment on the potential
application of the 2004 ADAAG to
existing facilities. The extent to which
the 2004 ADAAG is used with respect
to the barrier removal requirement
applicable to existing facilities under
title III (as well as with respect to the
program access requirement in title II) is
within the sole discretion of the
Department. The ANPRM dealt with the
Department’s responsibilities under
both title II and title III.
The public response to the ANPRM
was substantial. The Department
extended the comment deadline by four
months at the public’s request. 70 FR
2992 (Jan. 19, 2005). By the end of the
extended comment period, the
Department had received more than 900
comments covering a broad range of
issues. Many of the commenters
responded to questions posed
specifically by the Department,
including questions regarding the
Department’s application of the 2004
ADAAG once adopted by the
Department and the Department’s
regulatory assessment of the costs and
benefits of particular elements. Many
other commenters addressed areas of
desired regulation or of particular
concern.
To enhance accessibility strides made
since the enactment of the ADA,
commenters asked the Department to
focus on previously unregulated areas,
such as ticketing in assembly areas;
reservations for hotel rooms, rental cars,
and boat slips; and captioning. They
also asked for clarification on some
issues in the 1991 regulations, such as
the requirements regarding service
animals. Other commenters dealt with
specific requirements in the 2004
ADAAG or responded to questions
regarding elements scoped for the first
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
time in the 2004 ADAAG, including
recreation facilities and play areas.
Commenters also provided some
information on how to assess the cost of
elements in small facilities, office
buildings, hotels and motels, assembly
areas, hospitals and long-term care
facilities, residential units, recreation
facilities, and play areas. Still other
commenters addressed the effective date
of the proposed standards, the triggering
event by which the effective date is
calculated for new construction, and
variations on a safe harbor that would
excuse elements built in compliance
with the 1991 Standards from
compliance with the proposed
standards.
After careful consideration of the
public comments in response to the
ANPRM, on June 17, 2008, the
Department published an NPRM
covering title III. 73 FR 34508. The
Department also published an NPRM on
that day covering title II. 73 FR 34466.
The NPRMs addressed the issues raised
in the public’s comments to the ANPRM
and sought additional comment,
generally and in specific areas, such as
the Department’s adoption of the 2004
ADAAG, the Department’s regulatory
assessment of the costs and benefits of
the rule, its updates and amendments of
certain provisions of the existing title II
and III regulations, and areas that were
in need of additional clarification or
specificity.
A public hearing was held on July 15,
2008, in Washington, DC. Forty-five
individuals testified in person or by
phone. The hearing was streamed live
over the Internet. By the end of the 60day comment period, the Department
had received 4,435 comments
addressing a broad range of issues,
many of which were common to the title
II and title III NPRMs, from
representatives of businesses and
industries, State and local government
agencies, disability advocacy
organizations, and private individuals.
The Department notes that this
rulemaking was unusual in that much of
the proposed regulatory text and many
of the questions asked across titles II
and III were the same. Consequently,
many of the commenters did not
provide separate sets of documents for
the proposed title II and title III rules,
and in many instances, the commenters
did not specify which title was being
commented upon. As a result, where
comments could be read to apply to
both titles II and III, the Department
included them in the comments and
responses for each final rule.
Most of the commenters responded to
questions posed specifically by the
Department, including what were the
PO 00000
Frm 00077
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56239
most appropriate definitions for terms
such as ‘‘wheelchair,’’ ‘‘mobility device,’’
and ‘‘service animal’’; how to quantify
various benefits that are difficult to
monetize; what requirements to adopt
for ticketing and assembly areas;
whether to adopt safe harbors for small
businesses; and how best to regulate
captioning. Some comments addressed
specific requirements in the 2004
ADAAG or responded to questions
regarding elements scoped for the first
time in the 2004 ADAAG, including
recreation facilities and play areas.
Other comments responded to questions
posed by the Department concerning
certain specific requirements in the
2004 ADAAG.
Relationship to Other Laws
The Department of Justice regulation
implementing title III, 28 CFR 36.103,
provides the following:
(a) Rule of interpretation. Except as
otherwise provided in this part, this part
shall not be construed to apply a lesser
standard than the standards applied
under title V of the Rehabilitation Act
of 1973 (29 U.S.C. 791) or the
regulations issued by Federal agencies
pursuant to that title.
(b) Section 504. This part does not
affect the obligations of a recipient of
Federal financial assistance to comply
with the requirements of section 504 of
the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (29 U.S.C.
794) and regulations issued by Federal
agencies implementing section 504.
(c) Other laws. This part does not
invalidate or limit the remedies, rights,
and procedures of any other Federal,
State, or local laws (including State
common law) that provide greater or
equal protection for the rights of
individuals with disabilities or
individuals associated with them.
These provisions remain unchanged
by the final rule. The Department
recognizes that public accommodations
subject to title III of the ADA may also
be subject to title I of the ADA, which
prohibits discrimination on the basis of
disability in employment; section 504 of
the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 and other
Federal statutes that prohibit
discrimination on the basis of disability
in the programs and activities of
recipients of Federal financial
assistance; and other Federal statutes
such as the Air Carrier Access Act
(ACAA), 49 U.S.C. 41705 et seq., and
the Fair Housing Act (FHAct), 42 U.S.C.
3601 et seq. Compliance with the
Department’s title II and title III
regulations does not ensure compliance
with other Federal statutes.
Public accommodations that are
subject to the ADA as well as other
Federal disability discrimination laws
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56240
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
must be aware of the requirements of all
applicable laws and must comply with
these laws and their implementing
regulations. Although in many cases
similar provisions of different statutes
are interpreted to impose similar
requirements, there are circumstances in
which similar provisions are applied
differently because of the nature of the
covered entity or activity, or because of
distinctions between the statutes. For
example, emotional support animals
that do not qualify as service animals
under the Department’s title III
regulations may nevertheless qualify as
permitted reasonable accommodations
for persons with disabilities under the
FHAct and the ACAA. See, e.g.,
Overlook Mutual Homes, Inc. v.
Spencer, 666 F. Supp. 2d 850 (S.D. Ohio
2009). Public accommodations that
operate housing facilities must ensure
that they apply the reasonable
accommodation requirements of the
FHAct in determining whether to allow
a particular animal needed by a person
with a disability into housing and may
not use the ADA definition as a
justification for reducing their FHAct
obligations. In addition, nothing in the
ADA prevents a public accommodation
subject to one statute from modifying its
policies and providing greater access in
order to assist individuals with
disabilities in achieving access to
entities subject to other Federal statutes.
For example, a quick service restaurant
at an airport is, as a public
accommodation, subject to the title III
requirements, not to the ACAA
requirements. Conversely, an air carrier
that flies in and out of the same airport
is required to comply with the ACAA,
but is not covered by title III of the
ADA. If a particular animal is a service
animal for purposes of the ACAA and is
thus allowed on an airplane, but is not
a service animal for purposes of the
ADA, nothing in the ADA prohibits an
airport restaurant from allowing a
ticketed passenger with a disability who
is traveling with a service animal that
meets the ACAA’s definition of a service
animal to bring that animal into the
facility even though under the ADA’s
definition of service animal the animal
lawfully could be excluded.
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Organization of This Rule
Throughout this rule, the original
ADA Standards, which are republished
as Appendix D to 28 CFR part 36, will
be referred to as the ‘‘1991 Standards.’’
The original title III regulation, codified
at 28 CFR part 36 (2009), will be
referred to as the ‘‘1991 regulation’’ or
the ‘‘1991 title III regulation.’’ ADA
Chapter 1, ADA Chapter 2, and Chapters
3 through 10 of the 2004 ADA/ABA
VerDate Mar<15>2010
18:44 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
Guidelines, 36 CFR part 1191, app. B
and D (2009), will be referred to as the
‘‘2004 ADAAG.’’ The Department’s
Notice of Proposed Rulemaking, 73 FR
34508 (June 17, 2008), will be referred
to as the ‘‘NPRM.’’ As noted above, the
2004 ADAAG, taken together with the
requirements contained in subpart D of
28 CFR part 36 (New Construction and
Alterations) of the final rule, will be
referred to as the ‘‘2010 Standards.’’ The
amendments made to the 1991 title III
regulation and the adoption of the 2004
ADAAG, taken together, will be referred
to as the ‘‘final rule.’’
In performing the required periodic
review of its existing regulation, the
Department has reviewed the title III
regulation section by section, and, as a
result, has made several clarifications
and amendments in this rule. Appendix
A of the final rule, ‘‘Guidance on
Revisions to ADA Regulation on
Nondiscrimination on the Basis of
Disability by Public Accommodations
and Commercial Facilities,’’ codified as
Appendix A to 28 CFR part 36, provides
the Department’s response to comments
and its explanations of the changes to
the regulation. The section entitled
‘‘Section-by-Section Analysis and
Response to Comments’’ in Appendix A
provides a detailed discussion of the
changes to the title III regulation. The
Section-by-Section Analysis follows the
order of the 1991 title III regulation,
except that regulatory sections that
remain unchanged are not referenced.
The discussion within each section
explains the changes and the reasoning
behind them, as well as the
Department’s response to related public
comments. Subject areas that deal with
more than one section of the regulation
include references to the related
sections, where appropriate. The
Section-by-Section Analysis also
discusses many of the questions asked
by the Department for specific public
response. The section of Appendix A
entitled ‘‘Other Issues’’ discusses public
comment on several issues of concern to
the Department that were the subject of
questions that are not specifically
addressed in the Section-by-Section
Analysis.
The Department’s description of the
2010 Standards, as well as a discussion
of the public comments on specific
sections of the 2004 ADAAG, is found
in Appendix B of this final rule,
‘‘Analysis and Commentary on the 2010
ADA Standards for Accessible Design,’’
codified as Appendix B to 28 CFR part
36.
The provisions of this rule generally
take effect six months from its
publication in the Federal Register. The
Department has determined, however,
that compliance with the requirements
PO 00000
Frm 00078
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
related to new construction and
alterations and reservations at a place of
lodging shall not be required until 18
months from the publication date of this
rule. These exceptions are set forth in
§§ 36.406(a) and 36.302(e)(3),
respectively, and are discussed in
greater detail in Appendix A. See
discussions in Appendix A entitled
‘‘Section 36.406 Standards for New
Construction and Alterations’’ and
‘‘Section 36.302(e) Hotel Reservations.’’
This final rule only addresses issues
that were identified in the NPRM as
subjects the Department intended to
regulate through this rulemaking
proceeding. Because the Department
indicated in the NPRM that it did not
intend to regulate certain areas,
including equipment and furniture,
accessible golf cars, and movie
captioning and video description, as
part of this rulemaking proceeding, the
Department believes it would be
appropriate to solicit more public
comment about these areas prior to
making them the subject of a
rulemaking. The Department intends to
engage in additional rulemaking in the
near future addressing accessibility in
these areas and others, including next
generation 9–1–1 and accessibility of
Web sites operated by covered public
entities and public accommodations.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:
Regulatory Process Matters (SBREFA,
Regulatory Flexibility Act, and
Executive Orders)
The Department must provide two
types of assessments as part of its final
rule: An analysis of the costs and
benefits of adopting the changes
contained in this rule, and a periodic
review of its existing regulations to
consider their impact on small entities,
including small businesses, small
nonprofit organizations, and small
governmental jurisdictions. See E.O.
12866, 58 FR 51735, 3 CFR, 1994
Comp., p. 638, as amended; Regulatory
Flexibility Act of 1980 (RFA), 5 U.S.C.
601 et seq., as amended by the Small
Business Regulatory Enforcement
Fairness Act of 1996 (SBREFA), 5 U.S.C.
610(a); OMB Circular A–4, available at
https://www.whitehouse.gov/OMB/
circulars/a004/a-4.pdf (last visited June
24, 2010); E.O. 13272, 67 FR 53461, 3
CFR, 2003 Comp., p. 247.
In the NPRM, the Department kept
open the possibility that, if warranted
by public comments received on an
issue raised by the 2004 ADAAG or by
the results of the Department’s Initial
Regulatory Impact Analysis (Initial
RIA), available at https://www.ada.gov/
NPRM2008/ria.htm, showing that the
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
likely costs of making a particular
feature or facility accessible were
disproportionate to the benefits
(including both monetized and nonmonetized benefits) to persons with
disabilities, the Attorney General, as a
member of the Access Board, could
return the issue to the Access Board for
further consideration. After careful
consideration, the Department has
determined that it is unnecessary to
return any issues to the Access Board
for additional consideration.
Executive Order 12866
This rule has been reviewed by the
Office of Management and Budget
(OMB) under Executive Order 12866.
The Department has evaluated its
existing regulations for title II and title
III section by section, and many of the
provisions in the final rule for both
titles reflect its efforts to mitigate any
negative effects on small entities. A
Final Regulatory Impact Analysis (Final
RIA or RIA) was prepared by the
Department’s contractor, HDR|HLB
Decision Economics, Inc. (HDR). In
accordance with Executive Order 12866,
as amended, and OMB Circular A–4, the
Department has reviewed and
considered the Final RIA and has
accepted the results of this analysis as
its assessment of the benefits and costs
of the final rules.
Executive Order 12866 refers
explicitly not only to monetizable costs
and benefits but also to ‘‘distributive
impacts’’ and ‘‘equity,’’ see E.O. 12866,
section 1(a), and it is important to
recognize that the ADA is intended to
provide important benefits that are
distributional and equitable in
character. The ADA states, ‘‘[i]t is the
purpose of this [Act] (1) to provide a
clear and comprehensive national
mandate for the elimination of
discrimination against individuals with
disabilities; [and] (2) to provide clear,
strong, consistent, enforceable standards
addressing discrimination against
individuals with disabilities[.]’’ 42
U.S.C. 12101(b). Many of the benefits of
this rule stem from the provision of
such standards, which will promote
inclusion, reduce stigma and potential
embarrassment, and combat isolation,
segregation, and second-class
citizenship of individuals with
disabilities. Some of these benefits are,
in the words of Executive Order 12866,
‘‘difficult to quantify, but nevertheless
essential to consider.’’ E.O. 12866,
section 1(a). The Department has
considered such benefits here.
Final Regulatory Impact Analysis
The Final RIA embodies a
comprehensive benefit-cost analysis of
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
the final rules for both title II and title
III and assesses the incremental benefits
and costs of the 2010 Standards relative
to a primary baseline scenario (1991
Standards). In addition, the Department
conducted additional research and
analyses for requirements having the
highest negative net present values
under the primary baseline scenario.
This approach was taken because, while
the 1991 Standards are the only uniform
set of accessibility standards that apply
to public accommodations, commercial
facilities, and State and local
government facilities nationwide, it is
also understood that many State and
local jurisdictions have already adopted
IBC/ANSI model code provisions that
mirror those in the 2004 ADAAG. The
assessments based on this approach
assume that covered entities currently
implementing codes that mirror the
2004 ADAAG will not need to modify
their code requirements once the rules
are finalized. They also assume that,
even without the final rules, the current
level of compliance would be
unchanged. The Final RIA contains
specific information, including data in
chart form, detailing which States have
already adopted the accessibility
standards for this subset of six
requirements. The Department believes
that the estimates resulting from this
approach represent a reasonable upper
and lower measure of the likely effects
these requirements will have that the
Department was able to quantify and
monetize.
The Final RIA estimates the benefits
and costs for all new (referred to as
‘‘supplemental’’) requirements and
revised requirements across all types of
newly constructed and existing
facilities. The Final RIA also
incorporates a sophisticated risk
analysis process that quantifies the
inherent uncertainties in estimating
costs and benefits and then assesses
(through computer simulations) the
relative impact of these factors when
varied simultaneously. A copy of the
Final RIA will be made available online
for public review on the Department’s
ADA Home Page (https://www.ada.gov).
From an economic perspective (as
specified in OMB Circular A–B4), the
results of the Final RIA demonstrate that
the Department’s final rules increase
social resources and thus represent a
public good because monetized benefits
exceed monetized costs—that is, the
regulations have a positive net present
value (NPV). Indeed, under every
scenario assessed in the Final RIA, the
final rules have a positive NPV. The
Final RIA’s first scenario examines the
incremental impact of the final rules
using the ‘‘main’’ set of assumptions (i.e.,
PO 00000
Frm 00079
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56241
assuming a primary baseline (1991
Standards), that the safe harbor applies,
and that for title III entities barrier
removal is readily achievable for 50
percent of elements subject to
supplemental requirements).
EXPECTED IMPACT OF THE RULES 2
[In billions]
Discount
rate
Expected
NPV
3% .......
7 ..........
$40.4
9.3
Total
expected
PV
(benefits)
$66.2
22.0
Total
expected
PV
(costs)
$25.8
12.8
Under this set of assumptions, the
final rules have an expected NPV of $9.3
billion (7 percent discount rate) and
$40.4 billion (3 percent discount rate).
See Final RIA, table ES–1 & figure ES–
2.
Water Closet Clearances
The Department gave careful
consideration to the costs and benefits
of its adoption of the standards relating
to water closet clearances in single-user
toilet rooms. The primary effect of the
Department’s proposed final rules
governing water closet clearances in
single-user toilet rooms with inswinging and out-swinging doors is to
allow sufficient room for ‘‘side’’ or
‘‘parallel’’ methods of transferring from a
wheelchair to a toilet. Under the current
1991 Standards, the requisite clearance
space in single-user toilet rooms
between and around the toilet and the
lavatory does not permit these methods
of transfer. Side or parallel transfers are
used by large numbers of persons who
use wheelchairs and are regularly taught
in rehabilitation and occupational
therapy. Currently, persons who use
side or parallel transfer methods from
their wheelchairs are faced with a stark
choice at establishments with singleuser toilet rooms—i.e., patronize the
establishment but run the risk of
needing assistance when using the
restroom, travel with someone who
would be able to provide assistance in
toileting, or forgo the visit entirely. The
revised water closet clearance
regulations would make single-user
toilet rooms accessible to all persons
2 The analysis assumes these regulations will be
in force for 15 years. Incremental costs and benefits
are calculated for all construction, alterations, and
barrier removal that is expected to occur during
these 15 years. The analysis also assumes that any
new or revised ADA rules enacted 15 years from
now will include a safe harbor provision. Thus, any
facilities constructed in year 14 of the final rules are
assumed to continue to generate benefits to users,
and to incur any operating or replacement costs for
the life of these buildings, which is assumed to be
40 years.
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56242
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
who use wheelchairs, not just those
with the physical strength, balance, and
dexterity and the training to use a fronttransfer method. Single-user toilet
rooms are located in a wide variety of
public and private facilities, including
restaurants, fast-food establishments,
schools, retail stores, parks, sports
stadiums, and hospitals. Final
promulgation of these requirements
might thus, for example, enable a person
who uses a side or parallel transfer
method to use the restroom (or use the
restroom independently) at his or her
local coffee shop for the first time.
Because of the complex nature of its
cost-benefit analysis, the Department is
providing ‘‘plain language’’ descriptions
of the benefits calculations for the two
revised requirements with the highest
estimated total costs: Water closet
clearance in single-user toilet rooms
with out-swinging doors (RIA Req. #28)
(section 604.3 of the 2010 Standards)
and water closet clearance in single-user
toilet rooms with in-swinging doors
(RIA Req. #32) (sections 604.3 and
603.2.3 Exception 2 of the 2010
Standards). Since many of the concepts
and calculations in the Final RIA are
highly technical, it is hoped that, by
providing ‘‘lay’’ descriptions of how
benefits are monetized for an illustrative
set of requirements, the Final RIA will
be more transparent and afford readers
a more complete understanding of the
benefits model generally. Because of the
widespread adoption of the water closet
clearance standards in existing State
and local building codes, the following
calculations use the IBC/ANSI baseline.
General description of monetized
benefits for water closet clearance in
single-user toilet rooms—out-swinging
doors (Req. #28). In order to assess
monetized benefits for the requirement
covering water closet clearances in
single-user toilet rooms with outswinging doors, a determination needed
to be made concerning the population of
users with disabilities who would likely
benefit from this revised standard.
Based on input received from a panel of
experts jointly convened by HDR and
the Department to discuss benefitsrelated estimates and assumptions used
in the RIA model, it was assumed that
accessibility changes brought about by
this requirement would benefit persons
with any type of ambulatory (i.e.,
mobility-related) disability, such as
persons who use wheelchairs, walkers,
or braces. Recent census figures estimate
that about 11.9 percent of Americans
ages 15 and older have an ambulatory
disability, or about 35 million people.
This expert panel also estimated that
single-user toilet rooms with outswinging doors would be used slightly
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
less than once every other visit to a
facility with such toilet rooms covered
by the final rules (or, viewed another
way, about once every two hours spent
at a covered facility assumed to have
one or more single-user toilet rooms
with out-swinging doors) by an
individual with an ambulatory
disability. The expert panel further
estimated that, for such individuals, the
revised requirement would result in an
average time savings of about five and
a half minutes when using the restroom.
This time savings is due to the revised
water closet clearance standard, which
permits, among other things, greater
flexibility in terms of access to the toilet
by parallel or side transfer, thereby
perhaps reducing the wait for another
person to assist with toileting and the
need to twist or struggle to access the
toilet independently. Based on average
hourly wage rates compiled by the U.S.
Department of Labor, the time savings
for Req. #28 is valued at just under $10
per hour.
For public and private facilities
covered by the final rules, it is estimated
that there are currently about 11 million
single-user toilet rooms with outswinging doors. The majority of these
types of single-user toilet rooms, nearly
7 million, are assumed to be located at
‘‘Indoor Service Establishments,’’ a
broad facility group that encompasses
various types of indoor retail stores such
as bakeries, grocery stores, clothing
stores, and hardware stores. Based on
construction industry data, it was
estimated that approximately 3 percent
of existing single-user toilet rooms with
out-swinging doors would be altered
each year, and that the number of newly
constructed facilities with these types of
toilet rooms would increase at the rate
of about 1 percent each year. However,
due to the widespread adoption at the
State and local level of model code
provisions that mirror Req. #28, it is
further understood that about half of all
existing facilities assumed to have
single-user toilet rooms with outswinging doors already are covered by
State or local building codes that require
equivalent water closet clearances. Due
to the general element-by-element safe
harbor provision in the final rules, no
unaltered single-user toilet rooms that
comply with the current 1991 Standards
will be required to retrofit to meet the
revised clearance requirements in the
final rules.
With respect to new construction, it is
assumed that each single-user toilet
room with an out-swinging door will
last the life of the building, about 40
years. For alterations, the amount of
time such a toilet room will be used
depends upon the remaining life of the
PO 00000
Frm 00080
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
building (i.e., a period of time between
1 and 39 years).
Summing up monetized benefits to
users with disabilities across all types of
public and private facilities covered by
the final rules, and assuming 46 percent
of covered facilities nationwide are
located in jurisdictions that have
adopted the relevant equivalent IBC/
ANSI model code provisions, it is
expected that the revised requirement
for water closet clearance in single-user
toilet rooms with out-swinging doors
will result in net benefits of
approximately $900 million over the life
of these regulations.
General description of monetized
benefits for water closet clearance in
single-user toilet rooms—in-swinging
doors (Req. # 32). For the water closet
clearance in single-user toilet rooms
with the in-swinging door requirement
(Req. #32), the expert panel determined
that the primary beneficiaries would be
persons who use wheelchairs. As
compared to single-user toilet rooms
with out-swinging doors, those with inswinging doors tend to be larger (in
terms of square footage) in order to
accommodate clearance for the inswinging door and, thus, are already
likely to have adequate clear floor space
for persons with disabilities who use
other types of mobility aids such as
walkers and crutches.
The expert benefits panel estimated
that single-user toilet rooms with inswinging doors are used less frequently
on average—about once every 20 visits
to a facility with such a toilet room by
a person who uses a wheelchair—than
their counterpart toilet rooms with outswinging doors. This panel also
determined that, on average, each user
would realize a time savings of about 9
minutes as a result of the enhanced
clearances required by this revised
standard.
The RIA estimates that there are about
4 million single-user toilet rooms with
in-swinging doors in existing facilities.
About half of the single-user toilet
rooms with in-swinging doors are
assumed to be located in single-level
stores, and about a quarter of them are
assumed to be located in restaurants.
Based on construction industry data, it
was estimated that approximately 3
percent of existing single-user toilet
rooms with in-swinging doors would be
altered each year, and that the number
of newly constructed facilities with
these types of toilet rooms would
increase at the rate of about 1 percent
each year. However, due to the
widespread adoption at the State and
local level of model code provisions that
mirror Req. #32, it is further understood
that slightly more than 70 percent of all
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
existing facilities assumed to have
single-user toilet rooms with inswinging doors already are covered by
State or local building codes that require
equivalent water closet clearances. Due
to the general element-by-element safe
harbor provision in the final rules, no
unaltered single-user toilet rooms that
comply with the current 1991 Standards
will be required to retrofit to meet the
revised clearance requirements in the
final rules.
Similar to the assumptions for Req.
#28, it is assumed that newly
constructed single-user toilet rooms
with in-swinging doors will last the life
of the building, about 40 years. For
alterations, the amount of time such a
toilet room will be used depends upon
the remaining life of the building (i.e.,
a period of time between 1 and 39
years). Over this time period, the total
estimated value of benefits to users of
water closets with in-swinging doors
from the time they will save and
decreased discomfort they will
experience is nearly $12 million.
Additional benefits of water closet
clearance standards. The standards
requiring sufficient space in single-user
toilet rooms for a wheelchair user to
effect a side or parallel transfer are
among the most costly (in monetary
terms) of the new provisions in the
Access Board’s guidelines that the
Department adopts in this rule—but
also, the Department believes, one of the
most beneficial in non-monetary terms.
Although the monetized costs of these
requirements substantially exceed the
monetized benefits, the additional
benefits that persons with disabilities
will derive from greater safety,
enhanced independence, and the
avoidance of stigma and humiliation—
benefits that the Department’s economic
model could not put in monetary
terms—are, in the Department’s
experience and considered judgment,
likely to be quite high. Wheelchair
users, including veterans returning from
our Nation’s wars with disabilities, are
taught to transfer onto toilets from the
side. Side transfers are the safest, most
efficient, and most independencepromoting way for wheelchair users to
get onto the toilet. The opportunity to
effect a side transfer will often obviate
the need for a wheelchair user or
individual with another type of mobility
impairment to obtain the assistance of
another person to engage in what is, for
most people, among the most private of
activities. Executive Order 12866 refers
explicitly not only to monetizable costs
and benefits but also to ‘‘distributive
impacts’’ and ‘‘equity,’’ see E.O. 12866,
section 1(a), and it is important to
recognize that the ADA is intended to
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
provide important benefits that are
distributional and equitable in
character. These water closet clearance
provisions will have non-monetized
benefits that promote equal access and
equal opportunity for individuals with
disabilities, and will further the ADA’s
purpose of providing ‘‘a clear and
comprehensive national mandate for the
elimination of discrimination against
individuals with disabilities.’’ 42 U.S.C.
12101(b)(1).
The Department’s calculations
indicated that, in fact, people with the
relevant disabilities would have to place
only a very small monetary value on
these quite substantial benefits for the
costs and benefits of these water closet
clearance standards to break even. To
make these calculations, the Department
separated out toilet rooms with outswinging doors from those with inswinging doors, because the costs and
benefits of the respective water closet
clearance requirements are significantly
different. The Department estimates
that, assuming 46 percent of covered
facilities nationwide are located in
jurisdictions that have adopted the
relevant equivalent IBC/ANSI model
code provisions, the costs of the
requirement as applied to toilet rooms
with out-swinging doors will exceed the
monetized benefits by $454 million, an
annualized net cost of approximately
$32.6 million. But a large number of
people with disabilities will realize
benefits of independence, safety, and
avoided stigma and humiliation as a
result of the requirement’s application
in this context. Based on the estimates
of its expert panel and its own
experience, the Department believes
that both wheelchair users and people
with a variety of other mobility
disabilities will benefit. The Department
estimates that people with the relevant
disabilities will use a newly accessible
single-user toilet room with an outswinging door approximately 677
million times per year. Dividing the
$32.6 million annual cost by the 677
million annual uses, the Department
concludes that for the costs and benefits
to break even in this context, people
with the relevant disabilities will have
to value safety, independence, and the
avoidance of stigma and humiliation at
just under 5 cents per visit. The
Department believes, based on its
experience and informed judgment, that
5 cents substantially understates the
value people with the relevant
disabilities would place on these
benefits in this context.
There are substantially fewer singleuser toilet rooms with in-swinging
doors, and substantially fewer people
with disabilities will benefit from
PO 00000
Frm 00081
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56243
making those rooms accessible. While
both wheelchair users and individuals
with other ambulatory disabilities will
benefit from the additional space in a
room with an out-swinging door, the
Department believes, based on the
estimates of its expert panel and its own
experience, that wheelchair users likely
will be the primary beneficiaries of the
in-swinging door requirement. The
Department estimates that people with
the relevant disabilities will use a newly
accessible single-user toilet room with
an in-swinging door approximately 8.7
million times per year. Moreover, the
alteration costs to make a single-user
toilet room with an in-swinging door
accessible are substantially higher
(because of the space taken up by the
door) than the equivalent costs of
making a room with an out-swinging
door accessible. Thus, the Department
calculates that, assuming 72 percent of
covered facilities nationwide are located
in jurisdictions that have adopted the
relevant equivalent IBC/ANSI model
code provisions, the costs of applying
the toilet room accessibility standard to
rooms with in-swinging doors will
exceed the monetized benefits of doing
so by $266.3 million over the life of the
regulations, or approximately $19.14
million per year. Dividing the $19.14
million annual cost by the 8.7 million
annual uses, the Department concludes
that for the costs and benefits to break
even in this context, people with the
relevant disabilities will have to value
safety, independence, and the avoidance
of stigma and humiliation at
approximately $2.20 per visit. The
Department believes, based on its
experience and informed judgment, that
this figure approximates, and probably
understates, the value wheelchair users
place on safety, independence, and the
avoidance of stigma and humiliation in
this context.
Alternate Scenarios
Another scenario in the Final RIA
explores the incremental impact of
varying the assumptions concerning the
percentage of existing elements subject
to supplemental requirements for which
barrier removal would be readily
achievable. Readily achievable barrier
removal rates are modeled at 0 percent,
50 percent, and 100 percent levels. The
results of this scenario show that the
expected NPV is positive for each
readily achievable barrier removal rate
and that varying this assumed rate has
little impact on expected NPV. See Final
RIA, figure ES–3.
A third set of analyses in the Final
RIA demonstrates the impact of using
alternate baselines based on model
codes instead of the primary baseline.
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56244
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
The IBC model codes, which have been
widely adopted by State and local
jurisdictions around the country, are
significant because many of the
requirements in the final rules mirror
accessibility provisions in the IBC
model codes (or standards incorporated
therein by reference, such as ANSI
A117.1). The actual economic impact of
the Department’s final rules is,
therefore, tempered by the fact that
many jurisdictions nationwide have
already adopted and are enforcing
portions of the final rules—indeed, this
was one of the goals underlying the
Access Board’s efforts to harmonize the
2004 ADAAG Standards with the model
codes. However, capturing the economic
impact of this reality poses a difficult
modeling challenge due to the variety of
methods by which States and localities
have adopted the IBC/ANSI model
codes (e.g., in whole, in part, and with
or without amendments), as well as the
lack of a national ‘‘facility census’’
establishing the location, type, and age
of existing ADA-covered facilities.
As a result, in the first set of alternate
IBC baseline analyses, the Final RIA
assumes that all of the three IBC model
codes—IBC 2000, IBC 2003, and IBC
2006—have been fully adopted by all
jurisdictions and apply to all facilities
nationwide. As with the primary
baseline scenarios examined in the
Final RIA, use of these three alternate
IBC baselines results in positive
expected NPVs in all cases. See Final
RIA, figure ES–4. These results also
indicate that IBC 2000 and IBC 2006
respectively have the highest and lowest
expected NPVs. These results are due to
changes in the make-up of the set of
requirements that is included in each
alternative baseline.
Additionally, a second, more limited
alternate baseline analysis in the Final
RIA uses a State-specific and
requirement-specific alternate IBC/ANSI
baseline in order to demonstrate the
likely actual incremental impact of an
illustrative subset of 20 requirements
under current conditions nationwide.
For this analysis, research was
conducted on a subset of 20
requirements in the final rules that have
negative net present values under the
primary baseline and readily
identifiable IBC/ANSI counterparts to
determine the extent to which they each
respectively have been adopted at the
State or local level. With respect to
facilities, the population of adopting
jurisdictions was used as a proxy for
facility location. In other words, it was
assumed that the number of ADAcovered facilities respectively compliant
with these 20 requirements was equal to
the percentage of the United States
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
population (based on statistics from the
Census Bureau) currently residing in
those States or local jurisdictions that
have adopted the IBC/ANSI
counterparts to these requirements. The
results of this more limited analysis,
using State-specific and requirementspecific alternate IBC/ANSI baselines
for these 20 requirements, demonstrate
that the widespread adoption of IBC
model codes by States and localities
significantly lessens the financial
impact of these specific requirements.
Indeed, the Final RIA estimates that, if
the NPVs for these 20 requirements
resulting from the requirement-specific
alternate IBC/ANSI baseline are
substituted for their respective results
under the primary baseline, the overall
NPV for the final rules increases from
$9.2 billion to $12.0 billion. See Final
RIA, section 6.2.2 & table 10.
Benefits Not Monetized in the Formal
Analysis
Finally, the RIA recognizes that
additional benefits are likely to result
from the new standards. Many of these
benefits are more difficult to quantify.
Among the potential benefits that have
been discussed by researchers and
advocates are reduced administrative
costs due to harmonized guidelines,
increased business opportunities,
increased social development, and
improved health benefits. For example,
the final rules will substantially
increase accessibility at newly scoped
facilities such as recreation facilities
and judicial facilities, which previously
have been very difficult for persons with
disabilities to access. Areas where the
Department believes entities may incur
benefits that are not monetized in the
formal analysis include, but may not be
limited to, the following:
Use benefits accruing to persons with
disabilities. The final rules should
improve the overall sense of well-being
of persons with disabilities, who will
know that public entities and places of
public accommodation are generally
accessible, and who will have improved
individual experiences. Some of the
most frequently cited qualitative
benefits of increased access are the
increase in one’s personal sense of
dignity that arises from increased access
and the decrease in possibly humiliating
incidents due to accessibility barriers.
Struggling to join classmates on a stage,
to use a bathroom with too little
clearance, or to enter a swimming pool
all negatively affect a person’s sense of
independence and can lead to
humiliating accidents, derisive
comments, or embarrassment. These
humiliations, together with feelings of
being stigmatized as different or inferior
PO 00000
Frm 00082
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
from being relegated to use other, less
comfortable or pleasant elements of a
facility (such as a bathroom instead of
a kitchen sink for rinsing a coffee mug
at work), all have a negative effect on
persons with disabilities.
Use benefits accruing to persons
without disabilities. Improved
accessibility can affect more than just
the rule’s target population; persons
without disabilities may also benefit
from many of the requirements. Even
though the requirements were not
designed to benefit persons without
disabilities, any time savings or easier
access to a facility experienced by
persons without disabilities are also
benefits that should properly be
attributed to that change in accessibility.
Curb cuts in sidewalks make life easier
for those using wheeled suitcases or
pushing a baby stroller. For people with
a lot of luggage or a need to change
clothes, the larger bathroom stalls can
be highly valued. A ramp into a pool
can allow a child (or adult) with a fear
of water to ease into that pool. All are
examples of ‘‘unintended’’ benefits of
the rule. And ideally, all should be part
of the calculus of the benefits to society
of the rule.
Social benefits. Evidence supports the
notion that children with and without
disabilities benefit in their social
development from interaction with one
another. Therefore, there will likely be
social development benefits generated
by an increase in accessible play areas.
However, these benefits are nearly
impossible to quantify for several
reasons. First, there is no guarantee that
accessibility will generate play
opportunities between children with
and without disabilities. Second, there
may be substantial overlap between
interactions at accessible play areas and
interactions at other facilities, such as
schools and religious facilities. Third, it
is not certain what the unit of
measurement for social development
should be.
Non-use benefits. There are
additional, indirect benefits to society
that arise from improved accessibility.
For instance, resource savings may arise
from reduced social service agency
outlays when people are able to access
centralized points of service delivery
rather than receiving home-based care.
Home-based and other social services
may include home health care visits and
welfare benefits. Third-party
employment effects can arise when
enhanced accessibility results in
increasing rates of consumption by
disabled and non-disabled populations,
which in turn results in reduced
unemployment.
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Two additional forms of benefits are
discussed less often, let alone
quantified: Option value and existence
value. Option value is the value that
people with and without disabilities
derive from the option of using
accessible facilities at some point in the
future. As with insurance, people derive
benefit from the knowledge that the
option to use the accessible facility
exists, even if it ultimately goes unused.
Simply because an individual is a nonuser of accessible elements today does
not mean that he or she will remain so
tomorrow. In any given year, there is
some probability that an individual will
develop a disability (either temporary or
permanent) that will necessitate use of
these features. For example, the 2000
Census found that 41.9 percent of adults
65 years and older identified themselves
as having a disability. Census Bureau
figures, moreover, project that the
number of people 65 years and older
will more than double between 2000
and 2030—from 35 million to 71.5
million. Therefore, even individuals
who have no direct use for accessibility
features today get a direct benefit from
the knowledge of their existence should
such individuals need them in the
future.
Existence value is the benefit that
individuals get from the plain existence
of a good, service or resource—in this
case, accessibility. It can also be
described as the value that people both
with and without disabilities derive
from the guarantees of equal treatment
and non-discrimination that are
accorded through the provision of
accessible facilities. In other words,
people value living in a country that
affords protections to individuals with
disabilities, whether or not they
themselves are directly or indirectly
affected. Unlike use benefits and option
value, existence value does not require
an individual ever to use the resource or
plan on using the resource in the future.
There are numerous reasons why
individuals might value accessibility
even if they do not require it now and
do not anticipate needing it in the
future.
Costs Not Monetized in the Formal
Analysis
The Department also recognizes that
in addition to benefits that cannot
reasonably be quantified or monetized,
there may be negative consequences and
costs that fall into this category as well.
The absence of a quantitative
assessment of such costs in the formal
regulatory analysis is not meant to
minimize their importance to affected
entities; rather, it reflects the inherent
difficulty in estimating those costs.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
Areas where the Department believes
entities may incur costs that are not
monetized in the formal analysis
include, but may not be limited to, the
following:
Costs from deferring or forgoing
alterations. Entities covered by the final
rules may choose to delay otherwise
desired alterations to their facilities due
to the increased incremental costs
imposed by compliance with the new
requirements. This may lead to facility
deterioration and decrease in the value
of such facilities. In extreme cases, the
costs of complying with the new
requirements may lead some entities to
opt to not build certain facilities at all.
For example, the Department estimates
that the incremental costs of building a
new wading pool associated with the
final rules will increase by about
$142,500 on average. Some facilities
may opt to not build such pools to avoid
incurring this increased cost.
Loss of productive space while
modifying an existing facility. During
complex alterations, such as where
moving walls or plumbing systems will
be necessary to comply with the final
rules, productive space may be
unavailable until the alterations are
complete. For example, a hotel altering
its bathrooms to comply with the final
rules will be unable to allow guests to
occupy these rooms while construction
activities are underway, and thus the
hotel may forgo revenue from these
rooms during this time. While the
amount of time necessary to perform
alterations varies significantly, the costs
associated with unproductive space
could be high in certain cases,
especially if space is already limited or
if an entity or facility is located in an
area where real estate values are
particularly high (e.g., New York or San
Francisco).
Expert fees. Another type of cost to
entities that is not monetized in the
formal analysis is legal fees to determine
what, if anything, a facility needs to do
in order to comply with the new rules
or to respond to lawsuits. Several
commenters indicated that entities will
incur increased legal costs because the
requirements are changing for the first
time since 1991. Since litigation risk
could increase, entities could spend
more on legal fees than in the past.
Likewise, covered entities may face
incremental costs when undertaking
alterations because their engineers,
architects, or other consultants may also
need to consider what modifications are
necessary to comply with the new
requirements. The Department has not
quantified the incremental costs of the
services of these kinds of experts.
PO 00000
Frm 00083
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56245
Reduction in facility value and losses
to individuals without disabilities due to
the new accessibility requirements. It is
possible that some changes made by
entities to their facilities in order to
comply with the new requirements may
result in fewer individuals without
disabilities using such facilities
(because of decreased enjoyment) and
may create a disadvantage for
individuals without disabilities, even
though the change might increase
accessibility for individuals with
disabilities. For example, the new
requirements for wading pools might
decrease the value of the pool to the
entity that owns it due to fewer
individuals using it (because the new
requirements for a sloped entry might
make the pool too shallow). Similarly,
several commenters from the miniature
golf industry expressed concern that it
would be difficult to comply with the
regulations for accessible holes without
significantly degrading the experience
for other users. Finally, with respect to
costs to individuals who do not have
disabilities, a very tall person, for
example, may be inconvenienced by
having to reach further for a lowered
light switch.
Section 610 Review
The Department also is required to
conduct a periodic regulatory review
pursuant to section 610 of the RFA, as
amended by the SBREFA.
The review requires agencies to
consider five factors: (1) The continued
need for the rule; (2) the nature of
complaints or comments received
concerning the rule from the public; (3)
the complexity of the rule; (4) the extent
to which the rule overlaps, duplicates,
or conflicts with other Federal rules,
and, to the extent feasible, with State
and local governmental rules; and (5)
the length of time since the rule has
been evaluated or the degree to which
technology, economic conditions, or
other factors have changed in the area
affected by the rule. 5 U.S.C. 610(b).
Based on these factors, the agency is
required to determine whether to
continue the rule without change or to
amend or rescind the rule, to minimize
any significant economic impact of the
rule on a substantial number of small
entities. See id. 610(a).
In developing the 2010 Standards, the
Department reviewed the 1991
Standards section by section, and, as a
result, has made several clarifications
and amendments in both the title II and
title III implementing regulations. The
changes reflect the Department’s
analysis and review of complaints or
comments from the public, as well as
changes in technology. Many of the
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56246
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
amendments aim to clarify and simplify
the obligations of covered entities. As
discussed in greater detail above, one
significant goal of the development of
the 2004 ADAAG was to eliminate
duplication or overlap in Federal
accessibility guidelines, as well as to
harmonize the Federal guidelines with
model codes. The Department also has
worked to create harmony where
appropriate between the requirements of
titles II and III. Finally, while the
regulation is required by statute and
there is a continued need for it as a
whole, the Department proposes several
modifications that are intended to
reduce its effects on small entities.
The Department has consulted with
the Small Business Administration’s
Office of Advocacy about this process.
The Office of Advocacy has advised that
although the process followed by the
Department was ancillary to the
proposed adoption of revised ADA
Standards, the steps taken to solicit
public input and to respond to public
concerns are functionally equivalent to
the process required to complete a
section 610 review. Therefore, this
rulemaking fulfills the Department’s
obligations under the RFA.
Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis
This final rule also has been reviewed
by the Small Business Administration’s
Office of Advocacy (Advocacy) in
accordance with Executive Order 13272,
67 FR 53461, 3 CFR, 2003 Comp., p.
247. Chapter Seven of the Final RIA
demonstrates that the final rule will not
have a significant economic impact on
a substantial number of small entities.
The Department has also conducted a
final regulatory flexibility analysis
(FRFA) as a component of this
rulemaking. Collectively, the ANPRM,
NPRM, Initial RIA, Final RIA, and 2010
Standards include all of the elements of
a FRFA required by the RFA. See 5
U.S.C. 604(a)(1)–(5).
Section 604(a) lists the specific
requirements for a FRFA. The
Department has addressed these RFA
requirements throughout the ANPRM,
NPRM, the 2010 Standards, and the
RIA. In summary, the Department has
satisfied its FRFA obligations under
section 604(a) by providing the
following:
1. Succinct summaries of the need for,
and objectives of, the final rule. The
Department is issuing this final rule in
order to comply with its obligations
under both the ADA and the SBREFA.
The Department is also updating or
amending certain provisions of the
existing title III regulation so that they
are consistent with the title II
regulations and comport with the
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
Department’s legal and practical
experiences in enforcing the ADA.
The ADA requires the Department to
adopt enforceable accessibility
standards under the ADA that are
consistent with the Access Board’s
minimum accessibility guidelines and
requirements. Accordingly, this rule
adopts ADA Chapter 1, ADA Chapter 2,
and Chapters 3 through 10 of the 2004
ADA/ABA Guidelines as part of the
2010 Standards, which will give the
guidelines legal effect with respect to
the Department’s title II and title III
regulations.
Under the SBREFA, the Department is
required to perform a periodic review of
its 1991 rule because the rule may have
a significant economic impact on a
substantial number of small entities.
The SBREFA also requires the
Department to make a regulatory
assessment of the costs and benefits of
any significant regulatory action. See
preamble sections of the final rules for
titles II and III entitled ‘‘Summary’’;
Department of Justice Advanced Notice
of Proposed Rulemaking, 69 FR 58768,
58768B70, (Sept. 30, 2004) (outlining
the regulatory history, goals, and
rationale underlying the Department’s
proposal to revise its regulations
implementing titles II and III of the
ADA); and Department of Justice Notice
of Proposed Rulemaking, 73 FR 34508,
34508B14 (June 17, 2008) (outlining the
regulatory history and rationale
underlying the Department’s proposal to
revise its regulations implementing
titles II and III of the ADA).
2. Summaries of significant issues
raised by public comments in response
to the Department’s initial regulatory
flexibility analysis (IRFA) and
discussions of regulatory revisions made
as a result of such comments. The
majority of the comments received by
the Department addressing its IRFA set
forth in the title III NPRM were
submitted by the Advocacy. Advocacy
acknowledged that the Department took
into account the comments and
concerns of small businesses; however,
Advocacy remained concerned about
certain items in the Department’s NPRM
and requested clarification or additional
guidance on certain items.
General Safe Harbor. Advocacy
expressed support for the Department’s
proposal to allow an element-byelement safe harbor for elements that
now comply with the 1991 Standards
and encouraged the Department to
include specific technical assistance in
the Small Business Compliance Guide
that the Department is required to
publish pursuant to section 212 of the
SBREFA, 5 U.S.C. 610 et seq. Advocacy
requested that technical assistance
PO 00000
Frm 00084
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
outlining which standards are subject to
the safe harbor be included in the
Department’s guidance. The Department
has provided a list of the new
requirements in the 2010 Standards that
are not eligible for the safe harbor in
§ 36.304(d)(2)(iii)(A)–(L) of the final rule
and plans to include additional
information about the application of the
safe harbor in the Department’s Small
Business Compliance Guide. Advocacy
also requested that guidance regarding
the two effective dates for regulations
also be provided, and the Department
plans to include such guidance in its
Small Business Compliance Guide.
Small Business Safe Harbor.
Advocacy expressed disappointment
that the Department did not include a
small business safe harbor in the final
rule. In the NPRM, the Department
proposed to include a small business
safe harbor. Advocacy conceptually
supported this safe harbor but had
concerns regarding its application.
Commenters from both the disability
community and the business
community uniformly, and quite
adamantly, opposed the Department’s
proposal. Some business commenters
suggested alternative safe harbors, but
there was no common thread among
their suggestions that would enable the
Department to craft a proposal that
would draw support from the affected
communities.
Advocacy recommended that the
Department continue to study how the
proposed small business safe harbor
might be made workable in future
rulemakings, and recommended that the
Department also seek other alternatives
that minimize the economic impact of
the ADA rulemakings in the future. The
Department is mindful of its obligations
under the SBREFA and will be sensitive
to the need to mitigate costs for small
businesses in any future rulemaking;
however, based on the information
currently available, the Department has
declined to commit to a specific
regulatory approach in the final rule.
Indirect Costs. Advocacy and other
commenters representing business
interests expressed concern that
businesses would incur substantial
indirect costs under the final rule for
accessibility consultants, legal counsel,
training, and the development of new
policies and procedures. The
Department believes that such ‘‘indirect
costs,’’ even assuming they would occur
as described by these commenters, are
not properly attributed to the
Department’s final rule implementing
the ADA.
The vast majority of the new
requirements are incremental changes
subject to a safe harbor. All businesses
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
currently in compliance with the 1991
Standards will neither need to
undertake further retrofits nor require
the services of a consultant to tell them
so. If, on the other hand, elements at an
existing facility are not currently in
compliance with the 1991 Standards,
then the cost of making such a
determination and bringing these
elements into compliance are not
properly attributed to the final rule, but
to lack of compliance with the 1991
Standards.
For the limited number of
requirements in the final rule that are
supplemental, the Department believes
that covered entities simply need to
determine whether they have an
element covered by a supplemental
requirement (e.g., a swimming pool) and
then conduct any necessary barrier
removal work either in-house or by
contacting a local contractor.
Determining whether such an element
exists is expected to take only a minimal
amount of staff time. Nevertheless,
Chapter 5 of the Final RIA has a highend estimate of the additional
management costs of such evaluation
(from 1 to 8 hours of staff time).
The Department also anticipates that
businesses will incur minimal costs for
accessibility consultants to ensure
compliance with the new requirements
for New Construction and Alterations in
the final rule. Both the 2004 ADAAG
and the proposed requirements have
been made public for some time and are
already being incorporated into design
plans by architects and builders.
Further, in adopting the final rule, the
Department has sought to harmonize, to
the greatest extent possible, the ADA
Standards with model codes that have
been adopted on a widespread basis by
State and local jurisdictions across the
country. Accordingly, many of the
requirements in the final rule are
already incorporated into building
codes nationwide. Additionally, it is
assumed to be part of the regular course
of business—and thereby incorporated
into standard professional services or
construction contracts—for architects
and contractors to keep abreast of
changes in applicable Federal, State,
and local laws and building codes.
Given these considerations, the
Department has determined that the
additional costs, if any, for architectural
or contractor services that arise out of
the final rule should be minimal.
Some commenters stated that the final
rule would require them to develop new
policies or manuals to retrain employees
on the revised ADA standards.
However, it is the Department’s view
that because the revised and
supplemental requirements address
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
architectural issues and features, the
final rule would require minimal, if any,
changes to the overall policies and
procedures of covered entities.
Finally, commenters representing
business interests expressed the view
that the final rule would cause
businesses to incur significant legal
costs in order to defend ADA lawsuits.
However, regulatory impact analyses are
not an appropriate forum for assessing
the cost covered entities may bear, or
the repercussions they may face, for
failing to comply (or allegedly failing to
comply) with current law. See Final
RIA, Ch. 3, section 3.1.4, ‘‘Other
Management Transition Costs’’; Ch. 5,
‘‘Updates to the Regulatory Impact
Analysis’’; and table 15, ‘‘Impact of NPV
of Estimated Managerial Costs for
Supplemental Requirements at All
Facilities.’’
3. Estimates of the number and type
of small entities to which the final rule
will apply. The Department estimates
that the final rule will apply to
approximately three million small
entities or facilities covered by title III.
See Final RIA, Ch. 7, ‘‘Small Business
Impact Analysis,’’ table 17, and app. 5,
‘‘Small Business Data’’; see also 73 FR
36964, 36996–37009 (June 30, 2008)
(estimating the number of small entities
the Department believes may be
impacted by the NPRM and calculating
the likely incremental economic impact
of the rule on small facilities/entities
versus ‘‘typical’’ (i.e., average-sized)
facilities/entities).
4. A description of the projected
reporting, record-keeping, and other
compliance requirements of the final
rule, including an estimate of the
classes of small entities that will be
subject to the requirement and the type
of professional skills necessary for
preparation of the report or record. The
final rule imposes no new recordkeeping or reporting requirements. See
preamble section entitled ‘‘Paperwork
Reduction Act.’’ Small entities may
incur costs as a result of complying with
the final rules. These costs are detailed
in the Final RIA, Chapter 7, ‘‘Small
Business Impact Analysis’’ and
accompanying Appendix 5, ‘‘Small
Business Data.’’
5. Descriptions of the steps taken by
the Department to minimize any
significant economic impact on small
entities consistent with the stated
objectives of the ADA, including the
reasons for selecting the alternatives
adopted in the final rule and for
rejecting other significant alternatives.
From the outset of this rulemaking, the
Department has been mindful of small
entities and has taken numerous steps to
minimize the impact of the final rule on
PO 00000
Frm 00085
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56247
small businesses. Several of these steps
are summarized below.
As an initial matter, the Department—
as a voting member of the Access
Board—was extensively involved in the
development of the 2004 ADAAG.
These guidelines, which are
incorporated into the 2010 Standards,
reflect a conscious effort to mitigate any
significant economic impact on small
businesses in several respects. First, one
of the express goals of the 2004 ADAAG
is harmonization of Federal accessibility
guidelines with industry standards and
model codes that often form the basis of
State and local building codes, thereby
minimizing the impact of these
guidelines on all covered entities, but
especially small businesses. Second, the
2004 ADAAG is the product of a 10-year
rulemaking effort in which a host of
private and public entities, including
small business groups, worked
cooperatively to develop accessibility
guidelines that achieved an appropriate
balance between accessibility and cost.
For example, as originally
recommended by the Access Board’s
Recreation Access Advisory Committee,
all holes on a miniature golf course
would be required to be accessible
except for sloped surfaces where the
ball could not come to rest. See, e.g.,
‘‘ADA Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities—Recreation
Facilities and Outdoor Developed
Areas,’’ Access Board Advance Notice of
Proposed Rulemaking, 59 FR 48542
(Sept. 21, 1994). Miniature golf trade
groups and facility operators, who are
nearly all small businesses, expressed
significant concern that such
requirements would be prohibitively
expensive, would require additional
space, and might fundamentally alter
the nature of their courses. See, e.g.,
‘‘ADA Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities—Recreation
Facilities,’’ Access Board Notice of
Proposed Rulemaking, 64 FR 37326
(July 9, 1999). In consideration of such
concerns and after holding
informational meetings with miniature
golf representatives and persons with
disabilities, the Access Board
significantly revised the final miniature
golf guidelines. The final guidelines not
only reduced significantly the number
of holes required to be accessible to 50
percent of all holes (with one break in
the sequence of consecutive holes
permitted), but also added an exemption
for carpets used on playing surfaces,
modified ramp landing slope and size
requirements, and reduced the space
required for start of play areas. See, e.g.,
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56248
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
and Facilities—Recreation Facilities
Final Rule, 36 CFR parts 1190 and 1191.
The Department also published an
ANPRM to solicit public input on the
adoption of the 2004 ADAAG as the
revised Federal accessibility standards
implementing titles II and III of the
ADA. Among other things, the ANPRM
specifically invited comment from small
entities regarding the proposed rule’s
potential economic impact and
suggested regulatory alternatives to
ameliorate any such impact. See
‘‘Nondiscrimination on the Basis of
Disability by Public Accommodations
and in Commercial Facilities,’’
Department of Justice Advance Notice of
Proposed Rulemaking, 69 FR 58768,
58778–79 (Sept. 30, 2004). The
Department received over 900
comments, and small business interests
figured prominently. See
‘‘Nondiscrimination on the Basis of
Disability by Public Accommodations
and in Commercial Facilities,’’
Department of Justice Notice of
Proposed Rulemaking, 73 FR 34508,
34511, 34550 (June 17, 2008).
Subsequently, when the Department
published its NPRM in June 2008,
several regulatory proposals were
included to address concerns raised by
the small business community in
ANPRM comments. First, to mitigate
costs to existing facilities, the
Department proposed an element-byelement safe harbor that would exempt
elements in compliance with applicable
technical and scoping requirements in
the 1991 Standards from any retrofit
obligations under the revised title III
rule. Id. at 34514–15, 34532–33. While
this proposed safe harbor applied to title
III covered entities irrespective of size,
it was small businesses that especially
stood to benefit since, according to
comments from small business
advocates, small businesses are more
likely to operate in older buildings and
facilities. The title III NPRM also offered
for public comment a novel safe harbor
provision specifically designed to
address small business advocates’
request for clearer guidance on the
readily achievable barrier removal
requirement. This proposal provided
that qualified small businesses would be
deemed to have satisfied their readily
achievable barrier removal obligations
for a given year if, during that tax year,
they had spent at least 1 percent of their
respective gross revenues undertaking
measures in compliance with title III
barrier removal requirements. Id. at
34538–39. Lastly, the NPRM sought
public input on the inclusion of reduced
scoping provisions for certain types of
small existing recreation facilities (i.e.,
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
swimming pools, play areas, and
saunas). Id. at 34515, 34534–37.
During the NPRM comment period,
the Department engaged in considerable
public outreach to the small business
community. A public hearing was held
in Washington, D.C., during which
nearly 50 persons, including several
small business owners, testified in
person or by phone. See Transcript of
the Public Hearing on Notices of
Proposed Rulemaking (July 15, 2008),
available at www.ada.gov/NPRM2008/
public_hearing_transcript.htm. This
hearing was also streamed live over the
Internet. By the end of the 60-day
comment period, the Department had
also received nearly 4,500 public
comments on the title III NPRM,
including a significant number of
comments reflecting small businesses’
perspectives on a wide range of
regulatory issues.
In addition to soliciting input from
small entities through the formal
process for public comment, the
Department also targeted the small
business community with less formal
regulatory discussions, including a
Small Business Roundtable convened by
the Office of Advocacy and held at the
offices of the Small Business
Administration in Washington, D.C.,
and an informational question-andanswer session concerning the titles II
and III NPRMs at the Department of
Justice in which business
representatives attended in-person and
by telephone. These outreach efforts
provided the small business community
with information on the NPRM
proposals being considered by the
Department and gave small businesses
the opportunity to ask questions of the
Department and provide feedback.
As a result of the feedback provided
by representatives of small business
interests on the title III NPRM, the
Department was able to assess the
impact of various alternatives on small
businesses before adopting its final rule
and took steps to minimize any
significant impact on small entities.
Most notably, the final rule retains the
element-by-element safe harbor for
which the small business community
voiced strong support. See Appendix A
discussion of removal of barriers
(§ 36.304). The Department believes that
this element-by-element safe harbor
provision will go a long way toward
mitigating the economic impact of the
final rule on existing facilities owned or
operated by small businesses. Indeed, as
demonstrated in the Final RIA, the
element-by-element safe harbor will
provide substantial relief to small
businesses that is estimated at $ 7.5
PO 00000
Frm 00086
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
billion over the expected life of the final
rule.
Additional regulatory measures
mitigating the economic impact of the
final rule on title III-covered entities
(including small businesses) include
deletion of the proposed requirement for
captioning of safety and emergency
information on scoreboards at sporting
venues, retention of the proposed path
of travel safe harbor, extension of the
compliance date of the 2010 Standards
as applied to new construction and
alterations from 6 months to 18 months
after publication of the final rule, and,
in response to public comments,
modification of the triggering event for
application of the 2010 Standards to
new construction and alterations from a
unitary approach (commencement of
physical construction) to a two-pronged
approach (date of last application for
building permit or commencement of
physical construction) depending on
whether a building permit is or is not
required for the type of construction at
issue by State or local building
authorities. See Appendix A discussions
of captioning at sporting venues
(§ 36.303), alterations and path of travel
(§ 36.403), and compliance dates and
triggering events for new construction
and alterations (§ 36.406).
Two sets of proposed alternative
measures that would have potentially
provided some cost savings to small
businesses—the safe harbor for qualified
small businesses and reduced scoping
for certain existing recreation
facilities—were not adopted by the
Department in the final rule. As
discussed in more depth previously, the
safe harbor for qualified small
businesses was omitted from the final
rule because the general safe harbor
already provides significant relief for
small businesses located in existing
facilities, the proposed safe harbor
provision lacked support from the small
business community and no consensus
emerged from business commenters
concerning feasible bases for the final
regulatory provision, and commenters
noted practical considerations that
would potentially make some small
businesses incur greater expense or
administrative burden. See Appendix A
discussion of the safe harbor for
qualified small businesses (§ 36.304).
The Department also omitted the
proposals to reduce scoping for certain
existing recreation facilities in the final
rule. While these proposals were not
specific to small entities, they
nonetheless might have mitigated the
impact of the final rule for some small
businesses that owned or operated
existing facilities at which these
recreational elements were located. See
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Appendix A discussion of reduced
scoping for play areas and other
recreation facilities (§ 36.304). The
Department gave careful consideration
to how best to insulate small businesses
from overly burdensome barrier removal
costs under the 2010 Standards for
existing small play areas, swimming
pools, and saunas, while still providing
accessible and integrated recreation
facilities that are of great importance to
persons with disabilities. The
Department concluded that the existing
readily achievable barrier removal
standard, rather than specific
exemptions for these types of existing
facilities, is the most efficacious method
by which to protect small businesses.
Once the final rule is promulgated,
small businesses will also have a wealth
of documents to assist them in
complying with the 2010 Standards. For
example, accompanying the final rule in
the Federal Register is the Department’s
‘‘Analysis and Commentary on the 2010
ADA Standards for Accessible Design,’’
which provides a plain language
description of the revised scoping and
technical requirements in these
Standards and provides illustrative
figures. The Department also expects to
publish guidance specifically tailored to
small businesses in the form of a small
business compliance guide, as well as to
publish technical assistance materials of
general interest to all covered entities
following promulgation of the final rule.
Additionally, the Access Board has
published a number of guides that
discuss and illustrate application of the
2010 Standards to play areas and
various types of recreation facilities.
Executive Order 13132: Federalism
Executive Order 13132, 64 FR 43255,
3 CFR, 2000 Comp., p. 206, requires
executive branch agencies to consider
whether a rule will have federalism
implications. That is, the rulemaking
agency must determine whether the rule
is likely to have substantial direct
effects on State and local governments,
a substantial direct effect on the
relationship between the Federal
government and the States and
localities, or a substantial direct effect
on the distribution of power and
responsibilities among the different
levels of government. If an agency
believes that a rule is likely to have
federalism implications, it must consult
with State and local elected officials
about how to minimize or eliminate the
effects.
Title III of the ADA covers public
accommodations and commercial
facilities. These facilities are generally
subject to regulation by different levels
of government, including Federal, State,
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
and local governments. The ADA and
the 2010 Standards set minimum civil
rights protections for individuals with
disabilities that in turn may affect the
implementation of State and local laws,
particularly building codes. The 2010
Standards address federalism concerns
and mitigate federalism implications,
particularly the provisions that
streamline the administrative process
for State and local governments seeking
ADA code certification under title III.
As a member of the Access Board, the
Department was privy to substantial
feedback from State and local
governments throughout the
development of the Board’s 2004
guidelines. Before those guidelines were
finalized as the 2004 ADA/ABA
Guidelines, they addressed and
minimized federalism concerns
expressed by State and local
governments during the development
process. Because the Department
adopted ADA Chapter 1, ADA Chapter
2, and Chapters 3 through 10 of the 2004
ADA/ABA Guidelines as part of the
2010 Standards, the steps taken in the
2004 ADA/ABA Guidelines to address
federalism concerns are reflected in the
2010 Standards.
The Department also solicited and
received input from public entities in
the September 2004 ANPRM and the
June 2008 NPRM. Through the ANPRM
and NPRM processes, the Department
solicited comments from elected State
and local officials and their
representative national organizations
about the potential federalism
implications. The Department received
comments addressing whether the
ANPRM and NPRM directly affected
State and local governments, the
relationship between the Federal
government and the States, and the
distribution of power and
responsibilities among the various
levels of government. The rule preempts
State laws affecting entities subject to
the ADA only to the extent that those
laws conflict with the requirements of
the ADA, as set forth in the rule.
National Technology Transfer and
Advancement Act of 1995
The National Technology Transfer
and Advancement Act of 1995 (NTTAA)
directs that, as a general matter, all
Federal agencies and departments shall
use technical standards that are
developed or adopted by voluntary
consensus standards bodies, which are
private, generally non-profit
organizations that develop technical
standards or specifications using welldefined procedures that require
openness, balanced participation among
affected interests and groups, fairness
PO 00000
Frm 00087
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56249
and due process, and an opportunity for
appeal, as a means to carry out policy
objectives or activities. Public Law 104–
113 section 12(d)(1) (15 U.S.C. 272
Note). In addition, the NTTAA directs
agencies to consult with voluntary,
private sector, consensus standards
bodies and requires that agencies
participate with such bodies in the
development of technical standards
when such participation is in the public
interest and is compatible with agency
and departmental missions, authorities,
priorities, and budget resources. Id.
section 12(d)(1). The Department, as a
member of the Access Board, was an
active participant in the lengthy process
of developing the 2004 ADAAG, on
which the 2010 Standards are based. As
part of this update, the Board has made
its guidelines more consistent with
model building codes, such as the IBC,
and industry standards. It coordinated
extensively with model code groups and
standard-setting bodies throughout the
process so that differences could be
reconciled. As a result, an historic level
of harmonization has been achieved that
has brought about improvements to the
guidelines, as well as to counterpart
provisions in the IBC and key industry
standards, including those for accessible
facilities issued through the American
National Standards Institute.
Plain Language Instructions
The Department makes every effort to
promote clarity and transparency in its
rulemaking. In any regulation, there is a
tension between drafting language that
is simple and straightforward and
drafting language that gives full effect to
issues of legal interpretation. The
Department operates a toll-free ADA
Information Line (800) 514–0301
(voice); (800) 514–0383 (TTY) that the
public is welcome to call at any time to
obtain assistance in understanding
anything in this rule. If any commenter
has suggestions for how the regulation
could be written more clearly, please
contact Janet L. Blizard, Deputy Chief,
Disability Rights Section, whose contact
information is provided in the
introductory section of this rule,
entitled FOR FURTHER INFORMATION
CONTACT.
Paperwork Reduction Act
The Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980
(PRA) requires agencies to clear forms
and recordkeeping requirements with
OMB before they can be introduced. 44
U.S.C. 3501 et seq. This rule does not
contain any paperwork or recordkeeping
requirements and does not require
clearance under the PRA.
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56250
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
Unfunded Mandates Reform Act
Section 4(2) of the Unfunded
Mandates Reform Act of 1995, 2 U.S.C.
1503(2), excludes from coverage under
that Act any proposed or final Federal
regulation that ‘‘establishes or enforces
any statutory rights that prohibit
discrimination on the basis of race,
color, religion, sex, national origin, age,
handicap, or disability.’’ Accordingly,
this rulemaking is not subject to the
provisions of the Unfunded Mandates
Reform Act.
List of Subjects for 28 CFR Part 36
Administrative practice and
procedure, Buildings and facilities,
Business and industry, Civil rights,
Individuals with disabilities, Penalties,
Reporting and recordkeeping
requirements.
■ By the authority vested in me as
Attorney General by law, including 28
U.S.C. 509 and 510, 5 U.S.C. 301, and
section 306 of the Americans with
Disabilities Act of 1990, Public Law
101–336 (42 U.S.C. 12186), and for the
reasons set forth in Appendix A to 28
CFR part 36, chapter I of title 28 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amended
as follows:
PART 36—NONDISCRIMINATION ON
THE BASIS OF DISABILITY BY PUBLIC
ACCOMMODATIONS AND IN
COMMERCIAL FACILITIES
Subpart A—General
1. The authority citation for 28 CFR
part 36 is revised to read as follows:
■
Authority: 5 U.S.C. 301; 28 U.S.C. 509,
510; 42 U.S.C. 12186(b).
2. Amend § 36.104 by adding the
following definitions of 1991 Standards,
2004 ADAAG, 2010 Standards, direct
threat, existing facility, housing at a
place of education, other power-driven
mobility device, qualified reader, video
remote interpreting (VRI) service, and
wheelchair in alphabetical order and
revising the definitions of place of
public accommodation, qualified
interpreter, and service animal to read
as follows:
■
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
§ 36.104
Definitions.
1991 Standards means requirements
set forth in the ADA Standards for
Accessible Design, originally published
on July 26, 1991, and republished as
Appendix D to this part.
2004 ADAAG means the requirements
set forth in appendices B and D to 36
CFR part 1191 (2009).
2010 Standards means the 2010 ADA
Standards for Accessible Design, which
consist of the 2004 ADAAG and the
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
requirements contained in subpart D of
this part.
*
*
*
*
*
Direct threat means a significant risk
to the health or safety of others that
cannot be eliminated by a modification
of policies, practices, or procedures, or
by the provision of auxiliary aids or
services, as provided in § 36.208.
*
*
*
*
*
Existing facility means a facility in
existence on any given date, without
regard to whether the facility may also
be considered newly constructed or
altered under this part.
*
*
*
*
*
Housing at a place of education
means housing operated by or on behalf
of an elementary, secondary,
undergraduate, or postgraduate school,
or other place of education, including
dormitories, suites, apartments, or other
places of residence.
*
*
*
*
*
Other power-driven mobility device
means any mobility device powered by
batteries, fuel, or other engines—
whether or not designed primarily for
use by individuals with mobility
disabilities—that is used by individuals
with mobility disabilities for the
purpose of locomotion, including golf
cars, electronic personal assistance
mobility devices (EPAMDs), such as the
Segway® PT, or any mobility device
designed to operate in areas without
defined pedestrian routes, but that is not
a wheelchair within the meaning of this
section. This definition does not apply
to Federal wilderness areas; wheelchairs
in such areas are defined in section
508(c)(2) of the ADA, 42 U.S.C.
12207(c)(2).
*
*
*
*
*
Place of public accommodation
means a facility operated by a private
entity whose operations affect
commerce and fall within at least one of
the following categories—
(1) Place of lodging, except for an
establishment located within a facility
that contains not more than five rooms
for rent or hire and that actually is
occupied by the proprietor of the
establishment as the residence of the
proprietor. For purposes of this part, a
facility is a ‘‘place of lodging’’ if it is—
(i) An inn, hotel, or motel; or
(ii) A facility that—
(A) Provides guest rooms for sleeping
for stays that primarily are short-term in
nature (generally 30 days or less) where
the occupant does not have the right to
return to a specific room or unit after
the conclusion of his or her stay; and
(B) Provides guest rooms under
conditions and with amenities similar to
PO 00000
Frm 00088
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
a hotel, motel, or inn, including the
following—
(1) On- or off-site management and
reservations service;
(2) Rooms available on a walk-up or
call-in basis;
(3) Availability of housekeeping or
linen service; and
(4) Acceptance of reservations for a
guest room type without guaranteeing a
particular unit or room until check-in,
and without a prior lease or security
deposit.
*
*
*
*
*
Qualified interpreter means an
interpreter who, via a video remote
interpreting (VRI) service or an on-site
appearance, is able to interpret
effectively, accurately, and impartially,
both receptively and expressively, using
any necessary specialized vocabulary.
Qualified interpreters include, for
example, sign language interpreters, oral
transliterators, and cued-language
transliterators.
*
*
*
*
*
Qualified reader means a person who
is able to read effectively, accurately,
and impartially using any necessary
specialized vocabulary.
*
*
*
*
*
Service animal means any dog that is
individually trained to do work or
perform tasks for the benefit of an
individual with a disability, including a
physical, sensory, psychiatric,
intellectual, or other mental disability.
Other species of animals, whether wild
or domestic, trained or untrained, are
not service animals for the purposes of
this definition. The work or tasks
performed by a service animal must be
directly related to the handler’s
disability. Examples of work or tasks
include, but are not limited to, assisting
individuals who are blind or have low
vision with navigation and other tasks,
alerting individuals who are deaf or
hard of hearing to the presence of
people or sounds, providing non-violent
protection or rescue work, pulling a
wheelchair, assisting an individual
during a seizure, alerting individuals to
the presence of allergens, retrieving
items such as medicine or the
telephone, providing physical support
and assistance with balance and
stability to individuals with mobility
disabilities, and helping persons with
psychiatric and neurological disabilities
by preventing or interrupting impulsive
or destructive behaviors. The crime
deterrent effects of an animal’s presence
and the provision of emotional support,
well-being, comfort, or companionship
do not constitute work or tasks for the
purposes of this definition.
*
*
*
*
*
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
Video remote interpreting (VRI)
service means an interpreting service
that uses video conference technology
over dedicated lines or wireless
technology offering high-speed, widebandwidth video connection that
delivers high-quality video images as
provided in § 36.303(f).
*
*
*
*
*
Wheelchair means a manuallyoperated or power-driven device
designed primarily for use by an
individual with a mobility disability for
the main purpose of indoor or of both
indoor and outdoor locomotion. This
definition does not apply to Federal
wilderness areas; wheelchairs in such
areas are defined in section 508(c)(2) of
the ADA, 42 U.S.C. 12207(c)(2).
Subpart B—General Requirements
3. Amend § 36.208 by removing
paragraph (b) and redesignating
paragraph (c) as paragraph (b) and by
revising redesignated paragraph (b) to
read as follows:
■
§ 36.208
Direct threat.
*
*
*
*
*
(b) In determining whether an
individual poses a direct threat to the
health or safety of others, a public
accommodation must make an
individualized assessment, based on
reasonable judgment that relies on
current medical knowledge or on the
best available objective evidence, to
ascertain: The nature, duration, and
severity of the risk; the probability that
the potential injury will actually occur;
and whether reasonable modifications
of policies, practices, or procedures or
the provision of auxiliary aids or
services will mitigate the risk.
■ 4. Amend § 36.211 by adding
paragraph (c) to read as follows:
§ 36.211 Maintenance of accessible
features.
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
*
*
*
*
*
(c) If the 2010 Standards reduce the
technical requirements or the number of
required accessible elements below the
number required by the 1991 Standards,
the technical requirements or the
number of accessible elements in a
facility subject to this part may be
reduced in accordance with the
requirements of the 2010 Standards.
Subpart C—Specific Requirements
5. Amend § 36.302 as follows:
a. Revise paragraph (c)(2); and
■ b. Add paragraphs (c)(3) through (c)(9)
and paragraphs (e) and (f) to read as
follows:
■
■
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
§ 36.302 Modifications in policies,
practices, or procedures.
(c) * * *
(2) Exceptions. A public
accommodation may ask an individual
with a disability to remove a service
animal from the premises if:
(i) The animal is out of control and
the animal’s handler does not take
effective action to control it; or
(ii) The animal is not housebroken.
(3) If an animal is properly excluded.
If a public accommodation properly
excludes a service animal under
§ 36.302(c)(2), it shall give the
individual with a disability the
opportunity to obtain goods, services,
and accommodations without having
the service animal on the premises.
(4) Animal under handler’s control. A
service animal shall be under the
control of its handler. A service animal
shall have a harness, leash, or other
tether, unless either the handler is
unable because of a disability to use a
harness, leash, or other tether, or the use
of a harness, leash, or other tether
would interfere with the service
animal’s safe, effective performance of
work or tasks, in which case the service
animal must be otherwise under the
handler’s control (e.g., voice control,
signals, or other effective means).
(5) Care or supervision. A public
accommodation is not responsible for
the care or supervision of a service
animal.
(6) Inquiries. A public
accommodation shall not ask about the
nature or extent of a person’s disability,
but may make two inquiries to
determine whether an animal qualifies
as a service animal. A public
accommodation may ask if the animal is
required because of a disability and
what work or task the animal has been
trained to perform. A public
accommodation shall not require
documentation, such as proof that the
animal has been certified, trained, or
licensed as a service animal. Generally,
a public accommodation may not make
these inquiries about a service animal
when it is readily apparent that an
animal is trained to do work or perform
tasks for an individual with a disability
(e.g., the dog is observed guiding an
individual who is blind or has low
vision, pulling a person’s wheelchair, or
providing assistance with stability or
balance to an individual with an
observable mobility disability).
(7) Access to areas of a public
accommodation. Individuals with
disabilities shall be permitted to be
accompanied by their service animals in
all areas of a place of public
accommodation where members of the
public, program participants, clients,
PO 00000
Frm 00089
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56251
customers, patrons, or invitees, as
relevant, are allowed to go.
(8) Surcharges. A public
accommodation shall not ask or require
an individual with a disability to pay a
surcharge, even if people accompanied
by pets are required to pay fees, or to
comply with other requirements
generally not applicable to people
without pets. If a public accommodation
normally charges individuals for the
damage they cause, an individual with
a disability may be charged for damage
caused by his or her service animal.
(9) Miniature horses. (i) A public
accommodation shall make reasonable
modifications in policies, practices, or
procedures to permit the use of a
miniature horse by an individual with a
disability if the miniature horse has
been individually trained to do work or
perform tasks for the benefit of the
individual with a disability.
(ii) Assessment factors. In
determining whether reasonable
modifications in policies, practices, or
procedures can be made to allow a
miniature horse into a specific facility,
a public accommodation shall
consider—
(A) The type, size, and weight of the
miniature horse and whether the facility
can accommodate these features;
(B) Whether the handler has sufficient
control of the miniature horse;
(C) Whether the miniature horse is
housebroken; and
(D) Whether the miniature horse’s
presence in a specific facility
compromises legitimate safety
requirements that are necessary for safe
operation.
(iii) Other requirements. Sections
36.302(c)(3) through (c)(8), which apply
to service animals, shall also apply to
miniature horses.
*
*
*
*
*
(e)(1) Reservations made by places of
lodging. A public accommodation that
owns, leases (or leases to), or operates
a place of lodging shall, with respect to
reservations made by telephone, inperson, or through a third party—
(i) Modify its policies, practices, or
procedures to ensure that individuals
with disabilities can make reservations
for accessible guest rooms during the
same hours and in the same manner as
individuals who do not need accessible
rooms;
(ii) Identify and describe accessible
features in the hotels and guest rooms
offered through its reservations service
in enough detail to reasonably permit
individuals with disabilities to assess
independently whether a given hotel or
guest room meets his or her accessibility
needs;
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56252
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
(iii) Ensure that accessible guest
rooms are held for use by individuals
with disabilities until all other guest
rooms of that type have been rented and
the accessible room requested is the
only remaining room of that type;
(iv) Reserve, upon request, accessible
guest rooms or specific types of guest
rooms and ensure that the guest rooms
requested are blocked and removed
from all reservations systems; and
(v) Guarantee that the specific
accessible guest room reserved through
its reservations service is held for the
reserving customer, regardless of
whether a specific room is held in
response to reservations made by others.
(2) Exception. The requirements in
paragraphs (iii), (iv), and (v) of this
section do not apply to reservations for
individual guest rooms or other units
not owned or substantially controlled by
the entity that owns, leases, or operates
the overall facility.
(3) Compliance date. The
requirements in this section will apply
to reservations made on or after March
15, 2012.
(f) Ticketing. (1)(i) For the purposes of
this section, ‘‘accessible seating’’ is
defined as wheelchair spaces and
companion seats that comply with
sections 221 and 802 of the 2010
Standards along with any other seats
required to be offered for sale to the
individual with a disability pursuant to
paragraph (4) of this section.
(ii) Ticket sales. A public
accommodation that sells tickets for a
single event or series of events shall
modify its policies, practices, or
procedures to ensure that individuals
with disabilities have an equal
opportunity to purchase tickets for
accessible seating—
(A) During the same hours;
(B) During the same stages of ticket
sales, including, but not limited to, presales, promotions, lotteries, wait-lists,
and general sales;
(C) Through the same methods of
distribution;
(D) In the same types and numbers of
ticketing sales outlets, including
telephone service, in-person ticket sales
at the facility, or third-party ticketing
services, as other patrons; and
(E) Under the same terms and
conditions as other tickets sold for the
same event or series of events.
(2) Identification of available
accessible seating. A public
accommodation that sells or distributes
tickets for a single event or series of
events shall, upon inquiry—
(i) Inform individuals with
disabilities, their companions, and third
parties purchasing tickets for accessible
seating on behalf of individuals with
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
disabilities of the locations of all unsold
or otherwise available accessible seating
for any ticketed event or events at the
facility;
(ii) Identify and describe the features
of available accessible seating in enough
detail to reasonably permit an
individual with a disability to assess
independently whether a given
accessible seating location meets his or
her accessibility needs; and
(iii) Provide materials, such as seating
maps, plans, brochures, pricing charts,
or other information, that identify
accessible seating and information
relevant thereto with the same text or
visual representations as other seats, if
such materials are provided to the
general public.
(3) Ticket prices. The price of tickets
for accessible seating for a single event
or series of events shall not be set higher
than the price for other tickets in the
same seating section for the same event
or series of events. Tickets for accessible
seating must be made available at all
price levels for every event or series of
events. If tickets for accessible seating at
a particular price level cannot be
provided because barrier removal in an
existing facility is not readily
achievable, then the percentage of
tickets for accessible seating that should
have been available at that price level
but for the barriers (determined by the
ratio of the total number of tickets at
that price level to the total number of
tickets in the assembly area) shall be
offered for purchase, at that price level,
in a nearby or similar accessible
location.
(4) Purchasing multiple tickets. (i)
General. For each ticket for a wheelchair
space purchased by an individual with
a disability or a third-party purchasing
such a ticket at his or her request, a
public accommodation shall make
available for purchase three additional
tickets for seats in the same row that are
contiguous with the wheelchair space,
provided that at the time of purchase
there are three such seats available. A
public accommodation is not required
to provide more than three contiguous
seats for each wheelchair space. Such
seats may include wheelchair spaces.
(ii) Insufficient additional contiguous
seats available. If patrons are allowed to
purchase at least four tickets, and there
are fewer than three such additional
contiguous seat tickets available for
purchase, a public accommodation shall
offer the next highest number of such
seat tickets available for purchase and
shall make up the difference by offering
tickets for sale for seats that are as close
as possible to the accessible seats.
(iii) Sales limited to fewer than four
tickets. If a public accommodation
PO 00000
Frm 00090
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
limits sales of tickets to fewer than four
seats per patron, then the public
accommodation is only obligated to
offer as many seats to patrons with
disabilities, including the ticket for the
wheelchair space, as it would offer to
patrons without disabilities.
(iv) Maximum number of tickets
patrons may purchase exceeds four. If
patrons are allowed to purchase more
than four tickets, a public
accommodation shall allow patrons
with disabilities to purchase up to the
same number of tickets, including the
ticket for the wheelchair space.
(v) Group sales. If a group includes
one or more individuals who need to
use accessible seating because of a
mobility disability or because their
disability requires the use of the
accessible features that are provided in
accessible seating, the group shall be
placed in a seating area with accessible
seating so that, if possible, the group can
sit together. If it is necessary to divide
the group, it should be divided so that
the individuals in the group who use
wheelchairs are not isolated from their
group.
(5) Hold and release of tickets for
accessible seating. (i) Tickets for
accessible seating may be released for
sale in certain limited circumstances. A
public accommodation may release
unsold tickets for accessible seating for
sale to individuals without disabilities
for their own use for a single event or
series of events only under the
following circumstances—
(A) When all non-accessible tickets
(excluding luxury boxes, club boxes, or
suites) have been sold;
(B) When all non-accessible tickets in
a designated seating area have been sold
and the tickets for accessible seating are
being released in the same designated
area; or
(C) When all non-accessible tickets in
a designated price category have been
sold and the tickets for accessible
seating are being released within the
same designated price category.
(ii) No requirement to release
accessible tickets. Nothing in this
paragraph requires a facility to release
tickets for accessible seating to
individuals without disabilities for their
own use.
(iii) Release of series-of-events tickets
on a series-of-events basis. (A) Series-ofevents tickets sell-out when no
ownership rights are attached. When
series-of-events tickets are sold out and
a public accommodation releases and
sells accessible seating to individuals
without disabilities for a series of
events, the public accommodation shall
establish a process that prevents the
automatic reassignment of the accessible
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
seating to such ticket holders for future
seasons, future years, or future series, so
that individuals with disabilities who
require the features of accessible seating
and who become newly eligible to
purchase tickets when these series-ofevents tickets are available for purchase
have an opportunity to do so.
(B) Series-of-events tickets when
ownership rights are attached. When
series-of-events tickets with an
ownership right in accessible seating
areas are forfeited or otherwise returned
to a public accommodation, the public
accommodation shall make reasonable
modifications in its policies, practices,
or procedures to afford individuals with
mobility disabilities or individuals with
disabilities that require the features of
accessible seating an opportunity to
purchase such tickets in accessible
seating areas.
(6) Ticket transfer. Individuals with
disabilities who hold tickets for
accessible seating shall be permitted to
transfer tickets to third parties under the
same terms and conditions and to the
same extent as other spectators holding
the same type of tickets, whether they
are for a single event or series of events.
(7) Secondary ticket market. (i) A
public accommodation shall modify its
policies, practices, or procedures to
ensure that an individual with a
disability may use a ticket acquired in
the secondary ticket market under the
same terms and conditions as other
individuals who hold a ticket acquired
in the secondary ticket market for the
same event or series of events.
(ii) If an individual with a disability
acquires a ticket or series of tickets to
an inaccessible seat through the
secondary market, a public
accommodation shall make reasonable
modifications to its policies, practices,
or procedures to allow the individual to
exchange his ticket for one to an
accessible seat in a comparable location
if accessible seating is vacant at the time
the individual presents the ticket to the
public accommodation.
(8) Prevention of fraud in purchase of
tickets for accessible seating. A public
accommodation may not require proof
of disability, including, for example, a
doctor’s note, before selling tickets for
accessible seating.
(i) Single-event tickets. For the sale of
single-event tickets, it is permissible to
inquire whether the individual
purchasing the tickets for accessible
seating has a mobility disability or a
disability that requires the use of the
accessible features that are provided in
accessible seating, or is purchasing the
tickets for an individual who has a
mobility disability or a disability that
requires the use of the accessible
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
features that are provided in the
accessible seating.
(ii) Series-of-events tickets. For seriesof-events tickets, it is permissible to ask
the individual purchasing the tickets for
accessible seating to attest in writing
that the accessible seating is for a person
who has a mobility disability or a
disability that requires the use of the
accessible features that are provided in
the accessible seating.
(iii) Investigation of fraud. A public
accommodation may investigate the
potential misuse of accessible seating
where there is good cause to believe that
such seating has been purchased
fraudulently.
■ 6. Amend § 36.303 as follows:
■ a. Revise paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(2), (c),
and (d);
■ b. Redesignate paragraph (f) as
paragraph (g); and
■ c. Add paragraph (f) to read as
follows:
§ 36.303
Auxiliary aids and services.
*
*
*
*
*
(b) * * *
(1) Qualified interpreters on-site or
through video remote interpreting (VRI)
services; notetakers; real-time computeraided transcription services; written
materials; exchange of written notes;
telephone handset amplifiers; assistive
listening devices; assistive listening
systems; telephones compatible with
hearing aids; closed caption decoders;
open and closed captioning, including
real-time captioning; voice, text, and
video-based telecommunications
products and systems, including text
telephones (TTYs), videophones, and
captioned telephones, or equally
effective telecommunications devices;
videotext displays; accessible electronic
and information technology; or other
effective methods of making aurally
delivered information available to
individuals who are deaf or hard of
hearing;
(2) Qualified readers; taped texts;
audio recordings; Brailled materials and
displays; screen reader software;
magnification software; optical readers;
secondary auditory programs (SAP);
large print materials; accessible
electronic and information technology;
or other effective methods of making
visually delivered materials available to
individuals who are blind or have low
vision;
*
*
*
*
*
(c) Effective communication.
(1) A public accommodation shall
furnish appropriate auxiliary aids and
services where necessary to ensure
effective communication with
individuals with disabilities. This
PO 00000
Frm 00091
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56253
includes an obligation to provide
effective communication to companions
who are individuals with disabilities.
(i) For purposes of this section,
‘‘companion’’ means a family member,
friend, or associate of an individual
seeking access to, or participating in, the
goods, services, facilities, privileges,
advantages, or accommodations of a
public accommodation, who, along with
such individual, is an appropriate
person with whom the public
accommodation should communicate.
(ii) The type of auxiliary aid or service
necessary to ensure effective
communication will vary in accordance
with the method of communication
used by the individual; the nature,
length, and complexity of the
communication involved; and the
context in which the communication is
taking place. A public accommodation
should consult with individuals with
disabilities whenever possible to
determine what type of auxiliary aid is
needed to ensure effective
communication, but the ultimate
decision as to what measures to take
rests with the public accommodation,
provided that the method chosen results
in effective communication. In order to
be effective, auxiliary aids and services
must be provided in accessible formats,
in a timely manner, and in such a way
as to protect the privacy and
independence of the individual with a
disability.
(2) A public accommodation shall not
require an individual with a disability
to bring another individual to interpret
for him or her.
(3) A public accommodation shall not
rely on an adult accompanying an
individual with a disability to interpret
or facilitate communication, except—
(i) In an emergency involving an
imminent threat to the safety or welfare
of an individual or the public where
there is no interpreter available; or
(ii) Where the individual with a
disability specifically requests that the
accompanying adult interpret or
facilitate communication, the
accompanying adult agrees to provide
such assistance, and reliance on that
adult for such assistance is appropriate
under the circumstances.
(4) A public accommodation shall not
rely on a minor child to interpret or
facilitate communication, except in an
emergency involving an imminent
threat to the safety or welfare of an
individual or the public where there is
no interpreter available.
(d) Telecommunications. (1) When a
public accommodation uses an
automated-attendant system, including,
but not limited to, voicemail and
messaging, or an interactive voice
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56254
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
response system, for receiving and
directing incoming telephone calls, that
system must provide effective real-time
communication with individuals using
auxiliary aids and services, including
text telephones (TTYs) and all forms of
FCC-approved telecommunications
relay systems, including Internet-based
relay systems.
(2) A public accommodation that
offers a customer, client, patient, or
participant the opportunity to make
outgoing telephone calls using the
public accommodation’s equipment on
more than an incidental convenience
basis shall make available accessible
public telephones, TTYs, or other
telecommunications products and
systems for use by an individual who is
deaf or hard of hearing, or has a speech
impairment.
(3) A public accommodation may use
relay services in place of direct
telephone communication for receiving
or making telephone calls incident to its
operations.
(4) A public accommodation shall
respond to telephone calls from a
telecommunications relay service
established under title IV of the ADA in
the same manner that it responds to
other telephone calls.
(5) This part does not require a public
accommodation to use a TTY for
receiving or making telephone calls
incident to its operations.
*
*
*
*
*
(f) Video remote interpreting (VRI)
services. A public accommodation that
chooses to provide qualified interpreters
via VRI service shall ensure that it
provides—
(1) Real-time, full-motion video and
audio over a dedicated high-speed,
wide-bandwidth video connection or
wireless connection that delivers highquality video images that do not
produce lags, choppy, blurry, or grainy
images, or irregular pauses in
communication;
(2) A sharply delineated image that is
large enough to display the interpreter’s
face, arms, hands, and fingers, and the
participating individual’s face, arms,
hands, and fingers, regardless of his or
her body position;
(3) A clear, audible transmission of
voices; and
(4) Adequate training to users of the
technology and other involved
individuals so that they may quickly
and efficiently set up and operate the
VRI.
*
*
*
*
*
■ 7. Amend § 36.304 as follows:
■ a. Revise paragraph (d)(1);
■ b. Redesignate paragraph (d)(2) as
(d)(3);
■ c. Amend newly redesignated
paragraph (d)(3) by removing the
reference to ‘‘(d)(1)’’ and adding ‘‘(d)(1)
and (d)(2)’’ in its place;
■ d. Add paragraphs (d)(2) and (g)(4);
and
■ e. Add an Appendix to paragraph (d)
to read as follows:
§ 36.304
Removal of barriers.
*
*
*
*
*
(d) * * * (1) Except as provided in
paragraph (d)(3) of this section,
measures taken to comply with the
barrier removal requirements of this
section shall comply with the applicable
requirements for alterations in § 36.402
and §§ 36.404 through 36.406 of this
part for the element being altered. The
path of travel requirements of § 36.403
shall not apply to measures taken solely
to comply with the barrier removal
requirements of this section.
(d)(2)(i) Safe harbor. Elements that
have not been altered in existing
facilities on or after March 15, 2012 and
that comply with the corresponding
technical and scoping specifications for
those elements in the 1991 Standards
are not required to be modified in order
to comply with the requirements set
forth in the 2010 Standards.
(ii)(A) Before March 15, 2012,
elements in existing facilities that do
not comply with the corresponding
technical and scoping specifications for
those elements in the 1991 Standards
must be modified to the extent readily
achievable to comply with either the
1991 Standards or the 2010 Standards.
Noncomplying newly constructed and
altered elements may also be subject to
the requirements of § 36.406(a)(5).
(B) On or after March 15, 2012,
elements in existing facilities that do
not comply with the corresponding
technical and scoping specifications for
those elements in the 1991 Standards
must be modified to the extent readily
achievable to comply with the
requirements set forth in the 2010
Standards. Noncomplying newly
constructed and altered elements may
also be subject to the requirements of
§ 36.406(a)(5).
(iii) The safe harbor provided in
§ 36.304(d)(2)(i) does not apply to those
elements in existing facilities that are
subject to supplemental requirements
(i.e., elements for which there are
neither technical nor scoping
specifications in the 1991 Standards),
and therefore those elements must be
modified to the extent readily
achievable to comply with the 2010
Standards. Noncomplying newly
constructed and altered elements may
also be subject to the requirements of
§ 36.406(a)(5). Elements in the 2010
Standards not eligible for the elementby-element safe harbor are identified as
follows—
(A) Residential facilities and dwelling
units, sections 233 and 809.
(B) Amusement rides, sections 234
and 1002; 206.2.9; 216.12.
(C) Recreational boating facilities,
sections 235 and 1003; 206.2.10.
(D) Exercise machines and
equipment, sections 236 and 1004;
206.2.13.
(E) Fishing piers and platforms,
sections 237 and 1005; 206.2.14.
(F) Golf facilities, sections 238 and
1006; 206.2.15.
(G) Miniature golf facilities, sections
239 and 1007; 206.2.16.
(H) Play areas, sections 240 and 1008;
206.2.17.
(I) Saunas and steam rooms, sections
241 and 612.
(J) Swimming pools, wading pools,
and spas, sections 242 and 1009.
(K) Shooting facilities with firing
positions, sections 243 and 1010.
(L) Miscellaneous.
(1) Team or player seating, section
221.2.1.4.
(2) Accessible route to bowling lanes,
section 206.2.11.
(3) Accessible route in court sports
facilities, section 206.2.12.
*
*
*
*
*
Appendix to § 36.304(d)
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
COMPLIANCE DATES AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS FOR BARRIER REMOVAL AND SAFE HARBOR
Date
Requirement
Before March 15, 2012 .............................................
Elements that do not comply with the requirements for those elements in the 1991 Standards
must be modified to the extent readily achievable.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00092
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
Applicable standards
1991 Standards or 2010 Standards.
15SER2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
56255
COMPLIANCE DATES AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS FOR BARRIER REMOVAL AND SAFE HARBOR—Continued
Date
Requirement
On or after March 15, 2012 ......................................
Elements not altered after March 15, 2012 .............
*
*
*
*
*
(g) * * *
(4) This requirement does not apply to
guest rooms in existing facilities that are
places of lodging where the guest rooms
are not owned by the entity that owns,
leases, or operates the overall facility
and the physical features of the guest
room interiors are controlled by their
individual owners.
■ 8. Revise § 36.308 to read as follows:
§ 36.308
Seating in assembly areas.
A public accommodation shall ensure
that wheelchair spaces and companion
seats are provided in each specialty
seating area that provides spectators
with distinct services or amenities that
generally are not available to other
spectators. If it is not readily achievable
for a public accommodation to place
wheelchair spaces and companion seats
in each such specialty seating area, it
shall provide those services or amenities
to individuals with disabilities and their
companions at other designated
accessible locations at no additional
cost. The number of wheelchair spaces
and companion seats provided in
specialty seating areas shall be included
in, rather than in addition to,
wheelchair space requirements set forth
in table 221.2.1.1 in the 2010 Standards.
■ 9. Amend § 36.309 by adding
paragraphs (b)(1)(iv) through (vi) to read
as follows:
§ 36.309
Examinations and courses.
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
*
*
*
*
*
(b)(1)* * *
(iv) Any request for documentation, if
such documentation is required, is
reasonable and limited to the need for
the modification, accommodation, or
auxiliary aid or service requested.
(v) When considering requests for
modifications, accommodations, or
auxiliary aids or services, the entity
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
Note: Noncomplying newly constructed and altered elements may also be subject to the requirements of § 36.406(a)(5).
Elements that do not comply with the requirements for those elements in the 1991 Standards
or that do not comply with the supplemental requirements (i.e., elements for which there are
neither technical nor scoping specifications in
the 1991 Standards) must be modified to the
extent readily achievable.
Note: Noncomplying newly constructed and altered elements may also be subject to the requirements of § 36.406(a)(5).
Elements that comply with the requirements for
those elements in the 1991 Standards do not
need to be modified.
gives considerable weight to
documentation of past modifications,
accommodations, or auxiliary aids or
services received in similar testing
situations, as well as such
modifications, accommodations, or
related aids and services provided in
response to an Individualized Education
Program (IEP) provided under the
Individuals with Disabilities Education
Act or a plan describing services
provided pursuant to section 504 of the
Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended
(often referred to as a Section 504 Plan).
(vi) The entity responds in a timely
manner to requests for modifications,
accommodations, or aids to ensure
equal opportunity for individuals with
disabilities.
*
*
*
*
*
10. Add § 36.311 to read as follows:
§ 36.311
Mobility devices.
(a) Use of wheelchairs and manuallypowered mobility aids. A public
accommodation shall permit
individuals with mobility disabilities to
use wheelchairs and manually-powered
mobility aids, such as walkers, crutches,
canes, braces, or other similar devices
designed for use by individuals with
mobility disabilities in any areas open
to pedestrian use.
(b)(1) Use of other power-driven
mobility devices. A public
accommodation shall make reasonable
modifications in its policies, practices,
or procedures to permit the use of other
power-driven mobility devices by
individuals with mobility disabilities,
unless the public accommodation can
demonstrate that the class of other
power-driven mobility devices cannot
be operated in accordance with
legitimate safety requirements that the
public accommodation has adopted
pursuant to § 36.301(b).
PO 00000
Applicable standards
Frm 00093
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
2010 Standards.
Safe Harbor.
(2) Assessment factors. In determining
whether a particular other power-driven
mobility device can be allowed in a
specific facility as a reasonable
modification under paragraph (b)(1) of
this section, a public accommodation
shall consider—
(i) The type, size, weight, dimensions,
and speed of the device;
(ii) The facility’s volume of pedestrian
traffic (which may vary at different
times of the day, week, month, or year);
(iii) The facility’s design and
operational characteristics (e.g., whether
its business is conducted indoors, its
square footage, the density and
placement of stationary devices, and the
availability of storage for the device, if
requested by the user);
(iv) Whether legitimate safety
requirements can be established to
permit the safe operation of the other
power-driven mobility device in the
specific facility; and
(v) Whether the use of the other
power-driven mobility device creates a
substantial risk of serious harm to the
immediate environment or natural or
cultural resources, or poses a conflict
with Federal land management laws and
regulations.
(c)(1) Inquiry about disability. A
public accommodation shall not ask an
individual using a wheelchair or other
power-driven mobility device questions
about the nature and extent of the
individual’s disability.
(2) Inquiry into use of other powerdriven mobility device. A public
accommodation may ask a person using
an other power-driven mobility device
to provide a credible assurance that the
mobility device is required because of
the person’s disability. A public
accommodation that permits the use of
an other power-driven mobility device
by an individual with a mobility
disability shall accept the presentation
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56256
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
of a valid, State-issued disability
parking placard or card, or State-issued
proof of disability, as a credible
assurance that the use of the other
power-driven mobility device is for the
individual’s mobility disability. In lieu
of a valid, State-issued disability
parking placard or card, or State-issued
proof of disability, a public
accommodation shall accept as a
credible assurance a verbal
representation, not contradicted by
observable fact, that the other powerdriven mobility device is being used for
a mobility disability. A ‘‘valid’’ disability
placard or card is one that is presented
by the individual to whom it was issued
and is otherwise in compliance with the
State of issuance’s requirements for
disability placards or cards.
Subpart D—New Construction and
Alterations
12. Revise § 36.405 to read as follows:
§ 36.405
Alterations: Historic preservation.
(a) Alterations to buildings or
facilities that are eligible for listing in
the National Register of Historic Places
under the National Historic Preservation
Act, 16 U.S.C. 470 et seq., or are
designated as historic under State or
local law, shall comply to the maximum
extent feasible with this part.
(b) If it is determined that it is not
feasible to provide physical access to an
historic property that is a place of
public accommodation in a manner that
will not threaten or destroy the historic
significance of the building or the
facility, alternative methods of access
shall be provided pursuant to the
requirements of subpart C of this part.
■ 13. Revise § 36.406 to read as follows:
§ 36.406 Standards for new construction
and alterations.
11. Amend § 36.403 by retaining the
heading of paragraph (a), designating
the text of paragraph (a) as paragraph
(a)(1), adding paragraph (a)(2), and
revising paragraph (f)(2)(iii) to read as
follows:
■
§ 36.403
■
Alterations: Path of travel.
(a) General. (1) * * *
(2) If a private entity has constructed
or altered required elements of a path of
travel at a place of public
accommodation or commercial facility
in accordance with the specifications in
the 1991 Standards, the private entity is
not required to retrofit such elements to
reflect the incremental changes in the
2010 Standards solely because of an
alteration to a primary function area
served by that path of travel.
*
*
*
*
*
(f) * * *
(2) * * *
(iii) Costs associated with providing
accessible telephones, such a relocating
the telephone to an accessible height,
installing amplification devices, or
installing a text telephone (TTY);
*
*
*
*
*
(a) Accessibility standards and
compliance date. (1) New construction
and alterations subject to §§ 36.401 or
36.402 shall comply with the 1991
Standards if the date when the last
application for a building permit or
permit extension is certified to be
complete by a State, county, or local
government (or, in those jurisdictions
where the government does not certify
completion of applications, if the date
when the last application for a building
permit or permit extension is received
by the State, county, or local
government) is before September 15,
2010, or if no permit is required, if the
start of physical construction or
alterations occurs before September 15,
2010.
(2) New construction and alterations
subject to §§ 36.401 or 36.402 shall
comply either with the 1991 Standards
or with the 2010 Standards if the date
when the last application for a building
permit or permit extension is certified to
be complete by a State, county, or local
government (or, in those jurisdictions
where the government does not certify
completion of applications, if the date
Compliance dates for new construction and alterations
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
1991 Standards.
1991 Standards or 2010 Standards.
2010 Standards.
figures contained in the 1991 Standards
and 2010 Standards explain or illustrate
the requirements of the rule; they do not
establish enforceable requirements.
(c) Places of lodging. Places of lodging
subject to this part shall comply with
the provisions of the 2010 Standards
applicable to transient lodging,
PO 00000
Frm 00094
Appendix to § 36.406(a)
Applicable standards
On or after January 26, 1993 and before September 15, 2010 ..............
On or after September 15, 2010 and before March 15, 2012 .................
On or after March 15, 2012 ......................................................................
(b) Scope of coverage. The 1991
Standards and the 2010 Standards apply
to fixed or built-in elements of
buildings, structures, site
improvements, and pedestrian routes or
vehicular ways located on a site. Unless
specifically stated otherwise, the
advisory notes, appendix notes, and
when the last application for a building
permit or permit extension is received
by the State, county, or local
government) is on or after September 15,
2010 and before March 15, 2012, or if
no permit is required, if the start of
physical construction or alterations
occurs on or after September 15, 2010
and before March 15, 2012.
(3) New construction and alterations
subject to §§ 36.401 or 36.402 shall
comply with the 2010 Standards if the
date when the last application for a
building permit or permit extension is
certified to be complete by a State,
county, or local government (or, in those
jurisdictions where the government
does not certify completion of
applications, if the date when the last
application for a building permit or
permit extension is received by the
State, county, or local government) is on
or after March 15, 2012, or if no permit
is required, if the start of physical
construction or alterations occurs on or
after March 15, 2012.
(4) For the purposes of this section,
‘‘start of physical construction or
alterations’’ does not mean ceremonial
groundbreaking or razing of structures
prior to site preparation.
(5) Noncomplying new construction
and alterations. (i) Newly constructed or
altered facilities or elements covered by
§§ 36.401 or 36.402 that were
constructed or altered before March 15,
2012 and that do not comply with the
1991 Standards shall, before March 15,
2012, be made accessible in accordance
with either the 1991 Standards or the
2010 Standards.
(ii) Newly constructed or altered
facilities or elements covered by
§§ 36.401 or 36.402 that were
constructed or altered before March 15,
2012 and that do not comply with the
1991 Standards shall, on or after March
15, 2012, be made accessible in
accordance with the 2010 Standards.
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
including, but not limited to, the
requirements for transient lodging guest
rooms in sections 224 and 806 of the
2010 Standards.
(1) Guest rooms. Guest rooms with
mobility features in places of lodging
subject to the transient lodging
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
requirements of 2010 Standards shall be
provided as follows—
(i) Facilities that are subject to the
same permit application on a common
site that each have 50 or fewer guest
rooms may be combined for the
purposes of determining the required
number of accessible rooms and type of
accessible bathing facility in accordance
with table 224.2 to section 224.2 of the
2010 Standards.
(ii) Facilities with more than 50 guest
rooms shall be treated separately for the
purposes of determining the required
number of accessible rooms and type of
accessible bathing facility in accordance
with table 224.2 to section 224.2 of the
2010 Standards.
(2) Exception. Alterations to guest
rooms in places of lodging where the
guest rooms are not owned or
substantially controlled by the entity
that owns, leases, or operates the overall
facility and the physical features of the
guest room interiors are controlled by
their individual owners are not required
to comply with § 36.402 or the
alterations requirements in section
224.1.1 of the 2010 Standards.
(3) Facilities with residential dwelling
units and transient lodging units.
Residential dwelling units that are
designed and constructed for residential
use exclusively are not subject to the
transient lodging standards.
(d) Social service center
establishments. Group homes, halfway
houses, shelters, or similar social
service center establishments that
provide either temporary sleeping
accommodations or residential dwelling
units that are subject to this part shall
comply with the provisions of the 2010
Standards applicable to residential
facilities, including, but not limited to,
the provisions in sections 233 and 809.
(1) In sleeping rooms with more than
25 beds covered by this part, a
minimum of 5% of the beds shall have
clear floor space complying with section
806.2.3 of the 2010 Standards.
(2) Facilities with more than 50 beds
covered by this part that provide
common use bathing facilities shall
provide at least one roll-in shower with
a seat that complies with the relevant
provisions of section 608 of the 2010
Standards. Transfer-type showers are
not permitted in lieu of a roll-in shower
with a seat, and the exceptions in
sections 608.3 and 608.4 for residential
dwelling units are not permitted. When
separate shower facilities are provided
for men and for women, at least one
roll-in shower shall be provided for
each group.
(e) Housing at a place of education.
Housing at a place of education that is
subject to this part shall comply with
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
the provisions of the 2010 Standards
applicable to transient lodging,
including, but not limited to, the
requirements for transient lodging guest
rooms in sections 224 and 806, subject
to the following exceptions. For the
purposes of the application of this
section, the term ‘‘sleeping room’’ is
intended to be used interchangeably
with the term ‘‘guest room’’ as it is used
in the transient lodging standards.
(1) Kitchens within housing units
containing accessible sleeping rooms
with mobility features (including suites
and clustered sleeping rooms) or on
floors containing accessible sleeping
rooms with mobility features shall
provide turning spaces that comply with
section 809.2.2 of the 2010 Standards
and kitchen work surfaces that comply
with section 804.3 of the 2010
Standards.
(2) Multi-bedroom housing units
containing accessible sleeping rooms
with mobility features shall have an
accessible route throughout the unit in
accordance with section 809.2 of the
2010 Standards.
(3) Apartments or townhouse facilities
that are provided by or on behalf of a
place of education, which are leased on
a year-round basis exclusively to
graduate students or faculty and do not
contain any public use or common use
areas available for educational
programming, are not subject to the
transient lodging standards and shall
comply with the requirements for
residential facilities in sections 233 and
809 of the 2010 Standards.
(f) Assembly areas. Assembly areas
that are subject to this part shall comply
with the provisions of the 2010
Standards applicable to assembly areas,
including, but not limited to, sections
221 and 802. In addition, assembly areas
shall ensure that—
(1) In stadiums, arenas, and
grandstands, wheelchair spaces and
companion seats are dispersed to all
levels that include seating served by an
accessible route;
(2) In assembly areas that are required
to horizontally disperse wheelchair
spaces and companion seats by section
221.2.3.1 of the 2010 Standards and that
have seating encircling, in whole or in
part, a field of play or performance,
wheelchair spaces and companion seats
are dispersed around that field of play
or performance area;
(3) Wheelchair spaces and companion
seats are not located on (or obstructed
by) temporary platforms or other
movable structures, except that when an
entire seating section is placed on
temporary platforms or other movable
structures in an area where fixed seating
is not provided, in order to increase
PO 00000
Frm 00095
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56257
seating for an event, wheelchair spaces
and companion seats may be placed in
that section. When wheelchair spaces
and companion seats are not required to
accommodate persons eligible for those
spaces and seats, individual, removable
seats may be placed in those spaces and
seats;
(4) In stadium-style movie theaters,
wheelchair spaces and companion seats
are located on a riser or cross-aisle in
the stadium section that satisfies at least
one of the following criteria—
(i) It is located within the rear 60% of
the seats provided in an auditorium; or
(ii) It is located within the area of an
auditorium in which the vertical
viewing angles (as measured to the top
of the screen) are from the 40th to the
100th percentile of vertical viewing
angles for all seats as ranked from the
seats in the first row (1st percentile) to
seats in the back row (100th percentile).
(g) Medical care facilities. Medical
care facilities that are subject to this part
shall comply with the provisions of the
2010 Standards applicable to medical
care facilities, including, but not limited
to, sections 223 and 805. In addition,
medical care facilities that do not
specialize in the treatment of conditions
that affect mobility shall disperse the
accessible patient bedrooms required by
section 223.2.1 of the 2010 Standards in
a manner that is proportionate by type
of medical specialty.
§ 36.407
■
[Removed and Reserved]
14. Remove and reserve § 36.407.
Subpart F—Certification of State Laws
or Local Building Codes
§ 36.603
[Removed]
15. Remove § 36.603.
■ 16. Redesignate § 36.604 as § 36.603
and revise it to read as follows:
■
§ 36.603
Preliminary determination.
Upon receipt and review of all
information relevant to a request filed
by a submitting official for certification
of a code, and after consultation with
the Architectural and Transportation
Barriers Compliance Board, the
Assistant Attorney General shall make a
preliminary determination of
equivalency or a preliminary
determination to deny certification.
■ 17. Redesignate § 36.605 as § 36.604,
revise the introductory text to paragraph
(a), and revise paragraphs (a)(2) and (b)
to read as follows:
§ 36.604 Procedure following preliminary
determination of equivalency.
(a) If the Assistant Attorney General
makes a preliminary determination of
equivalency under § 36.603, he or she
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56258
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
shall inform the submitting official, in
writing, of that preliminary
determination. The Assistant Attorney
General also shall—
*
*
*
*
*
(2) After considering the information
received in response to the notice
described in paragraph (a) of this
section, and after publishing a separate
notice in the Federal Register, hold an
informal hearing, in the State or local
jurisdiction charged with administration
and enforcement of the code, at which
interested individuals, including
individuals with disabilities, are
provided an opportunity to express their
views with respect to the preliminary
determination of equivalency; and
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
(b) The Assistant Attorney General,
after consultation with the Architectural
and Transportation Barriers Compliance
Board and consideration of the materials
and information submitted pursuant to
this section, as well as information
provided previously by the submitting
official, shall issue either a certification
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
of equivalency or a final determination
to deny the request for certification. The
Assistant Attorney General shall publish
notice of the certification of equivalency
or denial of certification in the Federal
Register.
■ 18. Redesignate § 36.606 as § 36.605
and revise the first sentence of
paragraph (a) to read as follows:
§ 36.605 Procedure following preliminary
denial of certification.
(a) If the Assistant Attorney General
makes a preliminary determination to
deny certification of a code under
§ 36.603, he or she shall notify the
submitting official of the determination.
* * *
*
*
*
*
*
■ 19. Redesignate § 36.607 as § 36.606
and add paragraph (d) to read as
follows:
§ 36.606
Effect of certification.
*
Frm 00096
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
§ 36.608
■
[Redesignated as § 36.607]
20. Redesignate § 36.608 as § 36.607.
21. Redesignate Appendix A to part
36 as Appendix D to part 36 and add
Appendix A to part 36 to read as
follows:
■
*
*
*
*
(d) When the standards of the Act
against which a code is deemed
PO 00000
equivalent are revised or amended
substantially, a certification of
equivalency issued under the
preexisting standards is no longer
effective, as of the date the revised
standards take effect. However,
construction in compliance with a
certified code during the period when a
certification of equivalency was
effective shall be considered rebuttable
evidence of compliance with the
Standards then in effect as to those
elements of buildings and facilities that
comply with the certified code. A
submitting official may reapply for
certification pursuant to the Act’s
revised standards, and, to the extent
possible, priority will be afforded the
request in the review process.
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
Appendix A to Part 36—Guidance on
Revisions to ADA Regulation on
Nondiscrimination on the Basis of
Disability by Public Accommodations
and Commercial Facilities
Note: This Appendix contains guidance
providing a section-by-section analysis of the
revisions to 28 CFR part 36 published on
September 15, 2010.
Section-By-Section Analysis and Response to
Public Comments
This section provides a detailed
description of the Department’s changes to
the title III regulation, the reasoning behind
those changes, and responses to public
comments received on these topics. The
Section-by-Section Analysis follows the
order of the title III regulation itself, except
that if the Department has not changed a
regulatory section, the unchanged section has
not been mentioned.
Subpart A—General
Section 36.104
Definitions
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
‘‘1991 Standards’’ and ‘‘2004 ADAAG’’
The Department has included in the final
rule new definitions of both the ‘‘1991
Standards’’ and the ‘‘2004 ADAAG.’’ The term
‘‘1991 Standards’’ refers to the ADA
Standards for Accessible Design, originally
published on July 26, 1991, and republished
as Appendix D to 28 CFR part 36. The term
‘‘2004 ADAAG’’ refers to ADA Chapter 1,
ADA Chapter 2, and Chapters 3 through 10
of the Americans with Disabilities Act and
the Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility
Guidelines, which were issued by the Access
Board on July 23, 2004, codified at 36 CFR
1191, app. B and D (2009), and which the
Department has adopted in this final rule.
These terms are included in the definitions
section for ease of reference.
‘‘2010 Standards’’
The Department has added to the final rule
a definition of the term ‘‘2010 Standards.’’
The term ‘‘2010 Standards’’ refers to the 2010
ADA Standards for Accessible Design, which
consist of the 2004 ADAAG and the
requirements contained in subpart D of 28
CFR part 36.
‘‘Direct Threat’’
The final rule moves the definition of
direct threat from § 36.208(b) to the
definitions section at § 36.104. This is an
editorial change. Consequently, § 36.208(c)
becomes § 36.208(b) in the final rule.
‘‘Existing Facility’’
The 1991 title III regulation provided
definitions for ‘‘new construction’’ at
§ 36.401(a) and ‘‘alterations’’ at § 36.402(b). In
contrast, the term ‘‘existing facility’’ was not
explicitly defined, although it is used in the
statute and regulations for titles II and III.
See, e.g., 42 U.S.C. 12182(b)(2)(A)(iv); 28 CFR
35.150. It has been the Department’s view
that newly constructed or altered facilities
are also existing facilities subject to title III’s
continuing barrier removal obligation, and
that view is made explicit in this rule.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
The classification of facilities under the
ADA is neither static nor mutually exclusive.
Newly constructed or altered facilities are
also existing facilities. A newly constructed
facility remains subject to the accessibility
standards in effect at the time of design and
construction, with respect to those elements
for which, at that time, there were applicable
ADA Standards. That same facility, however,
after construction, is also an existing facility,
and subject to the public accommodation’s
continuing obligation to remove barriers
where it is readily achievable to do so. The
fact that the facility is also an existing facility
does not relieve the public accommodation of
its obligations under the new construction
requirements of this part. Rather, it means
that in addition to the new construction
requirements, the public accommodation has
a continuing obligation to remove barriers
that arise, or are deemed barriers, only after
construction. Such barriers include but are
not limited to the elements that are first
covered in the 2010 Standards, as that term
is defined in § 36.104.
At some point, the same facility may
undergo alterations, which are subject to the
alterations requirements in effect at that time.
This facility remains subject to its original
new construction standards for elements and
spaces not affected by the alterations; the
facility is subject to the alterations
requirements and standards in effect at the
time of the alteration for the elements and
spaces affected by the alteration; and,
throughout, the facility remains subject to the
continuing barrier removal obligation.
The Department’s enforcement of the ADA
is premised on a broad understanding of
‘‘existing facility.’’ The ADA contemplates
that as the Department’s knowledge and
understanding of accessibility advances and
evolves, this knowledge will be incorporated
into and result in increased accessibility in
the built environment. Title III’s barrier
removal provisions strike the appropriate
balance between ensuring that accessibility
advances are reflected in the built
environment and mitigating the costs of those
advances to public accommodations. With
adoption of the final rule, public
accommodations engaged in barrier removal
measures will now be guided by the 2010
Standards, defined in § 36.104, and the safe
harbor in § 36.304(d)(2).
The NPRM included the following
proposed definition of ‘‘existing facility’’: ‘‘[A]
facility that has been constructed and
remains in existence on any given date.’’ 73
FR 34508, 34552 (June 17, 2008). While the
Department intended the proposed definition
to provide clarity with respect to public
accommodations’ continuing obligation to
remove barriers where it is readily achievable
to do so, some commenters pointed out
arguable ambiguity in the language and the
potential for misapplication of the rule in
practice.
The Department received a number of
comments on this issue. The commenters
urged the Department to clarify that all
buildings remain subject to the standards in
effect at the time of their construction, that
is, that a facility designed and constructed for
first occupancy between January 26, 1993,
and the effective date of the final rule is still
PO 00000
Frm 00097
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56259
considered ‘‘new construction’’ and that
alterations occurring between January 26,
1993, and the effective date of the final rule
are still considered ‘‘alterations.’’
The final rule includes clarifying language
to ensure that the Department’s interpretation
is accurately reflected. As established by this
rule, existing facility means a facility in
existence on any given date, without regard
to whether the facility may also be
considered newly constructed or altered
under this part. Thus, this definition reflects
the Department’s longstanding interpretation
that public accommodations have obligations
in existing facilities that are independent of
but may coexist with requirements imposed
by new construction or alteration
requirements in those same facilities.
‘‘Housing at a Place of Education’’
The Department has added a new
definition to § 36.104, ‘‘housing at a place of
education,’’ to clarify the types of educational
housing programs that are covered by this
title. This section defines ‘‘housing at a place
of education’’ as ‘‘housing operated by or on
behalf of an elementary, secondary,
undergraduate, or postgraduate school, or
other place of education, including
dormitories, suites, apartments, or other
places of residence.’’ This definition does not
apply to social service programs that
combine residential housing with social
services, such as a residential job training
program.
‘‘Other Power-Driven Mobility Device’’ and
‘‘Wheelchair’’
Because relatively few individuals with
disabilities were using nontraditional
mobility devices in 1991, there was no
pressing need for the 1991 title III regulation
to define the terms ‘‘wheelchair’’ or ‘‘other
power-driven mobility device,’’ to expound
on what would constitute a reasonable
modification in policies, practices, or
procedures under § 36.302, or to set forth
within that section specific requirements for
the accommodation of mobility devices.
Since the issuance of the 1991 title III
regulation, however, the choices of mobility
devices available to individuals with
disabilities have increased dramatically. The
Department has received complaints about
and has become aware of situations where
individuals with mobility disabilities have
utilized devices that are not designed
primarily for use by an individual with a
mobility disability, including the Segway®
Personal Transporter (Segway® PT), golf cars,
all-terrain vehicles (ATVs), and other
locomotion devices.
The Department also has received
questions from public accommodations and
individuals with mobility disabilities
concerning which mobility devices must be
accommodated and under what
circumstances. Indeed, there has been
litigation concerning the legal obligations of
covered entities to accommodate individuals
with mobility disabilities who wish to use an
electronic personal assistance mobility
device (EPAMD), such as the Segway® PT, as
a mobility device. The Department has
participated in such litigation as amicus
curiae. See Ault v. Walt Disney World Co.,
No. 6:07–cv–1785–Orl–31KRS, 2009 WL
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56260
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
3242028 (M.D. Fla. Oct. 6, 2009). Much of the
litigation has involved shopping malls where
businesses have refused to allow persons
with disabilities to use EPAMDs. See, e.g.,
McElroy v. Simon Property Group, No. 08–
404 RDR, 2008 WL 4277716 (D. Kan. Sept.
15, 2008) (enjoining mall from prohibiting
the use of a Segway® PT as a mobility device
where an individual agrees to all of a mall’s
policies for use of the device, except
indemnification); Shasta Clark, Local Man
Fighting Mall Over Right to Use Segway,
WATE 6 News, July 26, 2005, available at
https://www.wate.com/Global/
story.asp?s=3643674 (last visited June 24,
2010).
In response to questions and complaints
from individuals with disabilities and
covered entities concerning which mobility
devices must be accommodated and under
what circumstances, the Department began
developing a framework to address the use of
unique mobility devices, concerns about
their safety, and the parameters for the
circumstances under which these devices
must be accommodated. As a result, the
Department’s NPRM proposed two new
approaches to mobility devices. First, the
Department proposed a two-tiered mobility
device definition that defined the term
‘‘wheelchair’’ separately from ‘‘other powerdriven mobility device.’’ Second, the
Department proposed requirements to allow
the use of devices in each definitional
category. In § 36.311(a), the NPRM proposed
that wheelchairs and manually-powered
mobility aids used by individuals with
mobility disabilities shall be permitted in any
areas open to pedestrian use. Section
36.311(b) of the NPRM proposed that a
public accommodation ‘‘shall make
reasonable modifications in its policies,
practices, and procedures to permit the use
of other power-driven mobility devices by
individuals with disabilities, unless the
public accommodation can demonstrate that
the use of the device is not reasonable or that
its use will result in a fundamental alteration
in the nature of the public accommodation’s
goods, services, facilities, privileges,
advantages, or accommodations.’’ 73 FR
34508, 34556 (June 17, 2008).
The Department sought public comment
with regard to whether these steps would, in
fact, achieve clarity on these issues. Toward
this end, the Department’s NPRM asked
several questions relating to the definitions of
‘‘wheelchair,’’ ‘‘other power-driven mobility
device,’’ and ‘‘manually-powered mobility
aids’’; the best way to categorize different
classes of mobility devices, the types of
devices that should be included in each
category; and the circumstances under which
certain types of mobility devices must be
accommodated or may be excluded pursuant
to the policy adopted by the public
accommodation.
Because the questions in the NPRM that
concerned mobility devices and their
accommodation were interrelated, many of
the commenters’ responses did not identify
the specific question to which they were
responding. Instead, commenters grouped the
questions together and provided comments
accordingly. Most commenters spoke to the
issues addressed in the Department’s
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
questions in broad terms and using general
concepts. As a result, the responses to the
questions posed are discussed below in
broadly grouped issue categories rather than
on a question-by-question basis.
Two-tiered definitional approach.
Commenters supported the Department’s
proposal to use a two-tiered definition of
mobility device. Commenters nearly
universally said that wheelchairs always
should be accommodated and that they
should never be subject to an assessment
with regard to their admission to a particular
public accommodation. In contrast, the vast
majority of commenters indicated they were
in favor of allowing public accommodations
to conduct an assessment as to whether, and
under which circumstances, other powerdriven mobility devices will be allowed onsite.
Many commenters also indicated their
support for the two-tiered approach in
responding to questions concerning the
definition of ‘‘wheelchair’’ and ‘‘other powerdriven mobility device.’’ Nearly every
disability advocacy group said that the
Department’s two-tiered approach strikes the
proper balance between ensuring access for
individuals with disabilities and addressing
fundamental alteration and safety concerns
held by public accommodations; however, a
minority of disability advocacy groups
wanted other power-driven mobility devices
to be included in the definition of
‘‘wheelchair.’’ Most advocacy, nonprofit, and
individual commenters supported the
concept of a separate definition for ‘‘other
power-driven mobility device’’ because a
separate definition would maintain existing
legal protections for wheelchairs while
recognizing that some devices that are not
designed primarily for individuals with
mobility disabilities have beneficial uses for
individuals with mobility disabilities. They
also favored this concept because it
recognizes technological developments and
that innovative uses of varying devices may
provide increased access to individuals with
mobility disabilities.
While two business associations indicated
that they opposed the concept of ‘‘other
power-driven mobility device’’ in its entirety,
other business commenters expressed general
and industry-specific concerns about
permitting their use. They indicated that
such devices create a host of safety, cost, and
fraud issues that do not exist with
wheelchairs. On balance, however, business
commenters indicated that they support the
establishment of a two-tiered regulatory
approach because defining ‘‘other powerdriven mobility device’’ separately from
‘‘wheelchair’’ means that businesses will be
able to maintain some measure of control
over the admission of the former. Virtually
all of these commenters indicated that their
support for the dual approach and the
concept of other power-driven mobility
devices was, in large measure, due to the
other power-driven mobility device
assessment factors in § 36.311(c) of the
NPRM.
By maintaining the two-tiered approach to
mobility devices and defining ‘‘wheelchair’’
separately from ‘‘other power-driven mobility
device,’’ the Department is able to preserve
PO 00000
Frm 00098
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
the protection users of traditional
wheelchairs and other manually-powered
mobility aids have had since the ADA was
enacted, while also recognizing that human
ingenuity, personal choice, and new
technologies have led to the use of devices
that may be more beneficial for individuals
with certain mobility disabilities.
Moreover, the Department believes the
two-tiered approach gives public
accommodations guidance to follow in
assessing whether reasonable modifications
can be made to permit the use of other
power-driven mobility devices on-site and to
aid in the development of policies describing
the circumstances under which persons with
disabilities may use such devices. The twotiered approach neither mandates that all
other power-driven mobility devices be
accommodated in every circumstance, nor
excludes these devices from all protection.
This approach, in conjunction with the factor
assessment provisions in § 36.311(b)(2), will
serve as a mechanism by which public
accommodations can evaluate their ability to
accommodate other power-driven mobility
devices. As will be discussed in more detail
below, the assessment factors in
§ 36.311(b)(2) are specifically designed to
provide guidance to public accommodations
regarding whether it is permissible to bar the
use of a specific other power-driven mobility
device in a specific facility. In making such
a determination, a public accommodation
must consider the device’s type, size, weight
dimensions, and speed; the facility’s volume
of pedestrian traffic; the facility’s design and
operational characteristics; whether the
device conflicts with legitimate safety
requirements; and whether the device poses
a substantial risk of serious harm to the
immediate environment or natural or cultural
resources, or conflicts with Federal land
management laws or regulations. In addition,
under § 36.311(b)(i) if the public
accommodation claims that it cannot make
reasonable modifications to its policies,
practices, or procedures to permit the use of
other power-driven mobility devices by
individuals with disabilities, the burden of
proof to demonstrate that such devices
cannot be operated in accordance with
legitimate safety requirements rests upon the
public accommodation.
Categorization of wheelchair versus other
power-driven mobility devices. Implicit in the
creation of the two-tiered mobility device
concept is the question of how to categorize
which devices are wheelchairs and which are
other power-driven mobility devices. Finding
weight and size to be too restrictive, the vast
majority of advocacy, nonprofit, and
individual commenters opposed using the
Department of Transportation’s definition of
‘‘common wheelchair’’ to designate the
mobility device’s appropriate category.
Business commenters who generally
supported using weight and size as the
method of categorization did so because of
their concerns about having to make physical
changes to their facilities to accommodate
oversized devices. The vast majority of
business commenters also favored using the
device’s intended use to categorize which
devices constitute wheelchairs and which are
other power-driven mobility devices.
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
Furthermore, the intended-use determinant
received a fair amount of support from
advocacy, nonprofit, and individual
commenters, either because they sought to
preserve the broad accommodation of
wheelchairs or because they sympathized
with concerns about individuals without
mobility disabilities fraudulently bringing
other power-driven mobility devices into
places of public accommodation.
Commenters seeking to have the Segway®
PT included in the definition of ‘‘wheelchair’’
objected to classifying mobility devices on
the basis of their intended use because they
felt that such a classification would be unfair
and prejudicial to Segway® PT users and
would stifle personal choice, creativity, and
innovation. Other advocacy and nonprofit
commenters objected to employing an
intended-use approach because of concerns
that the focus would shift to an assessment
of the device, rather than the needs or
benefits to the individual with the mobility
disability. They were of the view that the
mobility-device classification should be
based on its function—whether it is used to
address a mobility disability. A few
commenters raised the concern that an
intended-use approach might embolden
public accommodations to assess whether an
individual with a mobility disability really
needs to use the other power-driven mobility
device at issue or to question why a
wheelchair would not provide sufficient
mobility. Those citing objections to the
intended-use determinant indicated it would
be more appropriate to make the
categorization determination based on
whether the device is being used for a
mobility disability in the context of the
impact of its use in a specific environment.
Some of these commenters preferred this
approach because it would allow the
Segway® PT to be included in the definition
of ‘‘wheelchair.’’
Some commenters were inclined to
categorize mobility devices by the way in
which they are powered, such as batterypowered engines versus fuel or combustion
engines. One commenter suggested using
exhaust level as the determinant. Although
there were only a few commenters who
would make the determination based on
indoor or outdoor use, there was nearly
universal support for banning from indoor
use devices that are powered by fuel or
combustion engines.
A few commenters thought it would be
appropriate to categorize the devices based
on their maximum speed. Others objected to
this approach, stating that circumstances
should dictate the appropriate speed at
which mobility devices should be operated—
for example, a faster speed may be safer
when crossing streets than it would be for
sidewalk use—and merely because a device
can go a certain speed does not mean it will
be operated at that speed.
The Department has decided to maintain
the device’s intended use as the appropriate
determinant for which devices are
categorized as ‘‘wheelchairs.’’ However,
because wheelchairs may be intended for use
by individuals who have temporary
conditions affecting mobility, the Department
has decided that it is more appropriate to use
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
the phrase ‘‘primarily designed’’ rather than
‘‘solely designed’’ in making such
categorizations. The Department will not
foreclose any future technological
developments by identifying or banning
specific devices or setting restrictions on
size, weight, or dimensions. Moreover,
devices designed primarily for use by
individuals with mobility disabilities often
are considered to be medical devices and are
generally eligible for insurance
reimbursement on this basis. Finally, devices
designed primarily for use by individuals
with mobility disabilities are less subject to
fraud concerns because they were not
designed to have a recreational component.
Consequently, rarely, if ever, is any inquiry
or assessment as to their appropriateness for
use in a public accommodation necessary.
Definition of ‘‘wheelchair.’’ In seeking
public feedback on the NPRM’s definition of
‘‘wheelchair,’’ the Department explained its
concern that the definition of ‘‘wheelchair’’ in
section 508(c)(2) of the ADA (formerly
section 507(c)(2), July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 372,
42 U.S.C. 12207, renumbered section
508(c)(2), Public Law 110–325 section 6(a)(2),
Sept. 25, 2008, 122 Stat. 3558), which
pertains to Federal wilderness areas, is not
specific enough to provide clear guidance in
the array of settings covered by title III and
that the stringent size and weight
requirements for the Department of
Transportation’s definition of ‘‘common
wheelchair’’ are not a good fit in the context
of most public accommodations. The
Department noted in the NPRM that it sought
a definition of ‘‘wheelchair’’ that would
include manually-operated and power-driven
wheelchairs and mobility scooters (i.e., those
that typically are single-user, have three to
four wheels, and are appropriate for both
indoor and outdoor pedestrian areas), as well
as a variety of types of wheelchairs and
mobility scooters with individualized or
unique features or models with different
numbers of wheels. The NPRM defined a
wheelchair as ‘‘a device designed solely for
use by an individual with a mobility
impairment for the primary purpose of
locomotion in typical indoor and outdoor
pedestrian areas. A wheelchair may be
manually-operated or power-driven.’’ 73 FR
34508, 34553 (June 17, 2008). Although the
NPRM’s definition of ‘‘wheelchair’’ excluded
mobility devices that are not designed solely
for use by individuals with mobility
disabilities, the Department, noting that the
use of the Segway® PT by individuals with
mobility disabilities is on the upswing,
inquired as to whether this device should be
included in the definition of ‘‘wheelchair.’’
Most business commenters wished the
definition of ‘‘wheelchair’’ had included size,
weight, and dimension maximums.
Ultimately, however, they supported the
definition because it excludes other powerdriven mobility devices and enables them to
engage in an assessment to determine
whether a particular device can be allowed
as a reasonable modification. These
commenters felt this approach gave them
some measure of control over whether, and
under what circumstances, other powerdriven mobility devices may be used in their
facilities by individuals with mobility
PO 00000
Frm 00099
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56261
disabilities. Two commenters noted that
because many mobility scooters are
oversized, they are misplaced in the
definition of ‘‘wheelchair’’ and belong with
other power-driven mobility devices.
Another commenter suggested using
maximum size and weight requirements to
allocate which mobility scooters should be
categorized as wheelchairs, and which
should be categorized as other power-driven
mobility devices.
Many advocacy, nonprofit, and individual
commenters indicated that as long as the
Department intends the scope of the term
‘‘mobility impairments’’ to include other
disabilities that cause mobility impairments
(e.g., respiratory, circulatory, stamina, etc.),
they were in support of the language. Several
commenters indicated a preference for the
definition of ‘‘wheelchair’’ in section
508(c)(2) of the ADA. One commenter
indicated a preference for the term ‘‘assistive
device,’’ as it is defined in the Rehabilitation
Act of 1973, over the term ‘‘wheelchair.’’ A
few commenters indicated that strollers
should be added to the preamble’s list of
examples of wheelchairs because parents of
children with disabilities frequently use
strollers as mobility devices until their
children get older.
In the final rule, the Department has
rearranged some wording and has made some
changes in the terminology used in the
definition of ‘‘wheelchair,’’ but essentially has
retained the definition, and therefore the
rationale, that was set forth in the NPRM.
Again, the text of the ADA makes the
definition of ‘‘wheelchair’’ contained in
section 508(c)(2) applicable only to the
specific context of uses in designated
wilderness areas, and therefore does not
compel the use of that definition for any
other purpose. Moreover, the Department
maintains that limiting the definition to
devices suitable for use in an ‘‘indoor
pedestrian area’’ as provided for in section
508(c)(2) of the ADA would ignore the
technological advances in wheelchair design
that have occurred since the ADA went into
effect and that the inclusion of the phrase
‘‘indoor pedestrian area’’ in the definition of
‘‘wheelchair’’ would set back progress made
by individuals with mobility disabilities
who, for many years now, have been using
devices designed for locomotion in indoor
and outdoor settings. The Department has
concluded that same rationale applies to
placing limits on the size, weight, and
dimensions of wheelchairs.
With regard to the term ‘‘mobility
impairments,’’ the Department intended a
broad reading so that a wide range of
disabilities, including circulatory and
respiratory disabilities, that make walking
difficult or impossible, would be included. In
response to comments on this issue, the
Department has revisited the issue and has
concluded that the most apt term to achieve
this intent is ‘‘mobility disability.’’
In addition, the Department has decided
that it is more appropriate to use the phrase,
‘‘primarily’’ designed for use by individuals
with disabilities in the final rule, rather than,
‘‘solely’’ designed for use by individuals with
disabilities—the phrase, proposed in the
NPRM. The Department believes that this
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56262
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
phrase more accurately covers the range of
devices the Department intends to fall within
the definition of ‘‘wheelchair.’’
After receiving comments that the word
‘‘typical’’ is vague and the phrase ‘‘pedestrian
areas’’ is confusing to apply, particularly in
the context of similar, but not identical,
terms used in the proposed Standards, the
Department decided to delete the term
‘‘typical indoor and outdoor pedestrian areas’’
from the final rule. Instead, the final rule
references ‘‘indoor or * * * both indoor and
outdoor locomotion,’’ to make clear that the
devices that fall within the definition of
‘‘wheelchair’’ are those that are used for
locomotion on indoor and outdoor pedestrian
paths or routes and not those that are
intended exclusively for traversing
undefined, unprepared, or unimproved paths
or routes. Thus, the final rule defines the
term ‘‘wheelchair’’ to mean ‘‘a manuallyoperated or power-driven device designed
primarily for use by an individual with a
mobility disability for the main purpose of
indoor or of both indoor and outdoor
locomotion.’’
Whether the definition of ‘‘wheelchair’’
includes the Segway® PT. As discussed
above, because individuals with mobility
disabilities are using the Segway® PT as a
mobility device, the Department asked
whether it should be included in the
definition of ‘‘wheelchair.’’ The basic
Segway® PT model is a two-wheeled,
gyroscopically-stabilized, battery-powered
personal transportation device. The user
stands on a platform suspended three inches
off the ground by wheels on each side, grasps
a T-shaped handle, and steers the device
similarly to a bicycle. Most Segway® PTs can
travel up to 121⁄2 miles per hour, compared
to the average pedestrian walking speed of 3
to 4 miles per hour and the approximate
maximum speed for power-operated
wheelchairs of 6 miles per hour. In a study
of trail and other non-motorized
transportation users including EPAMDs, the
Federal Highway Administration (FHWA)
found that the eye height of individuals using
EPAMDs ranged from approximately 69 to 80
inches. See Federal Highway Administration,
Characteristics of Emerging Road and Trail
Users and Their Safety (Oct. 14, 2004),
available at https://www.tfhrc.gov/safety/
pubs/04103 (last visited June 24, 2010). Thus,
the Segway® PT can operate at much greater
speeds than wheelchairs, and the average
user stands much taller than most wheelchair
users.
The Segway® PT has been the subject of
debate among users, pedestrians, disability
advocates, State and local governments,
businesses, and bicyclists. The fact that the
Segway® PT is not designed primarily for use
by individuals with disabilities, nor used
primarily by persons with disabilities,
complicates the question of to what extent
individuals with disabilities should be
allowed to operate them in areas and
facilities where other power-driven mobility
devices are not allowed. Those who question
the use of the Segway® PT in pedestrian
areas argue that the speed, size, and
operating features of the devices make them
too dangerous to operate alongside
pedestrians and wheelchair users.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
Comments regarding whether to include
the Segway® PT in the definition of
‘‘wheelchair’’ were, by far, the most numerous
received in the category of comments
regarding wheelchairs and other powerdriven mobility devices. Significant numbers
of veterans with disabilities, individuals with
multiple sclerosis, and those advocating on
their behalf made concise statements of
general support for the inclusion of the
Segway® PT in the definition of
‘‘wheelchair.’’ Two veterans offered extensive
comments on the topic, along with a few
advocacy and nonprofit groups and
individuals with disabilities for whom sitting
is uncomfortable or impossible.
While there may be legitimate safety issues
for EPAMD users and bystanders in some
circumstances, EPAMDs and other nontraditional mobility devices can deliver real
benefits to individuals with disabilities.
Among the reasons given by commenters to
include the Segway® PT in the definition of
‘‘wheelchair’’ were that the Segway® PT is
well-suited for individuals with particular
conditions that affect mobility including
multiple sclerosis, Parkinson’s disease,
chronic obstructive pulmonary disease,
amputations, spinal cord injuries, and other
neurological disabilities, as well as
functional limitations, such as gait limitation,
inability to sit or discomfort in sitting, and
diminished stamina issues. Such individuals
often find that EPAMDs are more comfortable
and easier to use than more traditional
mobility devices and assist with balance,
circulation, and digestion in ways that
wheelchairs do not. See Rachel Metz,
Disabled Embrace Segway, New York Times,
Oct. 14, 2004. Commenters specifically cited
pressure relief, reduced spasticity, increased
stamina, and improved respiratory,
neurologic, and muscular health as
secondary medical benefits from being able
to stand.
Other arguments for including the
Segway® PT in the definition of ‘‘wheelchair’’
were based on commenters’ views that the
Segway® PT offers benefits not provided by
wheelchairs and mobility scooters, including
its intuitive response to body movement,
ability to operate with less coordination and
dexterity than is required for many
wheelchairs and mobility scooters, and
smaller footprint and turning radius as
compared to most wheelchairs and mobility
scooters. Several commenters mentioned
improved visibility, either due to the
Segway® PT’s raised platform or simply by
virtue of being in a standing position. And
finally, some commenters advocated for the
inclusion of the Segway® PT simply based on
civil rights arguments and the empowerment
and self-esteem obtained from having the
power to select the mobility device of choice.
Many commenters, regardless of their
position on whether to include the Segway®
PT in the definition of ‘‘wheelchair,’’ noted
that the Segway® PT’s safety record is as
good as, if not better, than the record for
wheelchairs and mobility scooters.
Most business commenters were opposed
to the inclusion of the Segway® PT in the
definition of ‘‘wheelchair’’ but were
supportive of its inclusion as an ‘‘other
power-driven mobility device.’’ They raised
PO 00000
Frm 00100
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
industry- or venue-specific concerns about
including the Segway® PT in the definition
of ‘‘wheelchair.’’ For example, civic centers,
arenas, and theaters were concerned about
the impact on sight-line requirements if
Segway® PT users remain on their devices in
a designated wheelchair seating area;
amusement parks expressed concern that
rides have been designed, purchased, and
installed to enable wheelchair users to
transfer easily or to accommodate
wheelchairs on the ride itself; and retail
stores mentioned size constraints in some
stores. Nearly all business commenters
expressed concern—and perceived liability
issues—related to having to store or stow the
Segway® PT, particularly if it could not be
stored in an upright position. These
commenters cited concerns about possible
damage to the device, injury to customers
who may trip over it, and theft of the device
as a result of not being able to stow the
Segway® PT securely.
Virtually every business commenter
mentioned concerns about rider safety, as
well as concerns for pedestrians
unexpectedly encountering these devices or
being hit or run over by these devices in
crowded venues where maneuvering space is
limited. Their main safety objection to the
inclusion of the Segway® PT in the definition
of ‘‘wheelchair’’ was that the maximum speed
at which the Segway® PT can operate is far
faster than that of motorized wheelchairs.
There was a universal unease among these
commenters with regard to relying on the
judgment of the Segway® PT user to exercise
caution because its top speed is far in excess
of a wheelchair’s top speed. Many other
safety concerns were industry-specific. For
example, amusement parks were concerned
that the Segway® PT is much taller than
children; that it is too quiet to warn
pedestrians, particularly those with low
vision or who are blind, of their presence;
that it may keep moving after a rider has
fallen off or power system fails; and that it
has a full-power override which
automatically engages when an obstacle is
encountered. Hotels and retail stores
mentioned that maneuvering the Segway® PT
through their tight quarters would create
safety hazards.
Business commenters also expressed
concern that if the Segway® PT were
included in the definition of ‘‘wheelchair’’
they would have to make physical changes to
their facilities to accommodate Segway® PT
riders who stand much taller in these devices
than do users of wheelchairs. They also were
concerned that if the Segway®7 PT was
included in the definition of ‘‘wheelchair,’’
they would have no ability to assess whether
it is appropriate to allow the entry of the
Segway® PT into their facilities the way they
would have if the device is categorized as an
‘‘other power-driven mobility device.’’
Many disability advocacy and nonprofit
commenters did not support the inclusion of
the Segway® PT in the definition of
‘‘wheelchair.’’ Paramount to these
commenters was the maintenance of existing
protections for wheelchair users. Because
there was unanimous agreement that
wheelchair use rarely, if ever, may be
restricted, these commenters strongly favored
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
categorizing wheelchairs separately from the
Segway® PT and other power-driven mobility
devices and applying the intended-use
determinant to assign the devices to either
category. They indicated that while they
support the greatest degree of access in
public accommodations for all persons with
disabilities who require the use of mobility
devices, they recognize that under certain
circumstances allowing the use of other
power-driven mobility devices would result
in a fundamental alteration or run counter to
legitimate safety requirements necessary for
the safe operation of a public
accommodation. While these groups
supported categorizing the Segway® PT as an
‘‘other power-driven mobility device,’’ they
universally noted that because the Segway®
PT does not present environmental concerns
and is as safe to use as, if not safer than, a
wheelchair, it should be accommodated in
most circumstances.
The Department has considered all the
comments and has concluded that it should
not include the Segway® PT in the definition
of ‘‘wheelchair.’’ The final rule provides that
the test for categorizing a device as a
wheelchair or an other power-driven
mobility device is whether the device is
designed primarily for use by individuals
with mobility disabilities. Mobility scooters
are included in the definition of ‘‘wheelchair’’
because they are designed primarily for users
with mobility disabilities. However, because
the current generation of EPAMDs, including
the Segway® PT, was designed for
recreational users and not primarily for use
by individuals with mobility disabilities, the
Department has decided to continue its
approach of excluding EPAMDs from the
definition of ‘‘wheelchair’’ and including
them in the definition of ‘‘other power-driven
mobility device.’’ Although EPAMDs, such as
the Segway® PT, are not included in the
definition of a ‘‘wheelchair,’’ public
accommodations must assess whether they
can make reasonable modifications to permit
individuals with mobility disabilities to use
such devices on their premises. The
Department recognizes that the Segway® PT
provides many benefits to those who use
them as mobility devices, including a
measure of privacy with regard to the nature
of one’s particular disability, and believes
that in the vast majority of circumstances, the
application of the factors described in
§ 36.311 for providing access to otherpowered mobility devices will result in the
admission of the Segway® PT.
Treatment of ‘‘manually-powered mobility
aids.’’ The Department’s NPRM did not
define the term ‘‘manually-powered mobility
aids.’’ Instead, the NPRM included a nonexhaustive list of examples in § 36.311(a).
The NPRM queried whether the Department
should maintain this approach to manuallypowered mobility aids or whether it should
adopt a more formal definition.
Only a few commenters addressed
‘‘manually-powered mobility aids.’’ Virtually
all commenters were in favor of maintaining
a non-exhaustive list of examples of
‘‘manually-powered mobility aids’’ rather
than adopting a definition of the term. Of
those who commented, a couple sought
clarification of the term ‘‘manually-powered.’’
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
One commenter suggested that the term be
changed to ‘‘human-powered.’’ Other
commenters requested that the Department
include ordinary strollers in the nonexhaustive list of manually-powered mobility
aids. Since strollers are not devices designed
primarily for individuals with mobility
disabilities, the Department does not
consider them to be manually-powered
mobility aids; however, strollers used in the
context of transporting individuals with
disabilities are subject to the same
assessment required by the ADA’s reasonable
modification standards at § 36.302. The
Department believes that because the existing
approach is clear and understood easily by
the public, no formal definition of the term
‘‘manually-powered mobility aids’’ is
required.
Definition of ‘‘other power-driven mobility
device.’’ The Department’s NPRM defined the
term ‘‘other power-driven mobility device’’ in
§ 36.104 as ‘‘any of a large range of devices
powered by batteries, fuel, or other engines—
whether or not designed solely for use by
individuals with mobility impairments—that
are used by individuals with mobility
impairments for the purpose of locomotion,
including golf cars, bicycles, electronic
personal assistance mobility devices
(EPAMDs), or any mobility aid designed to
operate in areas without defined pedestrian
routes.’’ 73 FR 34508, 34552 (June 17, 2008).
Business commenters mostly were
supportive of the definition of ‘‘other powerdriven mobility device’’ because it gave them
the ability to develop policies pertaining to
the admission of these devices, but they
expressed concern that individuals will feign
mobility disabilities so that they can use
devices that are otherwise banned in public
accommodations. Advocacy, nonprofit, and
several individual commenters supported the
definition of ‘‘other power-driven mobility
device’’ because it allows new technologies to
be added in the future, maintains the existing
legal protections for wheelchairs, and
recognizes that some devices, particularly the
Segway® PT, which are not designed
primarily for individuals with mobility
disabilities, have beneficial uses for
individuals with mobility disabilities.
Despite support for the definition of ‘‘other
power-driven mobility device,’’ however,
most advocacy and nonprofit commenters
expressed at least some hesitation about the
inclusion of fuel-powered mobility devices in
the definition. While virtually all of these
commenters noted that a blanket exclusion of
any device that falls under the definition of
‘‘other power-driven mobility device’’ would
violate basic civil rights concepts, they also
specifically stated that certain devices,
particularly off-highway vehicles, cannot be
permitted in certain circumstances. They also
made a distinction between the Segway® PT
and other power-driven mobility devices,
noting that the Segway® PT should be
accommodated in most circumstances
because it satisfies the safety and
environmental elements of the policy
analysis. These commenters indicated that
they agree that other power-driven mobility
devices must be assessed, particularly as to
their environmental impact, before they are
accommodated.
PO 00000
Frm 00101
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56263
Business commenters were even less
supportive of the inclusion of fuel-powered
devices in the other power-driven mobility
devices category. They sought a complete ban
on fuel-powered devices because they believe
they are inherently dangerous and pose
environmental and safety concerns.
Although many commenters had
reservations about the inclusion of fuelpowered devices in the definition of other
power-driven mobility devices, the
Department does not want the definition to
be so narrow that it would foreclose the
inclusion of new technological
developments, whether powered by fuel or
by some other means. It is for this reason that
the Department has maintained the phrase
‘‘any mobility device designed to operate in
areas without defined pedestrian routes’’ in
the final rule’s definition of other powerdriven mobility devices. The Department
believes that the limitations provided by
‘‘fundamental alteration’’ and the ability to
impose legitimate safety requirements will
likely prevent the use of fuel and combustion
engine-driven devices indoors, as well as in
outdoor areas with heavy pedestrian traffic.
The Department notes, however, that in the
future technological developments may
result in the production of safe fuel-powered
mobility devices that do not pose
environmental and safety concerns. The final
rule allows consideration to be given as to
whether the use of a fuel-powered device
would create a substantial risk of serious
harm to the environment or natural or
cultural resources, and to whether the use of
such a device conflicts with Federal land
management laws or regulations; this aspect
of the final rule will further limit the
inclusion of fuel-powered devices where they
are not appropriate. Consequently, the
Department has maintained fuel-powered
devices in the definition of ‘‘other powerdriven mobility devices.’’ The Department
has also added language to the definition of
‘‘other power-driven mobility device’’ to
reiterate that the definition does not apply to
Federal wilderness areas, which are not
covered by title II of the ADA; the use of
wheelchairs in such areas is governed by
section 508(c)(2) of the ADA, 42 U.S.C.
12207(c)(2).
‘‘Place of Public Accommodation’’
Definition of ‘‘place of lodging.’’ The NPRM
stated that a covered ‘‘place of lodging’’ is a
facility that provides guest rooms for sleeping
for stays that are primarily short-term in
nature (generally two weeks or less), to
which the occupant does not have the right
or intent to return to a specific room or unit
after the conclusion of his or her stay, and
which operates under conditions and with
amenities similar to a hotel, motel, or inn,
particularly including factors such as: (1) An
on-site proprietor and reservations desk; (2)
rooms available on a walk-up basis; (3) linen
service; and (4) a policy of accepting
reservations for a room type without
guaranteeing a particular unit or room until
check-in, without a prior lease or security
deposit. The NPRM stated that timeshares
and condominiums or corporate hotels that
did not meet this definition would not be
covered by § 36.406(c) of the proposed
regulation, but may be covered by the
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56264
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
requirements of the Fair Housing Act
(FHAct).
In the NPRM, the Department sought
comment on its definition of ‘‘place of
lodging,’’ specifically seeking public input on
whether the most appropriate time period for
identifying facilities used for stays that
primarily are short-term in nature should be
set at 2 weeks or 30 days.
The vast majority of the comments
received by the Department supported the
use of a 30-day limitation on places of
lodging as more consistent with building
codes, local laws, and common real estate
practices that treat stays of 30 days or less as
transient rather than residential use. One
commenter recommended using the phrase
‘‘fourteen days or less.’’ Another commenter
objected to any bright line standard, stating
that the difference between two weeks and 30
days for purposes of title III is arbitrary,
viewed in light of conflicting regulations by
the States. This commenter argued the
Department should continue its existing
practice under title III of looking to State law
as one factor in determining whether a
facility is used for stays that primarily are
short-term in nature.
The Department is persuaded by the
majority of commenters to adopt a 30-day
guideline for the purposes of identifying
facilities that primarily are short-term in
nature and has modified the section
accordingly. The 30-day guideline is
intended only to determine when the final
rule’s transient lodging provisions apply to a
facility. It does not alter an entity’s
obligations under any other applicable
statute. For example, the Department
recognizes that the FHAct does not employ
a bright line standard for determining which
facilities qualify as residential facilities
under that Act and that there are
circumstances where units in facilities that
meet the definition of places of lodging will
be covered under both the ADA and the
FHAct and will have to comply with the
requirements of both laws.
The Department also received comments
about the factors used in the NPRM’s
definition of ‘‘place of lodging.’’ One
commenter proposed modifications to the
definition as follows: changing the words
‘‘guest rooms’’ to ‘‘accommodations for
sleeping’’; and adding a fifth factor that states
that ‘‘the in-room decor, furnishings and
equipment being specified by the owner or
operator of the lodging operation rather than
generally being determined by the owner of
the individual unit or room.’’ The Department
does not believe that ‘‘guest room’’ should be
changed to ‘‘accommodations for sleeping.’’
Such a change would create confusion
because the transient lodging provisions in
the 2004 ADAAG use the term ‘‘guest rooms’’
and not ‘‘accommodations for sleeping.’’ In
addition, the Department believes that it
would be confusing to add a factor relating
to who dictates the in-room decor and
furnishings in a unit or room, because there
may be circumstances where particular rental
programs require individual owners to use
certain decor and furnishings as a condition
of participating in that program.
One commenter stated that the factors the
Department has included for determining
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
whether a rental unit is a place of lodging for
the purposes of title III, and therefore a ‘‘place
of public accommodation’’ under the ADA,
address only the way an establishment
appears to the public. This commenter
recommended that the Department also
consider the economic relationships among
the unit owners, rental managers, and
homeowners’ associations, noting that where
revenues are not pooled (as they are in a
hotel), the economic relationships do not
make it possible to spread the cost of
providing accessibility features over the
entire business enterprise. Another
commenter argued that private ownership of
sleeping accommodations sets certain
facilities apart from traditional hotels,
motels, and inns, and that the Department
should revise the definition of places of
lodging to exempt existing places of lodging
that have sleeping accommodations
separately owned by individual owners (e.g.,
condominiums) from the accessible transient
lodging guest room requirements in sections
224 and 806 of the 2004 ADAAG, although
the commenter agreed that newly constructed
places of lodging should meet those
standards.
One commenter argued that the
Department’s proposed definition of place of
lodging does not reflect fully the nature of a
timeshare facility and one single definition
does not fit timeshares, condo hotels, and
other types of rental accommodations. This
commenter proposed that the Department
adopt a separate definition for timeshare
resorts as a subcategory of place of lodging.
The commenter proposed defining timeshare
resorts as facilities that provide the recurring
right to occupancy for overnight
accommodations for the owners of the
accommodations, and other occupancy rights
for owners exchanging their interests or
members of the public for stays that
primarily are short-term in nature (generally
30 consecutive days or less), where neither
the owner nor any other occupant has the
right or intent to use the unit or room on
other than a temporary basis for vacation or
leisure purposes. This proposed definition
also would describe factors for determining
when a timeshare resort is operating in a
manner similar to a hotel, motel, or inn,
including some or all of the following: rooms
being available on a walk-in or call-in basis;
housekeeping or linen services being
available; on-site management; and
reservations being accepted for a room type
without guaranteeing any guest or owner use
of a particular unit or room until check-in,
without a prior lease or security deposit.
Timeshares that do not meet this definition
would not be subject to the transient lodging
standards.
The Department has considered these
comments and has revised the definition of
‘‘place of accommodation’’ in § 36.104 to
include a revised subcategory (B), which
more clearly defines the factors that must be
present for a facility that is not an inn, motel,
or hotel to qualify as a place of lodging.
These factors include conditions and
amenities similar to an inn, motel, or hotel,
including on- or off-site management and
reservations service, rooms available on a
walk-up or call-in basis, availability of
PO 00000
Frm 00102
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
housekeeping or linen service, and accepting
reservations for a room type without
guaranteeing a particular unit or room until
check-in without a prior lease or security
deposit.
Although the Department understands
some of the concerns about the application
of the ADA requirements to places of lodging
that have ownership structures that involve
individually owned units, the Department
does not believe that the definitional section
of the regulation is the place to address these
concerns and has addressed them in
§ 36.406(c)(2) and the accompanying
discussion in Appendix A.
‘‘Qualified Interpreter’’
In the NPRM, the Department proposed
adding language to the definition of
‘‘qualified interpreter’’ to clarify that the term
includes, but is not limited to, sign language
interpreters, oral interpreters, and cuedspeech interpreters. As the Department
explained, not all interpreters are qualified
for all situations. For example, a qualified
interpreter who uses American Sign
Language (ASL) is not necessarily qualified
to interpret orally. In addition, someone with
only a rudimentary familiarity with sign
language or finger spelling is not qualified,
nor is someone who is fluent in sign language
but unable to translate spoken
communication into ASL or to translate
signed communication into spoken words.
As further explained, different situations
will require different types of interpreters.
For example, an oral interpreter who has
special skill and training to mouth a
speaker’s words silently for individuals who
are deaf or hard of hearing may be necessary
for an individual who was raised orally and
taught to read lips or was diagnosed with
hearing loss later in life and does not know
sign language. An individual who is deaf or
hard of hearing may need an oral interpreter
if the speaker’s voice is unclear, if there is
a quick-paced exchange of communication
(e.g., in a meeting), or when the speaker does
not directly face the individual who is deaf
or hard of hearing. A cued-speech interpreter
functions in the same manner as an oral
interpreter except that he or she also uses a
hand code or cue to represent each speech
sound.
The Department received many comments
regarding the proposed modifications to the
definition of ‘‘qualified interpreter.’’ Many
commenters requested that the Department
include within the definition a requirement
that interpreters be certified, particularly if
they reside in a State that licenses or certifies
interpreters. Other commenters opposed a
certification requirement as unduly limiting,
noting that an interpreter may well be
qualified even if that same interpreter is not
certified. These commenters noted the
absence of nationwide standards or
universally accepted criteria for certification.
On review of this issue, the Department
has decided against imposing a certification
requirement under the ADA. It is sufficient
under the ADA that the interpreter be
qualified. With respect to the proposed
additions to the rule, most commenters
supported the expansion of the list of
qualified interpreters, and some advocated
for the inclusion of other types of interpreters
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
on the list as well, such as deaf-blind
interpreters, certified deaf interpreters, and
speech-to-speech interpreters. As these
commenters explained, deaf-blind
interpreters are interpreters who have
specialized skills and training to interpret for
individuals who are deaf and blind. Certified
deaf interpreters are deaf or hard of hearing
interpreters who work with hearing sign
language interpreters to meet the specific
communication needs of deaf individuals.
Speech-to-speech interpreters have special
skill and training to interpret for individuals
who have speech disabilities.
The list of interpreters in the definition of
‘‘qualified interpreter’’ is illustrative, and the
Department does not believe it is necessary
or appropriate to attempt to provide an
exhaustive list of qualified interpreters.
Accordingly, the Department has decided not
to expand the proposed list. However, if a
deaf and blind individual needs interpreting
services, an interpreter who is qualified to
handle the interpreting needs of that
individual may be required. The guiding
criterion is that the public accommodation
must provide appropriate auxiliary aids and
services to ensure effective communication
with the individual.
Commenters also suggested various
definitions for the term ‘‘cued-speech
interpreters,’’ and different descriptions of
the tasks they performed. After reviewing the
various comments, the Department has
determined that it is more accurate and
appropriate to refer to such individuals as
‘‘cued-language transliterators.’’ Likewise, the
Department has changed the term ‘‘oral
interpreters’’ to ‘‘oral transliterators.’’ These
two changes have been made to distinguish
between sign language interpreters, who
translate one language into another language
(e.g., ASL to English and English to ASL),
from transliterators, who interpret within the
same language between deaf and hearing
individuals. A cued-language transliterator is
an interpreter who has special skill and
training in the use of the Cued Speech system
of handshapes and placements, along with
non-manual information, such as facial
expression and body language, to show
auditory information visually, including
speech and environmental sounds. An oral
transliterator is an interpreter who has
special skill and training to mouth a
speaker’s words silently for individuals who
are deaf or hard of hearing. While the
Department included definitions for ‘‘cuedspeech interpreter’’ and ‘‘oral interpreter’’ in
the regulatory text proposed in the NPRM,
the Department has decided that it is
unnecessary to include such definitions in
the text of the final rule.
Many commenters questioned the
proposed deletion of the requirement that a
qualified interpreter be able to interpret both
receptively and expressively, noting the
importance of both these skills. Commenters
noted that this phrase was carefully crafted
in the original regulation to make certain that
interpreters both (1) are capable of
understanding what a person with a
disability is saying and (2) have the skills
needed to convey information back to that
individual. These are two very different skill
sets and both are equally important to
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
achieve effective communication. For
example, in a medical setting, a sign language
interpreter must have the necessary skills to
understand the grammar and syntax used by
an ASL user (receptive skills) and the ability
to interpret complicated medical
information—presented by medical staff in
English—back to that individual in ASL
(expressive skills). The Department agrees
and has put the phrase ‘‘both receptively and
expressively’’ back in the definition.
Several advocacy groups suggested that the
Department make clear in the definition of
qualified interpreter that the interpreter may
appear either on-site or remotely using a
video remote interpreting (VRI) service.
Given that the Department has included in
this rule both a definition of VRI services and
standards that such services must satisfy,
such an addition to the definition of qualified
interpreter is appropriate.
After consideration of all relevant
information submitted during the public
comment period, the Department has
modified the definition from that initially
proposed in the NPRM. The final definition
now states that ‘‘[q]ualified interpreter means
an interpreter who, via a video remote
interpreting (VRI) service or an on-site
appearance, is able to interpret effectively,
accurately, and impartially, both receptively
and expressively, using any necessary
specialized vocabulary. Qualified interpreters
include, for example, sign language
interpreters, oral transliterators, and cuedlanguage transliterators.’’
‘‘Qualified Reader’’
The 1991 title III regulation identified a
qualified reader as an auxiliary aid, but did
not define the term. Based upon the
Department’s investigation of complaints
alleging that some entities have provided
ineffective readers, the Department proposed
in the NPRM to define ‘‘qualified reader’’
similarly to ‘‘qualified interpreter’’ to ensure
that public accommodations select qualified
individuals to read an examination or other
written information in an effective, accurate,
and impartial manner. This proposal was
suggested in order to make clear to public
accommodations that a failure to provide a
qualified reader to a person with a disability
may constitute a violation of the requirement
to provide appropriate auxiliary aids and
services.
The Department received comments
supporting the inclusion in the regulation of
a definition of a ‘‘qualified reader.’’ Some
commenters suggested the Department add to
the definition a requirement prohibiting the
use of a reader whose accent, diction, or
pronunciation makes full comprehension of
material being read difficult. Another
commenter requested that the Department
include a requirement that the reader ‘‘will
follow the directions of the person for whom
he or she is reading.’’ Commenters also
requested that the Department define
‘‘accurately’’ and ‘‘effectively’’ as used in this
definition.
While the Department believes that the
regulatory definition proposed in the NPRM
adequately addresses these concerns, the
Department emphasizes that a reader, in
order to be ‘‘qualified,’’ must be skilled in
reading the language and subject matter and
PO 00000
Frm 00103
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56265
must be able to be easily understood by the
individual with the disability. For example,
if a reader is reading aloud the questions for
a bar examination, that reader, in order to be
qualified, must know the proper
pronunciation of all legal terminology used
and must be sufficiently articulate to be
easily understood by the individual with a
disability for whom he or she is reading. In
addition, the terms ‘‘effectively’’ and
‘‘accurately’’ have been successfully used and
understood in the Department’s existing
definition of ‘‘qualified interpreter’’ since
1991 without specific regulatory definitions.
Instead, the Department has relied upon the
common use and understanding of those
terms from standard English dictionaries.
Thus, the definition of ‘‘qualified reader’’ has
not been changed from that contained in the
NPRM. The final rule defines a ‘‘qualified
reader’’ to mean ‘‘a person who is able to read
effectively, accurately, and impartially using
any necessary specialized vocabulary.’’
‘‘Service Animal’’
Section 36.104 of the 1991 title III
regulation defines a ‘‘service animal’’ as ‘‘any
guide dog, signal dog, or other animal
individually trained to do work or perform
tasks for the benefit of an individual with a
disability, including, but not limited to,
guiding individuals with impaired vision,
alerting individuals with impaired hearing to
intruders or sounds, providing minimal
protection or rescue work, pulling a
wheelchair, or fetching dropped items.’’
Section 36.302(c)(1) of the 1991 title III
regulation requires that ‘‘[g]enerally, a public
accommodation shall modify policies,
practices, or procedures to permit the use of
a service animal by an individual with a
disability.’’ Section 36.302(c)(2) of the 1991
title III regulation states that ‘‘a public
accommodation [is not required] to supervise
or care for a service animal.’’
The Department has issued guidance and
provided technical assistance and
publications concerning service animals
since the 1991 regulations became effective.
In the NPRM, the Department proposed to
modify the definition of service animal and
asked for public input on several issues
related to the service animal provisions of the
1991 title III regulation: whether the
Department should clarify the phrase
‘‘providing minimal protection’’ in the
definition or remove it; whether there are any
circumstances where a service animal
‘‘providing minimal protection’’ would be
appropriate or expected; whether certain
species should be eliminated from the
definition of ‘‘service animal,’’ and, if so,
which types of animals should be excluded;
whether ‘‘common domestic animal’’ should
be part of the definition; and whether a size
or weight limitation should be imposed for
common domestic animals, even if the
animal satisfies the ‘‘common domestic
animal’’ part of the NPRM definition.
The Department received extensive
comments on these issues, as well as requests
to clarify the obligations of public
accommodations to accommodate
individuals with disabilities who use service
animals, and has modified the final rule in
response. In the interests of avoiding
unnecessary repetition, the Department has
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56266
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
elected to discuss the issues raised in the
NPRM questions about service animals and
the corresponding public comments in the
following discussion of the definition of
‘‘service animal.’’
The Department’s final rule defines
‘‘service animal’’ as ‘‘any dog that is
individually trained to do work or perform
tasks for the benefit of an individual with a
disability, including a physical, sensory,
psychiatric, intellectual, or other mental
disability. Other species of animals, whether
wild or domestic, trained or untrained, are
not service animals for the purposes of this
definition. The work or tasks performed by
a service animal must be directly related to
the handler’s disability. Examples of work or
tasks include, but are not limited to, assisting
individuals who are blind or have low vision
with navigation and other tasks, alerting
individuals who are deaf or hard of hearing
to the presence of people or sounds,
providing non-violent protection or rescue
work, pulling a wheelchair, assisting an
individual during a seizure, alerting
individuals to the presence of allergens,
retrieving items such as medicine or the
telephone, providing physical support and
assistance with balance and stability to
individuals with mobility disabilities, and
helping persons with psychiatric and
neurological disabilities by preventing or
interrupting impulsive or destructive
behaviors. The crime deterrent effects of an
animal’s presence and the provision of
emotional support, well-being, comfort, or
companionship do not constitute work or
tasks for the purposes of this definition.’’
This definition has been designed to clarify
a key provision of the ADA. Many covered
entities indicated that they are confused
regarding their obligations under the ADA
with regard to individuals with disabilities
who use service animals. Individuals with
disabilities who use trained guide or service
dogs are concerned that if untrained or
unusual animals are termed ‘‘service
animals,’’ their own right to use guide or
service dogs may become unnecessarily
restricted or questioned. Some individuals
who are not individuals with disabilities
have claimed, whether fraudulently or
sincerely (albeit mistakenly), that their
animals are service animals covered by the
ADA, in order to gain access to hotels,
restaurants, and other places of public
accommodation. The increasing use of wild,
exotic, or unusual species, many of which are
untrained, as service animals has also added
to the confusion.
Finally, individuals with disabilities who
have the legal right under the Fair Housing
Act (FHAct) to use certain animals in their
homes as a reasonable accommodation to
their disabilities have assumed that their
animals also qualify under the ADA. This is
not necessarily the case, as discussed below.
The Department recognizes the diverse
needs and preferences of individuals with
disabilities protected under the ADA, and
does not wish to unnecessarily impede
individual choice. Service animals play an
integral role in the lives of many individuals
with disabilities, and with the clarification
provided by the final rule, individuals with
disabilities will continue to be able to use
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
their service animals as they go about their
daily activities. The clarification will also
help to ensure that the fraudulent or
mistaken use of other animals not qualified
as service animals under the ADA will be
deterred. A more detailed analysis of the
elements of the definition and the comments
responsive to the service animal provisions
of the NPRM follows.
Providing minimal protection. The 1991
title III regulation included language stating
that ‘‘minimal protection’’ was a task that
could be performed by an individually
trained service animal for the benefit of an
individual with a disability. In the
Department’s ‘‘ADA Business Brief on Service
Animals’’ (2002), the Department interpreted
the ‘‘minimal protection’’ language within the
context of a seizure (i.e., alerting and
protecting a person who is having a seizure).
The Department received many comments in
response to the question of whether the
‘‘minimal protection’’ language should be
clarified. Many commenters urged the
removal of the ‘‘minimal protection’’ language
from the service animal definition for two
reasons: (1) The phrase can be interpreted to
allow any dog that is trained to be aggressive
to qualify as a service animal simply by
pairing the animal with a person with a
disability; and (2) The phrase can be
interpreted to allow any untrained pet dog to
qualify as a service animal, since many
consider the mere presence of a dog to be a
crime deterrent, and thus sufficient to meet
the minimal protection standard. These
commenters argued, and the Department
agrees, that these interpretations were not
contemplated under the original title III
regulation.
While many commenters stated that they
believe that the ‘‘minimal protection’’
language should be eliminated, other
commenters recommended that the language
be clarified, but retained. Commenters
favoring clarification of the term suggested
that the Department explicitly exclude the
function of attack or exclude those animals
that are trained solely to be aggressive or
protective. Other commenters identified nonviolent behavioral tasks that could be
construed as minimally protective, such as
interrupting self-mutilation, providing safety
checks and room searches, reminding the
handler to take medications, and protecting
the handler from injury resulting from
seizures or unconsciousness.
Several commenters noted that the existing
direct threat defense, which allows the
exclusion of a service animal if the animal
exhibits unwarranted or unprovoked violent
behavior or poses a direct threat, prevents the
use of ‘‘attack dogs’’ as service animals. One
commenter noted that the use of a service
animal trained to provide ‘‘minimal
protection’’ may impede access to care in an
emergency, for example, where the first
responder is unable or reluctant to approach
a person with a disability because the
individual’s service animal is in a protective
posture suggestive of aggression.
Many organizations and individuals stated
that in the general dog training community,
‘‘protection’’ is code for attack or aggression
training and should be removed from the
definition. Commenters stated that there
PO 00000
Frm 00104
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
appears to be a broadly held misconception
that aggression-trained animals are
appropriate service animals for persons with
post traumatic stress disorder (PTSD). While
many individuals with PTSD may benefit by
using a service animal, the work or tasks
performed appropriately by such an animal
would not involve unprovoked aggression
but could include actively cuing the handler
by nudging or pawing the handler to alert to
the onset of an episode and removing the
individual from the anxiety-provoking
environment.
The Department recognizes that despite its
best efforts to provide clarification, the
‘‘minimal protection’’ language appears to
have been misinterpreted. While the
Department maintains that protection from
danger is one of the key functions that
service animals perform for the benefit of
persons with disabilities, the Department
recognizes that an animal individually
trained to provide aggressive protection, such
as an attack dog, is not appropriately
considered a service animal. Therefore, the
Department has decided to modify the
‘‘minimal protection’’ language to read ‘‘nonviolent protection,’’ thereby excluding socalled ‘‘attack dogs’’ or dogs with traditional
‘‘protection training’’ as service animals. The
Department believes that this modification to
the service animal definition will eliminate
confusion, without restricting unnecessarily
the type of work or tasks that service animals
may perform. The Department’s modification
also clarifies that the crime-deterrent effect of
a dog’s presence, by itself, does not qualify
as work or tasks for purposes of the service
animal definition.
Alerting to intruders. The phrase ‘‘alerting
to intruders’’ is related to the issues of
minimal protection and the work or tasks an
animal may perform to meet the definition of
a service animal. In the original 1991
regulatory text, this phrase was intended to
identify service animals that alert individuals
who are deaf or hard of hearing to the
presence of others. This language has been
misinterpreted by some to apply to dogs that
are trained specifically to provide aggressive
protection, resulting in the assertion that
such training qualifies a dog as a service
animal under the ADA. The Department
reiterates that public accommodations are not
required to admit any animal whose use
poses a direct threat. In addition, the
Department has decided to remove the word
‘‘intruders’’ from the service animal definition
and replace it with the phrase ‘‘the presence
of people or sounds.’’ The Department
believes this clarifies that so-called ‘‘attack
training’’ or other aggressive response types
of training that cause a dog to provide an
aggressive response do not qualify a dog as
a service animal under the ADA.
Conversely, if an individual uses a breed
of dog that is perceived to be aggressive
because of breed reputation, stereotype, or
the history or experience the observer may
have with other dogs, but the dog is under
the control of the individual with a disability
and does not exhibit aggressive behavior, the
public accommodation cannot exclude the
individual or the animal from the place of
public accommodation. The animal can only
be removed if it engages in the behaviors
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
mentioned in § 36.302(c) (as revised in the
final rule) or if the presence of the animal
constitutes a fundamental alteration to the
nature of the goods, services, facilities, and
activities of the place of public
accommodation.
‘‘Doing work’’ or ‘‘performing tasks.’’ The
NPRM proposed that the Department
maintain the requirement first articulated in
the 1991 title III regulation that in order to
qualify as a service animal, the animal must
‘‘perform tasks’’ or ‘‘do work’’ for the
individual with a disability. The phrases
‘‘perform tasks’’ and ‘‘do work’’ describe what
an animal must do for the benefit of an
individual with a disability in order to
qualify as a service animal.
The Department received a number of
comments in response to the NPRM proposal
urging the removal of the term ‘‘do work’’
from the definition of a service animal. These
commenters argued that the Department
should emphasize the performance of tasks
instead. The Department disagrees. Although
the common definition of work includes the
performance of tasks, the definition of work
is somewhat broader, encompassing activities
that do not appear to involve physical action.
One service dog user stated that, in some
cases, ‘‘critical forms of assistance can’t be
construed as physical tasks,’’ noting that the
manifestations of ‘‘brain-based disabilities,’’
such as psychiatric disorders and autism, are
as varied as their physical counterparts. The
Department agrees with this statement but
cautions that unless the animal is
individually trained to do something that
qualifies as work or a task, the animal is a
pet or support animal and does not qualify
for coverage as a service animal. A pet or
support animal may be able to discern that
the handler is in distress, but it is what the
animal is trained to do in response to this
awareness that distinguishes a service animal
from an observant pet or support animal.
The NPRM contained an example of ‘‘doing
work’’ that stated ‘‘a psychiatric service dog
can help some individuals with dissociative
identity disorder to remain grounded in time
or place.’’ 73 FR 34508, 34521 (June 17,
2008). Several commenters objected to the
use of this example, arguing that grounding
was not a ‘‘task’’ and therefore the example
inherently contradicted the basic premise
that a service animal must perform a task in
order to mitigate a disability. Other
commenters stated that ‘‘grounding’’ should
not be included as an example of ‘‘work’’
because it could lead to some individuals
claiming that they should be able to use
emotional support animals in public because
the dog makes them feel calm or safe. By
contrast, one commenter with experience in
training service animals explained that
grounding is a trained task based upon very
specific behavioral indicators that can be
observed and measured. These tasks are
based upon input from mental health
practitioners, dog trainers, and individuals
with a history of working with psychiatric
service dogs.
It is the Department’s view that an animal
that is trained to ‘‘ground’’ a person with a
psychiatric disorder does work or performs a
task that would qualify it as a service animal
as compared to an untrained emotional
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
support animal whose presence affects a
person’s disability. It is the fact that the
animal is trained to respond to the
individual’s needs that distinguishes an
animal as a service animal. The process must
have two steps: Recognition and response.
For example, if a service animal senses that
a person is about to have a psychiatric
episode and it is trained to respond, for
example, by nudging, barking, or removing
the individual to a safe location until the
episode subsides, then the animal has indeed
performed a task or done work on behalf of
the individual with the disability, as opposed
to merely sensing an event.
One commenter suggested defining the
term ‘‘task,’’ presumably to improve the
understanding of the types of services
performed by an animal that would be
sufficient to qualify the animal for coverage.
The Department believes that the common
definition of the word ‘‘task’’ is sufficiently
clear and that it is not necessary to add to
the definitions section. However, the
Department has added examples of other
kinds of work or tasks to help illustrate and
provide clarity to the definition. After careful
evaluation of this issue, the Department has
concluded that the phrases ‘‘do work’’ and
‘‘perform tasks’’ have been effective during
the past two decades to illustrate the varied
services provided by service animals for the
benefit of individuals with all types of
disabilities. Thus, the Department declines to
depart from its longstanding approach at this
time.
Species limitations. When the Department
originally issued its title III regulation in the
early 1990s, the Department did not define
the parameters of acceptable animal species.
At that time, few anticipated the variety of
animals that would be promoted as service
animals in the years to come, which ranged
from pigs and miniature horses to snakes,
iguanas, and parrots. The Department has
followed this particular issue closely,
keeping current with the many unusual
species of animals represented to be service
animals. Thus, the Department has decided
to refine further this aspect of the service
animal definition in the final rule.
The Department received many comments
from individuals and organizations
recommending species limitations. Several of
these commenters asserted that limiting the
number of allowable species would help stop
erosion of the public’s trust, which has
resulted in reduced access for many
individuals with disabilities who use trained
service animals that adhere to high
behavioral standards. Several commenters
suggested that other species would be
acceptable if those animals could meet
nationally recognized behavioral standards
for trained service dogs. Other commenters
asserted that certain species of animals (e.g.,
reptiles) cannot be trained to do work or
perform tasks, so these animals would not be
covered.
In the NPRM, the Department used the
term ‘‘common domestic animal’’ in the
service animal definition and excluded
reptiles, rabbits, farm animals (including
horses, miniature horses, ponies, pigs, and
goats), ferrets, amphibians, and rodents from
the service animal definition. 73 FR 34508,
PO 00000
Frm 00105
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56267
34553 (June 17, 2008). However, the term
‘‘common domestic animal’’ is difficult to
define with precision due to the increase in
the number of domesticated species. Also,
several State and local laws define a
‘‘domestic’’ animal as an animal that is not
wild.
The Department is compelled to take into
account the practical considerations of
certain animals and to contemplate their
suitability in a variety of public contexts,
such as restaurants, grocery stores, hospitals,
and performing arts venues, as well as
suitability for urban environments. The
Department agrees with commenters’ views
that limiting the number and types of species
recognized as service animals will provide
greater predictability for public
accommodations as well as added assurance
of access for individuals with disabilities
who use dogs as service animals. As a
consequence, the Department has decided to
limit this rule’s coverage of service animals
to dogs, which are the most common service
animals used by individuals with disabilities.
Wild animals, monkeys, and other
nonhuman primates. Numerous business
entities endorsed a narrow definition of
acceptable service animal species, and
asserted that there are certain animals (e.g.,
reptiles) that cannot be trained to do work or
perform tasks. Other commenters suggested
that the Department should identify excluded
animals, such as birds and llamas, in the
final rule. Although one commenter noted
that wild animals bred in captivity should be
permitted to be service animals, the
Department has decided to make clear that
all wild animals, whether born or bred in
captivity or in the wild, are eliminated from
coverage as service animals. The Department
believes that this approach reduces risks to
health or safety attendant with wild animals.
Some animals, such as certain nonhuman
primates, including certain monkeys, pose a
direct threat; their behavior can be
unpredictably aggressive and violent without
notice or provocation. The American
Veterinary Medical Association (AVMA)
issued a position statement advising against
the use of monkeys as service animals,
stating that ‘‘[t]he AVMA does not support
the use of nonhuman primates as assistance
animals because of animal welfare concerns,
and the potential for serious injury and
zoonotic [animal to human disease
transmission] risks.’’ AVMA Position
Statement, Nonhuman Primates as
Assistance Animals (2005), available at
https://www.avma.org/issues/policy/
nonhuman_primates.asp (last visited June
24, 2010).
An organization that trains capuchin
monkeys to provide in-home services to
individuals with paraplegia and quadriplegia
was in substantial agreement with the
AVMA’s views but requested a limited
recognition in the service animal definition
for the capuchin monkeys it trains to provide
assistance for persons with disabilities. The
organization commented that its trained
capuchin monkeys undergo scrupulous
veterinary examinations to ensure that the
animals pose no health risks, and are used by
individuals with disabilities exclusively in
their homes. The organization acknowledged
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56268
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
that the capuchin monkeys it trains are not
necessarily suitable for use in a place of
public accommodation but noted that the
monkeys may need to be used in
circumstances that implicate title III
coverage, e.g., in the event the handler had
to leave home due to an emergency, to visit
a veterinarian, or for the initial delivery of
the monkey to the individual with a
disability. The organization noted that
several State and local government entities
have local zoning, licensing, health, and
safety laws that prohibit non-human
primates, and that these prohibitions would
prevent individuals with disabilities from
using these animals even in their homes.
The organization argued that including
capuchin monkeys under the service animal
umbrella would make it easier for
individuals with disabilities to obtain
reasonable modifications of State and local
licensing, health, and safety laws that would
permit the use of these monkeys. The
organization argued that this limited
modification to the service animal definition
was warranted in view of the services these
monkeys perform, which enable many
individuals with paraplegia and quadriplegia
to live and function with increased
independence.
The Department has carefully considered
the potential risks associated with the use of
nonhuman primates as service animals in
places of public accommodation, as well as
the information provided to the Department
about the significant benefits that trained
capuchin monkeys provide to certain
individuals with disabilities in residential
settings. The Department has determined,
however, that nonhuman primates, including
capuchin monkeys, will not be recognized as
service animals for purposes of this rule
because of their potential for disease
transmission and unpredictable aggressive
behavior. The Department believes that these
characteristics make nonhuman primates
unsuitable for use as service animals in the
context of the wide variety of public settings
subject to this rule. As the organization
advocating the inclusion of capuchin
monkeys acknowledges, capuchin monkeys
are not suitable for use in public facilities.
The Department emphasizes that it has
decided only that capuchin monkeys will not
be included in the definition of service
animals for purposes of its regulation
implementing the ADA. This decision does
not have any effect on the extent to which
public accommodations are required to allow
the use of such monkeys under other Federal
statutes, like the FHAct or the Air Carrier
Access Act (ACAA). For example, a public
accommodation that also is considered to be
a ‘‘dwelling’’ may be covered under both the
ADA and the FHAct. While the ADA does
not require such a public accommodation to
admit people with service monkeys, the
FHAct may. Under the FHAct an individual
with a disability may have the right to have
an animal other than a dog in his or her home
if the animal qualifies as a ‘‘reasonable
accommodation’’ that is necessary to afford
the individual equal opportunity to use and
enjoy a dwelling, assuming that the use of the
animal does not pose a direct threat. In some
cases, the right of an individual to have an
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
animal under the FHAct may conflict with
State or local laws that prohibit all
individuals, with or without disabilities,
from owning a particular species. However,
in this circumstance, an individual who
wishes to request a reasonable modification
of the State or local law must do so under
the FHAct, not the ADA.
Having considered all of the comments
about which species should qualify as service
animals under the ADA, the Department has
determined the most reasonable approach is
to limit acceptable species to dogs.
Size or weight limitations. The vast
majority of commenters did not support a
size or weight limitation. Commenters were
typically opposed to a size or weight limit
because many tasks performed by service
animals require large, strong dogs. For
instance, service animals may perform tasks
such as providing balance and support or
pulling a wheelchair. Small animals may not
be suitable for large adults. The weight of the
service animal user is often correlated with
the size and weight of the service animal.
Others were concerned that adding a size and
weight limit would further complicate the
difficult process of finding an appropriate
service animal. One commenter noted that
there is no need for a limit because ‘‘if, as a
practical matter, the size or weight of an
individual’s service animal creates a direct
threat or fundamental alteration to a
particular public entity or accommodation,
there are provisions that allow for the
animal’s exclusion or removal.’’ Some
common concerns among commenters in
support of a size and weight limit were that
a larger animal may be less able to fit in
various areas with its handler, such as toilet
rooms and public seating areas, and that
larger animals are more difficult to control.
Balancing concerns expressed in favor of
and against size and weight limitations, the
Department has determined that such
limitations would not be appropriate. Many
individuals of larger stature require larger
dogs. The Department believes it would be
inappropriate to deprive these individuals of
the option of using a service dog of the size
required to provide the physical support and
stability these individuals may need to
function independently. Since large dogs
have always served as service animals,
continuing their use should not constitute
fundamental alterations or impose undue
burdens on public accommodations.
Breed limitations. A few commenters
suggested that certain breeds of dogs should
not be allowed to be used as service animals.
Some suggested that the Department should
defer to local laws restricting the breeds of
dogs that individuals who reside in a
community may own. Other commenters
opposed breed restrictions, stating that the
breed of a dog does not determine its
propensity for aggression and that aggressive
and non-aggressive dogs exist in all breeds.
The Department does not believe that it is
either appropriate or consistent with the
ADA to defer to local laws that prohibit
certain breeds of dogs based on local
concerns that these breeds may have a
history of unprovoked aggression or attacks.
Such deference would have the effect of
limiting the rights of persons with disabilities
PO 00000
Frm 00106
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
under the ADA who use certain service
animals based on where they live rather than
on whether the use of a particular animal
poses a direct threat to the health and safety
of others. Breed restrictions differ
significantly from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
Some jurisdictions have no breed
restrictions. Others have restrictions that,
while well-meaning, have the unintended
effect of screening out the very breeds of dogs
that have successfully served as service
animals for decades without a history of the
type of unprovoked aggression or attacks that
would pose a direct threat, e.g., German
Shepherds. Other jurisdictions prohibit
animals over a certain weight, thereby
restricting breeds without invoking an
express breed ban. In addition, deference to
breed restrictions contained in local laws
would have the unacceptable consequence of
restricting travel by an individual with a
disability who uses a breed that is acceptable
and poses no safety hazards in the
individual’s home jurisdiction but is
nonetheless banned by other jurisdictions.
Public accommodations have the ability to
determine, on a case-by-case basis, whether
a particular service animal can be excluded
based on that particular animal’s actual
behavior or history—not based on fears or
generalizations about how an animal or breed
might behave. This ability to exclude an
animal whose behavior or history evidences
a direct threat is sufficient to protect health
and safety.
Recognition of psychiatric service animals,
but not ‘‘emotional support animals.’’ The
definition of ‘‘service animal’’ in the NPRM
stated the Department’s longstanding
position that emotional support animals are
not included in the definition of ‘‘service
animal.’’ The proposed text provided that
‘‘[a]nimals whose sole function is to provide
emotional support, comfort, therapy,
companionship, therapeutic benefits, or to
promote emotional well-being are not service
animals.’’ 73 FR 34508, 34553 (June 17,
2008).
Many advocacy organizations expressed
concern and disagreed with the exclusion of
comfort and emotional support animals.
Others have been more specific, stating that
individuals with disabilities may need their
emotional support animals in order to have
equal access. Some commenters noted that
individuals with disabilities use animals that
have not been trained to perform tasks
directly related to their disability. These
animals do not qualify as service animals
under the ADA. These are emotional support
or comfort animals.
Commenters asserted that excluding
categories such as ‘‘comfort’’ and ‘‘emotional
support’’ animals recognized by laws such as
the FHAct or the ACAA is confusing and
burdensome. Other commenters noted that
emotional support and comfort animals
perform an important function, asserting that
animal companionship helps individuals
who experience depression resulting from
multiple sclerosis.
Some commenters explained the benefits
emotional support animals provide,
including emotional support, comfort,
therapy, companionship, therapeutic
benefits, and the promotion of emotional
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
well-being. They contended that without the
presence of an emotional support animal in
their lives they would be disadvantaged and
unable to participate in society. These
commenters were concerned that excluding
this category of animals will lead to
discrimination against and excessive
questioning of individuals with non-visible
or non-apparent disabilities. Other
commenters expressing opposition to the
exclusion of individually trained ‘‘comfort’’
or ‘‘emotional support’’ animals asserted that
the ability to soothe or de-escalate and
control emotion is ‘‘work’’ that benefits the
individual with the disability.
Many commenters requested that the
Department carve out an exception that
permits current or former members of the
military to use emotional support animals.
They asserted that a significant number of
service members returning from active
combat duty have adjustment difficulties due
to combat, sexual assault, or other traumatic
experiences while on active duty.
Commenters noted that some current or
former members of the military service have
been prescribed animals for conditions such
as PTSD. One commenter stated that service
women who were sexually assaulted while in
the military use emotional support animals to
help them feel safe enough to step outside
their homes. The Department recognizes that
many current and former members of the
military have disabilities as a result of
service-related injuries that may require
emotional support and that such individuals
can benefit from the use of an emotional
support animal and could use such animal in
their home under the FHAct. However,
having carefully weighed the issues, the
Department believes that its final rule
appropriately addresses the balance of issues
and concerns of both the individual with a
disability and the public accommodation.
The Department also notes that nothing in
this part prohibits a public entity from
allowing current or former military members
or anyone else with disabilities to utilize
emotional support animals if it wants to do
so.
Commenters asserted the view that if an
animal’s ‘‘mere presence’’ legitimately
provides such benefits to an individual with
a disability and if those benefits are
necessary to provide equal opportunity given
the facts of the particular disability, then
such an animal should qualify as a ‘‘service
animal.’’ Commenters noted that the focus
should be on the nature of a person’s
disability, the difficulties the disability may
impose and whether the requested
accommodation would legitimately address
those difficulties, not on evaluating the
animal involved. The Department
understands this approach has benefitted
many individuals under the FHAct and
analogous State law provisions, where the
presence of animals poses fewer health and
safety issues and where emotional support
animals provide assistance that is unique to
residential settings. The Department believes,
however, that the presence of such animals
is not required in the context of public
accommodations, such as restaurants,
hospitals, hotels, retail establishments, and
assembly areas.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
Under the Department’s previous
regulatory framework, some individuals and
entities assumed that the requirement that
service animals must be individually trained
to do work or perform tasks excluded all
individuals with mental disabilities from
having service animals. Others assumed that
any person with a psychiatric condition
whose pet provided comfort to them was
covered by the 1991 title III regulation. The
Department reiterates that psychiatric service
animals that are trained to do work or
perform a task for individuals whose
disability is covered by the ADA are
protected by the Department’s present
regulatory approach. Psychiatric service
animals can be trained to perform a variety
of tasks that assist individuals with
disabilities to detect the onset of psychiatric
episodes and ameliorate their effects. Tasks
performed by psychiatric service animals
may include reminding the handler to take
medicine, providing safety checks or room
searches for persons with PTSD, interrupting
self-mutilation, and removing disoriented
individuals from dangerous situations.
The difference between an emotional
support animal and a psychiatric service
animal is the work or tasks that the animal
performs. Traditionally, service dogs worked
as guides for individuals who were blind or
had low vision. Since the original regulation
was promulgated, service animals have been
trained to assist individuals with many
different types of disabilities.
In the final rule, the Department has
retained its position on the exclusion of
emotional support animals from the
definition of ‘‘service animal.’’ The definition
states that ‘‘[t]he provision of emotional
support, well-being, comfort, or
companionship * * * do[es] not constitute
work or tasks for the purposes of this
definition.’’ The Department notes, however,
that the exclusion of emotional support
animals from coverage in the final rule does
not mean that individuals with psychiatric or
mental disabilities cannot use service
animals that meet the regulatory definition.
The final rule defines service animal as
follows: ‘‘Service animal means any dog that
is individually trained to do work or perform
tasks for the benefit of an individual with a
disability, including a physical, sensory,
psychiatric, intellectual, or other mental
disability.’’ This language simply clarifies the
Department’s longstanding position.
The Department’s position is based on the
fact that the title II and title III regulations
govern a wider range of public settings than
the housing and transportation settings for
which the Department of Housing and Urban
Development (HUD) and the DOT regulations
allow emotional support animals or comfort
animals. The Department recognizes that
there are situations not governed by the title
II and title III regulations, particularly in the
context of residential settings and
transportation, where there may be a legal
obligation to permit the use of animals that
do not qualify as service animals under the
ADA, but whose presence nonetheless
provides necessary emotional support to
persons with disabilities. Accordingly, other
Federal agency regulations, case law, and
possibly State or local laws governing those
PO 00000
Frm 00107
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56269
situations may provide appropriately for
increased access for animals other than
service animals as defined under the ADA.
Public officials, housing providers, and
others who make decisions relating to
animals in residential and transportation
settings should consult the Federal, State,
and local laws that apply in those areas (e.g.,
the FHAct regulations of HUD and the
ACAA) and not rely on the ADA as a basis
for reducing those obligations.
Retain term ‘‘service animal.’’ Some
commenters asserted that the term
‘‘assistance animal’’ is a term of art and
should replace the term ‘‘service animal’’;
however, the majority of commenters
preferred the term ‘‘service animal’’ because
it is more specific. The Department has
decided to retain the term ‘‘service animal’’ in
the final rule. While some agencies, like
HUD, use the terms ‘‘assistance animal,’’
‘‘assistive animal,’’ or ‘‘support animal,’’ these
terms are used to denote a broader category
of animals than is covered by the ADA. The
Department has decided that changing the
term used in the final rule would create
confusion, particularly in view of the broader
parameters for coverage under the FHAct, cf.
Preamble to HUD’s Final Rule for Pet
Ownership for the Elderly and Persons with
Disabilities, 73 FR 63834–38 (Oct. 27, 2008);
HUD Handbook No. 4350.3 Rev–1, Chapter 2,
Occupancy Requirements of Subsidized
Multifamily Housing Programs (June 2007),
available at https://www.hud.gov/offices/adm/
hudclips/handbooks/hsgh/4350.3 (last
visited June 24, 2010). Moreover, as
discussed above, the Department’s definition
of ‘‘service animal’’ in the final rule does not
affect the rights of individuals with
disabilities who use assistance animals in
their homes under the FHAct or who use
‘‘emotional support animals’’ that are covered
under the ACAA and its implementing
regulations. See 14 CFR 382.7 et seq.; see also
Department of Transportation, Guidance
Concerning Service Animals in Air
Transportation, 68 FR 24874, 24877 (May 9,
2003) (discussing accommodation of service
animals and emotional support animals on
aircraft).
‘‘Video Remote Interpreting (VRI) Services’’
In the NPRM, the Department proposed
adding ‘‘Video Interpreting Services (VIS)’’ to
the list of auxiliary aids available to provide
effective communication. In the preamble to
the NPRM, VIS was defined as ‘‘a technology
composed of a video phone, video monitors,
cameras, a high-speed Internet connection,
and an interpreter. The video phone provides
video transmission to a video monitor that
permits the individual who is deaf or hard
of hearing to view and sign to a video
interpreter (i.e., a live interpreter in another
location), who can see and sign to the
individual through a camera located on or
near the monitor, while others can
communicate by speaking. The video
monitor can display a split screen of two live
images, with the interpreter in one image and
the individual who is deaf or hard of hearing
in the other image.’’ 73 FR 34508, 34522 (June
17, 2008). Comments from advocacy
organizations and individuals unanimously
requested that the Department use the term
‘‘video remote interpreting (VRI),’’ instead of
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56270
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
VIS, for consistency with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
regulations, FCC Public Notice, DA–0502417
(Sept. 7, 2005), and with common usage by
consumers. The Department has made that
change throughout the regulation to avoid
confusion and to make the regulation more
consistent with existing regulations.
Many commenters also requested that the
Department distinguish between VRI and
‘‘video relay service (VRS).’’ Both VRI and
VRS use a remote interpreter who is able to
see and communicate with a deaf person and
a hearing person, and all three individuals
may be connected by a video link. VRI is a
fee-based interpreting service conveyed via
videoconferencing where at least one person,
typically the interpreter, is at a separate
location. VRI can be provided as an ondemand service or by appointment. VRI
normally involves a contract in advance for
the interpreter who is usually paid by the
covered entity.
VRS is a telephone service that enables
persons with disabilities to use the telephone
to communicate using video connections and
is a more advanced form of relay service than
the traditional voice to text telephones (TTY)
relay systems that were recognized in the
1991 title III regulation. More specifically,
VRS is a video relay service using
interpreters connected to callers by video
hook-up and is designed to provide
telephone services to persons who are deaf
and use American Sign Language that are
functionally equivalent to those services
provided to users who are hearing. VRS is
funded through the Interstate
Telecommunications Relay Services Fund
and overseen by the FCC. See 47 CFR
64.601(a)(26). There are no fees for callers to
use the VRS interpreters and the video
connection, although there may be relatively
inexpensive initial costs to the title III
entities to purchase the videophone or
camera for on-line video connection, or other
equipment to connect to the VRS service. The
FCC has made clear that VRS functions as a
telephone service and is not intended to be
used for interpreting services where both
parties are in the same room; the latter is
reserved for VRI. The Department agrees that
VRS cannot be used as a substitute for inperson interpreters or for VRI in situations
that would not, absent one party’s disability,
entail use of the telephone.
Many commenters strongly recommended
limiting the use of VRI to circumstances
where it will provide effective
communication. Commenters from advocacy
groups and persons with disabilities
expressed concern that VRI may not always
be appropriate to provide effective
communication, especially in hospitals and
emergency rooms. Examples were provided
of patients who are unable to see the video
monitor because they are semi-conscious or
unable to focus on the video screen; other
examples were given of cases where the
video monitor is out of the sightline of the
patient or the image is out of focus; still other
examples were given of patients who could
not see the image because the signal was
interrupted, causing unnatural pauses in the
communication, or the image was grainy or
otherwise unclear. Many commenters
VerDate Mar<15>2010
18:44 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
requested more explicit guidelines on the use
of VRI and some recommended requirements
for equipment maintenance, high-speed,
wide-bandwidth video links using dedicated
lines or wireless systems, and training of staff
using VRI, especially in hospital and health
care situations. Several major organizations
requested a requirement to include the
interpreter’s face, head, arms, hands, and
eyes in all transmissions.
After consideration of the comments and
the Department’s own research and
experience, the Department has determined
that VRI can be an effective method of
providing interpreting services in certain
circumstances, but not in others. For
example, VRI should be effective in many
situations involving routine medical care, as
well as in the emergency room where urgent
care is important, but no in-person
interpreter is available; however, VRI may
not be effective in situations involving
surgery or other medical procedures where
the patient is limited in his or her ability to
see the video screen. Similarly, VRI may not
be effective in situations where there are
multiple people in a room and the
information exchanged is highly complex
and fast paced. The Department recognizes
that in these and other situations, such as
where communication is needed for persons
who are deaf-blind, it may be necessary to
summon an in-person interpreter to assist
certain individuals. To ensure that VRI is
effective in situations where it is appropriate,
the Department has established performance
standards in § 36.303(f).
public accommodation may reduce such
accessible features in accordance with the
requirements in the 2010 Standards.
The Department received only four
comments on this proposed amendment.
None of the commenters opposed the change.
In the final rule, the Department has revised
the section to make it clear that if the 2010
Standards reduce either the technical
requirements or the number of required
accessible elements below that required by
the 1991 Standards, then the public
accommodation may reduce the technical
requirements or the number of accessible
elements in a covered facility in accordance
with the requirements of the 2010 Standards.
One commenter, an association of
convenience stores, urged the Department to
expand the language of the section to include
restocking of shelves as a permissible activity
for isolated or temporary interruptions in
service or access. It is the Department’s
position that a temporary interruption that
blocks an accessible route, such as restocking
of shelves, is already permitted by existing
§ 36.211(b), which clarifies that ‘‘isolated or
temporary interruptions in service or access
due to maintenance or repairs’’ are permitted.
Therefore, the Department will not make any
additional changes in the language of
§ 36.211 other than those discussed in the
preceding paragraph.
Subpart B—General Requirements
Section 36.302(c)
Section 36.208(b)
Section 36.302(c)(1) of the 1991 title III
regulation states that ‘‘[g]enerally, a public
accommodation shall modify [its] policies,
practices, or procedures to permit the use of
service animals by an individual with a
disability.’’ Section 36.302(c)(2) of the 1991
title III regulation states that ‘‘[n]othing in
this part requires a public accommodation to
supervise or care for a service animal.’’ The
Department has decided to retain the scope
of the 1991 title III regulation while clarifying
the Department’s longstanding policies and
interpretations. Toward that end, the final
rule has been revised to include the
Department’s policy interpretations as
outlined in published technical assistance,
Commonly Asked Questions about Service
Animals in Places of Business (1996),
available at https://www.ada.gov/qasrvc.htm,
and ADA Guide for Small Businesses (1999),
available at https://www.ada.gov/
smbustxt.htm, and to add that a public
accommodation may exclude a service
animal in certain circumstances where the
service animal fails to meet certain
behavioral standards. The Department
received extensive comments in response to
proposed § 36.302(c) from individuals,
disability advocacy groups, organizations
involved in training service animals, and
public accommodations. Those comments
and the Department’s response are discussed
below.
Exclusion of service animals. The 1991
regulatory provision in § 36.302(c) addresses
reasonable modification and remains
unchanged in the final rule. However, based
Direct Threat
The Department has revised the language
of § 36.208(b) (formerly § 36.208(c) in the
1991 title III regulation) to include
consideration of whether the provision of
auxiliary aids or services will mitigate the
risk that an individual will pose a direct
threat to the health or safety of others.
Originally, the reference to auxiliary aids or
services as a mitigating factor was part of
§ 36.208. However, that reference was
removed from the section when, for editorial
purposes, the Department removed the
definition of ‘‘direct threat’’ from § 36.208 and
placed it in § 36.104. The Department has put
the reference to auxiliary aids or services as
a mitigating factor back into § 36.208(b) in
order to maintain consistency with the
current regulation.
Section 36.211 Maintenance of Accessible
Features
Section 36.211 of the 1991 title III
regulation provides that a public
accommodation must maintain in operable
working condition those features of facilities
and equipment that are required to be readily
accessible to and usable by individuals with
disabilities. 28 CFR 36.211. In the NPRM, the
Department clarified the application of this
provision and proposed one change to the
section to address the discrete situation in
which the scoping requirements provided in
the 2010 Standards reduce the number of
required elements below the requirements of
the 1991 Standards. In that discrete event, a
PO 00000
Frm 00108
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Subpart C—Specific Requirements
Section 36.302 Modifications in
Policies, Practices, or Procedures
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
Service Animals
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
on comments received and the Department’s
analysis, the Department has decided to
clarify those circumstances where otherwise
eligible service animals may be excluded by
public accommodations.
In the NPRM, in § 36.302(c)(2)(i), the
Department proposed that a public
accommodation may ask an individual with
a disability to remove a service animal from
the place of public accommodation if ‘‘[t]he
animal is out of control and the animal’s
handler does not take effective action to
control it.’’ 73 FR 34508, 34553 (June 17,
2008). The Department has long held that a
service animal must be under the control of
the handler at all times. Commenters
overwhelmingly were in favor of this
language, but noted that there are occasions
when service animals are provoked to
disruptive or aggressive behavior by agitators
or troublemakers, as in the case of a blind
individual whose service dog is taunted or
pinched. While all service animals are
trained to ignore and overcome these types
of incidents, misbehavior in response to
provocation is not always unreasonable. In
circumstances where a service animal
misbehaves or responds reasonably to a
provocation or injury, the public
accommodation must give the handler a
reasonable opportunity to gain control of the
animal. Further, if the individual with a
disability asserts that the animal was
provoked or injured, or if the public
accommodation otherwise has reason to
suspect that provocation or injury has
occurred, the public accommodation should
seek to determine the facts and, if
provocation or injury occurred, the public
accommodation should take effective steps to
prevent further provocation or injury, which
may include asking the provocateur to leave
the place of public accommodation. This
language is unchanged in the final rule.
The NPRM also proposed language at
§ 36.302(c)(2)(ii) to permit a public
accommodation to exclude a service animal
if the animal is not housebroken (i.e., trained
so that, absent illness or accident, the animal
controls its waste elimination) or the
animal’s presence or behavior fundamentally
alters the nature of the service the public
accommodation provides (e.g., repeated
barking during a live performance). Several
commenters were supportive of this NPRM
language, but cautioned against overreaction
by the public accommodation in these
instances. One commenter noted that animals
get sick, too, and that accidents occasionally
happen. In these circumstances, simple clean
up typically addresses the incident.
Commenters noted that the public
accommodation must be careful when it
excludes a service animal on the basis of
‘‘fundamental alteration,’’ asserting for
example, that a public accommodation
should not exclude a service animal for
barking in an environment where other types
of noise, such as loud cheering or a child
crying, is tolerated. The Department
maintains that the appropriateness of an
exclusion can be assessed by reviewing how
a public accommodation addresses
comparable situations that do not involve a
service animal. The Department has retained
in § 36.302(c)(2) of the final rule the
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
exception requiring animals to be
housebroken. The Department has not
retained the specific NPRM language stating
that animals can be excluded if their
presence or behavior fundamentally alters
the nature of the service provided by the
public accommodation, because the
Department believes that this exception is
covered by the general reasonable
modification requirement contained in
§ 36.302(c)(1).
The NPRM also proposed in
§ 36.302(c)(2)(iii) that a service animal can be
excluded where ‘‘[t]he animal poses a direct
threat to the health or safety of others that
cannot be eliminated by reasonable
modifications.’’ 73 FR 34508, 34553 (June 17,
2008). Commenters were universally
supportive of this provision as it makes
express the discretion of a public
accommodation to exclude a service animal
that poses a direct threat. Several
commenters cautioned against the overuse of
this provision and suggested that the
Department provide an example of the rule’s
application. The Department has decided not
to include regulatory language specifically
stating that a service animal can be excluded
if it poses a direct threat. The Department
believes that the direct threat provision in
§ 36.208 already provides this exception to
public accommodations.
Access to a public accommodation
following the proper exclusion of a service
animal. The NPRM proposed that in the
event a public accommodation properly
excludes a service animal, the public
accommodation must give the individual
with a disability the opportunity to obtain
the goods and services of the public
accommodation without having the service
animal on the premises. Most commenters
welcomed this provision as a common sense
approach. These commenters noted that they
do not wish to preclude individuals with
disabilities from the full and equal enjoyment
of the goods and services simply because of
an isolated problem with a service animal.
The Department has elected to retain this
provision in § 36.302(c)(2).
Other requirements. The NPRM also
proposed that the regulation include the
following requirements: that the work or
tasks performed by the service animal must
be directly related to the handler’s disability;
that a service animal must be individually
trained to do work or perform a task, be
housebroken, and be under the control of the
handler; and that a service animal must have
a harness, leash, or other tether. Most
commenters addressed at least one of these
issues in their responses. Most agreed that
these provisions are important to clarify
further the 1991 service animal regulation.
The Department has moved the requirement
that the work or tasks performed by the
service animal must be related directly to the
handler’s disability to the definition of
‘‘service animal’’ in § 36.104. In addition, the
Department has modified the proposed
language relating to the handler’s control of
the animal with a harness, leash, or other
tether to state that ‘‘[a] service animal shall
have a harness, leash, or other tether, unless
either the handler is unable because of a
disability to use a harness, leash, or other
PO 00000
Frm 00109
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56271
tether, or the use of a harness, leash, or other
tether would interfere with the service
animal’s safe, effective performance of work
or tasks, in which case the service animal
must be otherwise under the handler’s
control (e.g., voice control, signals, or other
effective means).’’ The Department has
retained the requirement that the service
animal must be individually trained, as well
as the requirement that the service animal be
housebroken.
Responsibility for supervision and care of
a service animal. The 1991 title III regulation,
in § 36.302(c)(2), states that ‘‘[n]othing in this
part requires a public accommodation to
supervise or care for a service animal.’’ The
NPRM modified this language to state that
‘‘[a] public accommodation is not responsible
for caring for or supervising a service
animal.’’ 73 FR 34508, 34553 (June 17, 2008).
Most commenters did not address this
particular provision. The Department notes
that there are occasions when a person with
a disability is confined to bed in a hospital
for a period of time. In such an instance, the
individual may not be able to walk or feed
the service animal. In such cases, if the
individual has a family member, friend, or
other person willing to take on these
responsibilities in the place of the individual
with a disability, the individual’s obligation
to be responsible for the care and supervision
of the service animal would be satisfied. The
language of this section is retained, with
minor modifications, in § 36.302(c)(5) of the
final rule.
Inquiries about service animals. The NPRM
proposed language at § 36.302(c)(6) setting
forth parameters about how a public
accommodation may determine whether an
animal qualifies as a service animal. The
proposed section stated that a public
accommodation may ask if the animal is
required because of a disability and what task
or work the animal has been trained to do but
may not require proof of service animal
certification or licensing. Such inquiries are
limited to eliciting the information necessary
to make a decision without requiring
disclosure of confidential disability-related
information that a public accommodation
does not need.
This language is consistent with the policy
guidance outlined in two Department
publications, Commonly Asked Questions
about Service Animals in Places of Business
(1996), available at https://www.ada.gov/
qasrvc.htm, and ADA Guide for Small
Businesses (1999), available at https://
www.ada.gov/smbustxt.htm.
Although some commenters contended
that the NPRM service animal provisions
leave unaddressed the issue of how a public
accommodation can distinguish between a
psychiatric service animal, which is covered
under the final rule, and a comfort animal,
which is not, other commenters noted that
the Department’s published guidance has
helped public accommodations to
distinguish between service animals and pets
on the basis of an individual’s response to
these questions. Accordingly, the Department
has retained the NPRM language
incorporating its guidance concerning the
permissible questions into the final rule.
Some commenters suggested that a title III
entity be allowed to require current
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56272
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
documentation, no more than one year old,
on letterhead from a mental health
professional stating the following: (1) That
the individual seeking to use the animal has
a mental health-related disability; (2) that
having the animal accompany the individual
is necessary to the individual’s mental health
or treatment or to assist the person otherwise;
and (3) that the person providing the
assessment of the individual is a licensed
mental health professional and the
individual seeking to use the animal is under
that individual’s professional care. These
commenters asserted that this will prevent
abuse and ensure that individuals with
legitimate needs for psychiatric service
animals may use them. The Department
believes that this proposal would treat
persons with psychiatric, intellectual, and
other mental disabilities less favorably than
persons with physical or sensory disabilities.
The proposal would also require persons
with disabilities to obtain medical
documentation and carry it with them any
time they seek to engage in ordinary
activities of daily life in their communities—
something individuals without disabilities
have not been required to do. Accordingly,
the Department has concluded that a
documentation requirement of this kind
would be unnecessary, burdensome, and
contrary to the spirit, intent, and mandates of
the ADA.
Service animal access to areas of a public
accommodation. The NPRM proposed at
§ 36.302(c)(7) that an individual with a
disability who uses a service animal has the
same right of access to areas of a public
accommodation as members of the public,
program participants, and invitees.
Commenters indicated that allowing
individuals with disabilities to go with their
service animals into the same areas as
members of the public, program participants,
clients, customers, patrons, or invitees is
accepted practice by most places of public
accommodation. The Department has
included a slightly modified version of this
provision in § 36.302(c)(7) of the final rule.
The Department notes that under the final
rule, a healthcare facility must also permit a
person with a disability to be accompanied
by a service animal in all areas of the facility
in which that person would otherwise be
allowed. There are some exceptions,
however. The Department follows the
guidance of the Centers for Disease Control
and Prevention (CDC) on the use of service
animals in a hospital setting. Zoonotic
diseases can be transmitted to humans
through bites, scratches, direct contact,
arthropod vectors, or aerosols.
Consistent with CDC guidance, it is
generally appropriate to exclude a service
animal from limited-access areas that employ
general infection-control measures, such as
operating rooms and burn units. See Centers
for Disease Control and Prevention,
Guidelines for Environmental Infection
Control in Health-Care Facilities:
Recommendations of CDC and the
Healthcare Infection Control Practices
Advisory Committee (June 2003), available at
https://www.cdc.gov/hicpac/pdf/guidelines/
eic_in_HCF_03.pdf (last visited June 24,
2010). A service animal may accompany its
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
handler to such areas as admissions and
discharge offices, the emergency room,
inpatient and outpatient rooms, examining
and diagnostic rooms, clinics, rehabilitation
therapy areas, the cafeteria and vending
areas, the pharmacy, restrooms, and all other
areas of the facility where healthcare
personnel, patients, and visitors are
permitted without taking added precautions.
Prohibition against surcharges for use of a
service animal. In the NPRM, the Department
proposed to incorporate the previously
mentioned policy guidance, which prohibits
the assessment of a surcharge for the use of
a service animal, into proposed
§ 36.302(c)(8). Several commenters agreed
that this provision makes clear the obligation
of a place of public accommodation to admit
an individual with a service animal without
surcharges, and that any additional costs
imposed should be factored into the overall
cost of doing business and passed on as a
charge to all participants, rather than an
individualized surcharge to the service
animal user. Commenters also noted that
service animal users cannot be required to
comply with other requirements that are not
generally applicable to other persons. If a
public accommodation normally charges
individuals for the damage they cause, an
individual with a disability may be charged
for damage caused by his or her service
animals. The Department has retained this
language, with minor modifications, in the
final rule at § 36.302(c)(8).
Training requirement. Certain commenters
recommended the adoption of formal training
requirements for service animals. The
Department has rejected this approach and
will not impose any type of formal training
requirements or certification process, but will
continue to require that service animals be
individually trained to do work or perform
tasks for the benefit of an individual with a
disability. While some groups have urged the
Department to modify this position, the
Department has determined that such a
modification would not serve the full array
of individuals with disabilities who use
service animals, since individuals with
disabilities may be capable of training, and
some have trained, their service animal to
perform tasks or do work to accommodate
their disability. A training and certification
requirement would increase the expense of
acquiring a service animal and might limit
access to service animals for individuals with
limited financial resources.
Some commenters proposed specific
behavior or training standards for service
animals, arguing that without such standards,
the public has no way to differentiate
between untrained pets and service animals.
Many of the suggested behavior or training
standards were lengthy and detailed. The
Department believes that this rule addresses
service animal behavior sufficiently by
including provisions that address the
obligations of the service animal user and the
circumstances under which a service animal
may be excluded, such as the requirements
that an animal be housebroken and under the
control of its handler.
Miniature horses. The Department has been
persuaded by commenters and the available
research to include a provision that would
PO 00000
Frm 00110
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
require public accommodations to make
reasonable modifications to policies,
practices, or procedures to permit the use of
a miniature horse by a person with a
disability if the miniature horse has been
individually trained to do work or perform
tasks for the benefit of the individual with a
disability. The traditional service animal is a
dog, which has a long history of guiding
individuals who are blind or have low vision,
and over time dogs have been trained to
perform an even wider variety of services for
individuals with all types of disabilities.
However, an organization that developed a
program to train miniature horses, modeled
on the program used for guide dogs, began
training miniature horses in 1991.
Although commenters generally supported
the species limitations proposed in the
NPRM, some were opposed to the exclusion
of miniature horses from the definition of a
service animal. These commenters noted that
these animals have been providing assistance
to persons with disabilities for many years.
Miniature horses were suggested by some
commenters as viable alternatives to dogs for
individuals with allergies, or for those whose
religious beliefs preclude the use of dogs.
Another consideration mentioned in favor of
the use of miniature horses is the longer life
span and strength of miniature horses in
comparison to dogs. Specifically, miniature
horses can provide service for more than 25
years while dogs can provide service for
approximately seven years, and, because of
their strength, miniature horses can provide
services that dogs cannot provide.
Accordingly, use of miniature horses reduces
the cost involved to retire, replace, and train
replacement service animals.
The miniature horse is not one specific
breed, but may be one of several breeds, with
distinct characteristics that produce animals
suited to service animal work. These animals
generally range in height from 24 inches to
34 inches measured to the withers, or
shoulders, and generally weigh between 70
and 100 pounds. These characteristics are
similar to those of large breed dogs, such as
Labrador Retrievers, Great Danes, and
Mastiffs. Similar to dogs, miniature horses
can be trained through behavioral
reinforcement to be ‘‘housebroken.’’ Most
miniature service horse handlers and
organizations recommend that when the
animals are not doing work or performing
tasks, the miniature horses should be kept
outside in a designated area instead of
indoors in a house.
According to information provided by an
organization that trains service horses, these
miniature horses are trained to provide a
wide array of services to their handlers,
primarily guiding individuals who are blind
or have low vision, pulling wheelchairs,
providing stability and balance for
individuals with disabilities that impair the
ability to walk, and supplying leverage that
enables a person with a mobility disability to
get up after a fall. According to the
commenter, miniature horses are particularly
effective for large stature individuals. The
animal can be trained to stand (and in some
cases, lie down) at the handler’s feet in
venues where space is at a premium, such as
assembly areas or inside some vehicles that
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
provide public transportation. Some
individuals with disabilities have traveled by
train and have flown commercially with their
miniature horses.
The miniature horse is not included in the
definition of service animal, which is limited
to dogs. However, the Department has added
a specific provision at § 36.302(c)(9) of the
final rule covering miniature horses. Under
this provision, public accommodations must
make reasonable modifications in policies,
practices, or procedures to permit the use of
a miniature horse by an individual with a
disability if the miniature horse has been
individually trained to do work or perform
tasks for the benefit of the individual with a
disability. The public accommodation may
take into account a series of assessment
factors in determining whether to allow a
miniature horse into a specific facility. These
include the type, size, and weight of the
miniature horse, whether the handler has
sufficient control of the miniature horse,
whether the miniature horse is housebroken,
and whether the miniature horse’s presence
in a specific facility compromises legitimate
safety requirements that are necessary for
safe operation. In addition, paragraphs
(c)(3)B–(8) of this section, which are
applicable to dogs, also apply to miniature
horses.
Ponies and full-size horses are not covered
by § 36.302(c)(9). Also, because miniature
horses can vary in size and can be larger and
less flexible than dogs, covered entities may
exclude this type of service animal if the
presence of the miniature horse, because of
its larger size and lower level of flexibility,
results in a fundamental alteration to the
nature of the services provided.
Section 36.302(e) Hotel Reservations
Section 36.302 of the 1991 title III
regulation requires public accommodations
to make reasonable modifications in policies,
practices, or procedures when such
modifications are necessary to afford access
to any goods, services, facilities, privileges,
advantages, or accommodations, unless the
entity can demonstrate that making such
modifications would fundamentally alter the
nature of such goods, services, facilities,
privileges, advantages, or accommodations.
Hotels, timeshare resorts, and other places of
lodging are subject to this requirement and
must make reasonable modifications to
reservations policies, practices, or procedures
when necessary to ensure that individuals
with disabilities are able to reserve accessible
hotel rooms with the same efficiency,
immediacy, and convenience as those who
do not need accessible guest rooms.
Each year the Department receives many
complaints concerning failed reservations.
Most of these complaints involve individuals
who have reserved an accessible hotel room
only to discover upon arrival that the room
they reserved is either not available or not
accessible. Although problems with
reservations services were not addressed in
the ANPRM, commenters independently
noted an ongoing problem with hotel
reservations and urged the Department to
provide regulatory guidance. In response, the
Department proposed specific language in
the NPRM to address hotel reservations. In
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
addition, the Department posed several
questions regarding the current practices of
hotels and other reservations services
including questions about room guarantees
and the holding and release of accessible
rooms. The Department also questioned
whether public accommodations that provide
reservations services for a place or places of
lodging but do not own, lease (or lease to),
or operate a place of lodging—referred to in
this discussion as ‘‘third-party reservations
services’’—should also be subject to the
NPRM’s proposals concerning hotel
reservations.
Although reservations issues were
discussed primarily in the context of
traditional hotels, the new rule modifies the
definition of ‘‘places of lodging’’ to clarify the
scope of the rule’s coverage of rental
accommodations in timeshare properties,
condominium hotels, and mixed-use and
corporate hotel facilities that operate as
places of public accommodation (as that term
is now defined in § 36.104), and the
Department received detailed comments,
discussed below, regarding the application of
reservations requirements to this category of
rental accommodations.
General rule on reservations. Section
36.302(e)(1) of the NPRM required a public
accommodation that owns, leases (or leases
to), or operates a place of lodging to:
Modify its policies, practices, or
procedures to ensure that individuals with
disabilities can make reservations, including
reservations made by telephone, in-person, or
through a third party, for accessible guest
rooms during the same hours and in the same
manner as individuals who do not need
accessible rooms.
73 FR 34508, 34553 (June 17, 2008).
Most individual commenters and
organizations that represent individuals with
disabilities strongly supported the
requirement that individuals with disabilities
should be able to make reservations for
accessible guest rooms during the same hours
and in the same manner as individuals who
do not need accessible rooms. In many cases
individuals with disabilities expressed
frustration because, while they are aware of
improvements in architectural access brought
about as a result of the ADA, they are unable
to take advantage of these improvements
because of shortcomings in current hotel
reservations systems. A number of these
commenters pointed out that it can be
difficult or impossible to obtain information
about accessible rooms and hotel features
and that even when information is provided
it often is found to be incorrect upon arrival.
They also noted difficulty reserving
accessible rooms and the inability to
guarantee or otherwise ensure that the
appropriate accessible room is available
when the guest arrives. The ability to obtain
information about accessible guest rooms, to
make reservations for accessible guest rooms
in the same manner as other guests, and to
be assured of an accessible room upon arrival
was of critical importance to these
commenters.
Other commenters, primarily hotels, resort
developers, travel agencies, and
organizations commenting on their behalf,
did not oppose the general rule on
PO 00000
Frm 00111
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56273
reservations, but recommended that the
language requiring that reservations be made
‘‘in the same manner’’ be changed to require
that reservations be made ‘‘in a substantially
similar manner.’’ These commenters argued
that hotel reservations are made in many
different ways and through a variety of
systems. In general, they argued that current
reservations database systems may not
contain sufficient information to permit
guests, travel agents, or other third-party
reservations services to select the most
appropriate room without consulting directly
with the hotel, and that updating these
systems might be expensive and time
consuming. They also noted that in some
cases, hotels do not always automatically
book accessible rooms when requested to do
so. Instead, guests may select from a menu
of accessibility and other room options when
making reservations. This information is
transmitted to the hotel’s reservations staff,
who then contact the individual to verify the
guest’s accessibility needs. Only when such
verification occurs will the accessible room
be booked.
The Department is not persuaded that
individuals who need to reserve accessible
rooms cannot be served in the same manner
as those who do not, and it appears that there
are hotels of all types and sizes that already
meet this requirement. Further, the
Department has been able to accomplish this
goal in settlement agreements resolving
complaints about this issue. As stated in the
preamble to the NPRM, basic
nondiscrimination principles mandate that
individuals with disabilities should be able
to reserve hotel rooms with the same
efficiency, immediacy, and convenience as
those who do not need accessible guest
rooms. The regulation does not require
reservations services to create new methods
for reserving hotel rooms or available
timeshare units; instead, covered entities
must make the modifications needed to
ensure that individuals who need accessible
rooms are able to reserve them in the same
manner as other guests. If, for example, hotel
reservations are not final until all hotel
guests have been contacted by the hotel to
discuss the guest’s needs, a hotel may follow
the same process when reserving accessible
rooms. Therefore, the Department declines to
change this language, which has been moved
to § 36.302(e)(1)(i). However, in response to
the commenters who recommended a
transition period that would allow
reservations services time to modify existing
reservations systems to meet the
requirements of this rule, § 36.302(e)(3) now
provides a 18-month transition period before
the requirements of § 36.302(e)(1) will be
enforced.
Hotels and organizations commenting on
their behalf also requested that the language
be changed to eliminate any liability for
reservations made through third parties,
arguing that they are unable to control the
actions of unrelated parties. The rule, both as
proposed and as adopted, requires covered
public accommodations to ensure that
reservations made on their behalf by third
parties are made in a manner that results in
parity between those who need accessible
rooms and those who do not.
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56274
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
Hotels and other places of lodging that use
third-party reservations services must make
reasonable efforts to make accessible rooms
available through at least some of these
services and must provide these third-party
services with information concerning the
accessible features of the hotel and the
accessible rooms. To the extent a hotel or
other place of lodging makes available such
rooms and information to a third-party
reservation provider, but the third party fails
to provide the information or rooms to
people with disabilities in accordance with
this section, the hotel or other place of
lodging will not be responsible.
Identification of accessible features in
hotels and guest rooms. NPRM § 36.302(e)(2)
required public accommodations that
provide hotel reservations services to identify
and describe the accessible features in the
hotels and guest rooms offered through that
service. This requirement is essential to
ensure that individuals with disabilities
receive the information they need to benefit
from the services offered by the place of
lodging. As a practical matter, a public
accommodation’s designation of a guest room
as ‘‘accessible’’ will not ensure necessarily
that the room complies with all of the 1991
Standards. In older facilities subject to barrier
removal requirements, strict compliance with
the 1991 Standards is not required. Instead,
public accommodations must remove barriers
to the extent that it is readily achievable to
do so.
Further, hotel rooms that are in full
compliance with current standards may
differ, and individuals with disabilities must
be able to ascertain which features—in new
and existing facilities—are included in the
hotel’s accessible guest rooms. For example,
under certain circumstances, an accessible
hotel bathroom may meet accessibility
requirements with either a bathtub or a rollin shower. The presence or absence of
particular accessible features such as these
may be the difference between a room that
is usable by a particular person with a
disability and one that is not.
Individuals with disabilities strongly
supported this requirement. In addition to
the importance of information about specific
access features, several commenters pointed
out the importance of knowing the size and
number of beds in a room. Many individuals
with disabilities travel with family members,
personal care assistants, or other companions
and require rooms with at least two beds.
Although most hotels provide this
information when generally categorizing the
type or class of room (e.g., deluxe suite with
king bed), as described below, all hotels
should consider the size and number of beds
to be part of the basic information they are
required to provide.
Comments made on behalf of reservations
services expressed concern that unless the
word ‘‘hotels’’ is stricken from the text,
§ 36.302(e)(2) of the NPRM essentially would
require reservations systems to include a full
accessibility report on each hotel or resort
property in its system. Along these lines,
commenters also suggested that the
Department identify the specific accessible
features of hotel rooms that must be
described in the reservations system. For
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
example, commenters suggested limiting
features that must be included to bathroom
type (tub or roll-in shower) and
communications features.
The Department recognizes that a
reservations system is not intended to be an
accessibility survey. However, specific
information concerning accessibility features
is essential to travelers with disabilities.
Because of the wide variations in the level of
accessibility that travelers will encounter, the
Department cannot specify what information
must be included in every instance. For
hotels that were built in compliance with the
1991 Standards, it may be sufficient to
specify that the hotel is accessible and, for
each accessible room, to describe the general
type of room (e.g., deluxe executive suite),
the size and number of beds (e.g., two queen
beds), the type of accessible bathing facility
(e.g., roll-in shower), and communications
features available in the room (e.g., alarms
and visual notification devices). Based on
that information, many individuals with
disabilities will be comfortable making
reservations.
For older hotels with limited accessibility
features, information about the hotel should
include, at a minimum, information about
accessible entrances to the hotel, the path of
travel to guest check-in and other essential
services, and the accessible route to the
accessible room or rooms. In addition to the
room information described above, these
hotels should provide information about
important features that do not comply with
the 1991 Standards. For example, if the door
to the ‘‘accessible’’ room or bathroom is
narrower than required, this information
should be included (e.g., door to guest room
measures 30 inches clear). This width may
not meet current standards but may be
adequate for some wheelchair users who use
narrower chairs. In many cases, older hotels
provide services through alternatives to
barrier removal, for example, by providing
check-in or concierge services at a different,
accessible location. Reservations services for
these entities should include this information
and provide a way for guests to contact the
appropriate hotel employee for additional
information. To recognize that the
information and level of detail needed will
vary based on the nature and age of the
facility, § 36.302(e)(2) has been moved to
§ 36.302(e)(1)(ii) in the final rule and
modified to require reservations services to:
Identify and describe accessible features in
the hotels and guest rooms offered through
its reservations service in enough detail to
reasonably permit individuals with
disabilities to assess independently whether
a given hotel or guest room meets his or her
accessibility needs. [Emphasis added]
As commenters representing hotels have
described, once reservations are made, some
hotels may wish to contact the guest to offer
additional information and services. Or,
many individuals with disabilities may wish
to contact the hotel or reservations service for
more detailed information. At that point,
trained staff (including staff located on-site at
the hotel and staff located off-site at a
reservations center) should be available to
provide additional information such as the
specific layout of the room and bathroom,
PO 00000
Frm 00112
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
shower design, grab-bar locations, and other
amenities available (e.g., bathtub bench).
In the NPRM, the Department sought
guidance concerning whether this
requirement should be applied to third-party
reservations services. Comments made by or
on behalf of hotels, resort managers, and
other members of the lodging and resort
industry pointed out that, in most cases,
these third parties do not have direct access
to this information and must obtain it from
the hotel or other place of lodging. Because
third-party reservations services must rely on
the place of lodging to provide the requisite
information and to ensure that it is accurate
and timely, the Department has declined to
extend this requirement directly to thirdparty reservations services.
Hold and release of accessible guest rooms.
The Department has addressed the hold and
release of accessible guest rooms in
settlement agreements and recognizes that
current practices vary widely. The
Department is concerned about current
practices by which accessible guest rooms are
released to the general public even though
the hotel is not sold out. In such instances,
individuals with disabilities may be denied
an equal opportunity to benefit from the
services offered by the public
accommodation, i.e., a hotel guest room. In
the NPRM, the Department requested
information concerning the current practices
of hotels and third-party reservations services
with respect to (1) holding accessible rooms
for individuals with disabilities and (2)
releasing accessible rooms to individuals
without disabilities.
Individuals with disabilities and
organizations commenting on their behalf
strongly supported requiring accessible
rooms to be held back for rental by
individuals with disabilities. In some cases
commenters supported holding back all
accessible rooms until all non-accessible
rooms were rented. Others supported holding
back accessible rooms in each category of
rooms until all other rooms of that type were
reserved. This latter position was also
supported in comments received on behalf of
the lodging industry; commenters also noted
that this is the current practice of many
hotels. In general, holding accessible rooms
until requested by an individual who needs
a room with accessible features or until it is
the only available room of its type was
viewed widely as a sensible approach to
allocating scarce accessible rooms without
imposing unnecessary costs on hotels.
The Department agrees with this latter
approach and has added § 36.302(e)(1)(iii),
which requires covered entities to hold
accessible rooms for use by individuals with
disabilities until all other guest rooms of that
type have been rented and the accessible
room requested is the only remaining room
of that type. For example, if there are 25
rooms of a given type and two of these rooms
are accessible, the reservations service is
required to rent all 23 non-accessible rooms
before it is permitted to rent these two
accessible rooms to individuals without
disabilities. If a one-of-a-kind room is
accessible, that room is available to the first
party to request it. The Department believes
that this is the fairest approach available
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
since it reserves accessible rooms for
individuals who require them until all nonaccessible rooms of that type have been
reserved, and then provides equal access to
any remaining rooms. It is also fair to hotels
because it does not require them to forego
renting a room that actually has been
requested in favor of the possibility that an
individual with a disability may want to
reserve it at a later date.
Requirement to block accessible guest
room reservations. NPRM § 36.302(e)(3)
required a public accommodation that owns,
leases (or leases to), or operates a place of
lodging to guarantee accessible guest rooms
that are reserved through a reservations
service to the same extent that it guarantees
rooms that are not accessible. In the NPRM,
the Department sought comment on the
current practices of hotels and third party
reservations services with respect to
‘‘guaranteed’’ hotel reservations and on the
impact of requiring a public accommodation
to guarantee accessible rooms to the extent it
guarantees other rooms.
Comments received by the Department by
and on behalf of both individuals with
disabilities and public accommodations that
provide reservations services made clear that,
in many cases, when speaking of room
guarantees, parties who are not familiar with
hotel terminology actually mean to refer to
policies for blocking and holding specific
hotel rooms. Several commenters explained
that, in most cases, when an individual
makes ‘‘reservations,’’ hotels do not reserve
specific rooms; rather the individual is
reserving a room with certain features at a
given price. When the hotel guest arrives, he
or she is provided with a room that has those
features.
In most cases, this does not pose a problem
because there are many available rooms of a
given type. However, in comparison,
accessible rooms are much more limited in
availability and there may be only one room
in a given hotel that meets a guest’s needs.
As described in the discussion on the
identification of accessible features in hotels
and guest rooms, the presence or absence of
particular accessible features may be the
difference between a room that is usable by
a particular person with a disability and one
that is not.
For that reason, the Department has added
§ 36.302(e)(1)(iv) to the final rule. Section
36.302(e)(1)(iv) requires covered entities to
reserve, upon request, accessible guest rooms
or specific types of guest rooms and ensure
that the guest rooms requested are blocked
and removed from all reservations systems
(to eliminate double-booking, which is a
common problem that arises when rooms are
made available to be reserved through more
than one reservations service). Of course, if
a public accommodation typically requires a
payment or deposit from its patrons in order
to reserve a room, it may require the same
payment or deposit from individuals with
disabilities before it reserves an accessible
room and removes it from all its reservations
systems. These requirements should alleviate
the widely-reported problem of arriving at a
hotel only to discover that, although an
accessible room was reserved, the room
available is not accessible or does not have
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
the specific accessible features needed. Many
hotels already have a similar process in place
for other guest rooms that are unique or oneof-a-kind, such as ‘‘Presidential’’ suites. The
Department has declined to extend this
requirement directly to third-party
reservations services. Comments the
Department received in response to the
NPRM indicate that most of the actions
required to implement these requirements
primarily are within the control of the
entities that own the place of lodging or that
manage it on behalf of its owners.
Guarantees of reservations for accessible
guest rooms. The Department recognizes that
not all reservations are guaranteed, and the
rule does not impose an affirmative duty to
guarantee reservations. When a public
accommodation does guarantee hotel or other
room reservations, it must provide the same
guarantee for accessible guest rooms as it
makes for other rooms, except that it must
apply that guarantee to the specific room
reserved and blocked, even if in other
situations, its guarantee policy only
guarantees that a room of a specific type will
be available at the guaranteed price. Without
this reasonable modification to its guarantee
policy, any guarantee for accessible rooms
would be meaningless. If, for example, a
hotel makes reservations for an accessible
‘‘Executive Suite’’ but, upon arrival, offers its
guest an inaccessible Executive Suite that the
guest is unable to enter, it would be
meaningless to consider the hotel’s guarantee
fulfilled. As with the requirements for
identifying, holding, and blocking accessible
rooms, the Department has declined to
extend this requirement directly to thirdparty reservations services because the
fulfillment of guarantees largely is beyond
their power to control.
Application to rental units in timeshare,
vacation communities, and condo-hotels.
Because the Department has revised the
definition of ‘‘Places of Lodging’’ in the final
rule, the reservations requirements now
apply to guest rooms and other rental units
in timeshares, vacation communities, and
condo-hotels where some or all of the units
are owned and controlled by individual
owners and rented out some portion of time
to the public, as compared to traditional
hotels and motels that are owned, controlled,
and rented to the public by one entity. If a
reservations service owns and controls one or
more of the guest rooms or other units in the
rental property (e.g., a developer who retains
and rents out unsold inventory), it is subject
to the requirements set forth in § 36.302(e).
Several commenters expressed concern
about any rule that would require accessible
units that are owned individually to be
removed from the rental pool and rented last.
Commenters pointed out that this would be
a disadvantage to the owners of accessible
units because they would be rented last, if at
all. Further, certain vacation property
managers consider holding specific units
back to be a violation of their ethical
responsibility to present all properties they
manage at an equal advantage. To address
these concerns, the Department has added
§ 36.302(e)(2), which exempts reservations
for individual guest rooms and other units
that are not owned or substantially controlled
PO 00000
Frm 00113
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56275
by the entity that owns, leases, or operates
the overall facility from the requirement that
accessible guest rooms be held back from
rental until all other guest rooms of that type
have been rented. Section 36.302(e)(2) also
exempts such rooms from requirements for
blocking and guaranteeing reserved rooms. In
resort developments with mixed ownership
structures, such as a resort where some units
are operated as hotel rooms and others are
owned and controlled individually, a
reservations service operated by the owner of
the hotel portion may apply the exemption
only to the rooms that are not owned or
substantially controlled by the entity that
owns, manages, or otherwise controls the
overall facility.
Other reservations-related comments made
on behalf of these entities reflected concerns
similar to the general concerns expressed
with respect to traditional hotel properties.
For example, commenters noted that because
of the unique nature of the timeshare
industry, additional flexibility is needed
when making reservations for accessible
units. One commenter explained that
reservations are sometimes made through
unusual entities such as exchange
companies, which are not public
accommodations and which operate to trade
ownership interests of millions of individual
owners. The commenter expressed concern
that developers or resort owners would be
held responsible for the actions of these
exchange entities. If, as described, the choice
to list a unit with an exchange company is
made by the individual owner of the property
and the exchange company does not operate
on behalf of the reservations service, the
reservations service is not liable for the
exchange company’s actions.
As with hotels, the Department believes
that within the 18-month transition period
these reservations services should be able to
modify their systems to ensure that potential
guests with disabilities who need accessible
rooms can make reservations during the same
hours and in the same manner as those who
do not need accessible rooms.
Section 36.302(f) Ticketing
The 1991 title III regulation did not contain
specific regulatory language on ticketing. The
ticketing policies and practices of public
accommodations, however, are subject to title
III’s nondiscrimination provisions. Through
the investigation of complaints, enforcement
actions, and public comments related to
ticketing, the Department became aware that
some venue operators, ticket sellers, and
distributors were violating title III’s
nondiscrimination mandate by not providing
individuals with disabilities the same
opportunities to purchase tickets for
accessible seating as provided to spectators
purchasing conventional seats. In the NPRM,
the Department proposed § 36.302(f) to
provide explicit direction and guidance on
discriminatory practices for entities involved
in the sale or distribution of tickets.
The Department received comments from
advocacy groups, assembly area trade
associations, public accommodations, and
individuals. Many commenters supported the
addition of regulatory language pertaining to
ticketing and urged the Department to retain
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56276
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
it in the final rule. Several commenters,
however, questioned why there were
inconsistencies between the title II and title
III provisions and suggested that the same
language be used for both titles. The
Department has decided to retain ticketing
regulatory language and to ensure
consistency between the ticketing provisions
in title II and title III.
Because many in the ticketing industry
view season tickets and other multi-event
packages differently from individual tickets,
the Department bifurcated some season ticket
provisions from those concerning singleevent tickets in the NPRM. This structure,
however, resulted in some provisions being
repeated for both types of tickets but not for
others even though they were intended to
apply to both types of tickets. The result was
that it was not entirely clear that some of the
provisions that were not repeated also were
intended to apply to season tickets. The
Department is addressing the issues raised by
these commenters using a different approach.
For the purposes of this section, a single
event refers to an individual performance for
which tickets may be purchased. In contrast,
a series of events includes, but is not limited
to, subscription events, event packages,
season tickets, or any other tickets that may
be purchased for multiple events of the same
type over the course of a specified period of
time whose ownership right reverts to the
public accommodation at the end of each
season or time period. Series-of-events tickets
that give their holders an enhanced ability to
purchase such tickets from the public
accommodation in seasons or periods of time
that follow, such as a right of first refusal or
higher ranking on waiting lists for more
desirable seats, are subject to the provisions
in this section. In addition, the final rule
merges together some NPRM paragraphs that
dealt with related topics and has reordered
and renamed some of the paragraphs that
were in the NPRM.
Ticket sales. In the NPRM, the Department
proposed, in § 36.302(f)(1), a general rule that
a public accommodation shall modify its
policies, practices, or procedures to ensure
that individuals with disabilities can
purchase tickets for accessible seating for an
event or series of events in the same way as
others (i.e., during the same hours and
through the same distribution methods as
other seating is sold). ‘‘Accessible seating’’ is
defined in § 36.302(f)(1)(i) of the final rule to
mean ‘‘wheelchair spaces and companion
seats that comply with sections 221 and 802
of the 2010 Standards along with any other
seats required to be offered for sale to the
individual with a disability pursuant to
paragraph (4) of this section.’’ The defined
term does not include designated aisle seats.
A ‘‘wheelchair space’’ refers to a space for a
single wheelchair and its occupant.
The NPRM proposed requiring that
accessible seats be sold through the ‘‘same
methods of distribution’’ as non-accessible
seats. 73 FR 34508, 34554 (June 17, 2008).
Comments from venue managers and others
in the business community, in general, noted
that multiple parties are involved in
ticketing, and because accessible seats may
not be allotted to all parties involved at each
stage, such parties should be protected from
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
liability. For example, one commenter noted
that a third-party ticket vendor, like
Ticketmaster, can only sell the tickets it
receives from its client. Because § 36.302(f)(1)
of the final rule requires venue operators to
make available accessible seating through the
same methods of distribution they use for
their regular tickets, venue operators that
provide tickets to third-party ticket vendors
are required to provide accessible seating to
the third-party ticket vendor. This provision
will enhance third-party ticket vendors’
ability to acquire and sell accessible seating
for sale in the future. The Department notes
that once third-party ticket vendors acquire
accessible tickets, they are obligated to sell
them in accordance with these rules.
The Department also has received frequent
complaints that individuals with disabilities
have not been able to purchase accessible
seating over the Internet, and instead have
had to engage in a laborious process of
calling a customer service line, or sending an
email to a customer service representative
and waiting for a response. Not only is such
a process burdensome, but it puts individuals
with disabilities at a disadvantage in
purchasing tickets for events that are popular
and may sell out in minutes. Because
§ 36.302(f)(5) of the final rule authorizes
venues to release accessible seating in case of
a sell-out, individuals with disabilities
effectively could be cut off from buying
tickets unless they also have the ability to
purchase tickets in real time over the
Internet. The Department’s new regulatory
language is designed to address this problem.
Several commenters representing assembly
areas raised concerns about offering
accessible seating for sale over the Internet.
They contended that this approach would
increase the incidence of fraud since anyone
easily could purchase accessible seating over
the Internet. They also asserted that it would
be difficult technologically to provide
accessible seating for sale in real time over
the Internet, or that to do so would require
simplifying the rules concerning the
purchase of multiple additional
accompanying seats. Moreover, these
commenters argued that requiring an
individual purchasing accessible seating to
speak with a customer service representative
would allow the venue to meet the patron’s
needs most appropriately and ensure that
wheelchair spaces are reserved for
individuals with disabilities who require
wheelchair spaces. Finally, these
commenters argued that individuals who can
transfer effectively and conveniently from a
wheelchair to a seat with a movable armrest
seat could instead purchase designated aisle
seats.
The Department considered these concerns
carefully and has decided to continue with
the general approach proposed in the NPRM.
Although fraud is an important concern, the
Department believes that it is best combated
by other means that would not have the effect
of limiting the ability of individuals with
disabilities to purchase tickets, particularly
since restricting the purchase of accessible
seating over the Internet will, of itself, not
curb fraud. In addition, the Department has
identified permissible means for covered
entities to reduce the incidence of fraudulent
PO 00000
Frm 00114
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
accessible seating ticket purchases in
§ 36.302(f)(8) of the final rule.
Several commenters questioned whether
ticket Web sites themselves must be
accessible to individuals who are blind or
have low vision, and if so, what that requires.
The Department has consistently interpreted
the ADA to cover Web sites that are operated
by public accommodations and stated that
such sites must provide their services in an
accessible manner or provide an accessible
alternative to the Web site that is available
24 hours a day, seven days a week. The final
rule, therefore, does not impose any new
obligation in this area. The accessibility of
Web sites is discussed in more detail in the
section entitled ‘‘Other Issues.’’
In § 36.302(f)(2) of the NPRM, the
Department also proposed requiring public
accommodations to make accessible seating
available during all stages of tickets sales
including, but not limited to, presales,
promotions, lotteries, waitlists, and general
sales. For example, if tickets will be presold
for an event that is open only to members of
a fan club, or to holders of a particular credit
card, then tickets for accessible seating must
be made available for purchase through those
means. This requirement does not mean that
any individual with a disability would be
able to purchase those seats. Rather, it means
that an individual with a disability who
meets the requirement for such a sale (e.g.,
who is a member of the fan club or holds that
credit card) will be able to participate in the
special promotion and purchase accessible
seating. The Department has maintained the
substantive provisions of the NPRM’s
§§ 36.302(f)(1) and (f)(2) but has combined
them in a single paragraph at § 36.302(f)(1)(ii)
of the final rule so that all of the provisions
having to do with the manner in which
tickets are sold are located in a single
paragraph.
Identification of available accessible
seating. In the NPRM, the Department
proposed § 36.302(f)(3), which, as modified
and renumbered § 36.302(f)(2)(iii) in the final
rule, requires a facility to identify available
accessible seating through seating maps,
brochures, or other methods if that
information is made available about other
seats sold to the general public. This rule
requires public accommodations to provide
information about accessible seating to the
same degree of specificity that it provides
information about general seating. For
example, if a seating map displays colorcoded blocks pegged to prices for general
seating, then accessible seating must be
similarly color-coded. Likewise, if covered
entities provide detailed maps that show
exact seating and pricing for general seating,
they must provide the same for accessible
seating.
The NPRM did not specify a requirement
to identify prices for accessible seating. The
final rule requires that if such information is
provided for general seating, it must be
provided for accessible seating as well.
In the NPRM, the Department proposed in
§ 36.302(f)(4) that a public accommodation,
upon being asked, must inform persons with
disabilities and their companions of the
locations of all unsold or otherwise available
seating. This provision is intended to prevent
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
the practice of ‘‘steering’’ individuals with
disabilities to certain accessible seating so
that the facility can maximize potential ticket
sales by releasing unsold accessible seating,
especially in preferred or desirable locations,
for sale to the general public. The
Department received no significant comment
on this proposal. The Department has
retained this provision in the final rule but
has added it, with minor modifications, to
§ 36.302(f)(2) as paragraph (i).
Ticket prices. In the NPRM, the
Department proposed § 36.302(f)(7) requiring
that ticket prices for accessible seating be set
no higher than the prices for other seats in
that seating section for that event. The
NPRM’s provision also required that
accessible seating be made available at every
price range, and if an existing facility has
barriers to accessible seating within a
particular price range, a proportionate
amount of seating (determined by the ratio of
the total number of seats at that price level
to the total number of seats in the assembly
area) must be offered in an accessible
location at that same price. Under this rule,
for example, if it is not readily achievable for
a 20,000-seat facility built in 1980 to place
accessible seating in the $20-price category,
which is on the upper deck, it must place a
proportionate number of seats in an
accessible location for $20. If the upper deck
has 2,000 seats, then the facility must place
10 percent of its accessible seating in an
accessible location for $20 provided that it is
part of a seating section where ticket prices
are equal to or more than $20—a facility may
not place the $20-accessible seating in a $10seating section. The Department received no
significant comment on this rule, and it has
been retained, as amended, in the final rule
in § 36.302(f)(3).
Purchase of multiple tickets. In the NPRM,
the Department proposed § 36.302(f)(9) to
address one of the most common ticketing
complaints raised with the Department: that
individuals with disabilities are not able to
purchase more than two tickets. The
Department proposed this provision to
facilitate the ability of individuals with
disabilities to attend events with friends,
companions, or associates who may or may
not have a disability by enabling individuals
with disabilities to purchase the maximum
number of tickets allowed per transaction to
other spectators; by requiring venues to place
accompanying individuals in general seating
as close as possible to accessible seating (in
the event that a group must be divided
because of the large size of the group); and
by allowing an individual with a disability to
purchase up to three additional contiguous
seats per wheelchair space if they are
available at the time of sale. Section
36.302(f)(9)(ii) of the NPRM required that a
group containing one or more wheelchair
users must be placed together, if possible,
and that in the event that the group could not
be placed together, the individuals with
disabilities may not be isolated from the rest
of the group.
The Department asked in the NPRM
whether this rule was sufficient to effectuate
the integration of individuals with
disabilities. Many advocates and individuals
praised it as a welcome and much-needed
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
change, stating that the trade-off of being able
to sit with their family or friends was worth
reducing the number of seats available for
individuals with disabilities. Some
commenters went one step further and
suggested that the number of additional
accompanying seats should not be restricted
to three.
Although most of the substance of the
proposed provision on the purchase of
multiple tickets has been maintained in the
final rule, it has been renumbered as
§ 36.302(f)(4), reorganized, and
supplemented. To preserve the availability of
accessible seating for other individuals with
disabilities, the Department has not
expanded the rule beyond three additional
contiguous seats. Section 36.302(f)(4)(i) of the
final rule requires public accommodations to
make available for purchase three additional
tickets for seats in the same row that are
contiguous with the wheelchair space,
provided that at the time of purchase there
are three such seats available. The
requirement that the additional seats be
‘‘contiguous with the wheelchair space’’ does
not mean that each of the additional seats
must be in actual contact or have a border in
common with the wheelchair space;
however, at least one of the additional seats
should be immediately adjacent to the
wheelchair space. The Department
recognizes that it will often be necessary to
use vacant wheelchair spaces to provide for
contiguous seating.
The Department has added paragraphs
(4)(ii) and (4)(iii) to clarify that in situations
where there are insufficient unsold seats to
provide three additional contiguous seats per
wheelchair space or a ticket office restricts
sales of tickets to a particular event to less
than four tickets per customer, the obligation
to make available three additional contiguous
seats per wheelchair space would be affected.
For example, if at the time of purchase, there
are only two additional contiguous seats
available for purchase because the third has
been sold already, then the ticket purchaser
would be entitled to two such seats. In this
situation, the public entity would be required
to make up the difference by offering one
additional ticket for sale that is as close as
possible to the accessible seats. Likewise, if
ticket purchases for an event are limited to
two per customer, a person who uses a
wheelchair who seeks to purchase tickets
would be entitled to purchase only one
additional contiguous seat for the event.
The Department has also added paragraph
(4)(iv) to clarify that the requirement for three
additional contiguous seats is not intended to
serve as a cap if the maximum number of
tickets that may be purchased by members of
the general public exceeds the four tickets an
individual with a disability ordinarily would
be allowed to purchase (i.e., a wheelchair
space and three additional contiguous seats).
If the maximum number of tickets that may
be purchased by members of the general
public exceeds four, an individual with a
disability is to be allowed to purchase the
maximum number of tickets; however,
additional tickets purchased by an individual
with a disability beyond the wheelchair
space and the three additional contiguous
seats provided in § 36.302(f)(4)(i) do not have
to be contiguous with the wheelchair space.
PO 00000
Frm 00115
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56277
The NPRM proposed at § 36.302(f)(9)(ii)
that for group sales, if a group includes one
or more individuals who use a wheelchair,
then the group shall be placed in a seating
area with accessible seating so that, if
possible, the group can sit together. If it is
necessary to divide the group, it should be
divided so that the individuals in the group
who use wheelchairs are not isolated from
the rest of the members of their group. The
final rule retains the NPRM language in
paragraph (4)(v).
Hold and release of unsold accessible
seating. The Department recognizes that not
all accessible seating will be sold in all
assembly areas for every event to individuals
with disabilities who need such seating and
that public accommodations may have
opportunities to sell such seating to the
general public. The Department proposed in
the NPRM a provision aimed at striking a
balance between affording individuals with
disabilities adequate time to purchase
accessible seating and the entity’s desire to
maximize ticket sales. In the NPRM, the
Department proposed § 36.302(f)(6), which
allowed for the release of accessible seating
under the following circumstances: (i) When
all seating in the facility has been sold,
excluding luxury boxes, club boxes, or suites;
(ii) when all seating in a designated area has
been sold and the accessible seating being
released is in the same area; or (iii) when all
seating in a designated price range has been
sold and the accessible seating being released
is within the same price range.
The Department’s NPRM asked ‘‘whether
additional regulatory guidance is required or
appropriate in terms of a more detailed or set
schedule for the release of tickets in
conjunction with the three approaches
described above. For example, does the
proposed regulation address the variable
needs of assembly areas covered by the ADA?
Is additional regulatory guidance required to
eliminate discriminatory policies, practices
and procedures related to the sale, hold, and
release of accessible seating? What
considerations should appropriately inform
the determination of when unsold accessible
seating can be released to the general
public?’’ 73 FR 34508, 34527 (June 17, 2008).
The Department received comments both
supporting and opposing the inclusion of a
hold-and-release provision. One side
proposed loosening the restrictions on the
release of unsold accessible seating. One
commenter from a trade association
suggested that tickets should be released
regardless of whether there is a sell-out, and
that these tickets should be released
according to a set schedule. Conversely,
numerous individuals, advocacy groups, and
at least one public entity urged the
Department to tighten the conditions under
which unsold tickets for accessible seating
may be released. These commenters
suggested that venues should not be
permitted to release tickets during the first
two weeks of sale, or alternatively, that they
should not be permitted to be released earlier
than 48 hours before a sold-out event. Many
of these commenters criticized the release of
accessible seating under the second and third
prongs of § 36.302(f)(6) in the NPRM (when
there is a sell-out in general seating in a
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56278
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
designated seating area or in a price range),
arguing that it would create situations where
general seating would be available for
purchase while accessible seating would not
be.
Numerous commenters—both from the
industry and from advocacy groups—asked
for clarification of the term ‘‘sell-out.’’
Business groups commented that industry
practice is to declare a sell-out when there
are only ‘‘scattered singles’’ available—
isolated seats that cannot be purchased as a
set of adjacent pairs. Many of those same
commenters also requested that ‘‘sell-out’’ be
qualified with the phrase ‘‘of all seating
available for sale’’ since it is industry practice
to hold back from release tickets to be used
for groups connected with that event (e.g.,
the promoter, home team, or sports league).
They argued that those tickets are not
available for sale and any return of these
tickets to the general inventory happens close
to the event date. Noting the practice of
holding back tickets, one advocacy group
suggested that covered entities be required to
hold back accessible seating in proportion to
the number of tickets that are held back for
later release.
The Department has concluded that it
would be inappropriate to interfere with
industry practice by defining what
constitutes a ‘‘sell-out’’ and that a public
accommodation should continue to use its
own approach to defining a ‘‘sell-out.’’ If,
however, a public accommodation declares a
sell-out by reference to those seats that are
available for sale, but it holds back tickets
that it reasonably anticipates will be released
later, it must hold back a proportional
percentage of accessible seating to be
released as well.
Adopting any of the alternatives proposed
in the comments summarized above would
have upset the balance between protecting
the rights of individuals with disabilities and
meeting venues’ concerns about lost revenue
from unsold accessible seating. As a result,
the Department has retained § 36.302(f)(6)
renumbered as § 36.302(f)(5) in the final rule.
The Department has, however, modified the
regulation text to specify that accessible
seating may be released only when ‘‘all nonaccessible tickets in a designated seating area
have been sold and the tickets for accessible
seating are being released in the same
designated area.’’ As stated in the NPRM, the
Department intended for this provision to
allow, for example, the release of accessible
seating at the orchestra level when all other
seating at the orchestra level is sold. The
Department has added this language to the
final rule at § 36.302(f)(5)(B) to clarify that
venues cannot designate or redesignate
seating areas for the purpose of maximizing
the release of unsold accessible seating. So,
for example, a venue may not determine on
an ad hoc basis that a group of seats at the
orchestra level is a designated seating area in
order to release unsold accessible seating in
that area.
The Department also has maintained the
hold-and-release provisions that appeared in
the NPRM, but has added a provision to
address the release of accessible seating for
series-of-events tickets on a series-of-events
basis. Many commenters asked the
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
Department whether unsold accessible
seating may be converted to general seating
and released to the general public on a
season-ticket basis or longer when tickets
typically are sold as a season-ticket package
or other long-term basis. Several disability
rights organizations and individual
commenters argued that such a practice
should not be permitted, and, if it were, that
conditions should be imposed to ensure that
individuals with disabilities have future
access to those seats.
The Department interprets the fundamental
principle of the ADA as a requirement to give
individuals with disabilities equal, not better,
access to those opportunities available to the
general public. Thus, for example, a public
accommodation that sells out its facility on
a season-ticket only basis is not required to
leave unsold its accessible seating if no
persons with disabilities purchase those
season-ticket seats. Of course, public
accommodations may choose to go beyond
what is required by reserving accessible
seating for individuals with disabilities (or
releasing such seats for sale to the general
public) on an individual-game basis.
If a covered entity chooses to release
unsold accessible seating for sale on a
season-ticket or other long-term basis, it must
meet at least two conditions. Under
§ 36.302(f)(5)(iii) of the final rule, public
accommodations must leave flexibility for
game-day change-outs to accommodate ticket
transfers on the secondary market. And
public accommodations must modify their
ticketing policies so that, in future years,
individuals with disabilities will have the
ability to purchase accessible seating on the
same basis as other patrons (e.g., as season
tickets). Put differently, releasing accessible
seating to the general public on a seasonticket or other long-term basis cannot result
in that seating being lost to individuals with
disabilities in perpetuity. If, in future years,
season tickets become available and persons
with disabilities have reached the top of the
waiting list or have met any other eligibility
criteria for season ticket purchases, public
accommodations must ensure that accessible
seating will be made available to the eligible
individuals. In order to accomplish this, the
Department has added § 36.302(f)(5)(iii)(A) to
require public accommodations that release
accessible season tickets to individuals who
do not have disabilities that require the
features of accessible seating to establish a
process to prevent the automatic
reassignment of such ticket holders to
accessible seating. For example, a public
accommodation could have in place a system
whereby accessible seating that was released
because it was not purchased by individuals
with disabilities is not in the pool of tickets
available for purchase for the following
season unless and until the conditions for
ticket release have been satisfied in the
following season. Alternatively, a public
accommodation might release tickets for
accessible seating only when a purchaser
who does not need its features agrees that he
or she has no guarantee of or right to the
same seats in the following season, or that if
season tickets are guaranteed for the
following season, the purchaser agrees that
the offer to purchase tickets is limited to non-
PO 00000
Frm 00116
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
accessible seats with, to the extent
practicable, comparable price, view, and
amenities to the accessible seats such
individuals held in the prior year. The
Department is aware that this rule may
require some administrative changes but
believes that this process will not create
undue financial and administrative burdens.
The Department believes that this approach
is balanced and beneficial. It will allow
public accommodations to sell all of their
seats and will leave open the possibility, in
future seasons or series of events, that
persons who need accessible seating may
have access to it.
The Department also has added
§ 36.302(f)(5)(iii)(B) to address how season
tickets or series-of-events tickets that have
attached ownership rights should be handled
if the ownership right returns to the public
accommodation (e.g., when holders forfeit
their ownership right by failing to purchase
season tickets or sell their ownership right
back to a public accommodation). If the
ownership right is for accessible seating, the
public accommodation is required to adopt a
process that allows an eligible individual
with a disability who requires the features of
such seating to purchase the rights and
tickets for such seating.
Nothing in the regulatory text prevents a
public accommodation from establishing a
process whereby such ticket holders agree to
be voluntarily reassigned from accessible
seating to another seating area so that
individuals with mobility disabilities or
disabilities that require the features of
accessible seating and who become newly
eligible to purchase season tickets have an
opportunity to do so. For example, a public
accommodation might seek volunteers to
relocate to another location that is at least as
good in terms of its location, price, and
amenities or a public accommodation might
use a seat with forfeited ownership rights as
an inducement to get a ticket holder to give
up accessible seating he or she does not need.
Ticket transfer. The Department received
many comments asking whether accessible
seating has the same transfer rights as general
seats. The proposed regulation at
§ 36.302(f)(5) required that individuals with
disabilities must be allowed to purchase
season tickets for accessible seating on the
same terms and conditions as individuals
purchasing season tickets for general seating,
including the right—if it exists for other
ticket-holders—to transfer individual tickets
to friends or associates. Some commenters
pointed out that the NPRM proposed
explicitly allowing individuals with
disabilities holding season tickets to transfer
tickets but did not address the transfer of
tickets purchased for individual events.
Several commenters representing assembly
areas argued that persons with disabilities
holding tickets for an individual event
should not be allowed to sell or transfer them
to third parties because such ticket transfers
would increase the risk of fraud or would
make unclear the obligation of the entity to
accommodate secondary ticket transfers.
They argued that individuals holding
accessible seating should either be required
to transfer their tickets to another individual
with a disability or return them to the facility
for a refund.
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
Although the Department is sympathetic to
concerns about administrative burden,
curtailing transfer rights for accessible
seating when other ticket holders are
permitted to transfer tickets would be
inconsistent with the ADA’s guiding
principle that individuals with disabilities
must have rights equal to others. Thus, the
Department has added language in the final
rule in § 36.302(f)(6) that requires that
individuals with disabilities holding
accessible seating for any event have the
same transfer rights accorded other ticket
holders for that event. Section 36.302(f)(6)
also preserves the rights of individuals with
disabilities who hold tickets to accessible
seats for a series of events to transfer
individual tickets to others, regardless of
whether the transferee needs accessible
seating. This approach recognizes the
common practice of individuals splitting
season tickets or other multi-event ticket
packages with friends, colleagues, or other
spectators to make the purchase of season
tickets affordable; individuals with
disabilities should not be placed in the
burdensome position of having to find
another individual with a disability with
whom to share the package.
This provision, however, does not require
public accommodations to seat an individual
who holds a ticket to an accessible seat in
such seating if the individual does not need
the accessible features of the seat. A public
accommodation may reserve the right to
switch these individuals to different seats if
they are available, but a public
accommodation is not required to remove a
person without a disability who is using
accessible seating from that seating, even if
a person who uses a wheelchair shows up
with a ticket from the secondary market for
a non-accessible seat and wants accessible
seating.
Secondary ticket market. Section
36.302(f)(7) is a new provision in the final
rule that requires a public accommodation to
modify its policies, practices, or procedures
to ensure that an individual with a disability,
who acquires a ticket in the secondary ticket
market, may use that ticket under the same
terms and conditions as other ticket holders
who acquire a ticket in the secondary market
for an event or series of events. This
principle was discussed in the NPRM in
connection with § 36.302(f)(5), pertaining to
season-ticket sales. There, the Department
asked for public comment regarding a public
accommodation’s proposed obligation to
accommodate the transfer of accessible
seating tickets on the secondary ticket market
to those who do not need accessible seating
and vice versa.
The secondary ticket market, for the
purposes of this rule, broadly means any
transfer of tickets after the public
accommodation’s initial sale of tickets to
individuals or entities. It thus encompasses
a wide variety of transactions, from ticket
transfers between friends to transfers using
commercial exchange systems. Many
commenters noted that the distinction
between the primary and secondary ticket
market has become blurred as a result of
agreements between teams, leagues, and
secondary market sellers. These commenters
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
noted that the secondary market may operate
independently of the public accommodation,
and parts of the secondary market, such as
ticket transfers between friends, undoubtedly
are outside the direct jurisdiction of the
public accommodation. To the extent that
venues seat persons who have purchased
tickets on the secondary market, they must
similarly seat persons with disabilities who
have purchased tickets on the secondary
market. In addition, some public
accommodations may acquire ADA
obligations directly by formally entering the
secondary ticket market.
The Department’s enforcement experience
with assembly areas also has revealed that
venues regularly provide for and make lastminute seat transfers. As long as there are
vacant wheelchair spaces, requiring venues
to provide wheelchair spaces for patrons who
acquired inaccessible seats and need
wheelchair spaces is an example of a
reasonable modification of a policy under
title III of the ADA. Similarly, a person who
has a ticket for a wheelchair space but who
does not require its accessible features could
be offered non-accessible seating if such
seating is available.
The Department’s longstanding position
that title III of the ADA requires venues to
make reasonable modifications in their
policies to allow individuals with disabilities
who acquired non-accessible tickets on the
secondary ticket market to be seated in
accessible seating, where such seating is
vacant, is supported by the only Federal
court to address this issue. See Independent
Living Resources v. Oregon Arena Corp., 1 F.
Supp. 2d 1159, 1171 (D. Or. 1998). The
Department has incorporated this position
into the final rule at § 36.302(f)(7)(ii).
The NPRM contained two questions aimed
at gauging concern with the Department’s
consideration of secondary ticket market
sales. The first question asked whether a
secondary purchaser who does not have a
disability and who buys an accessible seat
should be required to move if the space is
needed for someone with a disability.
Many disability rights advocates answered
that the individual should move provided
that there is a seat of comparable or better
quality available for him and his companion.
Some venues, however, expressed concerns
about this provision, and asked how they are
to identify who should be moved and what
obligations apply if there are no seats
available that are equivalent or better in
quality.
The Department’s second question asked
whether there are particular concerns about
the obligation to provide accessible seating,
including a wheelchair space, to an
individual with a disability who purchases
an inaccessible seat through the secondary
market.
Industry commenters contended that this
requirement would create a ‘‘logistical
nightmare,’’ with venues scrambling to reseat
patrons in the short time between the
opening of the venues’ doors and the
commencement of the event. Furthermore,
they argued that they might not be able to
reseat all individuals and that even if they
were able to do so, patrons might be moved
to inferior seats (whether in accessible or
PO 00000
Frm 00117
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56279
non-accessible seating). These commenters
also were concerned that they would be sued
by patrons moved under such circumstances.
These commenters seem to have
misconstrued the rule. Covered entities are
not required to seat every person who
acquires a ticket for inaccessible seating but
needs accessible seating, and are not required
to move any individual who acquires a ticket
for accessible seating but does not need it.
Covered entities that allow patrons to buy
and sell tickets on the secondary market must
make reasonable modifications to their
policies to allow persons with disabilities to
participate in secondary ticket transfers. The
Department believes that there is no one-sizefits-all rule that will suit all assembly areas.
In those circumstances where a venue has
accessible seating vacant at the time an
individual with a disability who needs
accessible seating presents his ticket for
inaccessible seating at the box office, the
venue must allow the individual to exchange
his ticket for an accessible seat in a
comparable location if such an accessible
seat is vacant. Where, however, a venue has
sold all of its accessible seating, the venue
has no obligation to provide accessible
seating to the person with a disability who
purchased an inaccessible seat on the
secondary market. Venues may encourage
individuals with disabilities who hold tickets
for inaccessible seating to contact the box
office before the event to notify them of their
need for accessible seating, even though they
may not require ticketholders to provide such
notice.
The Department notes that public
accommodations are permitted, though not
required, to adopt policies regarding moving
patrons who do not need the features of an
accessible seat. If a public accommodation
chooses to do so, it might mitigate
administrative concerns by marking tickets
for accessible seating as such, and printing
on the ticket that individuals who purchase
such seats but who do not need accessible
seating are subject to being moved to other
seats in the facility if the accessible seating
is required for an individual with a
disability. Such a venue might also develop
and publish a ticketing policy to provide
transparency to the general public and to put
holders of tickets for accessible seating who
do not require it on notice that they may be
moved.
Prevention of fraud in purchase of
accessible seating. Assembly area managers
and advocacy groups have informed the
Department that the fraudulent purchase of
accessible seating is a pressing concern.
Curbing fraud is a goal that public
accommodations and individuals with
disabilities share. Steps taken to prevent
fraud, however, must be balanced carefully
against the privacy rights of individuals with
disabilities. Such measures also must not
impose burdensome requirements upon, nor
restrict the rights of, individuals with
disabilities.
In the NPRM, the Department struck a
balance between these competing concerns
by proposing § 36.302(f)(8), which prohibited
public accommodations from asking for proof
of disability before the purchase of accessible
seating but provided guidance in two
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56280
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
paragraphs on appropriate measures for
curbing fraud. Paragraph (i) proposed
allowing a public accommodation to ask
individuals purchasing single-event tickets
for accessible seating whether they are
wheelchair users. Paragraph (ii) proposed
allowing a public accommodation to require
individuals purchasing accessible seating for
season tickets or other multi-event ticket
packages to attest in writing that the
accessible seating is for a wheelchair user.
Additionally, the NPRM proposed to permit
venues, when they have good cause to
believe that an individual has fraudulently
purchased accessible seating, to investigate
that individual.
Several commenters objected to this rule
on the ground that it would require a
wheelchair user to be the purchaser of
tickets. The Department has reworded this
paragraph to reflect that the individual with
a disability does not have to be the ticket
purchaser. The final rule allows third parties
to purchase accessible tickets at the request
of an individual with a disability.
Commenters also argued that other
individuals with disabilities who do not use
wheelchairs should be permitted to purchase
accessible seating. Some individuals with
disabilities who do not use wheelchairs
urged the Department to change the rule,
asserting that they, too, need accessible
seating. The Department agrees that such
seating, although designed for use by a
wheelchair user, may be used by nonwheelchair users, if those persons are
persons with a disability who need to use
accessible seating because of a mobility
disability or because their disability requires
the use of the features that accessible seating
provides (e.g., individuals who cannot bend
their legs because of braces, or individuals
who, because of their disability, cannot sit in
a straight-back chair).
Some commenters raised concerns that
allowing venues to ask questions to
determine whether individuals purchasing
accessible seating are doing so legitimately
would burden individuals with disabilities in
the purchase of accessible seating. The
Department has retained the substance of this
provision in § 36.302(f)(8) of the final rule,
but emphasizes that such questions should
be asked at the initial time of purchase. For
example, if the method of purchase is via the
Internet, then the question(s) should be
answered by clicking a yes or no box during
the transaction. The public accommodation
may warn purchasers that accessible seating
is for individuals with disabilities and that
individuals purchasing such tickets
fraudulently are subject to relocation.
One commenter argued that face-to-face
contact between the venue and the ticket
holder should be required in order to prevent
fraud and suggested that individuals who
purchase accessible seating should be
required to pick up their tickets at the box
office and then enter the venue immediately.
The Department has declined to adopt that
suggestion. It would be discriminatory to
require individuals with disabilities to pick
up tickets at the box office when other
spectators are not required to do so. If the
assembly area wishes to make face-to-face
contact with accessible seating ticket holders
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
to curb fraud, it may do so through its ushers
and other customer service personnel located
within the seating area.
Some commenters asked whether it is
permissible for assembly areas to have
voluntary clubs where individuals with
disabilities self-identify to the public
accommodation in order to become a member
of a club that entitles them to purchase
accessible seating reserved for club members
or otherwise receive priority in purchasing
accessible seating. The Department agrees
that such clubs are permissible, provided that
a reasonable amount of accessible seating
remains available at all prices and dispersed
at all locations for individuals with
disabilities who are non-members.
Section 36.303 Auxiliary Aids and Services
Section 36.303(a) of the 1991 title III
regulation requires a public accommodation
to take such steps as may be necessary to
ensure that no individual with a disability is
excluded, denied services, segregated, or
otherwise treated differently than other
individuals because of the absence of
auxiliary aids and services, unless the public
accommodation can demonstrate that taking
such steps would fundamentally alter the
nature of the goods, services, facilities,
advantages, or accommodations being offered
or would result in an undue burden. Implicit
in this duty to provide auxiliary aids and
services is the underlying obligation of a
public accommodation to communicate
effectively with customers, clients, patients,
companions, or participants who have
disabilities affecting hearing, vision, or
speech. The Department notes that
§ 36.303(a) does not require public
accommodations to provide assistance to
individuals with disabilities that is unrelated
to effective communication, although
requests for such assistance may be otherwise
subject to the reasonable modifications or
barrier removal requirements.
The Department has investigated hundreds
of complaints alleging that public
accommodations have failed to provide
effective communication, and many of these
investigations have resulted in settlement
agreements and consent decrees. During the
course of these investigations, the
Department has determined that public
accommodations sometimes misunderstand
the scope of their obligations under the
statute and the regulation. Section 36.303 in
the final rule codifies the Department’s
longstanding policies in this area, and
includes provisions based on technological
advances and breakthroughs in the area of
auxiliary aids and services that have
occurred since the 1991 title III regulation
was published.
Video remote interpreting (VRI). Section
36.303(b)(1) sets out examples of auxiliary
aids and services. In the NPRM, the
Department proposed adding video remote
services (hereafter referred to as ‘‘video
remote interpreting’’ or ‘‘VRI’’) and the
exchange of written notes among the
examples. The Department also proposed
amending the provision to reflect
technological advances, such as the wide
availability of real-time capability in
transcription services and captioning.
PO 00000
Frm 00118
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
VRI is defined in the final rule at § 36.104
as ‘‘an interpreting service that uses video
conference technology over dedicated lines
or wireless technology offering high-speed,
wide-bandwidth video connection or
wireless connection that delivers highquality video images as provided in
§ 36.303(f).’’ The Department notes that VRI
generally consists of a videophone, monitors,
cameras, a high-speed video connection, and
an interpreter provided by the public
accommodation pursuant to a contract for
services. The term’s inclusion within the
definition of ‘‘qualified interpreter’’ makes
clear that a public accommodation’s use of
VRI satisfies its title III obligations only
where VRI affords effective communication.
Comments from advocates and persons with
disabilities expressed concern that VRI may
not always provide effective communication,
especially in hospitals and emergency rooms.
Examples were provided of patients who are
unable to see the video monitor because they
are semi-conscious or unable to focus on the
video screen; other examples were given of
cases where the video monitor is out of the
sightline of the patient or the image is out of
focus; still other examples were given of
patients who cannot see the screen because
the signal is interrupted, causing unnatural
pauses in communication, or the image is
grainy or otherwise unclear. Many
commenters requested more explicit
guidelines on the use of VRI, and some
recommended requirements for equipment
maintenance, dedicated high-speed, widebandwidth video connections, and training of
staff using VRI, especially in hospital and
health care situations. Several major
organizations requested a requirement to
include the interpreter’s face, head, arms,
hands, and eyes in all transmissions.
The Department has determined that VRI
can be an effective method of providing
interpreting service in certain situations,
particularly when a live interpreter cannot be
immediately on the scene. To ensure that VRI
is effective, the Department has established
performance standards for VRI in § 36.303(f).
The Department recognizes that reliance on
VRI may not be effective in certain situations,
such as those involving the exchange of
complex information or involving multiple
parties, and for some individuals, such as for
persons who are deaf-blind, and using VRI in
those circumstances would not satisfy a
public accommodation’s obligation to
provide effective communication.
Comments from several disability advocacy
organizations and individuals discouraged
the Department from adding the exchange of
written notes to the list of available auxiliary
aids in § 36.303(b). The Department
consistently has recognized that the exchange
of written notes may provide effective
communication in certain contexts. The
NPRM proposed adding an explicit reference
to written notes because some title III entities
do not understand that exchange of written
notes using paper and pencil may be an
available option in some circumstances.
Advocates and persons with disabilities
requested explicit limits on the use of written
notes as a form of auxiliary aid because, they
argued, most exchanges are not simple, and
handwritten notes do not afford effective
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
communication. One major advocacy
organization, for example, noted that the
speed at which individuals communicate
orally or use sign language averages about
200 words per minute or more, and thus, the
exchange of notes may provide only
truncated or incomplete communication. For
persons whose primary language is American
Sign Language (ASL), some commenters
pointed out, using written English in
exchange of notes often is ineffective because
ASL syntax and vocabulary is dissimilar from
English. By contrast, some commenters from
professional medical associations sought
more specific guidance on when notes are
allowed, especially in the context of medical
offices and health care situations.
Exchange of notes likely will be effective
in situations that do not involve substantial
conversation, for example, when blood is
drawn for routine lab tests or regular allergy
shots are administered. However, interpreters
should be used when the matter involves
more complexity, such as in communication
of medical history or diagnoses, in
conversations about medical procedures and
treatment decisions, or in communication of
instructions for care at home or elsewhere.
The Department discussed in the NPRM the
kinds of situations in which use of
interpreters or captioning is necessary.
Additional guidance on this issue can be
found in a number of agreements entered into
with health care providers and hospitals that
are available on the Department’s Web site at
https://www.ada.gov.
In addition, commenters requested that the
Department include ‘‘real-time’’ before any
mention of ‘‘computer-aided’’ or ‘‘captioning’’
technology to highlight the value of
simultaneous translation of any
communication. The Department has added
to the final rule appropriate references to
‘‘real-time’’ to recognize this aspect of
effective communication. Lastly, in this
provision and elsewhere in the title III
regulation, the Department has replaced the
term ‘‘telecommunications devices for deaf
persons (TDD)’’ with ‘‘text telephones
(TTYs).’’ As noted in the NPRM, TTY has
become the commonly accepted term and is
consistent with the terminology used by the
Access Board in the 2004 ADAAG.
Comments from advocates and persons with
disabilities expressed approval of the
substitution of TTY for TDD in the proposed
regulation, but expressed the view that the
Department should expand the definition to
‘‘voice, text, and video-based
telecommunications products and systems,
including TTY’s, videophones, and
captioned telephones, or equally effective
telecommunications systems.’’ The
Department has expanded its definition of
‘‘auxiliary aids and services’’ in § 36.303 to
include those examples in the final rule.
Other additions proposed in the NPRM, and
retained in the final rule, include Brailled
materials and displays, screen reader
software, magnification software, optical
readers, secondary auditory programs (SAP),
and accessible electronic and information
technology.
As the Department noted in the preamble
to the NPRM, the list of auxiliary aids in
§ 36.303(b) is merely illustrative. The
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
Department does not intend that every public
accommodation covered by title III must have
access to every device or all new technology
at all times, as long as the communication
provided is effective.
Companions who are individuals with
disabilities. The Department has added
several new provisions to § 36.303(c), but
these provisions do not impose new
obligations on places of public
accommodation. Rather, these provisions
simply codify the Department’s longstanding
positions. Section 36.303(c)(1) now states
that ‘‘[a] public accommodation shall furnish
appropriate auxiliary aids and services where
necessary to ensure effective communication
with individuals with disabilities. This
includes an obligation to provide effective
communication to companions who are
individuals with disabilities.’’ Section
36.303(c)(1)(i) defines ‘‘companion’’ as ‘‘a
family member, friend, or associate of an
individual seeking access to, or participating
in, the goods, services, facilities, privileges,
advantages, or accommodations of a public
accommodation, who, along with such
individual, is an appropriate person with
whom the public accommodation should
communicate.’’
This provision makes clear that if the
companion is someone with whom the
public accommodation normally would or
should communicate, then the public
accommodation must provide appropriate
auxiliary aids and services to that companion
to ensure effective communication with the
companion. This commonsense rule provides
the necessary guidance to public
accommodations to implement properly the
nondiscrimination requirements of the ADA.
Commenters also questioned why, in the
NPRM, the Department defined companion
as ‘‘a family member, friend, or associate of
a program participant * * *,’’ noting that the
scope of a public accommodation’s obligation
is not limited to ‘‘program participants’’ but
rather includes all individuals seeking access
to, or participating in, the goods, services,
facilities, privileges, advantages, or
accommodations of the public
accommodation. 73 FR 34508, 34554 (June
17, 2008). The Department agrees and has
amended the regulatory language
accordingly. Many commenters supported
inclusion of companions in the rule and
requested that the Department clarify that a
companion with a disability may be entitled
to effective communication from the public
accommodation, even though the individual
seeking access to, or participating in, the
goods, services, facilities, privileges,
advantages, or accommodations of the public
accommodation is not an individual with a
disability. Some commenters asked the
Department to make clear that if the
individual seeking access to or participating
in the public accommodation’s program or
services is an individual with a disability and
the companion is not, the public
accommodation may not limit its
communication to the companion, instead of
communicating directly with the individual
with a disability, when it would otherwise be
appropriate to communicate with the
individual with the disability.
Most entities and individuals from the
medical field objected to the Department’s
PO 00000
Frm 00119
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56281
proposal, suggesting that medical and health
care providers, and they alone, should
determine to whom medical information
should be communicated and when auxiliary
aids and services should be provided to
companions. Others asked that the
Department limit the public
accommodation’s obligation to communicate
effectively with a companion to situations
where such communication is necessary to
serve the interests of the person who is
receiving the public accommodation’s
services. It also was suggested that
companions should receive auxiliary aids
and services only when necessary to ensure
effective communication with the person
receiving the public accommodation’s
services, with an emphasis on the particular
needs of the patient requiring assistance, not
the patient’s family or guardian.
Some in the medical community objected
to the inclusion of any regulatory language
regarding companions, asserting that such
language is overbroad, seeks services for
individuals whose presence is neither
required by the public accommodation nor
necessary for the delivery of the services or
good, places additional burdens on the
medical community, and represents an
uncompensated mandate. One medical
association commenter stated that such a
mandate was particularly burdensome in
situations where a patient is fully and legally
capable of participating in the decisionmaking process and needs little or no
assistance in obtaining care and following
through on physician’s instructions.
The final rule codifies the Department’s
longstanding interpretation of the ADA, and
clarifies that public accommodations have
effective communication obligations with
respect to companions who are individuals
with disabilities even where the individual
seeking to participate in or benefit from what
a public accommodation offers does not have
a disability. There are many instances in
which such an individual may not be an
individual with a disability but his or her
companion is an individual with a disability.
The effective communication requirement
applies equally to that companion.
Effective communication with companions
is particularly critical in health care settings
where miscommunication may lead to
misdiagnosis and improper or delayed
medical treatment. The Department has
encountered confusion and reluctance by
medical care providers regarding the scope of
their obligation with respect to such
companions. Effective communication with a
companion is necessary in a variety of
circumstances. For example, a companion
may be legally authorized to make health
care decisions on behalf of the patient or may
need to help the patient with information or
instructions given by hospital personnel. In
addition, a companion may be the patient’s
next of kin or health care surrogate with
whom hospital personnel need to
communicate concerning the patient’s
medical condition. Moreover, a companion
could be designated by the patient to
communicate with hospital personnel about
the patient’s symptoms, needs, condition, or
medical history. Furthermore, the companion
could be a family member with whom
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56282
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
hospital personnel normally would
communicate. It has been the Department’s
longstanding position that public
accommodations are required to provide
effective communication to companions
when they accompany patients to medical
care providers for treatment.
The individual with a disability does not
need to be present physically to trigger the
public accommodation’s obligation to
provide effective communication to a
companion. The controlling principle
regarding whether appropriate auxiliary aids
and services should be provided is whether
the companion is an appropriate person with
whom the public accommodation should
communicate. Examples of such situations
include back-to-school night or parentteacher conferences at a private school. If the
faculty writes on the board or otherwise
displays information in a visual context
during back-to-school night, this information
must be communicated effectively to parents
or guardians who are blind or have low
vision. At a parent-teacher conference, deaf
parents or guardians are to be provided with
appropriate auxiliary aids and service to
communicate effectively with the teacher and
administrators. Likewise, when a deaf spouse
attempts to communicate with private social
service agencies about the services necessary
for the hearing spouse, appropriate auxiliary
aids and services must be provided to the
deaf spouse by the public accommodation to
ensure effective communication.
One medical association sought approval
to impose a charge against an individual with
a disability, either the patient or the
companion, where that person had stated he
or she needed an interpreter for a scheduled
appointment, the medical provider had
arranged for an interpreter to appear, and
then the individual requiring the interpreter
did not show up for the scheduled
appointment. Section 36.301(c) of the 1991
title III regulation prohibits the imposition of
surcharges to cover the costs of necessary
auxiliary aids and services. As such, medical
providers cannot pass along to their patients
with disabilities the cost of obtaining an
interpreter, even in situations where the
individual cancels his or her appointment at
the last minute or is a ‘‘no-show’’ for the
scheduled appointment. The medical
provider, however, may charge for the missed
appointment if all other patients are subject
to such a charge in the same circumstances.
Determining appropriate auxiliary aids.
The type of auxiliary aid the public
accommodation provides is dependent on
which auxiliary aid is appropriate under the
particular circumstances. Section
36.303(c)(1)(ii) codifies the Department’s
longstanding interpretation that the type of
auxiliary aid or service necessary to ensure
effective communication will vary in
accordance with the method of
communication used by the individual; the
nature, length, and complexity of the
communication involved; and the context in
which the communication is taking place. As
the Department explained in the NPRM, this
provision lists factors the public
accommodation should consider in
determining which type of auxiliary aids and
services are necessary. For example, an
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
individual with a disability who is deaf or
hard of hearing may need a qualified
interpreter to discuss with hospital personnel
a diagnosis, procedures, tests, treatment
options, surgery, or prescribed medication
(e.g., dosage, side effects, drug interactions,
etc.). In comparison, an individual who is
deaf or hard of hearing who purchases an
item in the hospital gift shop may need only
an exchange of written notes to achieve
effective communication.
The language in the first sentence of
§ 36.303(c)(1)(ii) is derived from the
Department’s Technical Assistance Manual.
See Department of Justice, Americans with
Disabilities Act, ADA Title III Technical
Assistance Manual Covering Public
Accommodations and Commercial Facilities,
III–4.3200, available at https://www.ada.gov/
taman3.html. There were few comments
regarding inclusion of this policy in the
regulation itself, and those received were
positive.
Many advocacy groups, particularly those
representing blind individuals and those
with low vision, urged the Department to add
language in the final rule requiring the
provision of accessible material in a manner
that is timely, accurate, and private. This,
they argued, would be especially important
with regard to billing information, other
time-sensitive material, or confidential
information. The Department has added a
provision in § 36.303(c)(1)(ii) stating that in
‘‘order to be effective, auxiliary aids and
services must be provided in accessible
formats, in a timely manner, and in such a
way so as to protect the privacy and
independence of the individual with a
disability.’’
The second sentence of § 36.303(c)(1)(ii)
states that ‘‘[a] public accommodation should
consult with individuals with disabilities
whenever possible to determine what type of
auxiliary aid is needed to ensure effective
communication, but the ultimate decision as
to what measures to take rests with the
public accommodation, provided that the
method chosen results in effective
communication.’’ Many commenters urged
the Department to amend this provision to
require public accommodations to give
primary consideration to the expressed
choice of an individual with a disability.
However, as the Department explained when
it initially promulgated the 1991 title III
regulation, the Department believes that
Congress did not intend under title III to
impose upon a public accommodation the
requirement that it give primary
consideration to the request of the individual
with a disability. See 28 CFR part 36, app.
B at 726 (2009). The legislative history does,
however, demonstrate congressional intent to
strongly encourage consulting with persons
with disabilities. Id. As the Department
explained in the 1991 preamble, ‘‘the House
Education and Labor Committee stated that it
‘expects’ that ‘public accommodation(s) will
consult with the individual with a disability
before providing a particular auxiliary aid or
service.’ (Education and Labor report at
107).’’ Id.
The commenters who urged that primary
consideration be given to the individual with
a disability noted, for example, that a public
PO 00000
Frm 00120
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
accommodation would not provide effective
communication by using written notes where
the individual requiring an auxiliary aid is in
severe pain, or by providing a qualified ASL
interpreter when an individual needs an oral
interpreter instead. Both examples illustrate
the importance of consulting with the
individual with a disability in order to
ensure that the communication provided is
effective. When a public accommodation
ignores the communication needs of the
individual requiring an auxiliary aid or
service, it does so at its peril, for if the
communication provided is not effective, the
public accommodation will have violated
title III of the ADA.
Consequently, the regulation strongly
encourages the public accommodation to
engage in a dialogue with the individual with
a disability to determine what auxiliary aids
and services are appropriate under the
circumstances. This dialogue should include
a communication assessment of the
individual with a disability initially,
regularly, and as needed, because the
auxiliary aids and services necessary to
provide effective communication to the
individual may fluctuate. For example, a deaf
individual may go to a private community
health center with what is at first believed to
be a minor medical emergency, such as a sore
knee, and the individual with a disability
and the community health center both may
believe that exchanging written notes will be
effective; however, during that individual’s
visit, it may be determined that the
individual is, in fact, suffering from an
anterior cruciate ligament tear and must have
surgery to repair the torn ligament. As the
situation develops and the diagnosis and
recommended course of action evolve into
surgery, an interpreter likely will be
necessary. The community health center has
a continuing obligation to assess the auxiliary
aids and services it is providing, and should
consult with individuals with disabilities on
a continuing basis to assess what measures
are required to ensure effective
communication.
Similarly, the Department strongly
encourages public accommodations to keep
individuals with disabilities apprised of the
status of the expected arrival of an interpreter
or the delivery of other requested or
anticipated auxiliary aids and services. Also,
when the public accommodation decides not
to provide the auxiliary aids and services
requested by an individual with a disability,
the public accommodation should provide
that individual with the reason for its
decision.
Family members and friends as
interpreters. Section 36.303(c)(2), which was
proposed in the NPRM, has been included in
the final rule to make clear that a public
accommodation shall not require an
individual with a disability to bring another
individual to interpret for him or her. The
Department has added this regulatory
requirement to emphasize that when a public
accommodation is interacting with a person
with a disability, it is the public
accommodation’s responsibility to provide
an interpreter to ensure effective
communication. It is not appropriate to
require the person with a disability to bring
another individual to provide such services.
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
Many commenters supported inclusion of
this language in the new rule. A
representative from a cruise line association
opined, however, that if a guest chose to
cruise without an interpreter or companion,
the ship would not be compelled to provide
an interpreter for the medical facility. On the
contrary, when an individual with a
disability goes on a cruise, the cruise ship
has an obligation to provide effective
communication, including, if necessary, a
qualified interpreter as defined in the rule.
Some representatives of pediatricians
objected to this provision, stating that parents
of children with disabilities often know best
how to interpret their children’s needs and
health status and relay that information to
the child’s physician, and to remove that
parent, or add a stranger into the examining
room, may frighten children. These
commenters requested clarification in the
regulation that public accommodations
should permit parents, guardians, or
caregivers of children with disabilities to
accompany them in medical settings to
ensure effective communication. The
regulation does not prohibit parents,
guardians, or caregivers from being present or
providing effective communication for
children. Rather, it prohibits medical
professionals (and other public
accommodations) from requiring or forcing
individuals with disabilities to bring other
individuals with them to facilitate
communication so that the public
accommodation will not have to provide
appropriate auxiliary aids and services. The
public accommodation cannot avoid its
obligation to provide an interpreter except
under the circumstances described in
§ 36.303(c)(3)–(4).
A State medical association also objected
to this provision, opining that medical
providers should have the authority to ask
patients to bring someone with them to
provide interpreting services if the medical
provider determines that such a practice
would result in effective communication and
that patient privacy and confidentiality
would be maintained. While the public
accommodation has the obligation to
determine what type of auxiliary aids and
services are necessary to ensure effective
communication, it cannot unilaterally
determine whether the patient’s privacy and
confidentiality would be maintained.
Section 36.303(c)(3) of the final rule
codifies the Department’s position that there
are certain limited instances when a public
accommodation may rely on an
accompanying adult to interpret or facilitate
communication: (1) In an emergency
involving an imminent threat to the safety or
welfare of an individual or the public; or (2)
if the individual with a disability specifically
requests it, the accompanying adult agrees to
provide the assistance, and reliance on that
adult for this assistance is appropriate under
the circumstances. In such instances, the
public accommodation should first offer to
provide appropriate auxiliary aids and
services free of charge.
Commenters requested that the Department
make clear that the public accommodation
cannot request, rely on, or coerce an
accompanying adult to provide effective
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
communication for an individual with a
disability, and that only a voluntary offer of
assistance is acceptable. The Department
states unequivocally that consent of, and for,
the accompanying adult to facilitate
communication must be provided freely and
voluntarily both by the individual with a
disability and the accompanying adult—
absent an emergency involving an imminent
threat to the safety or welfare of an
individual or the public. The public
accommodation cannot coerce or attempt to
persuade another adult to provide effective
communication for the individual with a
disability.
Several commenters asked that the
Department make clear that children are not
to be used to provide effective
communication for family members and
friends and that it is the responsibility of the
public accommodation to provide effective
communication, stating that interpreters
often are needed in settings where it would
not be appropriate for children to be
interpreting, such as those involving medical
issues, domestic violence, or other situations
involving the exchange of confidential or
adult-related material. Children often are
hesitant to decline requests to provide
communication services, which puts them in
a very difficult position vis-a-vis family
members and friends. The Department
agrees. It is the Department’s position that a
public accommodation shall not rely on a
minor child to facilitate communication with
a family member, friend, or other individual
except in an emergency involving an
imminent threat to the safety or welfare of an
individual or the public where no interpreter
is available. Accordingly, the Department has
revised the rule to state that ‘‘[a] public
accommodation shall not rely on a minor
child to interpret or facilitate
communication, except in an emergency
involving an imminent threat to the safety or
welfare of an individual or the public where
there is no interpreter available.’’
§ 36.303(c)(4). Sections 36.303(c)(3) and (c)(4)
have no application in circumstances where
an interpreter would not otherwise be
required in order to provide effective
communication (e.g., in simple transactions
such as purchasing movie tickets at a
theater).
The Department stresses that privacy and
confidentiality must be maintained but notes
that covered entities, such as hospitals, that
are subject to the Privacy Rules, 45 CFR parts
160 and 164, of the Health Insurance
Portability and Accountability Act of 1996
(HIPAA), Public Law 104–191, are permitted
to disclose to a patient’s relative, close friend,
or any other person identified by the patient
(such as an interpreter) relevant patient
information if the patient agrees to such
disclosures. See 45 CFR parts 160 and 164.
The agreement need not be in writing.
Covered entities should consult the HIPAA
Privacy Rules regarding other ways
disclosures may be made to such persons.
With regard to emergency situations,
proposed § 36.303(c)(3) permitted reliance on
an individual accompanying an individual
with a disability to interpret or facilitate
communication in an emergency involving a
threat to the safety or welfare of an
PO 00000
Frm 00121
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56283
individual or the public. Commenters
requested that the Department make clear
that often a public accommodation can
obtain appropriate auxiliary aids and services
in advance of an emergency, particularly in
anticipated emergencies, such as predicted
dangerous weather, or in certain medical
situations, such as pending childbirth, by
making necessary pre-arrangements. These
commenters did not want public
accommodations to be relieved of their
responsibilities to provide effective
communication in emergency situations,
noting that the need for effective
communication in emergencies is
heightened. For the same reason, several
commenters requested a separate rule that
requires public accommodations to provide
timely and effective communication in the
event of an emergency.
One group of commenters asked that the
Department narrow the regulation permitting
reliance on a companion to interpret or
facilitate communication in emergency
situations so that it is not available to entities
with responsibilities for emergency
preparedness and response. Some
commenters noted that certain exigent
circumstances, such as those that exist
during and, perhaps, immediately after a
major hurricane, temporarily may excuse
public accommodations of their
responsibilities to provide effective
communication. However, they asked that
the Department clarify that these obligations
are ongoing, and that as soon as such
situations begin to abate or become
stabilized, the public accommodation must
provide effective communication.
The Department recognizes the need for
effective communication is critical in
emergency situations. After due
consideration of all of these concerns raised
by commenters, the Department has revised
§ 36.303(c) to narrow the exception
permitting reliance on individuals
accompanying the individual with a
disability during an emergency to make it
clear that it applies only to emergencies
involving an ‘‘imminent threat to the safety
or welfare of an individual or the public
* * *.’’ § 36.303(c)(3)–(4). The Department
wishes to emphasize, however, that
application of this exception is narrowly
tailored to emergencies involving an
imminent threat to the safety or welfare of
individuals or the public. Arguably, all visits
to an emergency room are by definition
emergencies. Likewise, an argument can be
made that most situations to which
emergency workers respond involve, in one
way or another, a threat to the safety or
welfare of an individual or the public. The
imminent threat exception in § 36.303(c)(3)–
(4) is not intended to apply to typical and
foreseeable emergency situations that are part
of the normal operations of these institutions.
As such, a public accommodation may rely
on an accompanying individual to interpret
or facilitate communication under the
§ 36.303(c)(3)–(4) imminent threat exception
only where there is a true emergency, i.e.,
where any delay in providing immediate
services to the individual could have lifealtering or life-ending consequences.
Telecommunications. In addition to the
changes discussed in § 36.303(b) regarding
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56284
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
telecommunications, telephones, and text
telephones, the Department has adopted
provisions in § 36.303(d) of the final rule
(which also were included in the NPRM)
requiring that public accommodations must
not disconnect or refuse to take calls from
FCC-approved telecommunications relay
systems, including Internet-based relay
systems. Commenters from some State
agencies, many advocacy organizations, and
individuals strongly urged the Department to
mandate such action because of the high
proportion of TTY calls and relay service
calls to title III entities that are not completed
because of phone systems or employees not
taking the calls. This refusal presents a
significant obstacle for persons using TTYs
who do business with public
accommodations and denies persons with
disabilities telephone access for business that
typically is handled over the telephone.
Section 36.303(d)(1)(ii) of the NPRM added
public telephones equipped with volume
control mechanisms and hearing aidcompatible telephones to the examples of
types of telephone equipment to be provided.
Commenters from the disability community
and from telecommunications relay service
providers argued that requirements for these
particular features on telephones are obsolete
not only because the deaf and hard of hearing
community uses video technology more
frequently than other types of
telecommunication, but also because all
public coin phones have been hearing aid
compatible since 1983, pursuant to the
Telecommunications for the Disabled Act of
1982, 47 U.S.C. 610. The Hearing Aid
Compatibility Act of 1988, 47 U.S.C. 610,
extended this requirement to all wireline
telephones imported into or manufactured in
the United States since 1989. In 1997, the
FCC further required that all such phones
also be equipped with volume control. See 47
CFR 68.6. Given these existing statutory
obligations, the proposed language is
unnecessary. Accordingly, the Department
has deleted that language from the final rule.
The Department understands that there are
many new devices and advances in
technology that should be included in the
definition of available auxiliary aids and is
including many of the telecommunications
devices and some new technology. While
much of this technology is not expensive and
should be available to most title III entities,
there may be legitimate reasons why in a
particular situation some of these new and
developing auxiliary aids may not be
available, may be prohibitively costly (thus
supporting an undue burden defense), or may
otherwise not be suitable given other
circumstances related to the particular
terrain, situation, or functionality in
specialized areas where security, among
other things, may be a factor limiting the
appropriateness of the use of a particular
technology or device. The Department
recognizes that the available new technology
may provide more effective communication
than existing technology and that providing
effective communication often will include
use of new technology and video relay
services, as well as interpreters. However, the
Department has not mandated that title III
entities make all technology or services
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
available upon demand in all situations.
When a public accommodation provides the
opportunity to make outgoing phone calls on
more than an incidental-convenience basis, it
shall make available accessible public
telephones, TTYs, or other
telecommunications products and systems
for use by an individual who is deaf or hard
of hearing, or has a speech impairment.
Video remote interpreting (VRI) services. In
§ 36.303(f) of the NPRM, the Department
proposed the inclusion of four performance
standards for VRI (which the NPRM termed
video interpreting services (VIS)), for
effective communication: (1) High-quality,
clear, real-time, full-motion video, and audio
over a dedicated high-speed Internet
connection; (2) a clear, sufficiently large, and
sharply delineated picture of the
participants’ heads, arms, hands, and fingers,
regardless of their body position; (3) clear
transmission of voices; and (4) persons who
are trained to set up and operate the VIS
quickly and efficiently.
Commenters generally approved of these
proposed performance standards, but
recommended that some additional standards
be included in the final rule. For persons
who are deaf with limited vision,
commenters requested that the Department
include an explicit requirement that
interpreters wear high-contrast clothing with
no patterns that might distract from their
hands as they are interpreting, so that a
person with limited vision could still see the
signs made by the interpreter. While the
Department reiterates the importance of such
practices in the delivery of effective VRI as
well as in-person interpreting, the
Department declines to adopt such
performance standards as part of this rule. In
general, professional interpreters already
follow such practices, as the Code of
Professional Conduct for interpreters
developed by the Registry of Interpreter for
the Deaf and the National Association of the
Deaf incorporates attire considerations into
their standards of professionalism and
conduct. Moreover, as a result of this code,
many VRI agencies have adopted detailed
dress standards that interpreters hired by the
agency must follow. Commenters also urged
explicit requirement of a clear image of the
face and eyes of the interpreter and others.
Because the face includes the eyes, the
Department has amended § 36.303(f)(2) of the
final rule to include a requirement that the
interpreter’s face be displayed. Other
commenters requested requirement of a
wide-bandwidth video connection for the
VRI system, and the Department has
included this requirement in § 36.303(f)(1) of
the final rule.
ATMs. The 2010 Standards set out detailed
requirements for ATMs, including
communication-related requirements to make
ATMs usable by individuals who are blind or
have low vision. In the NPRM, the
Department discussed the application of a
safe harbor to the communication-related
elements of ATMs. The NPRM explained that
the Department considers the
communication-related elements of ATMs to
be auxiliary aids and services, to which the
safe harbor for elements built in compliance
with the 1991 standards does not apply.
PO 00000
Frm 00122
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
The Department received several
comments regarding this issue. Several
commenters representing banks objected to
the exclusion of communication-related
aspects of ATMs from the safe harbor
provision. They explained that the useful life
of ATMs—on average 10 years—was longer
than the Department noted; thus, without the
safe harbor, banks would be forced to retrofit
many ATMs in order to comply with the
proposed regulation. Such retrofitting, they
noted, would be costly to the industry. A few
representatives of the disability community
commented that communication-related
aspects of ATMs should be excluded from
the safe harbor.
The Department consistently has taken the
position that the communication-related
elements of ATMs are auxiliary aids and
services, rather than structural elements. See
28 CFR part 36, app. B at 728 (2009). Thus,
the safe harbor provision does not apply to
these elements. The Department believes that
the limitations on the effective
communication requirements, which provide
that a covered entity does not have to take
measures that would result in a fundamental
alteration of its program or would cause
undue burdens, provide adequate protection
to covered entities that operate ATMs.
Captioning at sporting venues. In
§ 36.303(g) of the NPRM, the Department
proposed that sports stadiums that have a
capacity of 25,000 or more shall provide
captioning for safety and emergency
information on scoreboards and video
monitors. In addition, the Department posed
four questions about captioning of
information, especially safety and emergency
information announcements, provided over
public address (PA) systems. The Department
received many detailed and divergent
responses to each of the four questions and
the proposed regulatory text. Because
comments submitted on the Department’s
title II and title III proposals were
intertwined, because of the similarity of
issues involved for title II entities and title
III entities, and in recognition of the fact that
many large sports stadiums are covered by
both title II and title III as joint operations of
State or local government and one or more
public accommodations, the Department
presents here a single consolidated review
and summary of the issues raised in
comments.
The Department asked whether requiring
captioning of safety and emergency
information made over the public address
system in stadiums seating fewer than 25,000
would create an undue burden for smaller
entities, and whether it would be feasible for
small stadiums to provide such captioning,
or whether a larger threshold, such as sports
stadiums with a capacity of 50,000 or more,
would be appropriate.
There was a consensus among the
commenters, including disability advocates
as well as venue owners and stadium
designers and operators, that using the
stadium size or seating capacity should not
be the exclusive deciding factor for any
obligation to provide captioning for safety
and emergency information broadcast over
the PA system. Most disability advocacy
organizations and individuals with
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
disabilities complained that using size or
seating capacity as a threshold for captioning
safety and emergency information would
undermine the ‘‘undue burden’’ defense
found in both titles II and III. Many
commenters provided examples of facilities
such as professional hockey arenas that seat
less than 25,000 fans but that, commenters
argued, should be able to provide real-time
captioning. Other commenters suggested that
some high school or college stadiums, for
example, may hold 25,000 fans or more and
yet lack the resources to provide real-time
captioning. Many commenters noted that
real-time captioning would require use of
trained stenographers, and that most high
school and college sports facilities rely upon
volunteers to operate scoreboards and PA
systems and they would not be qualified
stenographers, especially in case of an
emergency. One national association noted
that the typical stenographer expense for a
professional football game in Washington,
DC, is about $550 per game. Similarly, one
trade association representing venues
estimated that the cost for a professional
stenographer at a sporting event runs
between $500 and $1,000 per game or event,
the cost of which, they argued, would be
unduly burdensome in many cases. Some
commenters posited that schools that do not
sell tickets to athletic events would be
challenged to meet such expenses, in contrast
to major college athletic programs and
professional sports teams, which would be
less likely to prevail using an ‘‘undue
burden’’ defense.
Some venue owners and operators and
other covered entities also argued that
stadium size should not be the key
consideration for whether scoreboard
captioning will be required. Instead, these
entities suggested that equipment already
installed in the stadium, including necessary
electrical equipment and backup power
supply, should be the determining factor for
whether captioning is mandated. Many
commenters argued that the requirement to
provide captioning should apply only to
stadiums with scoreboards that meet the
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
National Fire Alarm Code. Commenters
reported that NFPA 72 requires at least two
independent and reliable power supplies for
emergency information systems, including
one source that is a generator or a battery
sufficient to run the system in the event the
primary power fails. Alternatively, some
stadium designers and title II entities
commented that the requirement should arise
when the facility has at least one elevator
providing firefighter emergency operation,
along with approval of authorities with
responsibility for fire safety. An organization
concerned with fire safety codes commented
that the Department lacks the expertise to
regulate on this topic. Other commenters
argued for flexibility in the requirements for
providing captioning and contended that any
requirement should apply only to stadiums
constructed after the effective date of the
regulation.
In the NPRM, the Department also asked
whether the rule should address the specific
means of captioning equipment, whether
captioning should be provided through any
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
effective means (e.g., scoreboards, line
boards, handheld devices, or other means), or
whether some means, such as handheld
devices, should be eliminated as options.
This question elicited many comments from
advocates for persons with disabilities as
well as from covered entities. Advocacy
organizations and individuals with
experience using handheld devices argued
that such devices do not provide effective
communication. These commenters noted
that information is often delayed in the
transmission to such devices, making them
hard to use when following action on the
playing field or in the event of an emergency
when the crowd is already reacting to aural
information provided over the PA system
well before it is received on the handheld
device.
Several venue owners and operators and
others commented that handheld technology
offers advantages of flexibility and portability
so that it may be used successfully regardless
of where in the facility the user is located,
even when not in the line of sight of a
scoreboard or other captioning system. Still
other commenters urged the Department not
to regulate in such a way as to limit
innovation and use of such technology now
and in the future. Cost considerations were
included in comments from some stadium
designers and venue owners and operators
who reported that the cost of providing
handheld systems is far less than the cost of
providing real-time captioning on
scoreboards, especially in facilities that do
not currently have the capacity to provide
real-time captions on existing equipment.
Others noted that handheld technology is not
covered by fire and safety model codes,
including the NFPA, and thus would be more
easily adapted into existing facilities if
captioning were required by the Department.
The Department also asked about requiring
open captioning of all public address
announcements, rather than limiting the
captioning requirement to safety and
emergency information. A variety of
advocates and persons with disabilities
argued that all information broadcast over a
PA system should be captioned in real time
at all facilities in order to provide effective
communication, and that a requirement only
to provide emergency and safety information
would not be sufficient. A few organizations
representing persons with disabilities
commented that installation of new systems
should not be required, but that all systems
within existing facilities that are capable of
providing captioning should provide
captioning of information to the maximum
extent possible. Several organizations for
persons with disabilities commented that all
facilities should include in their safety
planning measures a requirement that all
aurally provided information for patrons
with communication disabilities be
captioned. Some advocates suggested that
demand for captions will only increase as the
number of deaf and hard of hearing persons
grows with the aging of the general
population and with increasing numbers of
veterans returning from war with disabilities.
Multiple commenters noted that the
captioning would benefit others as well as
those with communication disabilities.
PO 00000
Frm 00123
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56285
By contrast, venue owners and operators
and others commented that the action on the
sports field is self-explanatory and does not
require captioning. These commenters
objected to an explicit requirement to
provide real-time captioning for all
information broadcast on the PA system at a
sporting event. Other commenters objected to
requiring captioning even for emergency and
safety information over the scoreboard rather
than through some other means. By contrast,
venue operators, State government agencies,
and some model code groups, including the
NFPA, commented that emergency and safety
information must be provided in an
accessible format and that public safety is a
paramount concern. Other commenters
argued that the best method to deliver safety
and emergency information would be
television monitors showing local TV
broadcasts with captions already mandated
by the FCC. Some commenters posited that
the most reliable information about a major
emergency would be provided on the
television news broadcasts. They argued that
television monitors may be located
throughout the facility, improving line of
sight for patrons, some of whom might not
be able to see the scoreboard from their seats
or elsewhere in the facility. Some stadium
designers, venue operators, and model code
groups pointed out that video monitors are
not regulated by the NFPA or other agencies,
so that such monitors could be more easily
provided. Video monitors may receive
transmissions from within the facility and
could provide real-time captions if there is
the necessary software and equipment to feed
the captioning signal to a closed video
network within the facility. Several
commenters suggested that using monitors
would be preferable to requiring captions on
the scoreboard if the regulation mandates
real-time captioning. Some venue owners
and operators argued that retrofitting existing
stadiums with new systems could easily cost
in the hundreds of thousands of dollars per
scoreboard or system. Some stadium
designers and others argued that captioning
should be required only in stadiums built
after the effective date of the regulation. For
stadiums with existing systems that allow for
real-time captioning, one commenter posited
that dedicating the system exclusively to
real-time captioning would lead to an annual
loss of between two and three million dollars
per stadium in revenue from advertising
currently running in that space.
After carefully considering the wide range
of public comments on this issue, the
Department has concluded that the final rule
will not provide additional requirements for
effective communication or emergency
information provided at sports stadiums at
this time. The 1991 title II and title III
regulations and statutory requirements are
not in any way affected by this decision. The
decision to postpone rulemaking on this
complex issue is based on a number of
factors, including the multiple layers of
existing regulations by various agencies and
levels of government, and the wide array of
information, requests, and recommendations
related to developing technology offered by
the public. The diversity of existing
information and communication systems and
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56286
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
other characteristics among sports stadiums
also complicates the regulation of captioning.
The Department has concluded that further
consideration and review is prudent before it
issues specific regulatory requirements.
Movie captioning. In the NPRM, the
Department stated that options were being
considered to require movie theater owners
and operators to exhibit movies that are
captioned for patrons who are deaf or hard
of hearing. Captioning makes films accessible
to individuals whose hearing is too limited
to benefit from assistive listening devices.
Both open and closed captioning are
examples of auxiliary aids and services
required under the Department’s 1991 title III
regulation. See 28 CFR 36.303(b)(1). Open
captions are similar to subtitles in that the
text is visible to everyone in the theater,
while closed captioning displays the written
text of the audio only to those individuals
who request it.
In the NPRM, the Department also stated
that options were being considered to require
movie theater owners and operators to
exhibit movies with video description,3 a
technology that enables individuals who are
blind or have low vision to enjoy movies by
providing a spoken interpretation of key
visual elements of a movie, such as actions,
settings, facial expressions, costumes, and
scene changes. The descriptions are narrated
and recorded onto an audiotape or disk that
can be synchronized with the film as it is
projected. An audio recording is an example
of an auxiliary aid and service required
under the Department’s 1991 title III
regulation. See 28 CFR 36.303(b)(2).
The NPRM stated that technological
advances since the early 1990s have made
open and closed captioning and video
description for movies more readily available
and effective and noted that the Department
was considering options to require
captioning and video description for movies
exhibited by public accommodations. The
NPRM also noted that the Department is
aware that the movie industry is
transitioning, in whole or in part, to movies
in digital format and that movie theater
owners and operators are beginning to
purchase digital projectors. The Department
noted in the NPRM that movie theater
owners and operators with digital projectors
may have available to them different
capabilities than those without digital
projectors. The Department sought comment
regarding whether and how to require
captioning and video description while the
film industry makes this transition. In
addition, the NPRM stated the Department’s
concern about the potential cost to exhibit
captioned movies, noting that cost may vary
depending upon whether open or closed
captioning is used and whether or not digital
projectors are used, and stated that the cost
of captioning must stay within the
parameters of the undue burden requirement
in 28 CFR 36.303(a). The Department further
noted that it understands the cost of video
description equipment to be less than that for
closed captioning. The Department then
stated that it was considering the possibility
of requiring public accommodations to
exhibit all new movies in captioned format
and with video description at every showing.
The NPRM stated that the Department would
not specify the types of captioning required,
leaving such decisions to the discretion of
the movie theater owners and operators.
In the NPRM, the Department requested
public comment as to whether public
accommodations should be required to
exhibit all new movies in captioned format
at every showing, whether it would be more
appropriate to require captioning less
frequently, and, if so, with what frequency
captioning should be provided. The
Department also inquired as to whether the
requirement for captioning should be tied to
the conversion of movies from film to the use
of a digital format. The Department also
asked for public comment regarding the
exhibition of all new movies with narrative
description, whether it would it be more
appropriate to require narrative description
less frequently, and whether narrative
description of movies should be tied to the
use of a digital format.
Representatives from the movie industry, a
commenter from a non-profit organization,
and a disability rights advocacy group
provided information in their comments on
the status of captioning and video
description technology today as well as an
update on the transition to digital cinema in
the industry. A representative of major movie
producers and distributors commented that
traditionally open captions were created by
‘‘burning’’ the captions onto a special print of
a selected movie, which the studios would
make available to the exhibitors (movie
theater owners and operators). Releases with
open captions typically would be presented
at special screenings. More recently,
according to this commenter, alternative
methods have been developed for presenting
movies with open captions, but their
common feature is that the captions are
visible to all theater-goers. Closed captioning
is an innovation in technology that was first
made available in a feature film presentation
in late 1997. Closed captioning technology
currently in use allows viewers to see
captions using a clear panel that is mounted
in front of the viewer’s seat.4 According to
commenters from the industry, the panel
reflects captions that are shown in reverse on
an LED display in the back of the theater,
with captions appearing on or near the movie
image. Moviegoers may use this technology
at any showing at a theater that has been
equipped with the technology, so that the
theater does not have to arrange limited
special screenings.
Video description technology also has
existed since 1997, according to a commenter
3 In the NPRM, the Department referred to this
technology as ‘‘narrative description.’’ 73 FR 34508,
34531 (June 17, 2008). Several commenters
informed the Department that the more accurate
and commonly understood term is ‘‘video
description,’’ even though the subject is movies, not
video, and so the Department decided to employ
that term.
4 Other closed captioning technologies for movies
that have been developed but are not in use at this
time include hand-held displays similar to a PDA
(personal digital assistant); eyeglasses fitted with a
prism over one lens; and projected bitmap captions.
The PDA and eyeglass systems use a wireless
transmitter to send the captions to the display
device.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00124
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
who works with the captioning and video
description industry. According to a movie
industry commenter, video description
requires the creation of a separate script
written by specially trained writers called
‘‘describers.’’ As the commenter explained, a
describer initially listens to the movie
without watching it in order to approximate
the experience of an audience member who
is blind or has low vision. Using software to
map out the pauses in the soundtrack, the
describer writes a description in the space
available. After an initial script is written for
video description, it is edited and checked
for timing, continuity, accuracy, and a
natural flow. A narrator then records the new
script to match the corresponding movie.
This same industry commenter said that
video description currently is provided in
theaters through screens equipped with the
same type of technology as that used for
closed captioning. As commenters explained,
technologies in use today deliver video
descriptions via infrared or FM listening
systems to headsets worn by individuals who
are blind or have low vision.
According to the commenter representing
major movie producers and distributors, the
percentage of motion pictures produced with
closed captioning by its member studios had
grown to 88 percent of total releases by 2007;
the percentage of motion pictures produced
with open captioning by its member studios
had grown to 78 percent of total releases by
2007; and the percentage of motion pictures
provided with video description has ranged
consistently between 50 percent and 60
percent of total releases. It is the movie
producers and distributors, not the movie
theater owners and operators, who determine
what to caption and describe, the type of
captioning to use, and the content of the
captions and video description script. These
same producers and distributors also assume
the costs of captioning and describing
movies. Movie theater owners and operators
simply purchase the equipment to display
the captions and play the video description
in their auditoria.
The transition to digital cinema,
considered by the industry to be one of the
most profound advancements in motion
picture production and technology of the last
100 years, will provide numerous advantages
both for the industry and the audience.
According to one commenter, currently there
are sufficient standards and interim solutions
to support captioning and video description
now in digital format. Additionally, movie
studios are supporting those efforts by
providing accessibility tracks (captioning and
video description) in many digital cinema
content packages. Moreover, a group of
industry commenters composed in pertinent
part of members of the motion picture
industry, the central standards organizations
for this industry, and key digital equipment
vendors, noted that they are participating in
a joint venture to establish the remaining
accessibility specifications and standards for
access audio tracks. Access audio tracks are
supplemental sound audio tracks for the hard
of hearing and narrative audio tracks for
individuals who have vision disabilities.
According to a commenter and to industry
documents, these standards were expected to
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
be in place by spring 2009. According to a
commenter, at that time, all of the major
digital cinema equipment vendors were
expected to have support for a variety of
closed caption display and video description
products. This same commenter stated that
these technologies will be supported by the
studios that produce and distribute feature
films, by the theaters that show these films
to the public, and by the full complement of
equipment in the production, distribution,
and display chain.
The initial investment for movie theater
owners and operators to convert to digital
cinema is expensive. One industry
commenter estimated that converting theaters
to digital projection costs between $70,000
and $100,000 per screen and that
maintenance costs for digital projectors are
estimated to run between $5,000 and $10,000
a year—approximately five times as
expensive as the maintenance costs for film
projectors. According to this same
commenter, while there has been progress in
making the conversion, only approximately
5,000 screens out of 38,794 nationwide have
been converted, and the cost to make the
remaining conversions involves a total
investment of several billion dollars.
According to another commenter, predictions
as to when more than half of all screens will
have been converted to digital projection are
10 years or more, depending on the finances
of the movie theater owners and operators,
the state of the economy, and the incentives
supporting conversion. That said, according
to one commenter who represents movie
theater owners and operators, the majority of
screens in the United States were expected to
enter into agreements by the end of 2008 to
convert to digital cinema. Most importantly,
however, according to a few commenters, the
systems in place today for captioning and
video description will not become obsolete
once a theater has converted to digital
cinema but still can be used by the movie
theater owner and operator to exhibit
captions and video description. The only
difference for a movie theater owner or
operator will be the way the data is delivered
to the captioning and video description
equipment in place in an auditorium.
Despite the current availability of movies
that are captioned and provide video
description, movie theater owners and
operators rarely exhibit the captions or
descriptions. According to several
commenters, less than 1 percent of all movies
being exhibited in theaters are shown with
captions.
Individuals with disabilities, advocacy
groups, the representative from a non-profit,
and representatives of State governments,
including 11 State attorneys general,
overwhelmingly supported issuance of a
regulation requiring movie theater owners
and operators to exhibit captioned and video
described movies at all showings unless
doing so would result in an undue burden or
fundamental alteration of the goods and
services offered by the public
accommodation. In addition, this same group
of commenters urged that any such
regulation should be made effective now, and
should not be tied to the conversion to digital
cinema by the movie theater owners and
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
operators. In support of such arguments,
these commenters stated that the technology
exists now to display movies with captions
and video descriptions, regardless of whether
the movie is exhibited on film or using
digital cinema. Moreover, since the
technology in use for displaying captions and
video descriptions on film will be compatible
with digital projection systems, they argued,
there is no need to postpone implementation
of a captioning or video description
regulation until the conversion to digital has
been made. Furthermore, since the
conversion to digital may take years,
commenters urged the Department to issue a
regulation requiring captioning and video
description now, rather than several years
from now.
Advocacy groups and the 11 State
attorneys general also requested that any
regulation include factors describing what
constitutes effective captioning and video
description. Recommendations included
requiring that captioning be within the same
line of sight to the screen as the movie so that
individuals who are deaf or hard of hearing
can watch the movie and read the captions
at the same time; that the captioning be
accessible from each seat; that the captions
be of sufficient size and contrast to the
background so as to be readable easily; and
that the recent recommendations of the
Telecommunications and Electronics and
Information Technology Advisory Committee
Report to the Access Board that captions be
‘‘timely, accurate, complete, and efficient’’ 5
also be included.
The State attorneys general supported the
Department’s statement in the NPRM that the
Department did not anticipate specifying
which type of captioning to provide or what
type of technology to use to provide video
description, but would instead leave that to
the discretion of the movie theater owners
and operators. These State attorneys general
opined that such discretion in the selection
of the type of technology was consistent with
the statutory and regulatory scheme of the
ADA and would permit any new regulation
to keep pace with future advancements in
captioning and video description technology.
These same commenters stated that such
discretion may result in a mixed use of both
closed captioning and open captioning,
affording more choices both for the movie
theater owners and operators and for
individuals who are deaf or hard of hearing.
The representatives from the movie theater
industry strongly urged the Department
against issuing a regulation requiring
captioning or video description. These
commenters argued that the legislative
history of the ADA expressly precluded
regulating in the area of captioning. (These
same commenters were silent with regard to
video description on this issue.) The industry
commenters also argued that to require movie
theater owners and operators to exhibit
captioned and video described movies would
constitute a fundamental alteration in the
nature of the goods and services offered by
5 Refreshed Accessibility Standards and
Guidelines in Telecommunications and Electronic
and Information Technology (April 2008), available
at https://www.access-board.gov/sec508/refresh/
report/ (last visited June 24, 2010).
PO 00000
Frm 00125
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56287
the movie theater owners and operators. In
addition, some industry commenters argued
that any such regulation by the Department
would be inconsistent with the Access
Board’s guidelines. Also, these commenters
noted the progress that has been made in the
industry in making cinema more accessible
even though there is no mandate to caption
or describe movies, and they questioned
whether any mandate is necessary. Finally,
all the industry commenters argued that to
require captioning or video description in
100 percent of movie theater screens for all
showings would constitute an undue burden.
The comments have provided the
Department with significant information on
the state of the movie industry with regard
to the availability of captioning and video
description, the status of closed captioning
technology, and the status of the transition to
digital cinema. The Department also has
given due consideration to the comments it
has received from individuals, advocacy
groups, governmental entities, and
representatives of the movie industry.
Recently, the United States Court of Appeals
for the Ninth Circuit held that the ADA
requires a chain of movie theaters to exhibit
movies with closed captioning and video
description unless the theaters can show that
to do so would amount to a fundamental
alteration or undue burden. Arizona ex rel.
Goddard v. Harkins Amusement Enterprises,
Inc., 603 F.3d 666 (9th Cir. 2010). However,
rather than issue specific regulatory text at
this time, the Department has determined
that it should obtain additional information
regarding issues raised by commenters that
were not contemplated at the time of the
2008 NPRM, supplemental technical
information, and updated information
regarding the current and future status of the
conversion to digital cinema by movie theater
owners and operators. To this end, the
Department is planning to engage in
rulemaking relating specifically to movie
captioning under the ADA in the near future.
Section 36.304 Removal of Barriers
With the adoption of the 2010 Standards,
an important issue that the Department must
address is the effect that the new (referred to
as ‘‘supplemental’’) and revised ADA
Standards will have on the continuing
obligation of public accommodations to
remove architectural, transportation, and
communication barriers in existing facilities
to the extent that it is readily achievable to
do so. See 42 U.S.C. 12182(b)(2)(A)(iv). This
issue was not addressed in the 2004 ADAAG
because it was outside the scope of the
Access Board’s statutory authority under the
ADA and section 502 of the Rehabilitation
Act of 1973. See 29 U.S.C. 792(b)(3)(A)–(B)
(authorizing the Access Board to establish
and maintain minimum guidelines for the
standards issued pursuant to the
Architectural Barriers Act of 1968 and titles
II and III of the ADA). Responsibility for
implementing title III’s requirement that
public accommodations eliminate barriers in
existing facilities where such removal is
readily achievable rests solely with the
Department. The term ‘‘existing facility’’ is
defined in § 36.104 of the final rule. This
definition is discussed in more detail above.
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56288
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
See Appendix A discussion of definitions
(§ 36.104).
The requirements for barrier removal by
public accommodations are established in
the Department’s title III regulation. 28 CFR
36.304. Under this regulation, the
Department used the 1991 Standards as a
guide to identify what constitutes an
architectural barrier, as well as the
specifications that covered entities must
follow in making architectural changes to
remove the barrier to the extent that such
removal is readily achievable. 28 CFR
36.304(d); 28 CFR part 36, app. A (2009).
With adoption of the final rule, public
accommodations will now be guided by the
2010 Standards, defined in § 36.104 as the
2004 ADAAG and the requirements
contained in subpart D of 28 CFR part 36.
The 2010 Standards include technical and
scoping specifications for a number of
elements that were not addressed specifically
in the 1991 Standards; these new
requirements were identified as
‘‘supplemental requirements’’ in the NPRM.
The 2010 Standards also include revisions to
technical or scoping specifications for certain
elements that were addressed in the 1991
Standards, i.e., elements for which there
already were technical and scoping
specifications. Requirements for which there
are revised technical or scoping
specifications in the 2010 Standards are
referred to in the NPRM as ‘‘incremental
changes.’’
The Department expressed concern that
requiring barrier removal for incremental
changes might place unnecessary cost
burdens on businesses that already had
removed barriers in existing facilities in
compliance with the 1991 Standards. With
this rulemaking, the Department sought to
strike an appropriate balance between
ensuring that individuals with disabilities are
provided access to facilities and mitigating
potential financial burdens from barrier
removal on existing places of public
accommodation that satisfied their
obligations under the 1991 Standards.
In the NPRM, the Department proposed
several potential additions to § 36.304(d) that
might reduce such financial burdens. First,
the Department proposed a safe harbor for
elements in existing facilities that were
compliant with the 1991 Standards. Under
this approach, an element that is not altered
after the effective date of the 2010 Standards
and that complies with the scoping and
technical requirements for that element in
the 1991 Standards would not be required to
undergo modification to comply with the
2010 Standards to satisfy the ADA’s barrier
removal obligations. The public
accommodation would thus be deemed to
have met its barrier removal obligation with
respect to that element.
The Department received many comments
on this issue during the 60-day public
comment period. After consideration of all
relevant information presented on the issue,
it is the Department’s view that this elementby-element safe harbor provision should be
retained in the final rule. This issue is
discussed further below.
Second, the NPRM proposed several
exceptions and exemptions from certain
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
supplemental requirements to mitigate the
barrier removal obligations of existing play
areas and recreation facilities under the 2004
ADAAG. These proposals elicited many
comments from both the business and
disability communities. After consideration
of all relevant information presented on the
issue, it is the Department’s view that these
exceptions and exemptions should not be
retained in the final rule. The specific
proposals and comments, and the
Department’s conclusions, are discussed
below.
Third, the NPRM proposed a new safe
harbor approach to readily achievable barrier
removal as applied to qualified small
businesses. This proposed small business
safe harbor was based on suggestions from
small business advocacy groups that
requested clearer guidance on the barrier
removal obligations for small businesses.
According to these groups, the Department’s
traditional approach to barrier removal
disproportionately affects small businesses.
They argued that most small businesses
owners neither are equipped to understand
the ADA Standards nor can they afford the
architects, consultants, and attorneys that
might provide some level of assurance of
compliance with the ADA. For these same
reasons, these commenters contended, small
business owners are vulnerable to litigation,
particularly lawsuits arising under title III,
and often are forced to settle because the
ADA Standards’ complexity makes
inadvertent noncompliance likely, even
when a small business owner is acting in
good faith, or because the business cannot
afford the costs of litigation.
To address these and similar concerns, the
NPRM proposed a level of barrier removal
expenditures at which qualified small
businesses would be deemed to have met
their readily achievable barrier removal
obligations for certain tax years. This safe
harbor would have provided some protection
from litigation because compliance could be
assessed easily. Such a rule, the Department
believed, also could further accessibility,
because qualified small businesses would
have an incentive to incorporate barrier
removal into short- and long-term planning.
The Department recognized that a qualified
small business safe harbor would be a
significant change to the Department’s title III
enforcement scheme. Accordingly, the
Department sought comment on whether
such an approach would further the aims
underlying the statute’s barrier removal
provisions, and, if so, the appropriate
parameters of the provision.
After consideration of the many comments
received on this issue, the Department has
decided not to include a qualified small
business safe harbor in the final rule. This
decision is discussed more fully below.
Element-by-element safe harbor for public
accommodations. Public accommodations
have a continuing obligation to remove
certain architectural, communications, and
transportation barriers in existing facilities to
the extent readily achievable. 42 U.S.C.
12182(b)(2)(A)(iv). Because the Department
uses the ADA Standards as a guide to
identifying what constitutes an architectural
barrier, the 2010 Standards, once they
PO 00000
Frm 00126
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
become effective, will provide a new
reference point for assessing an entity’s
barrier removal obligations. The 2010
Standards introduce technical and scoping
specifications for many elements that were
not included in the 1991 Standards.
Accordingly, public accommodations will
have to consider these supplemental
requirements when evaluating whether there
are covered barriers in existing facilities, and,
if so, remove them to the extent readily
achievable. Also included in the 2010
Standards are revised technical and scoping
requirements for elements that were
addressed in the 1991 Standards. These
incremental changes were made to address
technological changes that have occurred
since the promulgation of the 1991
Standards, to reflect additional study by the
Access Board, and to harmonize ADAAG
requirements with the model codes.
In the NPRM, the Department sought input
on a safe harbor in proposed § 36.304(d)(2)
intended to address concerns about the
practical effects of the incremental changes
on public accommodations’ readily
achievable barrier removal obligations. The
proposed element-by-element safe harbor
provided that in existing facilities elements
that are, as of the effective date of the 2010
Standards, fully compliant with the
applicable technical and scoping
requirements in the 1991 Standards, need not
be modified or retrofitted to meet the 2010
Standards, until and unless those elements
are altered. The Department posited that it
would be an inefficient use of resources to
require covered entities that have complied
with the 1991 Standards to retrofit already
compliant elements when the change might
only provide a minimal improvement in
accessibility. In addition, the Department
was concerned that covered entities would
have a strong disincentive for voluntary
compliance if every time the applicable
standards were revised covered entities
would be required once again to modify
elements to keep pace with new
requirements. The Department recognized
that revisions to some elements might confer
a significant benefit on some individuals
with disabilities and because of the safe
harbor these benefits would be unavailable
until the facility undergoes alterations.
The Department received many comments
on this issue from the business and disability
communities. Business owners and
operators, industry groups and trade
associations, and business advocacy
organizations strongly supported the
element-by-element safe harbor. By contrast,
disability advocacy organizations and
individuals commenting on behalf of the
disability community were opposed to this
safe harbor with near unanimity.
Businesses and business groups agreed
with the concerns outlined by the
Department in the NPRM, and asserted that
the element-by-element safe harbor is integral
to ensuring continued good faith compliance
efforts by covered entities. These commenters
argued that the financial cost and business
disruption resulting from retrofitting
elements constructed or previously modified
to comply with 1991 Standards would be
detrimental to nearly all businesses and not
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
readily achievable for most. They contended
that it would be fundamentally unfair to
place these entities in a position where,
despite full compliance with the 1991
Standards, the entities would now, overnight,
be vulnerable to barrier removal litigation.
They further contended that public
accommodations will have little incentive to
undertake large barrier removal projects or
incorporate barrier removal into long-term
planning if there is no assurance that the
actions taken and money spent for barrier
removal would offer some protection from
litigation. One commenter also pointed out
that the proposed safe harbor would be
consistent with practices under other Federal
accessibility standards, including the
Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
(UFAS) and the ADAAG.
Some business commenters urged the
Department to expand the element-byelement safe harbor to include supplemental
requirements. These commenters argued that
imposing the 2010 Standards on existing
facilities will provide a strong incentive for
such facilities to eliminate some elements
entirely, particularly where the element is
not critical to the public accommodation’s
business or operations (e.g., play areas in fast
food restaurants) or the cost of retrofitting is
significant. Some of these same commenters
urged the Department to include within the
safe harbor those elements not covered by the
1991 Standards, but which an entity had
built in compliance with State or local
accessibility laws. Other commenters
requested safe harbor protection where a
business had attempted barrier removal prior
to the establishment of technical and scoping
requirements for a particular element (e.g.,
play area equipment) if the business could
show that the element now covered by the
2010 Standards was functionally accessible.
Other commenters noted ambiguity in the
NPRM as to whether the element-by-element
safe harbor applies only to elements that
comply fully with the 1991 Standards, or also
encompasses elements that comply with the
1991 Standards to the extent readily
achievable. Some commenters proposed that
the safe harbor should exist in perpetuity—
that an element subject to a safe harbor at one
point in time also should be afforded the
same protection with respect to all future
revisions to the ADA Standards (as with
many building codes). These groups
contended that allowing permanent
compliance with the 1991 Standards will
ensure readily accessible and usable facilities
while also mitigating the need for expensive
and time-consuming documentation of
changes and maintenance.
A number of commenters inquired about
the effect of the element-by-element safe
harbor on elements that are not in strict
compliance with the 1991 Standards, but
conform to the terms of settlement
agreements or consent decrees resulting from
private litigation or Federal enforcement
actions. These commenters noted that
litigation or threatened litigation often has
resulted in compromise among parties as to
what is readily achievable. Business groups
argued that facilities that have made
modifications subject to those negotiated
agreements should not be subject to the risk
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
of further litigation as a result of the 2010
Standards.
Lastly, some business groups that
supported the element-by-element safe
harbor nevertheless contended that a better
approach would be to separate barrier
removal altogether from the 2010 Standards,
such that the 2010 Standards would not be
used to determine whether access to an
existing facility is impeded by architectural
barriers. These commenters argued that
application of the 2010 Standards to barrier
removal obligations is contrary to the ADA’s
directive that barrier removal is required only
where ‘‘easily accomplishable and able to be
carried out without much difficulty or
expense,’’ 42 U.S.C. 12181(9).
Nearly all commenters from the disability
community objected to the proposed
element-by-element safe harbor. These
commenters asserted that the adoption of this
safe harbor would permit and sanction the
retention of outdated access standards even
in cases where retrofitting to the 2010
Standards would be readily achievable. They
argued that title III’s readily achievable
defense is adequate to address businesses’
cost concerns, and rejected the premise that
requiring businesses to retrofit currently
compliant elements would be an inefficient
use of resources where readily achievable to
do so. The proposed regulations, these
commenters asserted, incorporate advances
in technology, design, and construction, and
reflect congressional and societal
understanding that accessibility is not a static
concept and that the ADA is a civil rights law
intended to maximize accessibility.
Additionally, these commenters noted that
since the 2004 revision of the ADAAG will
not be the last, setting a precedent of safe
harbors for compliant elements will have the
effect of preserving and protecting layers of
increasingly outdated accessibility standards.
Many commenters objected to the
Department’s characterization of the
requirements subject to the safe harbor as
reflecting only incremental changes and
asserted that many of these incremental
changes will result in significantly enhanced
accessibility at little cost. The requirement
concerning side-reach ranges was highlighted
as an example of such requirements.
Commenters from the disability community
argued that the revised maximum side-reach
range (from 54 inches to 48 inches) will
result in a substantial increase in
accessibility for many persons with
disabilities—particularly individuals of short
stature, for whom the revised reach range
represents the difference between
independent access to many features and
dependence—and that the revisions should
be made where readily achievable to do so.
Business commenters, on the other hand,
contended that application of the safe harbor
to this requirement is critical because
retrofitting items, such as light switches and
thermostats often requires work (e.g.,
rewiring, patching, painting, and rewallpapering), that would be extremely
burdensome for entities to undertake. These
commenters argued that such a burden is not
justified where many of the affected entities
already have retrofitted to meet the 1991
Standards.
PO 00000
Frm 00127
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56289
Some commenters that were opposed to
the element-by-element safe harbor proposed
that an entity’s past efforts to comply with
the 1991 Standards might appropriately be a
factor in the readily achievable analysis.
Several commenters proposed a temporary 5year safe harbor that would provide
reassurance and stability to covered entities
that have recently taken proactive steps for
barrier removal, but would also avoid the
problems of preserving access deficits in
perpetuity and creating multiple standards as
subsequent updates are adopted.
After consideration of all relevant
information presented on this issue during
the comment period, the Department has
decided to retain the proposed element-byelement safe harbor. Title III’s architecturalbarrier provisions place the most significant
requirements of accessibility on new
construction and alterations. The aim is to
require businesses to make their facilities
fully accessible at the time they are first
constructing or altering those facilities, when
burdens are less and many design elements
will necessarily be in flux, and to impose a
correspondingly lesser duty on businesses
that are not changing their facilities. The
Department believes that it would be
consistent with this statutory structure not to
change the requirements for design elements
that were specifically addressed in our prior
standards for those facilities that were built
or altered in full compliance with those
standards. The Department similarly believes
it would be consistent with the statutory
scheme not to change the requirements for
design elements that were specifically
addressed in our prior standards for those
existing facilities that came into full
compliance with those standards.
Accordingly, the final rule at § 36.304(d)(2)(i)
provides that elements that have not been
altered in existing facilities on or after March
15, 2012 and that comply with the
corresponding technical and scoping
specifications for those elements in the 1991
Standards are not required to be modified in
order to comply with the requirements set
forth in the 2010 Standards. The safe harbor
adopted is consistent in principle with the
proposed provision in the NPRM, and
reflects the Department’s determination that
this approach furthers the statute’s barrier
removal provisions and promotes continued
good-faith compliance by public
accommodations.
The element-by-element safe harbor
adopted in this final rule is a narrow one.
The Department recognizes that this safe
harbor will delay, in some cases, the
increased accessibility that the incremental
changes would provide and that for some
individuals with disabilities the impact may
be significant. This safe harbor, however, is
not a blanket exemption for every element in
existing facilities. Compliance with the 1991
Standards is determined on an element-byelement basis in each existing facility.
Section 36.304(d)(2)(ii)(A) provides that
prior to the compliance date of the rule
March 15, 2012, noncompliant elements that
have not been altered are obligated to be
modified to the extent readily achievable to
comply with the requirements set forth in the
1991 Standards or the 2010 Standards.
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56290
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
Section 36.304(d)(2)(ii)(B) provides that after
the date the 2010 Standards take effect (18
months after publication of the rule),
noncompliant elements that have not been
altered must be modified to the extent readily
achievable to comply with the requirements
set forth in the 2010 Standards.
Noncomplying newly constructed and
altered elements may also be subject to the
requirements of § 36.406(a)(5).
The Department has not expanded the
scope of the element-by-element safe harbor
beyond those elements subject to the
incremental changes. The Department has
added § 36.304(d)(2)(iii), explicitly clarifying
that existing elements subject to
supplemental requirements for which
scoping and technical specifications are
provided for the first time in the 2010
Standards (e.g., play area requirements) are
not covered by the safe harbor and, therefore,
must be modified to comply with the 2010
Standards to the extent readily achievable.
Section 36.304(d)(2)(iii) also identifies the
elements in the 2010 Standards that are not
eligible for the element-by-element safe
harbor. The safe harbor also does not apply
to the accessible routes not previously
scoped in the 1991 standards, such as those
required to connect the boundary of each
area of sport activity, including soccer fields,
basketball courts, baseball fields, running
tracks, skating rinks, and areas surrounding
a piece of gymnastic equipment. See
Advisory note to section F206.2.2 of the 2010
Standards. The resource and fairness
concerns underlying the element-by-element
safe harbor are not implicated by barrier
removal involving supplemental
requirements. Public accommodations have
not been subject previously to technical and
scoping specifications for these supplemental
requirements. Thus, with respect to
supplemental requirements, the existing
readily achievable standard best maximizes
accessibility in the built environment
without imposing unnecessary burdens on
public accommodations.
The Department also has declined to
expand the element-by-element safe harbor to
cover existing elements subject to
supplemental requirements that also may
have been built in compliance with State or
local accessibility laws. Measures taken to
remove barriers under a Federal accessibility
provision logically must be considered in
regard to Federal standards, in this case the
2010 Standards. This approach is based on
the Department’s determination that
reference to ADA Standards for barrier
removal will promote certainty, safety, and
good design while still permitting slight
deviations through readily achievable
alternative methods. The Department
continues to believe that this approach
provides an appropriate and workable
framework for implementation of title III’s
barrier removal provisions. Because
compliance with State or local accessibility
codes is not a reliable indicator of effective
access for purposes of the ADA Standards,
the Department has decided not to include
reliance on such codes as part of the safe
harbor provision.
Only elements compliant with the 1991
Standards are eligible for the safe harbor.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
Thus, where a public accommodation
attempted barrier removal but full
compliance with the 1991 Standards was not
readily achievable, the modified element
does not fall within the scope of the safe
harbor provision. A public accommodation at
any point in time must remove barriers to the
extent readily achievable. For existing
elements, for which removal is not readily
achievable at any given time, the public
accommodation must provide its goods,
services, facilities, privileges, advantages, or
accommodations through alternative
methods that are readily achievable. See 42
U.S.C. 12182(b)(2)(A)(iv), (v).
One-time evaluation and implementation
of the readily achievable standard is not the
end of the public accommodation’s barrierremoval obligation. Public accommodations
have a continuing obligation to reevaluate
barrier removal on a regular basis. For
example, if a public accommodation
identified barriers under the 1991 Standards
but did not remove them because removal
was not readily achievable based on cost
considerations, it has a continuing obligation
to remove these barriers if the economic
considerations for the public accommodation
change. The fact that the public
accommodation has been providing its goods
or services through alternative methods does
not negate the continuing obligation to assess
whether removal of the barrier at issue has
become readily achievable. Public
accommodations should incorporate
consideration of their continuing barrier
removal obligations in both short-term and
long-term business planning.
The Department notes that commenters
across the board expressed concern with
recordkeeping burdens implicated by the
element-by-element safe harbor. Businesses
noted the additional costs and administrative
burdens associated with identifying elements
that fall within the element-by-element safe
harbor, as well as tracking, documenting, and
maintaining data on installation dates.
Disability advocates expressed concern that
varying compliance standards will make
enforcement efforts more difficult, and urged
the Department to clarify that title III entities
bear the burden of proof regarding
entitlement to safe harbor protection. The
Department emphasizes that public
accommodations wishing to benefit from the
element-by-element safe harbor must
demonstrate their safe harbor eligibility. The
Department encourages public
accommodations to take appropriate steps to
confirm and document the compliance of
existing elements with the 1991 Standards.
Finally, while the Department has decided
not to adopt in this rulemaking the
suggestion by some commenters to make the
protection afforded by the element-byelement safe harbor temporary, the
Department believes this proposal merits
further consideration. The Department,
therefore, will continue to evaluate the
efficacy and appropriateness of a safe harbor
expiration or sunset provision.
Application to specific scenarios raised in
comments. In response to the NPRM, the
Department received a number of comments
that raised issues regarding application of the
element-by-element safe harbor to particular
PO 00000
Frm 00128
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
situations. Business commenters requested
guidance on whether the replacement for a
broken or malfunctioning element that is
covered by the 1991 Standards would have
to comply with the 2010 Standards. These
commenters expressed concern that in some
cases replacement of a broken fixture might
necessitate moving a number of other
accessible fixtures (such as in a bathroom) in
order to comply with the fixture and space
requirements of the 2010 Standards. Others
questioned the effect of the new standards
where an entity replaces an existing element
currently protected by the safe harbor
provision for water or energy conservation
reasons. The Department intends to address
these types of scenarios in technical
guidance.
Effective date for barrier removal. Several
commenters expressed concern that the
NPRM did not propose a transition period for
applying the 2004 ADAAG to barrier removal
in existing facilities in cases where the safe
harbors do not apply. These commenters
argued that for newly covered elements, they
needed time to hire attorneys and consultants
to assess the impact of the new requirements,
determine whether they need to make
additional retrofits, price those retrofits,
assess whether the change actually is ‘‘readily
achievable,’’ obtain approval for the removal
from owners who must pay for the changes,
obtain permits, and then do the actual work.
The commenters recognized that there may
be some barrier removal actions that require
little planning, but stated that other actions
cost significantly more and require more
budgeting, planning, and construction time.
Barrier removal has been an ongoing
requirement that has applied to public
accommodations since the original regulation
took effect on January 26, 1992. The final rule
maintains the existing regulatory provision
that barrier removal does not have to be
undertaken unless it is ‘‘readily achievable.’’
The Department has provided in
§ 36.304(d)(2)(ii)(B) that public
accommodations are not required to apply
the 2010 Standards to barrier removal until
18 months after the publication date of this
rule. It is the Department’s view that 18
months is a sufficient amount of time for
application of the 2010 Standards to barrier
removal for those elements not subject to the
safe harbor. This is also consistent with the
compliance date the Department has
specified for applying the 2010 Standards to
new construction and alterations.
Reduced scoping for play areas and other
recreation facilities.
Play areas. The Access Board published
final guidelines for play areas in October
2000. 65 FR 62498 (Oct. 18, 2000). The
guidelines include requirements for groundlevel and elevated play components,
accessible routes connecting the components,
accessible ground surfaces, and maintenance
of those surfaces. They have been referenced
in Federal playground construction and
safety guidelines and in some State and local
codes and have been used voluntarily when
many play areas across the country have been
altered or constructed.
In adopting the 2004 ADAAG (which
includes the play area guidelines published
in 2000), the Department acknowledges both
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
the importance of integrated, full access to
play areas for children and parents with
disabilities as well as the need to avoid
placing an untenable fiscal burden on
businesses. Consequently, the Department
asked seven questions in the NPRM related
to existing play areas. Two questions related
to safe harbors: one on the appropriateness of
a general safe harbor for existing play areas
and another on public accommodations that
have complied with State or local standards
specific to play areas. The others related to
reduced scoping, limited exemptions, and
whether there is a ‘‘tipping point’’ at which
the costs of compliance with supplemental
requirements would be so burdensome that a
public accommodation would shut down a
program rather than comply with the new
requirements. In the nearly 100 comments
received on title III play areas, the majority
of commenters strongly opposed all safe
harbors, exemptions, and reductions in
scoping, and questioned the feasibility of
determining a tipping point. A smaller
number of commenters advocated for a safe
harbor from compliance with the 2004
ADAAG play area requirements along with
reduced scoping and exemptions for both
readily achievable barrier removal and
alterations.
Commenters were split as to whether the
Department should exempt owners and
operators of public accommodations from
compliance with the supplemental
requirements for play areas and recreation
facilities and instead continue to determine
accessibility in these facilities on a case-bycase basis under existing law. Many
commenters were of the view that the
exemption was not necessary because
concerns of financial burden are addressed
adequately by the defenses inherent in the
standard for what constitutes readily
achievable barrier removal. A number of
commenters found the exemption
inappropriate because no standards for play
areas previously existed. Commenters also
were concerned that a safe harbor applicable
only to play areas and recreation facilities
(but not to other facilities operated by a
public accommodation) would create
confusion, significantly limit access for
children and parents with disabilities, and
perpetuate the discrimination and
segregation individuals with disabilities face
in the important social arenas of play and
recreation—areas where little access has been
provided in the absence of specific standards.
Many commenters suggested that instead of
an exemption, the Department should
provide guidance on barrier removal with
respect to play areas and other recreation
facilities.
Several commenters supported the
exemption, mainly on the basis of the cost of
barrier removal. More than one commenter
noted that the most expensive aspect of
barrier removal on existing play areas is the
surfaces for the accessible routes and use
zones. Several commenters expressed the
view that where a play area is ancillary to a
public accommodation (e.g., in quick service
restaurants or shopping centers), the play
area should be exempt from compliance with
the supplemental requirements because
barrier removal would be too costly, and as
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
a result, the public accommodation might
eliminate the area.
The Department has been persuaded that
the ADA’s approach to barrier removal, the
readily achievable standard, provides the
appropriate balance for the application of the
2010 Standards to existing play areas. Thus,
in existing playgrounds, public
accommodations will be required to remove
barriers to access where these barriers can be
removed without much difficulty or expense.
The NPRM asked if there are State and
local standards specifically regarding play
and recreation area accessibility and whether
facilities currently governed by, and in
compliance with, such State and local
standards or codes should be subject to a safe
harbor from compliance with similar
applicable requirements in the 2004 ADAAG.
The Department also requested comments on
whether it would be appropriate for the
Access Board to consider the implementation
of guidelines that would extend such a safe
harbor to play and recreation areas
undertaking alterations. In response, no
comprehensive State or local codes were
identified, and commenters generally noted
that because the 2004 ADAAG contained
comprehensive accessibility requirements for
these unique areas, public accommodations
should not be afforded a safe harbor from
compliance with them when altering play
and recreation areas. The Department is
persuaded by these comments that there is
insufficient basis to apply a safe harbor for
readily achievable barrier removal or
alterations for play areas built in compliance
with State or local laws.
In the NPRM, the Department requested
that public accommodations identify a
‘‘tipping point’’ at which the costs of
compliance with the supplemental
requirements for existing play areas would be
so burdensome that the entity simply would
shut down the playground. In response, no
tipping point was identified. Some
commenters noted, however, that the scope
of the requirements may create the choice
between wholesale replacement of play areas
and discontinuance of some play areas, while
others speculated that some public
accommodations may remove play areas that
are merely ancillary amenities rather than
incur the cost of barrier removal under the
2010 Standards. The Department has decided
that the comments did not establish any clear
tipping point and therefore that no regulatory
response is appropriate in this area.
The NPRM also asked for comment about
the potential effect of exempting existing
play areas of less than 1,000 square feet in
size from the requirements applicable to play
areas. Many trade and business associations
favored exempting these small play areas,
with some arguing that where the play areas
are only ancillary amenities, the cost of
barrier removal may dictate that they be
closed down. Some commenters sought
guidance on the definition of a 1,000-squarefoot play area, seeking clarification that
seating and bathroom spaces associated with
a play area are not included in the size
definition. Disability rights advocates, by
contrast, overwhelmingly opposed this
exemption, arguing that these play areas may
be some of the few available in a community;
PO 00000
Frm 00129
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56291
that restaurants and day care facilities are
important places for socialization between
children with disabilities and those without
disabilities; that integrated play is important
to the mission of day care centers and that
many day care centers and play areas in large
cities, such as New York City, have play
areas that are less than 1,000 square feet in
size; and that 1,000 square feet was an
arbitrary size requirement.
The Department agrees that children with
disabilities are entitled to access to integrated
play opportunities. However, the Department
is aware that small public accommodations
are concerned about the costs and efforts
associated with barrier removal. The
Department has given careful consideration
as to how best to insulate small entities from
overly burdensome costs and undertakings
and has concluded that the existing readily
achievable standard, not a separate
exemption, is an effective and employable
method by which to protect these entities.
Under the existing readily achievable
standard, small public accommodations
would be required to comply only with the
scoping and technical requirements of the
2010 Standards that are easily
accomplishable and able to be carried out
without much difficulty or expense. Thus,
concerns about prohibitive costs and efforts
clearly are addressed by the existing readily
achievable standard. Moreover, as evidenced
by comments inquiring as to how 1,000square-foot play areas are to be measured and
complaining that the 1,000-square-foot cutoff is arbitrary, the exemption posited in the
NPRM would have been difficult to apply.
Finally, a separate exemption would have
created confusion as to whether, or when, to
apply the exemption or the readily
achievable standard. Consequently, the
Department has decided that an exemption,
separate and apart from the readily
achievable standard, is not appropriate or
necessary for small private play areas.
In the NPRM, the Department requested
public comment as to whether existing play
areas should be permitted to substitute
additional ground-level play components for
the elevated play components that they
otherwise would have been required to make
accessible. Most commenters opposed this
substitution because the guidelines as well as
considerations of ‘‘readily achievable barrier
removal’’ inherently contain the flexibility
necessary for a variety of situations. Such
commenters also noted that the Access Board
adopted extensive guidelines with ample
public input, including significant
negotiation and balancing of costs. In
addition, commenters advised that including
additional ground level play components
might result in higher costs because more
accessible route surfaces might be required.
A limited number of commenters favored
substitution. The Department is persuaded by
these comments that the proposed
substitution of elements may not be
beneficial. The current rules applicable to
readily achievable barrier removal will be
used to determine the number and type of
accessible elements appropriate for a specific
facility.
In the NPRM, the Department requested
public comment on whether it would be
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56292
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
appropriate for the Access Board to consider
issuing guidelines for alterations to play and
recreation facilities that would permit
reduced scoping of accessible components or
substitution of ground level play components
in lieu of elevated play components. The
Department received little input on this
issue, and most commenters disfavored the
suggestion. One commenter that supported
this approach conjectured that it would
encourage public accommodations to
maintain and improve their playgrounds as
well as provide more accessibility. The
Department is persuaded that it is not
necessary to ask the Access Board to revisit
this issue.
The NPRM also asked whether only one
play area of each type should be required to
comply at existing sites with multiple play
areas and whether there are other select
requirements applicable to play areas in the
2004 ADAAG for which the Department
should consider exemptions or reduced
scoping. Some commenters were opposed to
the concept of requiring compliance at one
play area of each type at a site with multiple
play areas, citing lack of choice and ongoing
segregation of children and adults with
disabilities. Other commenters who
supported an exemption and reduced
scoping for alterations noted that the play
equipment industry has adjusted to, and does
not take issue with, the provisions of the
2004 ADAAG; however, they asked for some
flexibility in the barrier removal
requirements as applied to play equipment,
arguing that augmentation of the existing
equipment and installation of accessible play
surfacing equates to wholesale replacement
of the play equipment. The Department is
persuaded that the current rules applicable to
readily achievable barrier removal should be
used to decide which play areas must comply
with the supplemental requirements
presented in the 2010 Standards.
Swimming pools, wading pools, saunas,
and steam rooms. Section 36.304(d)(3)(ii) in
the NPRM specified that for measures taken
to comply with the barrier removal
requirements, existing swimming pools with
at least 300 linear feet of swimming pool wall
would need to provide only one accessible
means of entry that complies with section
1009.2 or section 1009.3 of the 2004 ADAAG,
instead of the two means required for new
construction. Commenters opposed the
Department’s reducing the scoping from that
required in the 2004 ADAAG. The following
were among the factors cited in comments:
that swimming is a common therapeutic form
of exercise for many individuals with
disabilities; that the cost of a swimming pool
lift or other options for pool access is readily
achievable and can be accomplished without
much difficulty or expense; and that the
readily achievable standard already provides
public accommodations with a means to
reduce their scoping requirements. A few
commenters cited safety concerns resulting
from having just one accessible means of
access, and stated that because pools
typically have one ladder for every 75 linear
feet of pool wall, they should have more than
one accessible means of egress. Other
commenters either approved or did not
oppose providing one accessible means of
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
access for larger pools so long as a lift was
used.
Section 36.304(d)(4)(ii) of the NPRM
proposed to exempt existing swimming pools
with fewer than 300 linear feet of swimming
pool wall from the obligation to provide an
accessible means of entry. Most commenters
strongly opposed this provision, arguing that
aquatic activity is a safe and beneficial form
of exercise that is particularly appropriate for
individuals with disabilities. Many argued
that the readily achievable standard for
barrier removal is available as a defense and
is preferable to creating an exemption for
pool operators for whom providing an
accessible means of entry would be readily
achievable. Commenters who supported this
provision apparently assumed that providing
an accessible means of entry would be
readily achievable and that therefore the
exemption is needed so that small pool
operators do not have to provide an
accessible means of entry.
The Department has carefully considered
all the information available to it as well as
the comments submitted on these two
proposed exemptions for swimming pools
owned or operated by title III entities. The
Department acknowledges that swimming
provides important therapeutic, exercise, and
social benefits for many individuals with
disabilities and is persuaded that exemption
of the vast majority of privately owned or
operated pools from the 2010 Standards is
neither appropriate nor necessary. The
Department agrees with the commenters that
title III already contains sufficient limitations
on private entities’ obligations to remove
barriers. In particular, the Department agrees
that those public accommodations that can
demonstrate that making particular existing
swimming pools accessible in accordance
with the 2010 Standards is not readily
achievable are sufficiently protected from
excessive compliance costs. Thus, the
Department has eliminated proposed
§ 36.304(d)(3)(ii) and (d)(4)(ii) from the final
rule.
Proposed § 36.304(d)(4)(iii) would have
exempted existing saunas and steam rooms
that seat only two individuals from the
obligation to remove barriers. This provision
generated far fewer comments than the
provisions for swimming pools. People who
commented were split fairly evenly between
those who argued that the readily achievable
standard for barrier removal should be
applied to all existing saunas and steam
rooms and those who argued that all existing
saunas and steam rooms, regardless of size,
should be exempt from any barrier removal
obligations. The Department considered
these comments and has decided to eliminate
the exemption for existing saunas and steam
rooms that seat only two people. Such an
exemption for saunas and steam rooms that
seat only two people is unnecessary because
the readily achievable standard provides
sufficient protection against barrier removal
that is overly expensive or too difficult.
Moreover, the Department believes barrier
removal likely will not be readily achievable
for most of these small saunas because the
nature of their prefabricated forms, which
include built-in seats, make it either
technically infeasible or too difficult or
PO 00000
Frm 00130
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
expensive to remove barriers. Consequently a
separate exemption for saunas and steam
rooms would have been superfluous. Finally,
employing the readily achievable standard
for small saunas and steam rooms is
consistent with the Department’s decisions
regarding the proposed exemptions for play
areas and swimming pools.
Several commenters also argued in favor of
a specific exemption for existing spas. The
Department notes that the technically
infeasible and readily achievable defenses are
applicable equally to existing spas and
declines to adopt such an exemption.
The Department also solicited comment on
the possibility of exempting existing wading
pools from the obligation to remove barriers
where readily achievable. Most commenters
stated that installing a sloped entry in an
existing wading pool is not likely to be
feasible. Because covered entities are not
required to undertake modifications that are
not readily achievable or that would be
technically infeasible, the Department
believes that the rule as drafted provides
sufficient protection from unwarranted
expense to the operators of small existing
wading pools. Other existing wading pools,
particularly those large wading pools found
in facilities such as water parks, must be
assessed on a case-by-case basis. Therefore,
the Department has not included an
exemption for wading pools in its final rule.
The Department received several
comments recommending that existing wave
pools be exempt from barrier removal
requirements. The commenters pointed out
that existing wave pools often have a sloped
entry, but do not have the handrails, level
landings, or edge protection required for
accessible entry. Because pool bottom slabs
are structural, they could be subject to
catastrophic failure if the soil pressure
stability or the under slab dewatering are not
maintained during the installation of these
accessibility features in an alreadyconstructed pool. They also argue that the
only safe design scenario is to design the
wheelchair ramp, pool lift, or transfer access
in a side cove where the mean water level
largely is unaffected by the wave action, and
that this additional construction to an
existing wave pool is not readily achievable.
If located in the main pool area, the
handrails, stanchions, and edge protection
for sloped entry will become underwater
hazards when the wave action is pushing
onto pool users, and the use of a pool lift will
not be safe without a means of stabilizing the
person against the forces of the waves while
using the lift. They also pointed out that a
wheelchair would pose a hazard to all wave
pool users, in that the wave action might
push other pool users into the wheelchair or
push the wheelchair into other pool users.
The wheelchair would have to be removed
from the pool after the user has entered (and
has transferred to a flotation device if
needed). The commenters did not specify if
these two latter concerns are applicable to all
wave pools or only to those with more
aggressive wave action. The Department has
decided that the issue of modifications to
wave pools is best addressed on a case-bycase basis, and therefore, this rule does not
contain barrier removal exemptions
applicable to wave pools.
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
The Department also received comments
suggesting that it is not appropriate to require
two accessible means of entry to wave pools,
lazy rivers, sand bottom pools, and other
water amusements that have only one point
of entry. The Department agrees. The 2010
Standards (at section 242.2, Exception 2)
provide that only one means of entry is
required for wave pools, lazy rivers, sand
bottom pools, and other water amusement
where user access is limited to one area.
Other recreation facilities. In the NPRM,
the Department asked about a number of
issues relating to recreation facilities, such as
team or player seating areas, areas of sport
activity, exercise machines, boating facilities,
fishing piers and platforms, golf courses, and
miniature golf courses. The Department
asked for public comment on the costs and
benefits of applying the 2004 ADAAG to
these spaces and facilities. The discussion of
the comments received by the Department on
these issues and the Department’s response
to those comments can be found in either the
section entitled ‘‘Other Issues’’ of Appendix
A to this final rule.
Safe harbor for qualified small businesses.
Section 36.304(d)(5) of the NPRM would
have provided that a qualified small business
would meet its obligation to remove
architectural barriers where readily
achievable for a given year if, during that tax
year, the entity spent at least 1 percent of its
gross revenue in the preceding tax year on
measures undertaken in compliance with
barrier removal requirements. Proposed
§ 36.304(d)(5) has been omitted from the final
rule.
The qualified small business safe harbor
was proposed in response to small business
advocates’ requests for clearer guidance on
when barrier removal is, and is not, readily
achievable. According to these groups, the
Department’s approach to readily achievable
barrier removal disproportionately affects
small business for the following reasons: (1)
Small businesses are more likely to operate
in older buildings and facilities; (2) the 1991
Standards are too numerous and technical for
most small business owners to understand
and determine how they relate to State and
local building or accessibility codes; and (3)
small businesses are vulnerable to title III
litigation and often are compelled to settle
because they cannot afford the litigation costs
involved in proving that an action is not
readily achievable.
The 2010 Standards go a long way toward
meeting the concern of small businesses with
regard to achieving compliance with both
Federal and State accessibility requirements,
because the Access Board harmonized the
2004 ADAAG with the model codes that form
the basis of most State and local accessibility
codes. Moreover, the element-by-element safe
harbor will ensure that unless and until a
small business engages in alteration of
affected elements, the small business will not
have to retrofit elements that were
constructed in compliance with the 1991
Standards or, with respect to elements in an
existing facility, that were retrofitted to the
1991 Standards in conjunction with the
business’s barrier removal obligation prior to
the rule’s compliance date.
In proposing an additional safe harbor for
small businesses, the Department had sought
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
to promulgate a rule that would provide
small businesses a level of certainty in shortterm and long-term planning with respect to
barrier removal. This in turn would benefit
individuals with disabilities in that it would
encourage small businesses to consider and
incorporate barrier removal in their yearly
budgets. Such a rule also would provide
some protection, through diminished
litigation risks, to small businesses that
undertake significant barrier removal
projects.
As proposed in the NPRM, the qualified
small business safe harbor would provide
that a qualified small business has met its
readily achievable barrier removal
obligations for a given year if, during that tax
year, the entity has spent at least 1 percent
of its gross revenue in the preceding tax year
on measures undertaken to comply with title
III barrier removal requirements. (Several
small business advocacy organizations
pointed out an inconsistency between the
Department’s description of the small
business safe harbor in the Section-bySection Analysis for § 36.304 and the
proposed regulatory text for that provision.
The proposed regulatory text sets out the
correct parameters of the proposed rule. The
Department does not believe that the error
substantively affected the comments on this
issue. Some commenters noted the
discrepancy and commented on both; others
commented more generally on the proposal,
so the discrepancy was not relevant.) The
Department noted that the efficacy of any
proposal for a small business safe harbor
would turn on the following two
determinations: (1) The definition of a
qualified small business, and (2) the formula
for calculating what percentage of revenue is
sufficient to satisfy the readily achievable
presumption.
As proposed in § 36.104 in the NPRM, a
‘‘qualified small business’’ is a business entity
defined as a small business concern under
the regulations promulgated by the Small
Business Administration (SBA) pursuant to
the Small Business Act. See 15 U.S.C. 632;
13 CFR part 121. The Department noted that
under section 3(a)(2)(C) of the Small Business
Act, Federal departments and agencies are
prohibited from prescribing a size standard
for categorizing a business concern as a small
business unless the department or agency has
been authorized specifically to do so or has
proposed a size standard in compliance with
the criteria set forth in the SBA regulations,
has provided an opportunity for public
notice and comment on the proposed
standard, and has received approval from the
Administrator of the SBA to use the standard.
See 15 U.S.C. 632(a)(2)(C). The Department
further noted that Federal agencies or
departments promulgating regulations
relating to small businesses usually use SBA
size criteria, and they otherwise must be
prepared to justify how they arrived at a
different standard and why the SBA’s
regulations do not satisfy the agency’s
program requirements. See 13 CFR 121.903.
The ADA does not define ‘‘small business’’ or
specifically authorize the Department to
prescribe size standards.
In the NPRM, the Department indicated its
belief that the size standards developed by
PO 00000
Frm 00131
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56293
the SBA are appropriate for determining
which businesses subject to the ADA should
be eligible for the small business safe harbor
provisions, and proposed to adopt the SBA’s
size standards to define small businesses for
purposes of the qualified small business safe
harbor. The SBA’s small business size
standards define the maximum size that a
concern, together with all of its affiliates,
may be if it is to be eligible for Federal small
business programs or to be considered a
small business for the purpose of other
Federal agency programs. Concerns primarily
engaged in the same kind of economic
activity are classified in the same industry
regardless of their types of ownership (such
as sole proprietorship, partnership, or
corporation). Approximately 1200 industries
are described in detail in the North American
Industry Classification System—United
States, 2007. For most businesses, the SBA
has established a size standard based on
average annual receipts. The majority of
places of public accommodation will be
classified as small businesses if their average
annual receipts are less than $6.5 million.
However, some will qualify with higher
annual receipts. The SBA small business size
standards should be familiar to many if not
most small businesses, and using these
standards in the ADA regulation would
provide some certainty to owners, operators,
and individuals because the SBA’s current
size standards can be changed only after
notice and comment rulemaking.
The Department explained in the NPRM
that the choice of gross revenue as the basis
for calculating the safe harbor threshold was
intended to avoid the effect of differences in
bookkeeping practices and to maximize
accessibility consistent with congressional
intent. The Department recognized, however,
that entities with similar gross revenue could
have very different net revenue, and that this
difference might affect what is readily
achievable for a particular entity. The
Department also recognized that adopting a
small business safe harbor would effect a
marked change to the Department’s current
position on barrier removal. Accordingly, the
Department sought public comment on
whether a presumption should be adopted
whereby qualifying small businesses are
presumed to have done what is readily
achievable for a given year if, during that tax
year, the entity spent at least 1 percent of its
gross revenue in the preceding tax year on
barrier removal, and on whether 1 percent is
an appropriate amount or whether gross
revenue would be the appropriate measure.
The Department received many comments
on the proposed qualified small business safe
harbor. From the business community,
comments were received from individual
business owners and operators, industry and
trade groups, and advocacy organizations for
business and industry. From the disability
community, comments were received from
individuals, disability advocacy groups, and
nonprofit organizations involved in
providing services for persons with
disabilities or involved in disability-related
fields. The Department has considered all
relevant matter submitted on this issue
during the 60-day public comment period.
Small businesses and industry groups
strongly supported a qualified small business
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56294
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
safe harbor of some sort, but none supported
the structure proposed by the Department in
the NPRM. All felt strongly that clarifications
and modifications were needed to strengthen
the provision and to provide adequate
protection from litigation.
Business commenters’ objections to the
proposed qualified small business safe harbor
fell generally into three categories: (1) That
gross revenue is an inappropriate and
inaccurate basis for determining what is
readily achievable by a small business since
it does not take into account expenses that
may result in a small business operating at
a loss; (2) that courts will interpret the
regulation to mean that a small business must
spend 1 percent of gross revenue each year
on barrier removal, i.e., that expenditure of
1 percent of gross revenue on barrier removal
is always ‘‘readily achievable’’; and (3) that a
similar misinterpretation of the 1 percent
gross revenue concept, i.e., that 1 percent of
gross revenue is always ‘‘readily achievable,’’
will be applied to public accommodations
that are not small businesses and that have
substantially larger gross revenue. Business
groups also expressed significant concern
about the recordkeeping burdens they viewed
as inherent in the Department’s proposal.
Across the board, business commenters
objected to the Department’s proposed use of
gross revenue as the basis for calculating
whether the small business safe harbor has
been met. All contended that 1 percent of
gross revenue is too substantial a trigger for
safe harbor protection and would result in
barrier removal burdens far exceeding what
is readily achievable or ‘‘easily
accomplishable and able to be carried out
without much difficulty or expense.’’ 42
U.S.C. 12181(9). These commenters further
pointed out that gross revenue and receipts
vary considerably from industry to industry
depending on the outputs sold in each
industry, and that the use of gross revenue
or receipts would therefore result in arbitrary
and inequitable burdens on those subject to
the rule. These commenters stated that the
readily achievable analysis, and thus the safe
harbor threshold, should be premised on a
business’s net revenue so that operating
expenses are offset before determining what
amount might be available for barrier
removal. Many business commenters
contended that barrier removal is not readily
achievable if an entity is operating at a loss,
and that a spending formula premised on net
revenue can reflect more accurately
businesses’ ability to engage in barrier
removal.
There was no consensus among the
business commenters as to a formula that
would reflect more accurately what is readily
achievable for small businesses with respect
to barrier removal. Those that proposed
alternative formulas offered little in the way
of substantive support for their proposals.
One advocacy organization representing a
large cross-section of small businesses
provided some detail on the gross and net
revenue of various industry types and sizes
in support of its position that for nearly all
small businesses, net revenue is a better
indicator of a business’s financial ability to
spend money on barrier removal. The data
also incidentally highlighted the importance
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
and complexity of ensuring that each
component in a safe harbor formula
accurately informs and contributes to the
ultimate question of what is and is not
readily achievable for a small business.
Several business groups proposed that a
threshold of 0.5 percent (or one-half of 1
percent) of gross revenue, or 2.5 percent of
net revenue, spent on ADA compliance might
be a workable measure of what is ‘‘readily
achievable’’ for small businesses. Other
groups proposed 3 to 5 percent of net
revenue as a possible measure. Several
commenters proposed affording small
businesses an option of using gross or net
revenue to determine safe harbor eligibility.
Another commenter proposed premising the
safe harbor threshold on a designated
percentage of the amount spent on
renovation in a given year. Others proposed
averaging gross or net revenue over a number
of years to account for cyclical changes in
economic and business environments.
Additionally, many proposed that an entity
should be able to roll over expenditures in
excess of the safe harbor for inclusion in safe
harbor analysis in subsequent years, to
facilitate barrier removal planning and
encourage large-scale barrier removal
measures.
Another primary concern of many
businesses and business groups is that the 1
percent threshold for safe harbor protection
would become a de facto ‘‘floor’’ for what is
readily achievable for any small business
entity. These commenters urged the
Department to clarify that readily achievable
barrier removal remains the standard, and
that in any given case, an entity retains the
right to assert that barrier removal
expenditures below the 1 percent threshold
are not readily achievable. Other business
groups worried that courts would apply the
1 percent calculus to questions of barrier
removal by businesses too large to qualify for
the small business safe harbor. These
commenters requested clarification that the
rationale underlying the Department’s
determination that a percentage of gross
revenue can appropriately approximate
readily achievable barrier removal for small
businesses does not apply outside the small
business context.
Small businesses and business groups
uniformly requested guidance as to what
expenses would be included in barrier
removal costs for purposes of determining
whether the safe harbor threshold has been
met. These commenters contended that any
and all expenses associated with ADA
compliance—e.g., consultants, architects,
engineers, staff training, and recordkeeping—
should be included in the calculation. Some
proposed that litigation-related expenses,
including defensive litigation costs, also
should be accounted for in a small business
safe harbor. Additionally, several
commenters urged the Department to issue a
small business compliance guide with
detailed guidance and examples regarding
application of the readily achievable barrier
removal standard and the safe harbor. Some
commenters felt that the Department’s
regulatory efforts should be focused on
clarifying the readily achievable standard
rather than on introducing a safe harbor
based on a set spending level.
PO 00000
Frm 00132
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Businesses and business groups expressed
concern that the Department’s proposed
small business safe harbor would not
alleviate small business vulnerability to
litigation. Individuals and advocacy groups
were equally concerned that the practical
effect of the Department’s proposal likely
would be to accelerate or advance the
initiation of litigation. These commenters
pointed out that an individual encountering
barriers in small business facilities will not
know whether the entity is noncompliant or
entitled to safe harbor protection. Safe harbor
eligibility can be evaluated only after review
of the small business’s barrier removal
records and financial records. Individuals
and advocacy groups argued that the
Department should not promulgate a rule by
which individuals must file suit to obtain the
information needed to determine whether a
lawsuit is appropriate in a particular case,
and that, therefore, the rule should clarify
that small businesses are required to produce
such documentation to any individual upon
request.
Several commenters noted that a small
business safe harbor based on net, rather than
gross, revenue would complicate
exponentially its efficacy as an affirmative
defense, because accounting practices and
asserted expenses would be subject to
discovery and dispute. One business
advocacy group representing a large crosssection of small businesses noted that some
small business owners and operators likely
would be uncomfortable with producing
detailed financial information, or could be
prevented from using the safe harbor because
of inadvertent recordkeeping deficiencies.
Individuals, advocacy groups, and
nonprofit organizations commenting on
behalf of the disability community uniformly
and strongly opposed a safe harbor for
qualified small businesses, saying it is
fundamentally at odds with the intent of
Congress and the plain language of the ADA.
These commenters contended that the casespecific factors underlying the statute’s
readily achievable standard cannot be
reconciled with a formulaic accounting
approach, and that a blanket formula
inherently is less fair, less flexible, and less
effective than the current case-by-case
determination for whether an action is
readily achievable. Moreover, they argued, a
small business safe harbor for readily
achievable barrier removal is unnecessary
because the statutory standard explicitly
provides that a business need only spend
what is readily achievable—an amount that
may be more or less than 1 percent of
revenue in any given year.
Several commenters opined that the
formulaic approach proposed by the
Department overlooks the factors that often
prove most conducive and integral to readily
achievable barrier removal—planning and
prioritization. Many commenters expressed
concern that the safe harbor creates an
incentive for business entities to forego largescale barrier removal in favor of smaller, less
costly removal projects, regardless of the
relative access the measures might provide.
Others commented that an emphasis on a
formulaic amount rather than readily
achievable barrier removal might result in
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
competition among types of disabilities as to
which barriers get removed first, or
discrimination against particular types of
disabilities if barrier removal for those groups
is more expensive.
Many commenters opposed to the small
business safe harbor proposed clarifications
and limiting rules. A substantial number of
commenters were strongly opposed to what
they perceived as a vastly overbroad and
overly complicated definition of ‘‘qualified
small business’’ for purposes of eligibility for
the safe harbor, and urged the Department to
limit the qualified small business safe harbor
to those businesses eligible for the ADA
small business tax credit under section 44 of
the Tax Code. Some commenters from the
disability community contended that the
spending level that triggers the safe harbor
should be cumulative, to reflect the
continuing nature of the readily achievable
barrier obligation and to preclude a business
from erasing years of unjustifiable inaction or
insufficient action by spending up to the safe
harbor threshold for one year. These
commenters also sought explicit clarification
that the small business safe harbor is an
affirmative defense.
A number of commenters proposed that a
business seeking to use the qualified small
business safe harbor should be required to
have a written barrier removal plan that
contains a prioritized list of significant access
barriers, a schedule for removal, and a
description of the methods used to identify
and prioritize barriers. These commenters
argued that only spending consistent with
the plan should count toward the qualified
small business threshold.
After consideration of all relevant matter
presented, the Department has concluded
that neither the qualified small business safe
harbor proposed in the NPRM nor any of the
alternatives proposed by commenters will
achieve the Department’s intended results.
Business and industry commenters uniformly
objected to a safe harbor based on gross
revenue, argued that 1 percent of gross
revenue was out of reach for most, if not all,
small businesses, and asserted that a safe
harbor based on net revenue would better
capture whether and to what extent barrier
removal is readily achievable for small
businesses. Individuals and disability
advocacy groups rejected a set formula as
fundamentally inconsistent with the casespecific approach reflected in the statute.
Commenters on both sides noted ambiguity
as to which ADA-related costs appropriately
should be included in the calculation of the
safe harbor threshold, and expressed concern
about the practical effect of the proposed safe
harbor on litigation. Disability organizations
expressed concern that the proposal might
increase litigation because individuals with
disabilities confronted with barriers in places
of public accommodation would not be able
to independently assess whether an entity is
noncompliant or is, in fact, protected by the
small business safe harbor. The Department
notes that the concerns about enforcementrelated complexity and expense likely would
increase exponentially with a small business
safe harbor based on net revenue.
The Department continues to believe that
promulgation of a small business safe harbor
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
would be within the scope of the Attorney
General’s mandate under 42 U.S.C. 12186(b)
to issue regulations to carry out the
provisions of title III. Title III defines ‘‘readily
achievable’’ to mean ‘‘easily accomplishable
and able to be carried out without much
difficulty or expense,’’ 42 U.S.C. 12181(9),
and sets out factors to consider in
determining whether an action is readily
achievable. While the statutory factors reflect
that whether an action is readily achievable
is a fact-based determination, there is no
inherent inconsistency with the Department’s
proposition that a formula based on revenue
and barrier removal expenditure could
accurately approximate the high end of the
level of expenditure that can be considered
readily achievable for a circumscribed subset
of title III entities defined, in part, by their
maximum annual average receipts. Moreover,
the Department’s obligation under the
SBREFA to consider alternative means of
compliance for small businesses, see 5 U.S.C.
603(c), further supports the Department’s
conclusion that a well-targeted formula is a
reasonable approach to implementation of
the statute’s readily achievable standard.
While the Department ultimately has
concluded that a small business safe harbor
should not be included in the final rule, the
Department continues to believe that it is
within the Department’s authority to develop
and implement such a safe harbor.
As noted above, the business community
strongly objected to a safe harbor premised
on gross revenue, on the ground that gross
revenue is an unreliable indicator of an
entity’s ability to remove barriers, and urged
the Department to formulate a safe harbor
based on net revenue. The Department’s
proposed use of gross revenue was intended
to offer a measure of certainty for qualified
small businesses while ensuring that those
businesses continue to meet their ongoing
obligation to remove architectural barriers
where doing so is readily achievable.
The Department believes that a qualified
small business safe harbor based on net
revenue would be an unreliable indicator of
what is readily achievable and would be
unworkable in practice. Evaluation of what is
readily achievable for a small business
cannot rest solely on a business’s net revenue
because many decisions about expenses are
inherently subjective, and in some cases a net
loss may be more beneficial (in terms of
taxes, for example) than a small net profit.
The Department does not read the ADA’s
readily achievable standard to mean
necessarily that architectural barrier removal
is to be, or should be, a business’s last
concern, or that a business can claim that
every barrier removal obligation is not
readily achievable. Therefore, if a qualified
small business safe harbor were to be
premised on net revenue, assertion of the
affirmative defense would trigger discovery
and examination of the business’s accounting
methods and the validity or necessity of
offsetting expenses. The practical benefits
and legal certainty intended by the NPRM
would be lost.
Because there was little to no support for
the Department’s proposed use of gross
revenue and no workable alternatives are
available at this time, the Department will
PO 00000
Frm 00133
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56295
not adopt a small business safe harbor in this
final rule. Small business public
accommodations are subject to the barrier
removal requirements set out in § 36.304 of
the final rule. In addition, the Department
plans to provide small businesses with more
detailed guidance on assessing and meeting
their barrier removal obligations in a small
business compliance guide.
Section 36.308 Seating in Assembly Areas
In the 1991 rule, § 36.308 covered seating
obligations for public accommodations in
assembly areas. It was bifurcated into (a)
existing facilities and (b) new construction
and alterations. The new construction and
alterations provision, § 36.308(b), merely
stated that assembly areas should be built or
altered in accordance with the applicable
provisions in the 1991 Standards. Section
36.308(a), by contrast, provided detailed
guidelines on what barrier removal was
required.
The Department explained in the preamble
to the 1991 rule that § 36.308 provided
specific rules on assembly areas to ensure
that wheelchair users, who typically were
relegated to inferior seating in the back of
assembly areas separate from their friends
and family, would be provided access to
seats that were integrated and equal in
quality to those provided to the general
public. Specific guidance on assembly areas
was desirable because they are found in
many different types of places of public
accommodation, ranging from opera houses
(places of exhibition or entertainment) to
private university lecture halls (places of
education), and include assembly areas that
range in size from small movie theaters of
100 or fewer seats to 100,000-seat sports
stadiums.
In the NPRM, the Department proposed to
update § 36.308(a) by incorporating some of
the applicable assembly area provisions from
the 2010 Standards. Upon further review,
however, the Department has determined
that the need to provide special guidance for
assembly areas in a separate section no
longer exists, except for specialty seating
areas, as discussed below. Since enactment of
the ADA, the Department has interpreted the
1991 Standards as a guide for determining
the existence of barriers. Courts have
affirmed this interpretation. See, e.g.,
Colorado Cross Disability Coalition v. Too,
Inc., 344 F. Supp. 2d 707 (D. Colo. 2004);
Access Now, Inc. v. AMH CGH, Inc., 2001 WL
1005593 (S.D. Fla. 2001); Pascuiti v. New
York Yankees, 87 F. Supp. 2d 221 (S.D.N.Y.
1999). The 2010 Standards now establish
detailed guidance for newly constructed and
altered assembly areas, which is provided in
§ 36.406(f), and these Standards will serve as
a new guide for barrier removal. Accordingly,
the former § 36.308(a) has been replaced in
the final rule. Assembly areas will benefit
from the same safe harbor provisions
applicable to barrier removal in all places of
public accommodations as provided in
§ 36.304(d)(2) of the final rule.
The Department has also decided to
remove proposed § 36.308(c)(2) from the final
rule. This provision would have required
assembly areas with more than 5,000 seats to
provide five wheelchair spaces with at least
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56296
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
three designated companion seats for each of
those five wheelchair spaces. The
Department agrees with commenters who
asserted that group seating already is
addressed more appropriately in ticketing
under § 36.302(f).
The Department has determined that
proposed § 36.308(c)(1), addressing specialty
seating in assembly areas, should remain as
§ 36.308 in the final rule with additional
language. This paragraph is designed to
ensure that individuals with disabilities have
an opportunity to access specialty seating
areas that entitle spectators to distinct
services or amenities not generally available
to others. This provision is not, as several
commenters mistakenly thought, designed to
cover luxury boxes and suites. Those areas
have separate requirements outlined in
section 221 of the 2010 Standards.
Section 36.308 requires only that
accessible seating be provided in each area
with distinct services or amenities. To the
extent a covered entity provides multiple
seating areas with the same services and
amenities, each of those areas would not be
distinct and thus all of them would not be
required to be accessible. For example, if a
facility has similar dining service in two
areas, both areas would not need to be made
accessible; however, if one dining service
area is open to families, while the other is
open only to individuals over the age of 21,
both areas would need to be made accessible.
Factors distinguishing specialty seating areas
generally are dictated by the type of facility
or event, but may include, for example, such
distinct services and amenities as access to
wait staff for in-seat food or beverage service;
availability of catered food or beverages for
pre-game, intermission, or post-game events;
restricted access to lounges with special
amenities, such as couches or flat-screen
televisions; or access to team personnel or
facilities for team-sponsored events (e.g.,
autograph sessions, sideline passes, or
facility tours) not otherwise available to other
spectators.
The NPRM required public
accommodations to locate wheelchair seating
spaces and companion seats in each specialty
seating area within the assembly area. The
Department has added language in the final
rule stating that public accommodations that
cannot place wheelchair seating spaces and
companion seats in each specialty area
because it is not readily achievable to do so
may meet their obligation by providing
specialty services or amenities to individuals
with disabilities and their companions at
other designated accessible locations at no
additional cost. For example, if a theater that
only has barrier removal obligations provides
wait service to spectators in the mezzanine,
and it is not readily achievable to place
accessible seating there, it may meet its
obligation by providing wait service to
patrons with disabilities who use
wheelchairs and their companions at other
designated accessible locations at no
additional cost. This provision does not
obviate the obligation to comply with
applicable requirements for new construction
and alterations, including dispersion of
accessible seating.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
Section 36.309 Examinations and Courses
Section 36.309(a) sets forth the general rule
that any private entity that offers
examinations or courses relating to
applications, licensing, certification, or
credentialing for secondary or postsecondary
education, professional, or trade purposes
shall offer such examinations or courses in a
place and manner accessible to persons with
disabilities or offer alternative accessible
arrangements for such individuals. In the
NPRM preamble and proposed regulatory
amendment and in this final rule, the
Department relied on its history of
enforcement efforts, research, and body of
knowledge of testing and modifications,
accommodations, and aids in detailing steps
testing entities should take to ensure that
persons with disabilities receive appropriate
modifications, accommodations, or auxiliary
aids in examination and course settings as
required by the ADA. The Department
received comments from disability rights
groups, organizations that administer tests,
State governments, professional associations,
and individuals on the language appearing in
the NPRM preamble and amended regulation
and has carefully considered these
comments.
The Department initially set out the
parameters of appropriate documentation
requests relating to examinations and courses
covered by this section in the 1991 preamble
at 28 CFR part 36, stating that ‘‘requests for
documentation must be reasonable and must
be limited to the need for the modification
or aid requested.’’ See 28 CFR part 36, app.
B at 735 (2009). Since that time, the
Department, through its enforcement efforts
pursuant to section 309, has addressed
concerns that requests by testing entities for
documentation regarding the existence of an
individual’s disability and need for a
modification or auxiliary aid or service were
often inappropriate and burdensome. The
Department proposed language stating that
while it may be appropriate for a testing
entity to request that an applicant provide
documentation supporting the existence of a
disability and the need for a modification,
accommodation, or auxiliary aid or service,
the request by the testing entity for such
documentation must be reasonable and
limited. The NPRM proposed that testing
entities should narrowly tailor requests for
documentation, limiting those requests to
materials that will allow the testing entities
to ascertain the nature of the disability and
the individual’s need for the requested
modification, accommodation, or auxiliary
aid or service. This proposal codified the
1991 rule’s preamble language regarding
testing entities’ requests for information
supporting applicants’ requests for testing
modifications or accommodations.
Overall, most commenters supported this
addition to the regulation. These commenters
generally agreed that documentation sought
by testing entities to support requests for
modifications and testing accommodations
should be reasonable and tailored.
Commenters noted, for example, that the
proposal to require reasonable and tailored
documentation requests ‘‘is not objectionable.
Indeed, it largely tracks DOJ’s long-standing
informal guidance that ‘requests for
PO 00000
Frm 00134
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
documentation must be reasonable and
limited to the need for the modification or
aid requested.’ ’’
Commenters including disability rights
groups, State governments, professional
associations, and individuals made it clear
that, in addition to the proposed regulatory
change, other significant problems remain for
individuals with disabilities who seek
necessary modifications to examinations and
courses. These problems include detailed
questions about the nature of documentation
materials submitted by candidates, testing
entities’ questioning of documentation
provided by qualified professionals with
expertise in the particular disability at issue,
and lack of timeliness in determining
whether to provide requested
accommodations or modifications. Several
commenters expressed enthusiasm for the
preamble language addressing some of these
issues, and some of these commenters
recommended the incorporation of portions
of this preamble language into the regulatory
text. Some testing entities expressed
concerns and uncertainty about the language
in the preamble and sought clarifications
about its meaning. These commenters
focused most of their attention on the
following language from the NPRM preamble:
Generally, a testing entity should accept
without further inquiry documentation
provided by a qualified professional who has
made an individualized assessment of the
applicant. Appropriate documentation may
include a letter from a qualified professional
or evidence of a prior diagnosis, or
accommodation, or classification, such as
eligibility for a special education program.
When an applicant’s documentation is recent
and demonstrates a consistent history of a
diagnosis, there is no need for further inquiry
into the nature of the disability. A testing
entity should consider an applicant’s past
use of a particular auxiliary aid or service.
73 FR 34508, 34539 (June 17, 2008).
Professional organizations, State
governments, individuals, and disability
rights groups fully supported the
Department’s preamble language and
recommended further modification of the
regulations to encompass the issues raised in
the preamble. A disability rights group
recommended that the Department
incorporate the preamble language into the
regulations to ensure that ‘‘documentation
demands are strictly limited in scope and
met per se when documentation of
previously provided accommodations or aids
is provided.’’ One professional education
organization noted that many testing
corporations disregard the documented
diagnoses of qualified professionals, and
instead substitute their own, often
unqualified diagnoses of individuals with
disabilities. Commenters confirmed that
testing entities sometimes ask for
unreasonable information that is either
impossible, or extremely onerous, to provide.
A disability rights organization supported the
Department’s proposals and noted that
private testing companies impose
burdensome documentation requirements
upon applicants with disabilities seeking
accommodations and that complying with
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
the documentation requests is frequently so
difficult, and negotiations over the requests
so prolonged, that test applicants ultimately
forgo taking the test. Another disability rights
group urged the Department to ‘‘expand the
final regulatory language to ensure that
regulations accurately provide guidance and
support the comments made about reducing
the burden of documenting the diagnosis and
existence of a disability.’’
Testing entities, although generally
supportive of the proposed regulatory
amendment, expressed concern regarding the
Department’s proposed preamble language.
The testing entities provided the Department
with lengthy comments in which they
suggested that the Department’s rationale
delineated in the preamble potentially could
limit them from gathering meaningful and
necessary documentation to determine
whether, in any given circumstance, a
disability is presented, whether
modifications are warranted, and which
modifications would be most appropriate.
Some testing entities raised concerns about
individuals skewing testing results by falsely
claiming or feigning disabilities as an
improper means of seeking advantage on an
examination. Several testing entities raised
concerns about and sought clarification
regarding the Department’s use of certain
terms and concepts in the preamble,
including ‘‘without further inquiry,’’
‘‘appropriate documentation,’’ ‘‘qualified
professional,’’ ‘‘individualized assessment,’’
and ‘‘consider.’’ These entities discussed the
preamble language at length, noting that
testing entities need to be able to question
some aspects of testing applicants’
documentation or to request further
documentation from some candidates when
the initial documentation is unclear or
incomplete. One testing entity expressed
concern that the Department’s preamble
language would require the acceptance of a
brief note on a doctor’s prescription pad as
adequate documentation of a disability and
the need for an accommodation. One medical
examination organization stated that the
Department’s preamble language would
result in persons without disabilities
receiving accommodations and passing
examinations as part of a broad expansion of
unwarranted accommodations, potentially
endangering the health and welfare of the
general public. Another medical board
‘‘strenuously objected’’ to the ‘‘without further
inquiry’’ language. Several of the testing
entities expressed concern that the
Department’s preamble language might
require testing companies to accept
documentation from persons with temporary
or questionable disabilities, making test
scores less reliable, harming persons with
legitimate entitlements, and resulting in
additional expense for testing companies to
accommodate more test takers.
It remains the Department’s view that,
when testing entities receive documentation
provided by a qualified professional who has
made an individualized assessment of an
applicant that supports the need for the
modification, accommodation, or aid
requested, they shall generally accept such
documentation and provide the
accommodation.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
Several commenters sought clarifications
on what types of documentation are
acceptable to demonstrate the existence of a
disability and the need for a requested
modification, accommodation, or aid. The
Department believes that appropriate
documentation may vary depending on the
nature of the disability and the specific
modification or aid requested, and
accordingly, testing entities should consider
a variety of types of information submitted.
Examples of types of information to consider
include recommendations of qualified
professionals familiar with the individual,
results of psycho-educational or other
professional evaluations, an applicant’s
history of diagnosis, participation in a special
education program, observations by
educators, or the applicant’s past use of
testing accommodations. If an applicant has
been granted accommodations post-high
school by a standardized testing agency,
there is no need for reassessment for a
subsequent examination.
Some commenters expressed concern
regarding the use of the term ‘‘letter’’ in the
proposed preamble sentence regarding
appropriate documentation. The NPRM
preamble language stated that ‘‘[a]ppropriate
documentation may include a letter from a
qualified professional or evidence of a prior
diagnosis, accommodation, or classification,
such as eligibility for a special education
program.’’ 73 FR 34508, 34539 (June 17,
2008). Some testing entities posited that the
preamble language would require them to
accept a brief letter from a doctor or even a
doctor’s note on a prescription pad indicating
‘‘I’ve been treating (student) for ADHD and
he/she is entitled to extend time on the
ACT.’’ The Department’s reference in the
NPRM preamble to letters from physicians or
other professionals was provided in order to
offer examples of some types of acceptable
documentation that may be considered by
testing entities in evaluating the existence of
an applicant’s disability and the need for a
certain modification, accommodation, or aid.
No one piece of evidence may be dispositive
in make a testing accommodation
determination. The significance of a letter or
other communication from a doctor or other
qualified professional would depend on the
professional’s relationship with the
candidate and the specific content of the
communication, as well as how the letter fits
in with the totality of the other factors used
to determine testing accommodations under
this rule. Similarly, an applicant’s failure to
provide results from a specific test or
evaluation instrument should not of itself
preclude approval of requests for
modifications, accommodations, or aids if the
documentation provided by the applicant, in
its entirety, is sufficient to demonstrate that
the individual has a disability and requires
a requested modification, accommodation, or
aid on the relevant examination. This issue
is discussed in more detail below.
One disability rights organization noted
that requiring a 25-year old who was
diagnosed in junior high school with a
learning disability and accommodated ever
since ‘‘to produce elementary school report
cards to demonstrate symptomology before
the age of seven is unduly burdensome.’’ The
PO 00000
Frm 00135
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56297
same organization commented that requiring
an individual with a long and early history
of disability to be assessed within three years
of taking the test in question is similarly
burdensome, stating that ‘‘[t]here is no
scientific evidence that learning disabilities
abate with time, nor that Attention Deficits
abate with time * * *.’’ This organization
noted that there is no justification for
repeatedly subjecting people to expensive
testing regimens simply to satisfy a
disbelieving industry. This is particularly
true for adults with, for example, learning
disabilities such as dyslexia, a persistent
condition without the need for retesting once
the diagnosis has been established and
accepted by a standardized testing agency.
Some commenters from testing entities
sought clarification regarding who may be
considered a ‘‘qualified professional.’’
Qualified professionals are licensed or
otherwise properly credentialed and possess
expertise in the disability for which
modifications or accommodations are sought.
For example, a podiatrist would not be
considered to be a qualified professional to
diagnose a learning disability or support a
request for testing accommodations on that
basis. Types of professionals who might
possess the appropriate credentials and
expertise are doctors (including
psychiatrists), psychologists, nurses, physical
therapists, occupational therapists, speech
therapists, vocational rehabilitation
specialists, school counselors, and licensed
mental health professionals. Additionally,
while testing applicants should present
documentation from qualified professionals
with expertise in the pertinent field, it also
is critical that testing entities that review
documentation submitted by prospective
examinees in support of requests for testing
modifications or accommodations ensure that
their own reviews are conducted by qualified
professionals with similarly relevant
expertise.
Commenters also sought clarification of the
term individualized assessment. The
Department’s intention in using this term is
to ensure that documentation provided on
behalf of a testing candidate is not only
provided by a qualified professional, but also
reflects that the qualified professional has
individually and personally evaluated the
candidate as opposed to simply considering
scores from a review of documents. This is
particularly important in the learning
disabilities context, where proper diagnosis
requires face-to-face evaluation. Reports from
experts who have personal familiarity with
the candidate should take precedence over
those from, for example, reviewers for testing
agencies, who have never personally met the
candidate or conducted the requisite
assessments for diagnosis and treatment.
Some testing entities objected to the NPRM
preamble’s use of the phrase ‘‘without further
inquiry.’’ The Department’s intention here is
to address the extent to which testing entities
should accept documentation provided by an
applicant when the testing entity is
determining the need for modifications,
accommodations, or auxiliary aids or
services. The Department’s view is that
applicants who submit appropriate
documentation, e.g., documentation that is
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56298
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
based on the careful individual consideration
of the candidate by a professional with
expertise relating to the disability in
question, should not be subjected to
unreasonably burdensome requests for
additional documentation. While some
testing commenters objected to this standard,
it reflects the Department’s longstanding
position. When an applicant’s documentation
demonstrates a consistent history of a
diagnosis of a disability, and is prepared by
a qualified professional who has made an
individualized evaluation of the applicant,
there is little need for further inquiry into the
nature of the disability and generally testing
entities should grant the requested
modification, accommodation, or aid.
After a careful review of the comments, the
Department has decided to maintain the
proposed regulatory language on the scope of
appropriate documentation in
§ 36.309(b)(1)(iv). The Department has also
added new regulatory language at
§ 36.309(b)(1)(v) that provides that testing
entities shall give considerable weight to
documentation of past modifications,
accommodations, or auxiliary aids or services
received in similar testing situations as well
as such modifications, accommodations, or
related aids and services provided in
response to an Individualized Education
Program (IEP) provided under the
Individuals with Disabilities Education Act
(IDEA) or a plan providing services pursuant
to section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of
1973, as amended (often referred to as a
Section 504 Plan). These additions to the
regulation are necessary because the
Department’s position on the bounds of
appropriate documentation contained in
Appendix B, 28 CFR part 36, app. B (2009),
has not been implemented consistently and
fully by organizations that administer tests.
The new regulatory language clarifies that
an applicant’s past use of a particular
modification, accommodation, or auxiliary
aid or service in a similar testing setting or
pursuant to an IEP or Section 504 Plan
provides critical information in determining
those examination modifications that would
be applicable in a given circumstance. The
addition of this language and the appropriate
weight to be accorded it is seen as important
by the Department because the types of
accommodations provided in both these
circumstances are typically granted in the
context of individual consideration of a
student’s needs by a team of qualified and
experienced professionals. Even though these
accommodations decisions form a common
sense and logical basis for testing entities to
rely upon, they are often discounted and
ignored by testing entities.
For example, considerable weight is
warranted when a student with a Section 504
Plan in place since middle school that
includes the accommodations of extra time
and a quiet room for testing is seeking these
same accommodations from a testing entity
covered by section 309 of the Act. In this
example, a testing entity receiving such
documentation should clearly grant the
request for accommodations. A history of test
accommodations in secondary schools or in
post-secondary institutions, particularly
when determined through the rigors of a
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
process required and detailed by Federal law,
is as useful and instructive for determining
whether a specific accommodation is
required as accommodations provided in
standardized testing situations.
It is important to note, however, that the
inclusion of this weight does not suggest that
individuals without IEPs or Section 504
Plans are not also entitled to receive testing
accommodations. Indeed, it is recommended
that testing entities must consider the
entirety of an applicant’s history to
determine whether that history, even without
the context of a IEP or Section 504 Plan,
indicates a need for accommodations. In
addition, many students with learning
disabilities have made use of informal, but
effective accommodations. For example, such
students often receive undocumented
accommodations such as time to complete
tests after school or at lunchtime, or being
graded on content and not form or spelling
of written work. Finally, testing entities shall
also consider that because private schools are
not subject to the IDEA, students at private
schools may have a history of receiving
accommodations in similar settings that are
not pursuant to an IEP or Section 504 Plan.
Some testing entities sought clarification
that they should only be required to consider
particular use of past modifications,
accommodations, auxiliary aids or services
received by testing candidates for prior
testing and examination settings. These
commenters noted that it would be unhelpful
to consider the classroom accommodations
for a testing candidate, as those
accommodations would not typically apply
in a standardized test setting. The
Department’s history of enforcement in this
area has demonstrated that a recent history
of past accommodations is critical to an
understanding of the applicant’s disability
and the appropriateness of testing
accommodations.
The Department also incorporates the
NPRM preamble’s ‘‘timely manner’’ concept
into the new regulatory language at
§ 36.309(b)(1)(vi). Under this provision,
testing entities are required to respond in a
timely manner to requests for testing
accommodations in order to ensure equal
opportunity for persons with disabilities.
Testing entities are to ensure that their
established process for securing testing
accommodations provides applicants with a
reasonable opportunity to supplement the
testing entities’ requests for additional
information, if necessary, and still be able to
take the test in the same testing cycle. A
disability rights organization commented that
testing entities should not subject applicants
to unreasonable and intrusive requests for
information in a process that should provide
persons with disabilities effective
modifications in a timely manner, fulfilling
the core objective of title III to provide equal
access. Echoing this perspective, several
disability rights organizations and a State
government commenter urged that testing
entities should not make unreasonably
burdensome demands for documentation,
particularly where those demands create
impediments to receiving accommodations in
a timely manner. Access to examinations
should be offered to persons with disabilities
PO 00000
Frm 00136
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
in as timely a manner as it is offered to
persons without disabilities. Failure by a
testing entity to act in a timely manner,
coupled with seeking unnecessary
documentation, could result in such an
extended delay that it constitutes a denial of
equal opportunity or equal treatment in an
examination setting for persons with
disabilities.
Section 36.311 Mobility Devices
Section 36.311 of the NPRM clarified the
scope and circumstances under which
covered entities are legally obligated to
accommodate various ‘‘mobility devices.’’
Section 36.311 set forth specific requirements
for the accommodation of mobility devices,
including wheelchairs, manually-powered
mobility aids, and other power-driven
mobility devices.
In both the NPRM and the final rule,
§ 36.311(a) states the general rule that in any
areas open to pedestrians, public
accommodations shall permit individuals
with mobility disabilities to use wheelchairs
and manually-powered mobility aids,
including walkers, crutches, canes, braces, or
similar devices. Because mobility scooters
satisfy the definition of ‘‘wheelchair’’ (i.e., ‘‘a
manually-operated or power-driven device
designed primarily for use by an individual
with a mobility disability for the main
purpose of indoor, or of both indoor and
outdoor locomotion’’), the reference to them
in § 36.311(a) of the final rule has been
omitted to avoid redundancy.
Most business commenters expressed
concern that permitting the use of other
power-driven mobility devices by
individuals with mobility disabilities would
make such devices akin to wheelchairs and
would require them to make physical
changes to their facilities to accommodate
their use. This concern is misplaced. If a
facility complies with the applicable design
requirements in the 1991 Standards or the
2010 Standards, the public accommodation
will not be required to exceed those
standards to accommodate the use of
wheelchairs or other power-driven mobility
devices that exceed those requirements.
Legal standard for other power-driven
mobility devices. The NPRM version of
§ 36.311(b) provided that a public
accommodation ‘‘shall make reasonable
modifications in its policies, practices, and
procedures to permit the use of other powerdriven mobility devices by individuals with
disabilities, unless the public
accommodation can demonstrate that the use
of the device is not reasonable or that its use
will result in a fundamental alteration in the
nature of the public accommodation’s goods,
services, facilities, privileges, advantages, or
accommodations.’’ 73 FR 34508, 34556 (June
17, 2008). In other words, public
accommodations are by default required to
permit the use of other power-driven
mobility devices; the burden is on them to
prove the existence of a valid exception.
Most commenters supported the notion of
assessing whether the use of a particular
device is reasonable in the context of a
particular venue. Commenters, however,
disagreed about the meaning of the word
‘‘reasonable’’ as it is used in § 36.311(b) of the
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
NPRM. Virtually every business and industry
commenter took the use of the word
‘‘reasonable’’ to mean that a general
reasonableness standard would be applied in
making such an assessment. Advocacy and
nonprofit groups almost universally objected
to the use of a general reasonableness
standard with regard to the assessment of
whether a particular device should be
allowed at a particular venue. They argued
that the assessment should be based on
whether reasonable modifications could be
made to allow a particular device at a
particular venue, and that the only factors
that should be part of the calculus that
results in the exclusion of a particular device
are undue burden, direct threat, and
fundamental alteration.
A few commenters opposed the proposed
provision requiring public accommodations
to assess whether reasonable modifications
can be made to allow other power-driven
mobility devices, preferring instead that the
Department issue guidance materials so that
public accommodations would not have to
incur the cost of such analyses. Another
commenter noted a ‘‘fox guarding the hen
house’’-type of concern with regard to public
accommodations developing and enforcing
their own modification policy.
In response to comments received, the
Department has revised § 36.311(b) to
provide greater clarity regarding the
development of legitimate safety
requirements regarding other power-driven
mobility devices. The Department has not
retained the proposed NPRM language stating
that an other power-driven mobility device
can be excluded if a public accommodation
can demonstrate that the use of the device is
not reasonable or that its use fundamentally
alters the nature of the goods, services,
facilities, privileges, advantages, or
accommodations offered by the public
accommodation because the Department
believes that these exceptions are covered by
the general reasonable modification
requirement contained in § 36.302.
Assessment factors. Section 36.311(c) of
the NPRM required public accommodations
to ‘‘establish policies to permit the use of
other power-driven mobility devices’’ and
articulated four factors upon which public
accommodations must base decisions as to
whether a modification is reasonable to allow
the use of a class of other power-driven
mobility devices by individuals with
disabilities in specific venues (e.g., doctors’
offices, parks, commercial buildings, etc.). 73
FR 34508, 34556 (June 17, 2008).
The Department has relocated and
modified the NPRM text that appeared in
§ 36.311(c) to new paragraph § 36.311(b)(2) to
clarify what factors the public
accommodation shall use in determining
whether a particular other power-driven
mobility device can be allowed in a specific
facility as a reasonable modification. Section
36.311(b)(2) now states that ‘‘[i]n determining
whether a particular other power-driven
mobility device can be allowed in a specific
facility as a reasonable modification under
(b)(1), a public accommodation shall
consider’’ certain enumerated factors. The
assessment factors are designed to assist
public accommodations in determining
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
whether allowing the use of a particular other
power-driven mobility device in a specific
facility is reasonable. Thus, the focus of the
analysis must be on the appropriateness of
the use of the device at a specific facility,
rather than whether it is necessary for an
individual to use a particular device.
The NPRM proposed the following specific
assessment factors: (1) The dimensions,
weight, and operating speed of the mobility
device in relation to a wheelchair; (2) the
potential risk of harm to others by the
operation of the mobility device; (3) the risk
of harm to the environment or natural or
cultural resources or conflict with Federal
land management laws and regulations; and
(4) the ability of the public accommodation
to stow the mobility device when not in use,
if requested by the user.
Factor 1 was designed to help public
accommodations assess whether a particular
device was appropriate, given its particular
physical features, for a particular location.
Virtually all commenters said the physical
features of the device affected their view of
whether a particular device was appropriate
for a particular location. For example, while
many commenters supported the use of an
other power-driven mobility device if the
device were a Segway® PT, because of
environmental and health concerns they did
not offer the same level of support if the
device were an off-highway vehicle, allterrain vehicle (ATV), golf car, or other
device with a fuel-powered or combustion
engine. Most commenters noted that
indicators such as speed, weight, and
dimension really were an assessment of the
appropriateness of a particular device in
specific venues and suggested that factor 1
say this more specifically.
The term ‘‘in relation to a wheelchair’’ in
the NPRM’s factor 1 apparently created some
concern that the same legal standards that
apply to wheelchairs would be applied to
other power-driven mobility devices. The
Department has omitted the term ‘‘in relation
to a wheelchair’’ from § 36.311(b)(2)(i) to
clarify that if a facility that is in compliance
with the applicable provisions of the 1991
Standards or the 2010 Standards grants
permission for an other power-driven
mobility device to go on-site, it is not
required to exceed those standards to
accommodate the use of other power-driven
mobility devices.
In response to requests that NPRM factor
1 state more specifically that it requires an
assessment of an other power-driven mobility
device’s appropriateness under particular
circumstances or in particular venues, the
Department has added several factors and
more specific language. In addition, although
the NPRM made reference to the operation of
other power-driven mobility devices in
‘‘specific venues,’’ the Department’s intent is
captured more clearly by referencing
‘‘specific facility’’ in paragraph (b)(2). The
Department also notes that while speed is
included in factor 1, public accommodations
should not rely solely on a device’s top speed
when assessing whether the device can be
accommodated; instead, public
accommodations should also consider the
minimum speeds at which a device can be
operated and whether the development of
PO 00000
Frm 00137
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56299
speed limit policies can be established to
address concerns regarding the speed of the
device. Finally, since the ability of the public
accommodation to stow the mobility device
when not in use is an aspect of its design and
operational characteristics, the text proposed
as factor 4 in the NPRM has been
incorporated in paragraph (b)(2)(iii).
The NPRM’s version of factor 2 provided
that the ‘‘potential risk of harm to others by
the operation of the mobility device’’ is one
of the determinants in the assessment of
whether other power-driven mobility devices
should be excluded from a site. With this
language, the Department intended to
incorporate the safety standard found in
§ 36.301(b), which provides that public
accommodations may ‘‘impose legitimate
safety requirements that are necessary for
safe operation’’ into the assessment. However,
several commenters indicated that they read
this language, particularly the phrase
‘‘potential risk of harm’’ to mean that the
Department had adopted a concept of risk
analysis different from that which is in the
existing standards. The Department did not
intend to create a new standard and has
changed the language in paragraphs (b)(1)
and (b)(2) to clarify the applicable standards,
thereby avoiding the introduction of new
assessments of risk beyond those necessary
for the safe operation of the public
accommodation.
While all applicable affirmative defenses
are available to public accommodations in
the establishment and execution of their
policies regarding other power-driven
mobility devices, the Department did not
explicitly incorporate the direct threat
defense into the assessment factors because
§ 36.301(b) provides public accommodations
the appropriate framework with which to
assess whether legitimate safety requirements
that may preclude the use of certain other
power-driven mobility devices are necessary
for the safe operation of the public
accommodation. In order to be legitimate, the
safety requirement must be based on actual
risks and not mere speculation regarding the
device or how it will be operated. Of course,
public accommodations may enforce
legitimate safety rules established for the
operation of other-power driven mobility
devices (e.g., reasonable speed restrictions).
Finally, NPRM factor 3 concerning
environmental resources and conflicts of law
has been relocated to paragraph (b)(2)(v).
As a result of these comments and
requests, NPRM factors 1, 2, 3, and 4 have
been revised and renumbered within
paragraph 36.311(b)(2) in the final rule.
Several commenters requested that the
Department provide guidance materials or
more explicit concepts of which
considerations might be appropriate for
inclusion in a policy that allows the use of
other power-driven mobility devices. A
public accommodation that has determined
that reasonable modifications can be made in
its policies, practices, or procedures to allow
the use of other power-driven mobility
devices should develop a policy that clearly
states the circumstances under which the use
of other power-driven mobility devices by
individuals with a mobility disability will be
permitted. It also should include clear,
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56300
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
concise statements of specific rules governing
the operation of such devices. Finally, the
public accommodation should endeavor to
provide individuals with disabilities who use
other power-driven mobility devices with
advanced notice of its policy regarding the
use of such devices and what rules apply to
the operation of these devices.
For example, the U.S. General Services
Administration (GSA) has developed a policy
allowing the use of the Segway® PT and
other EPAMDs in all Federal buildings under
GSA’s jurisdiction. See General Services
Administration, Interim Segway® Personal
Transporter Policy (Dec. 3, 2007), available at
https://www.gsa.gov/graphics/pbs/
Interim_Segway_Policy_121007.pdf (last
visited June 24, 2010). The GSA policy
defines the policy’s scope of coverage by
setting out what devices are and are not
covered by the policy. The policy also sets
out requirements for safe operation, such as
a speed limit, prohibits the use of EPAMDs
on escalators, and provides guidance
regarding security screening of these devices
and their operators.
A public accommodation that determines
that it can make reasonable modifications to
permit the use of an other power-driven
mobility device by an individual with a
mobility disability might include in its policy
the procedure by which claims that the other
power-driven mobility device is being used
for a mobility disability will be assessed for
legitimacy (i.e., a credible assurance that the
device is being used for a mobility disability,
including a verbal representation by the
person with a disability that is not
contradicted by observable fact, or the
presentation of a disability parking space
placard or card, or State-issued proof of
disability); the type or classes of other powerdriven mobility devices are permitted to be
used by individuals with mobility
disabilities; the size, weight, and dimensions
of the other power-driven mobility devices
that are permitted to be used by individuals
with mobility disabilities; the speed limit for
the other power-driven mobility devices that
are permitted to be used by individuals with
mobility disabilities; the places, times, or
circumstances under which the use of the
other power-driven mobility devices is or
will be restricted or prohibited; safety,
pedestrian, and other rules concerning the
use of the other power-driven mobility
devices; whether, and under which
circumstances, storage for the other powerdriven mobility devices will be made
available; and how and where individuals
with a mobility disability can obtain a copy
of the other power-driven mobility device
policy.
Public accommodations also might
consider grouping other power-driven
mobility devices by type (e.g., EPAMDs, golf
cars, gasoline-powered vehicles, and other
devices). For example, an amusement park
may determine that it is reasonable to allow
individuals with disabilities to use EPAMDs
in a variety of outdoor programs and
activities, but that it would not be reasonable
to allow the use of golf cars as mobility
devices in similar circumstances. At the same
time, the entity may address its concerns
about factors such as space limitations by
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
disallowing use of EPAMDs by members of
the general public who do not have mobility
disabilities.
The Department anticipates that in many
circumstances, public accommodations will
be able to develop policies that will allow the
use of other power-driven mobility devices
by individuals with mobility disabilities
without resulting in a fundamental alteration
of a public accommodation’s goods, services,
facilities, privileges, advantages, or
accommodations. Consider the following
examples:
Example 1: Although individuals who do
not have mobility disabilities are prohibited
from operating EPAMDs at a theme park, the
park has developed a policy allowing
individuals with mobility disabilities to use
EPAMDs as their mobility device at the park.
The policy states that EPAMDs are allowed
in all areas of the theme park that are open
to pedestrians as a reasonable modification to
its general policy on EPAMDs. The public
accommodation has determined that the
facility provides adequate space for a taller
device, such as an EPAMD, and that it does
not fundamentally alter the nature of the
theme park’s goods and services. The theme
park’s policies do, however, require that
EPAMDs be operated at a safe speed limit. A
theme park employee may inquire at the
ticket gate whether the device is needed due
to the user’s disability or may request the
presentation of a valid, State-issued,
disability parking placard (though
presentation of such a placard is not
necessary), or other State-issued proof of
disability or a credible assurance that the use
of the EPAMD is for the individual’s mobility
disability. The park employee also may
inform an individual with a disability using
an EPAMD that the theme park’s policy
requires that it be operated at or below the
park’s designated speed limit.
Example 2: A shopping mall has developed
a policy whereby EPAMDs may be operated
by individuals with mobility disabilities in
the common pedestrian areas of the mall if
the operator of the device agrees to the
following: to operate the device no faster
than the speed limit set by the policy; to use
the elevator, not the escalator, to transport
the EPAMD to different levels; to yield to
pedestrian traffic; not to leave the device
unattended unless it can stand upright and
has a locking system; to refrain from using
the device temporarily if the mall manager
determines that the volume of pedestrian
traffic is such that the operation of the device
would interfere with legitimate safety
requirements; and to present the mall
management office with a valid, State-issued,
disability parking placard (though
presentation of such a placard is not
necessary), or State-issued proof of disability,
as a credible assurance that the use of the
EPAMD is for the individual’s mobility
disability, upon entry to the mall.
Inquiry into the use of other power-driven
mobility device. Section 36.311(d) of the
NPRM provided that a ‘‘public
accommodation may ask a person using a
power-driven mobility device if the mobility
device is required because of the person’s
disability. A public accommodation shall not
PO 00000
Frm 00138
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
ask a person using a mobility device
questions about the nature and extent of the
person’s disability.’’ 73 FR 34508, 34556
(June 17, 2008).
While business commenters did not take
issue with applying this standard to
individuals who use wheelchairs, they were
not satisfied with the application of this
standard to other power-driven mobility
devices. Business commenters expressed
concern about people feigning mobility
disabilities to be able to use other powerdriven mobility devices in public
accommodations in which their use is
otherwise restricted. These commenters felt
that a mere inquiry into whether the device
is being used for a mobility disability was an
insufficient mechanism by which to detect
fraud by other power-driven mobility device
users who do not have mobility disabilities.
These commenters believed they should be
given more latitude to make inquiries of
other power-driven mobility device users
claiming a mobility disability than they
would be given for wheelchair users. They
sought the ability to establish a policy or
method by which public accommodations
may assess the legitimacy of the mobility
disability. They suggested some form of
certification, sticker, or other designation.
One commenter suggested a requirement that
a sticker bearing the international symbol for
accessibility be placed on the device or that
some other identification be required to
signal that the use of the device is for a
mobility disability. Other suggestions
included displaying a disability parking
placard on the device or issuing EPAMDs,
like the Segway® PT, a permit that would be
similar to permits associated with parking
spaces reserved for those with disabilities.
Advocacy, nonprofit, and several
individual commenters balked at the notion
of allowing any inquiry beyond whether the
device is necessary for a mobility disability
and encouraged the Department to retain the
NPRM’s language on this topic. Other
commenters, however, were empathetic with
commenters who had concerns about fraud.
At least one Segway® PT advocate suggested
it would be permissible to seek
documentation of the mobility disability in
the form of a simple sign or permit.
The Department has sought to find
common ground by balancing the needs of
businesses and individuals with mobility
disabilities wishing to use other powerdriven mobility devices with the
Department’s longstanding, well-established
policy of not allowing public
accommodations or establishments to require
proof of a mobility disability. There is no
question that public accommodations have a
legitimate interest in ferreting out fraudulent
representations of mobility disabilities,
especially given the recreational use of other
power-driven mobility devices and the
potential safety concerns created by having
too many such devices in a specific facility
at one time. However, the privacy of
individuals with mobility disabilities and
respect for those individuals are also vitally
important.
Neither § 36.311(d) of the NPRM nor
§ 36.311(c) of the final rule permits inquiries
into the nature of a person’s mobility
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
disability. However, the Department does not
believe it is unreasonable or overly intrusive
for an individual with a mobility disability
seeking to use an other power-driven
mobility device to provide a credible
assurance to verify that the use of the other
power-driven mobility device is for a
mobility disability. The Department sought to
minimize the amount of discretion and
subjectivity exercised by public
accommodations in assessing whether an
individual has a mobility disability and to
allow public accommodations to verify the
existence of a mobility disability. The
solution was derived from comments made
by several individuals who said they have
been admitted with their Segway® PTs into
public entities and public accommodations
that ordinarily do not allow these devices onsite when they have presented or displayed
State-issued disability parking placards. In
the examples provided by commenters, the
parking placards were accepted as
verification that the Segway® PTs were being
used as mobility devices.
Because many individuals with mobility
disabilities avail themselves of State
programs that issue disability parking
placards or cards and because these programs
have penalties for fraudulent representations
of identity and disability, utilizing the
parking placard system as a means to
establish the existence of a mobility
disability strikes a balance between the need
for privacy of the individual and fraud
protection for the public accommodation.
Consequently, the Department has decided to
include regulatory text in § 36.311(c)(2) of the
final rule that requires public
accommodations to accept the presentation
of a valid, State-issued disability parking
placard or card, or State-issued proof of
disability, as verification that an individual
uses the other power-driven mobility device
for his or her mobility disability. A ‘‘valid’’
disability placard or card is one that is
presented by the individual to whom it was
issued and is otherwise in compliance with
the State of issuance’s requirements for
disability placards or cards. Public
accommodations are required to accept a
valid, State-issued disability parking placard
or card, or State-issued proof of disability, as
a credible assurance, but they cannot demand
or require the presentation of a valid
disability placard or card, or State-issued
proof of disability, as a prerequisite for use
of an other power-driven mobility device,
because not all persons with mobility
disabilities have such means of proof. If an
individual with a mobility disability does not
have such a placard or card, or State-issued
proof of disability, he or she may present
other information that would serve as a
credible assurance of the existence of a
mobility disability.
In lieu of a valid, State-issued disability
parking placard or card, or State-issued proof
of disability, a verbal representation, not
contradicted by observable fact, shall be
accepted as a credible assurance that the
other power-driven mobility device is being
used because of a mobility disability. This
does not mean, however, that a mobility
disability must be observable as a condition
for allowing the use of an other power-driven
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
mobility device by an individual with a
mobility disability, but rather that if an
individual represents that a device is being
used for a mobility disability and that
individual is observed thereafter engaging in
a physical activity that is contrary to the
nature of the represented disability, the
assurance given is no longer credible and the
individual may be prevented from using the
device.
Possession of a valid, State-issued
disability parking placard or card or a verbal
assurance does not trump a public
accommodation’s valid restrictions on the
use of other power-driven mobility devices.
Accordingly, a credible assurance that the
other power-driven mobility device is being
used because of a mobility disability is not
a guarantee of entry to a public
accommodation because notwithstanding
such a credible assurance, use of the device
in a particular venue may be at odds with the
legal standard in § 36.311(b)(1) or with one
or more of the § 36.311(b)(2) factors. Only
after an individual with a disability has
satisfied all of the public accommodation’s
policies regarding the use of other powerdriven mobility devices does a credible
assurance become a factor in allowing the use
of the device. For example, if an individual
seeking to use an other power-driven
mobility device fails to satisfy any of the
public accommodation’s stated policies
regarding the use of other power-driven
mobility devices, the fact that the individual
legitimately possesses and presents a valid,
State-issued disability parking placard or
card, or State-issued proof of disability, does
not trump the policy and require the public
accommodation to allow the use of the
device. In fact, in some instances, the
presentation of a legitimately held placard or
card, or State-issued proof of disability, will
have no relevance or bearing at all on
whether the other power-driven mobility
device may be used, because the public
accommodation’s policy does not permit the
device in question on-site under any
circumstances (e.g., because its use would
create a substantial risk of serious harm to
the immediate environment or natural or
cultural resources). Thus, an individual with
a mobility disability who presents a valid
disability placard or card, or State-issued
proof of disability, will not be able to use an
ATV as an other power-driven mobility
device in a mall or a restaurant if the mall
or restaurant has adopted a policy banning
their use for any or all of the abovementioned reasons.
However, an individual with a mobility
disability who has complied with a public
accommodation’s stated policies cannot be
refused use of the other power-driven
mobility device if he or she has provided a
credible assurance that the use of the device
is for a mobility disability.
Subpart D—New Construction and
Alterations
Subpart D establishes the title III
requirements applicable to new construction
and alterations. The Department has
amended this subpart to adopt the 2004
ADAAG, set forth the effective dates for
PO 00000
Frm 00139
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56301
implementation of the 2010 Standards, and
make related revisions as described below.
Section 36.403 Alterations: Path of Travel
In the NPRM, the Department proposed
one change to § 36.403 on alterations and
path of travel by adding a path of travel safe
harbor. Proposed § 36.403(a)(1) stated that if
a private entity has constructed or altered
required elements of a path of travel in
accordance with the 1991 Standards, the
private entity is not required to retrofit such
elements to reflect incremental changes in
the 2010 Standards solely because of an
alteration to a primary function area served
by that path of travel.
A substantial number of commenters
objected to the Department’s creation of a
safe harbor for alterations to required
elements of a path of travel that comply with
the current 1991 Standards. These
commenters argued that if a public
accommodation already is in the process of
altering its facility, there should be a legal
requirement that individuals with disabilities
are entitled to increased accessibility
provided by the 2004 ADAAG for path of
travel work. These commenters also stated
that they did not believe there was a statutory
basis for ‘‘grandfathering’’ facilities that
comply with the 1991 Standards. Another
commenter argued that the updates
incorporated into the 2004 ADAAG provide
very substantial improvements for access,
and that since there already is a 20 percent
cost limit on the amount that can be
expended on path of travel alterations, there
is no need for a further limitation.
Some commenters supported the safe
harbor as lessening the economic costs of
implementing the 2004 ADAAG for existing
facilities. One commenter also stated that
without the safe harbor, entities that already
have complied with the 1991 Standards will
have to make and pay for compliance twice,
as compared to those entities that made no
effort to comply in the first place. Another
commenter asked that the safe harbor be
revised to include pre-ADA facilities that
have been made compliant with the 1991
Standards to the extent ‘‘readily achievable’’
or, in the case of alterations, ‘‘to the
maximum extent feasible,’’ but that are not in
full compliance with the 1991 Standards.
The final rule retains the safe harbor for
required elements of a path of travel to
altered primary function areas for private
entities that already have complied with the
1991 Standards with respect to those
required elements. As discussed with respect
to § 36.304, the Department believes that this
safe harbor strikes an appropriate balance
between ensuring that individuals with
disabilities are provided access to buildings
and facilities and mitigating potential
financial burdens on existing places of public
accommodation that are undertaking
alterations subject to the 2010 Standards.
This safe harbor is not a blanket exemption
for facilities. If a private entity undertakes an
alteration to a primary function area, only the
required elements of a path of travel to that
area that already comply with the 1991
Standards are subject to the safe harbor. If a
private entity undertakes an alteration to a
primary function area and the required
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56302
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
elements of a path of travel to the altered area
do not comply with the 1991 Standards, then
the private entity must bring those elements
into compliance with the 2010 Standards.
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Section 36.405 Alterations: Historic
Preservation
In the 1991 rule, the Department provided
guidance on making alterations to buildings
or facilities that are eligible for listing in the
National Register of Historic Places under the
National Historic Preservation Act or that are
designated as historic under State or local
law. That provision referenced the 1991
Standards. Because those cross-references to
the 1991 Standards are no longer applicable,
it is necessary in this final rule to provide
new regulatory text. No substantive change in
the Department’s approach in this area is
intended by this revision.
Section 36.406 Standards for New
Construction and Alterations
Applicable standards. Section 306 of the
ADA, 42 U.S.C. 12186, directs the Attorney
General to issue regulations to implement
title III that are consistent with the guidelines
published by the Access Board. As described
in greater detail elsewhere in this Appendix,
the Department is a statutory member of the
Access Board and was involved significantly
in the development of the 2004 ADAAG.
Nonetheless, the Department has reviewed
the standards and has determined that
additional regulatory provisions are
necessary to clarify how the Department will
apply the 2010 Standards to places of
lodging, social service center establishments,
housing at a place of education, assembly
areas, and medical care facilities. Those
provisions are contained in § 36.406(c)–(g).
Each of these provisions is discussed below.
Section 36.406(a) adopts the 2004 ADAAG
as part of the 2010 Standards and establishes
the compliance date and triggering events for
the application of those standards to both
new construction and alterations. Appendix
B of this final rule (Analysis and
Commentary on the 2010 ADA Standards for
Accessible Design) provides a description of
the major changes in the 2010 Standards (as
compared to the 1991 ADAAG) and a
discussion of the public comments that the
Department received on specific sections of
the 2004 ADAAG. A number of commenters
asked the Department to revise certain
provisions in the 2004 ADAAG in a manner
that would reduce either the required
scoping or specific technical accessibility
requirements. As previously stated, the ADA
requires the Department to adopt standards
consistent with the guidelines adopted by the
Access Board. The Department will not adopt
any standards that provide less accessibility
than is provided under the guidelines
contained in the 2004 ADAAG because the
guidelines adopted by the Access Board are
‘‘minimum guidelines.’’ 42 U.S.C. 12186(c).
In the NPRM, the Department specifically
proposed amending § 36.406(a) by dividing it
into two sections. Proposed § 36.406(a)(1)
specified that new construction and
alterations subject to this part shall comply
with the 1991 Standards if physical
construction of the property commences less
than six months after the effective date of the
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
rule. Proposed § 36.406(a)(2) specified that
new construction and alterations subject to
this part shall comply with the proposed
standards if physical construction of the
property commences six months or more
after the effective date of the rule. The
Department also proposed deleting the
advisory information now published in a
table at § 36.406(b).
Compliance date. When the ADA was
enacted, the compliance dates for various
provisions were delayed in order to provide
time for covered entities to become familiar
with their new obligations. Titles II and III
of the ADA generally became effective on
January 26, 1992, six months after the
regulations were published. See 42 U.S.C.
12131 note; 42 U.S.C. 12181 note. New
construction under title II and alterations
under either title II or title III had to comply
with the design standards on that date. See
42 U.S.C. 12131 note; 42 U.S.C. 12183(a)(2).
For new construction under title III, the
requirements applied to facilities designed
and constructed for first occupancy after
January 26, 1993—18 months after the 1991
Standards were published by the
Department. See 42 U.S.C. 12183(a)(1).
The Department received numerous
comments on the issue of effective date,
many of them similar to those received in
response to the ANPRM. A substantial
number of commenters advocated a
minimum of 18 months from publication of
the final rule to the effective date for
application of the standards to new
construction, consistent with the time period
used for implementation of the 1991
Standards. Many of these commenters argued
that the 18-month period was necessary to
minimize the likelihood of having to redesign
projects already in the design and permitting
stages at the time that the final rule is
published. According to these commenters,
large projects take several years from design
to occupancy, and can be subject to delays
from obtaining zoning, site approval, thirdparty design approval (i.e., architectural
review), and governmental permits. To the
extent the new standards necessitate changes
in any previous submissions or permits
already issued, businesses might have to
expend significant funds and incur delays
due to redesign and resubmission.
Some commenters also expressed concern
that a six-month period would be hard to
implement given that many renovations are
planned around retail selling periods,
holidays, and other seasonal concerns. For
example, hotels plan renovations during their
slow periods, retail establishments avoid
renovations during the major holiday selling
periods, and businesses in certain parts of the
country cannot do any major construction
during parts of the winter.
Some commenters argued that chain
establishments need additional time to
redesign their ‘‘master facility’’ designs for
replication at multiple locations, taking into
account both the new standards and
applicable State and local accessibility
requirements.
Other commenters argued for extending the
effective date from six months to a minimum
of 12 months for many of the same reasons,
and one commenter argued that there should
PO 00000
Frm 00140
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
be a tolling of the effective date for those
businesses that are in the midst of the
permitting process if the necessary permits
are delayed due to legal challenges or other
circumstances outside the business’s control.
Several commenters took issue with the
Department’s characterization of the 2004
ADAAG and the 1991 Standards as two
similar rules. These commenters argued that
many provisions in the 2004 ADAAG
represent a ‘‘substantial and significant’’
departure from the 1991 Standards and that
it will take a great deal of time and money
to identify all the changes and implement
them. In particular, they were concerned that
small businesses lacked the internal
resources to respond quickly to the new
changes and that they would have to hire
outside experts to assist them. One
commenter expressed concern that regardless
of familiarity with the 2004 ADAAG, since
the 2004 ADAAG standards are organized in
an entirely different manner from the 1991
Standards, and contain, in the commenter’s
view, extensive changes, it will make the
shift from the old to the new standards quite
complicated.
Several commenters also took issue with
the Department’s proffered rationale that by
adopting a six-month effective date, the
Department was following the precedent of
other Federal agencies that have adopted the
2004 ADAAG for facilities whose
accessibility they regulate. These
commenters argued that the Department’s
title III regulation applies to a much broader
range and number of facilities and programs
than the other Federal agencies (i.e.,
Department of Transportation and the
General Services Administration) and that
those agencies regulate accessibility
primarily in either governmental facilities or
facilities operated by quasi-governmental
authorities.
Several commenters representing the
travel, vacation, and golf industries argued
that the Department should adopt a two-year
effective date for new construction. In
addition to many of the arguments made by
commenters in support of an 18-month
effective date, these commenters also argued
that a two-year time frame would allow
States with DOJ-certified building codes to
have the time to amend their codes to meet
the 2004 ADAAG so that design professionals
can work from compatible codes and
standards.
Several commenters recommended treating
alterations differently than new construction,
arguing for a one-year effective date for
alterations. Another commenter representing
building officials argued that a minimum of
a six-month phase-in for alterations was
sufficient, since a very large percentage of
alteration projects ‘‘are of a scale that they
should be able to accommodate the phasein.’’
In contrast, many commenters argued that
the proposed six-month effective date should
be retained in the final rule.
The Department has been persuaded by
concerns raised by some of the commenters
that the six month compliance date proposed
in the NPRM for application of the 2010
Standards may be too short for certain
projects that are already in the midst of the
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
design and permitting process. The
Department has determined that for new
construction and alterations, compliance
with the 2010 Standards will not be required
until 18 months from the date the final rule
is published. This is consistent with the
amount of time given when the 1991
regulation was published. Since many State
and local building codes contain provisions
that are consistent with 2004 ADAAG, the
Department has decided that public
accommodations that choose to comply with
the 2010 Standards as defined in § 36.104
before the compliance date will still be
considered in compliance with the ADA.
However, public accommodations that
choose to comply with the 2010 Standards in
lieu of the 1991 Standards prior to the
compliance date described in this rule must
choose one or the other standard, and may
not rely on some of the requirements
contained in one standard and some of the
requirements contained in the other
standard.
Triggering event. In the NPRM, the
Department proposed using the start of
physical construction as the triggering event
for applying the proposed standards to new
construction under title III. This triggering
event parallels that for the alterations
provisions (i.e., the date on which
construction begins), and would apply
clearly across all types of covered public
accommodations. The Department also
proposed that for prefabricated elements,
such as modular buildings and amusement
park rides and attractions, or installed
equipment, such as ATMs, the start of
construction means the date on which the
site preparation begins. Site preparation
includes providing an accessible route to the
element.
The Department’s NPRM sought public
comment on how to define the start of
construction and the practicality of applying
commencement of construction as a
triggering event. The Department also
requested input on whether the proposed
definition of the start of construction was
sufficiently clear and inclusive of different
types of facilities. The Department also
sought input about facilities subject to title III
for which commencement of construction
would be ambiguous or problematic.
The Department received numerous
comments recommending that the
Department adopt a two-pronged approach to
defining the triggering event. In those cases
where permits are required, the Department
should use ‘‘date of permit application’’ as the
effective date triggering event, and if no
permit is required, the Department should
use ‘‘start of construction.’’ A number of these
commenters argued that the date of permit
application is appropriate because the
applicant would have to consider the
applicable State and Federal accessibility
standards in order to submit the designs
usually required with the application.
Moreover, the date of permit application is a
typical triggering event in other code
contexts, such as when jurisdictions
introduce an updated building code. Some
commenters expressed concern that using the
date of ‘‘start of construction’’ was
problematic because the date can be affected
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
by factors that are outside the control of the
owner. For example, an owner can plan
construction to start before the new standards
take effect and therefore use the 1991
Standards in the design. If permits are not
issued in a timely manner, then the
construction could be delayed until after the
effective date, and then the project would
have to be redesigned. This problem would
be avoided if the permit application date was
the triggering event. Two commenters
expressed concern that the term ‘‘start of
construction’’ is ambiguous, because it is
unclear whether start of construction means
the razing of structures on the site to make
way for a new facility or means site
preparation, such as regrading or laying the
foundation.
One commenter recommended using the
‘‘signing date of a construction contract,’’ and
an additional commenter recommended that
the new standards apply only to ‘‘buildings
permitted after the effective date of the
regulations.’’
One commenter stated that for facilities
that fall outside the building permit
requirements (ATMs, prefabricated saunas,
small sheds), the triggering event should be
the date of installation, rather than the date
the space for the facility is constructed.
The Department is persuaded by the
comments to adopt a two-pronged approach
to defining the triggering event for new
construction and alterations. The final rule
states that in those cases where permits are
required, the triggering event shall be the
date when the last application for a building
permit application or permit extension is
certified to be complete by a State, county,
or local government, or in those jurisdictions
where the government does not certify
completion of applications, the date when
the last application for a building permit or
permit extension is received by the State,
county, or local government. If no permits are
required, then the triggering event shall be
the ‘‘start of physical construction or
alterations.’’ The Department has also added
clarifying language related to the term ‘‘start
of physical construction or alterations’’ to
make it clear that ‘‘start of physical
construction or alterations’’ is not intended to
mean the date of ceremonial groundbreaking
or the date a structure is razed to make it
possible for construction of a facility to take
place.
Amusement rides. Section 234 of the 2010
Standards provides accessibility guidelines
for newly designed and constructed
amusement rides. The amusement ride
provisions do not provide a ‘‘triggering event’’
for new construction or alteration of an
amusement ride. An industry commenter
requested that the triggering event of ‘‘first
use’’ as noted in the Advisory note to section
234.1 of the 2004 ADAAG be included in the
final rule. The Advisory note provides that
‘‘[a] custom designed and constructed ride is
new upon its first use, which is the first time
amusement park patrons take the ride.’’ The
Department declines to treat amusement
rides differently than other types of new
construction and alterations and under the
final rule, they are subject to § 36.406(a)(3).
Thus, newly constructed and altered
amusement rides shall comply with the 2010
PO 00000
Frm 00141
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56303
Standards if the start of physical construction
or the alteration is on or after 18 months from
the publication date of this rule. The
Department also notes that section 234.4.2 of
the 2010 Standards only applies where the
structural or operational characteristics of an
amusement ride are altered. It does not apply
in cases where the only change to a ride is
the theme.
Noncomplying new construction and
alterations. The element-by-element safe
harbor referenced in § 36.304(d)(2) has no
effect on new or altered elements in existing
facilities that were subject to the 1991
Standards on the date that they were
constructed or altered, but do not comply
with the technical and scoping specifications
for those elements in the 1991 Standards.
Section 36.406(a)(5) of the final rule sets
forth the rules for noncompliant new
construction or alterations in facilities that
were subject to the requirements of this part.
Under those provisions, noncomplying new
construction and alterations constructed or
altered after the effective date of the
applicable ADA requirements and before
March 15, 2012 shall, before March 15, 2012,
be made accessible in accordance with either
the 1991 Standards or the 2010 Standards.
Noncomplying new construction and
alterations constructed or altered after the
effective date of the applicable ADA
requirements and before March 15, 2012,
shall, on or after March 15, 2012, be made
accessible in accordance with the 2010
Standards.
Section 36.406(b) Application of Standards
to Fixed Elements
The final rule contains a new § 36.406(b)
that clarifies that the requirements
established by this section, including those
contained in the 2004 ADAAG, prescribe the
requirements necessary to ensure that fixed
or built-in elements in new or altered
facilities are accessible to individuals with
disabilities. Once the construction or
alteration of a facility has been completed, all
other aspects of programs, services, and
activities conducted in that facility are
subject to the operational requirements
established elsewhere in this final rule.
Although the Department has often chosen to
use the requirements of the 1991 Standards
as a guide to determining when and how to
make equipment and furnishings accessible,
those coverage determinations fall within the
discretionary authority of the Department.
The Department is also clarifying that the
advisory notes, appendix notes, and figures
that accompany the 1991 and 2010 Standards
do not establish separately enforceable
requirements unless otherwise specified in
the text of the standards. This clarification
has been made to address concerns expressed
by ANPRM commenters who mistakenly
believed that the advisory notes in the 2004
ADAAG established requirements beyond
those established in the text of the guidelines
(e.g., Advisory 504.4 suggests, but does not
require, that covered entities provide visual
contrast on stair tread nosings to make them
more visible to individuals with low vision).
The Department received no comments on
this provision in the NPRM.
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56304
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
Section 36.406(c) Places of Lodging
In the NPRM, the Department proposed a
new definition for public accommodations
that are ‘‘places of lodging’’ and a new
§ 36.406(c) to clarify the scope of coverage for
places of public accommodation that meet
this definition. For many years the
Department has received inquiries from
members of the public seeking clarification of
ADA coverage of rental accommodations in
timeshares, condominium hotels, and mixeduse and corporate hotel facilities that operate
as places of public accommodation (as that
term is now defined in § 36.104). These
facilities, which have attributes of both
residential dwellings and transient lodging
facilities, have become increasingly popular
since the ADA’s enactment in 1990 and make
up the majority of new hotel construction in
some vacation destinations. The hybrid
residential and lodging characteristics of
these new types of facilities, as well as their
ownership characteristics, complicate
determinations of ADA coverage, prompting
questions from both industry and individuals
with disabilities. While the Department has
interpreted the ADA to encompass these
hotel-like facilities when they are used to
provide transient lodging, the regulation
previously has specifically not addressed
them. In the NPRM, the Department
proposed a new § 36.406(c), entitled ‘‘Places
of Lodging,’’ which was intended to clarify
that places of lodging, including certain
timeshares, condominium hotels, and mixeduse and corporate hotel facilities, shall
comply with the provisions of the proposed
standards, including, but not limited to, the
requirements for transient lodging in sections
224 and 806 of the 2004 ADAAG.
The Department’s NPRM sought public
input on this proposal. The Department
received a substantial number of comments
on these issues from industry representatives,
advocates for persons with disabilities, and
individuals. A significant focus of these
comments was on how the Department
should define and regulate vacation rental
units in timeshares, vacation communities,
and condo-hotels where the units are owned
and controlled by individual owners and
rented out some portion of time to the public,
as compared to traditional hotels and motels
that are owned, controlled, and rented to the
public by one entity.
Scoping and technical requirements
applicable to ‘‘places of lodging.’’ In the
NPRM, the Department asked for public
comment on its proposal in § 36.406(c) to
apply to places of lodging the scoping and
technical requirements for transient lodging,
rather than the scoping and technical
requirements for residential dwelling units.
Commenters generally agreed that the
transient lodging requirements should apply
to places of lodging. Several commenters
stated that the determination as to which
requirements apply should be made based on
the intention for use at the time of design and
construction. According to these
commenters, if units are intended for
transient rentals, then the transient lodging
standards should apply, and if they are
intended to be used for residential purposes,
the residential standards should apply. Some
commenters agreed with the application of
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
transient lodging standards to places of
lodging in general, but disagreed about the
characterization of certain types of facilities
as covered places of lodging.
The Department agrees that the scoping
and technical standards applicable to
transient lodging should apply to facilities
that contain units that meet the definition of
‘‘places of lodging.’’
Scoping for timeshare or condominium
hotels. In the NPRM, the Department sought
comment on the appropriate basis for
determining scoping for a timeshare or
condominium-hotel. A number of
commenters indicated that scoping should be
based on the usage of the facility. Only those
units used for short-term stays should be
counted for application of the transient
lodging standards, while units sold as
residential properties should be treated as
residential units not subject to the ADA. One
commenter stated that scoping should be
based on the maximum number of sleeping
units available for public rental. Another
commenter pointed out that unlike
traditional hotels and motels, the number of
units available for rental in a facility or
development containing individually owned
units is not fixed over time. Owners have the
right to participate in a public rental program
some, all, or none of the time, and individual
owner participation changes from year to
year.
The Department believes that the
determination for scoping should be based on
the number of units in the project that are
designed and constructed with the intention
that their owners may participate in a
transient lodging rental program. The
Department cautions that it is not the number
of owners that actually exercise their right to
participate in the program that determines
the scoping. Rather it is the units that could
be placed into an on-site or off-site transient
lodging rental program. In the final rule, the
Department has added a provision to
§ 36.406(c)(3), which states that units
intended to be used exclusively for
residential purposes that are contained in
facilities that also meet the definition of
place of lodging are not covered by the
transient lodging standards. Title III of the
ADA does not apply to units designed and
constructed with the intention that they be
rented or sold as exclusively residential
units. Such units are covered by the Fair
Housing Act (FHAct), which contains
requirements for certain features of accessible
and adaptable design both for units and for
public and common use areas. All units
designed and constructed with the intention
that they may be used for both residential
and transient lodging purposes are covered
by the ADA and must be counted for
determining the required number of units
that must meet the transient lodging
standards in the 2010 Standards. Public use
and common use areas in facilities
containing units subject to the ADA also
must meet the 2010 Standards. In some
developments, units that may serve as
residential units some of the time and rental
units some of the time will have to meet both
the FHAct and the ADA requirements. For
example, all of the units in a vacation
condominium facility whose owners choose
PO 00000
Frm 00142
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
to rent to the public when they are not using
the units themselves would be counted for
the purposes of determining the appropriate
number of units that must comply with the
2010 Standards. In a newly constructed
condominium that has three floors with units
dedicated to be sold solely as residential
housing and three floors with units that may
be used as residences or hotel units, only the
units on the three latter floors would be
counted for applying the 2010 Standards. In
a newly constructed timeshare development
containing 100 units, all of which may be
made available to the public through an
exchange or rental program, all 100 units
would be counted for purposes of applying
the 2010 Standards.
One commenter also asked the Department
for clarification of how to count individually
owned ‘‘lock-off units.’’ Lock-off units are
units that are multi-bedroom but can be
‘‘locked off’’ into two separate units, each
having individual external access. This
commenter requested that the Department
state in the final rule that individually owned
lock-off units do not constitute multiple
guest rooms for purposes of calculating
compliance with the scoping requirements
for accessible units, since for the most part
the lock-off units are used as part of a larger
accessible unit, and portions of a unit not
locked off would constitute both an
accessible one-bedroom unit or an accessible
two-bedroom unit with the lock-off unit.
It is the Department’s view that lock-off
units that are individually owned that can be
temporarily converted into two units do not
constitute two separate guest rooms for
purposes of calculating compliance with the
scoping requirements.
One commenter asked the Department how
developers should scope units where
buildings are constructed in phases over a
span of years, recommending that the
scoping be based on the total number of units
expected to be constructed at the project and
not on a building-by-building basis or on a
phase-by-phase basis. The Department does
not think scoping should be based on
planned number of units, which may or may
not be actually constructed over a period of
years. However, the Department recognizes
that resort developments may contain
buildings and facilities that are of all sizes
from single-unit cottages to facilities with
hundreds of units. The Department believes
it would be appropriate to allow designers,
builders, and developers to aggregate the
units in facilities with 50 or fewer units that
are subject to a single permit application and
that are on a common site or that are
constructed at the same time for the purposes
of applying the scoping requirements in table
224.2. Facilities with more than 50 units
should be scoped individually in accordance
with the table. The regulation has been
revised to reflect this application of the
scoping requirements.
One commenter also asked the Department
to use the title III regulation to declare that
timeshares subject to the transient lodging
standards are exempt from the design and
construction requirements of the FHAct. The
coverage of the FHAct is set by Congress and
interpreted by regulations issued by the
Department of Housing and Urban
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
Development. The Department has no
authority to exempt anyone from coverage of
the FHAct.
Application of ADA to places of lodging
that contain individually owned units. The
Department believes that regardless of
ownership structure for individual units,
rental programs (whether they are on- or offsite) that make transient lodging guest rooms
available to the public must comply with the
general nondiscrimination requirements of
the ADA. In addition, as provided in
§ 36.406(c), newly constructed facilities that
contain accommodations intended to be used
for transient lodging purposes must comply
with the 2010 Standards.
In the NPRM, the Department asked for
public comment on several issues related to
ensuring the availability of accessible units
in a rental program operated by a place of
lodging. The Department sought input on
how it could address a situation in which a
new or converted facility constructs the
required number of accessible units, but the
owners of those units choose not to
participate in the rental program; whether the
facility has an obligation to encourage or
require owners of accessible units to
participate in the rental program; and
whether the facility developer, the
condominium association, or the hotel
operator has an obligation to retain
ownership or control over a certain number
of accessible units to avoid this problem.
In the NPRM, the Department sought
public input on how to regulate scoping for
a timeshare or condominium-rental facility
that decides, after the sale of units to
individual owners, to begin a rental program
that qualifies the facility as a place of
lodging, and how the condominium
association, operator, or developer should
determine which units to make accessible.
A number of commenters expressed
concerns about the ability of the Department
to require owners of accessible units to
participate in the rental program, to require
developers, condo associations, or
homeowners associations to retain ownership
of accessible units, and to impose
accessibility requirements on individual
owners who choose to place inaccessible
units into a rental program after purchase.
These commenters stated that individuals
who purchase accessible vacation units in
condominiums, individual vacation homes,
and timeshares have ownership rights in
their units and may choose lawfully to make
their units available to the public some, all,
or none of the time. Commenters advised the
Department that the Securities and Exchange
Commission takes the position that if
condominium units are offered in connection
with participation in a required rental
program for any part of the year, require the
use of an exclusive rental agent, or impose
conditions otherwise restricting the
occupancy or rental of the unit, then that
offering will be viewed as an offering of
securities in the form of an investment
(rather than a real estate offering). SEC
Release No. 33–5347, Guidelines as to the
Applicability of the Federal Securities Laws
to Offers and Sales of Condominiums or
Units in a Real Estate Development (Jan. 4,
1973). Consequently, most condominium
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
developers do not impose such restrictions at
the time of sale. Moreover, owners who
choose to rent their units as a short-term
vacation rental can select any rental or
management company to lease and manage
their unit, or they may rent them out on their
own. They also may choose never to lease
those units. Thus, there are no guarantees
that at any particular time, accessible units
will be available for rental by the public.
According to this commenter, providing
incentives for owners of accessible units to
place their units in the rental program will
not work, because it does not guarantee the
availability of the requisite number of rooms
dispersed across the development, and there
is not any reasonable, identifiable source of
funds to cover the costs of such incentives.
A number of commenters also indicated
that it potentially is discriminatory as well as
economically infeasible to require that a
developer hold back the accessible units so
that the units can be maintained in the rental
program year-round. One commenter pointed
out that if a developer did not sell the
accessible condominiums or timeshares in
the building inventory, the developer would
be subject to a potential ADA or FHAct
complaint because persons with disabilities
who wanted to buy accessible units rather
than rent them each year would not have the
option to purchase them. In addition, if a
developer held back accessible units, the cost
of those units would have to be spread across
all the buyers of the inaccessible units, and
in many cases would make the project
financially infeasible. This would be
especially true for smaller projects. Finally,
this commenter argued that requiring units to
be part of the common elements that are
owned by all of the individual unit owners
is infeasible because the common ownership
would result in pooled rental income, which
would transform the owners into participants
in a rental pool, and thus turn the sale of the
condominiums into the sale of securities
under SEC Release 33–5347.
Several commenters noted that requiring
the operator of the rental program to own the
accessible units is not feasible either because
the operator of the rental program would
have to have the funds to invest in the
purchase of all of the accessible units, and it
would not have a means of recouping its
investment. One commenter stated that in
Texas, it is illegal for on-site rental programs
to own condominium units. Another
commenter noted that such a requirement
might lead to the loss of on-site rental
programs, leaving owners to use individual
third-party brokers, or rent the units
privately. One commenter acknowledged that
individual owners cannot be required to
place their units in a rental pool simply to
offer an accessible unit to the public, since
the owners may be purchasing units for their
own use. However, this commenter
recommended that owners who choose to
place their units in a rental pool be required
to contribute to a fund that would be used
to renovate units that are placed in the rental
pool to increase the availability of accessible
units. One commenter argued that the legal
entity running the place of lodging has an
obligation to retain control over the required
number of accessible units to ensure that
they are available in accordance with title III.
PO 00000
Frm 00143
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56305
A number of commenters also argued that
the Department has no legal authority to
require individual owners to engage in
barrier removal where an existing
development adds a rental program. One
commenter stated that Texas law prohibits
the operator of on-site rental program from
demanding that alterations be made to a
particular unit. In addition, under Texas law,
condominium declarations may not require
some units and not others to make changes,
because that would lead to unequal treatment
of units and owners, which is not
permissible.
One commenter stated that since it was not
possible for operators of rental programs
offering privately owned condominiums to
comply with accessible scoping, the
Department should create exemptions from
the accessible scoping, especially for existing
facilities. In addition, this commenter stated
that if an operator of an on-site rental
program were to require renovations as a
condition of participation in the rental
program, unit owners might just rent their
units through a different broker or on their
own, in which case such requirements would
not apply.
A number of commenters argued that if a
development decides to create a rental
program, it must provide accessible units.
Otherwise the development would have to
ensure that units are retrofitted. A
commenter argued that if an existing building
is being converted, the Department should
require that if alterations of the units are
performed by an owner or developer prior to
sale of the units, then the alterations
requirements should apply, in order to
ensure that there are some accessible units in
the rental pool. This commenter stated that
because of the proliferation of these type of
developments in Hawaii, mandatory
alteration is the only way to guarantee the
availability of accessible units in the long
run. In this commenter’s view, since
conversions almost always require makeover
of existing buildings, this will not lead to a
significant expense.
The Department agrees with the
commenters that it would not be feasible to
require developers to hold back or purchase
accessible units for the purposes of making
them available to the public in a transient
lodging rental program, nor would it be
feasible to require individual owners of
accessible units to participate in transient
lodging rental programs.
The Department recognizes that places of
lodging are developed and financed under
myriad ownership and management
structures and agrees that there will be
circumstances where there are legal barriers
to requiring compliance with either the
alterations requirements or the requirements
related to barrier removal. The Department
has added an exception to § 36.406(c),
providing that in existing facilities that meet
the definition of places of lodging, where the
guest rooms are not owned or substantially
controlled by the entity that owns, leases, or
operates the overall facility and the physical
features of the guest room interiors are
controlled by their individual owners, the
units are not subject to the alterations
requirement, even where the owner rents the
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56306
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
unit out to the public through a transient
lodging rental program. In addition, the
Department has added an exception to the
barrier removal requirements at § 36.304(g)
providing that in existing facilities that meet
the definition of places of lodging, where the
guest rooms are not owned or substantially
controlled by the entity that owns, leases, or
operates the overall facility and the physical
features of the guest room interiors are
controlled by their individual owners, the
units are not subject to the barrier removal
requirement. The Department notes,
however, that there are legal relationships for
some timeshares and cooperatives where the
ownership interests do not convey control
over the physical features of units. In those
cases, it may be the case that the facility has
an obligation to meet the alterations or
barrier removal requirements or to maintain
accessible features.
Section 36.406(d) Social Service Center
Establishments
In the NPRM, the Department proposed a
new § 36.406(d) requiring group homes,
halfway houses, shelters, or similar social
service center establishments that provide
temporary sleeping accommodations or
residential dwelling units to comply with the
provisions of the 2004 ADAAG that apply to
residential facilities, including, but not
limited to, the provisions in sections 233 and
809.
The NPRM explained that this proposal
was based on two important changes in the
2004 ADAAG. First, for the first time,
residential dwelling units are explicitly
covered in the 2004 ADAAG in section 233.
Second, the 2004 ADAAG eliminates the
language contained in the 1991 Standards
addressing scoping and technical
requirements for homeless shelters, group
homes, and similar social service center
establishments. Currently, such
establishments are covered in section 9.5 of
the transient lodging section of the 1991
Standards. The deletion of section 9.5 creates
an ambiguity of coverage that must be
addressed.
The NPRM explained the Department’s
belief that transferring coverage of social
service center establishments from the
transient lodging standards to the residential
facilities standards would alleviate
conflicting requirements for social service
providers. The Department believes that a
substantial percentage of social service
providers are recipients of Federal financial
assistance from the Department of Housing
and Urban Development (HUD). The
Department of Health and Human Services
(HHS) also provides financial assistance for
the operation of shelters through the
Administration for Children and Families
programs. As such, they are covered both by
the ADA and section 504. UFAS is currently
the design standard for new construction and
alterations for entities subject to section 504.
The two design standards for accessibility—
the 1991 Standards and UFAS—have
confronted many social service providers
with separate, and sometimes conflicting,
requirements for design and construction of
facilities. To resolve these conflicts, the
residential facilities standards in the 2004
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
ADAAG have been coordinated with the
section 504 requirements. The transient
lodging standards, however, are not similarly
coordinated. The deletion of section 9.5 of
the 1991 Standards from the 2004 ADAAG
presented two options: (1) Require coverage
under the transient lodging standards, and
subject such facilities to separate, conflicting
requirements for design and construction; or
(2) require coverage under the residential
facilities standards, which would harmonizes
the regulatory requirements under the ADA
and section 504. The Department chose the
option that harmonizes the regulatory
requirements: coverage under the residential
facilities standards.
In the NPRM, the Department expressed
concern that the residential facilities
standards do not include a requirement for
clear floor space next to beds similar to the
requirement in the transient lodging
standards; as a result, the Department
proposed adding a provision that would
require certain social service center
establishments that provide sleeping rooms
with more than 25 beds to ensure that a
minimum of 5 percent of the beds have clear
floor space in accordance with section
806.2.3 of the 2004 ADAAG.
The Department requested information
from providers who operate homeless
shelters, transient group homes, halfway
houses, and other social service center
establishments, and from the clients of these
facilities who would be affected by this
proposed change. In the NPRM, the
Department asked to what extent conflicts
between the ADA and section 504 have
affected these facilities and what the effect
would be of applying the residential dwelling
unit requirements to these facilities, rather
than the requirements for transient lodging
guest rooms.
Many of the commenters supported
applying the residential facilities
requirements to social service center
establishments stating that even though the
residential facilities requirements are less
demanding, in some instances, the existence
of one clear standard will result in an overall
increased level of accessibility by eliminating
the confusion and inaction that are
sometimes caused by the current existence of
multiple requirements. One commenter
stated that the residential facilities guidelines
were more appropriate because individuals
housed in social service center
establishments typically stay for a prolonged
period of time, and guests of a transient
lodging facility typically are not housed to
participate in a program or receive services.
One commenter opposed to the proposed
section argued for the application of the
transient lodging standards to all social
service center establishments except those
that were ‘‘intended as a person’s place of
abode,’’ referencing the Department’s
question related to the definition of place of
lodging in the title III NPRM. A second
commenter stated that the use of transient
lodging guidelines would lead to greater
accessibility.
The Department continues to be concerned
about alleviating the challenges for social
service providers that are also subject to
section 504 and that would likely be subject
PO 00000
Frm 00144
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
to conflicting requirements if the transient
lodging standard were applied. Thus, the
Department has retained the requirement that
social service center establishments comply
with the residential dwelling standards. The
Department did not receive comments
regarding adding a requirement for bathing
options, such as a roll-in shower, in social
service center establishments operated by
public accommodations. The Department
did, however, receive comments in support
of adding such a requirement regarding
public entities under title II. The Department
believes that social service center
establishments that provide emergency
shelter to large transient populations should
be able to provide bathing facilities that are
accessible to persons with mobility
disabilities who need roll-in showers.
Because of the transient nature of the
population of these large shelters, it will not
be feasible to modify bathing facilities in a
timely manner when faced with a need to
provide a roll-in shower with a seat when
requested by an overnight visitor. As a result,
the Department has added a requirement that
social service center establishments with
sleeping accommodations for more than 50
individuals must provide at least one roll-in
shower with a seat that complies with the
relevant provisions of section 608 of the 2010
Standards. Transfer-type showers are not
permitted in lieu of a roll-in shower with a
seat, and the exceptions in sections 608.3 and
608.4 for residential dwelling units are not
permitted. When separate shower facilities
are provided for men and for women, at least
one roll-in shower must be provided for each
group. This supplemental requirement to the
residential facilities standards is in addition
to the supplemental requirement that was
proposed in the NPRM for clear floor space
in sleeping rooms with more than 25 beds.
The Department also notes that while
dwelling units at some social service center
establishments are also subject to FHAct
design and construction requirements that
require certain features of adaptable and
accessible design, FHAct units do not
provide the same level of accessibility that is
required for residential facilities under the
2010 Standards. The FHAct requirements,
where also applicable, should not be
considered a substitute for the 2010
Standards. Rather, the 2010 Standards must
be followed in addition to the FHAct
requirements.
The Department also notes that while in
the NPRM the Department used the term
‘‘social service establishment,’’ the final rule
uses the term ‘‘social service center
establishment.’’ The Department has made
this editorial change so that the final rule is
consistent with the terminology used in the
ADA. See 42 U.S.C. 12181(7)(K).
Section 36.406(e) Housing at a Place of
Education
The Department of Justice and the
Department of Education share responsibility
for regulation and enforcement of the ADA in
postsecondary educational settings,
including architectural features. Housing
types in educational settings range from
traditional residence halls and dormitories to
apartment or townhouse-style residences. In
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
addition to title III of the ADA, universities
and schools that are recipients of Federal
financial assistance also are subject to section
504, which contains its own accessibility
requirements currently through the
application of UFAS. Residential housing,
including housing in an educational setting,
is also covered by the FHAct, which requires
newly constructed multifamily housing to
include certain features of accessible and
adaptable design. Covered entities subject to
the ADA must always be aware of, and
comply with, any other Federal statutes or
regulations that govern the operation of
residential properties.
Although the 1991 Standards mention
dormitories as a form of transient lodging,
they do not specifically address how the
ADA applies to dormitories and other types
of residential housing provided in an
educational setting. The 1991 Standards also
do not contain any specific provisions for
residential facilities, allowing covered
entities to elect to follow the residential
standards contained in UFAS. Although the
2004 ADAAG contains provisions for both
residential facilities and transient lodging,
the guidelines do not indicate which
requirements apply to housing provided in
an educational setting, leaving it to the
adopting agencies to make that choice. After
evaluating both sets of standards, the
Department concluded that the benefits of
applying the transient lodging standards
outweighed the benefits of applying the
residential facilities standards. Consequently,
in the NPRM, the Department proposed a
new § 36.406(e) that provided that residence
halls or dormitories operated by or on behalf
of places of education shall comply with the
provisions of the proposed standards for
transient lodging, including, but not limited
to, the provisions in sections 224 and 806 of
the 2004 ADAAG.
Private universities and schools covered by
title III as public accommodations are
required to make their programs and
activities accessible to persons with
disabilities. The housing facilities that they
provide have varied characteristics. College
and university housing facilities typically
provide housing for up to one academic year,
but may be closed during school vacation
periods. In the summer, they often are used
for short-term stays of one to three days, a
week, or several months. Graduate and
faculty housing often is provided year-round
in the form of apartments, which may serve
individuals or families with children. These
housing facilities are diverse in their layout.
Some are double-occupancy rooms with a
shared toilet and bathing room, which may
be inside or outside the unit. Others may
contain cluster, suite, or group arrangements
where several rooms are located inside a
defined unit with bathing, kitchen, and
similar common facilities. In some cases,
these suites are indistinguishable in features
from traditional apartments. Universities may
build their own housing facilities or enter
into agreements with private developers to
build, own, or lease housing to the
educational institution or to its students.
Academic housing may be located on the
campus of the university or may be located
in nearby neighborhoods.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
Throughout the school year and the
summer, academic housing can become
program areas in which small groups meet,
receptions and educational sessions are held,
and social activities occur. The ability to
move between rooms—both accessible rooms
and standard rooms—in order to socialize, to
study, and to use all public use and common
use areas is an essential part of having access
to these educational programs and activities.
Academic housing also is used for short-term
transient educational programs during the
time students are not in regular residence
and may be rented out to transient visitors in
a manner similar to a hotel for special
university functions.
The Department was concerned that
applying the new construction requirements
for residential facilities to educational
housing facilities could hinder access to
educational programs for students with
disabilities. Elevators generally are not
required under the 2004 ADAAG residential
facilities standards unless they are needed to
provide an accessible route from accessible
units to public use and common use areas,
while under the 2004 ADAAG as it applies
to other types of facilities, multistory private
facilities must have elevators unless they
meet very specific exceptions. In addition,
the residential facilities standards do not
require accessible roll-in showers in
bathrooms, while the transient lodging
requirements require some of the accessible
units to be served by bathrooms with roll-in
showers. The transient lodging standards also
require that a greater number of units have
accessible features for persons with
communication disabilities. The transient
lodging standards provide for installation of
the required accessible features so that they
are available immediately, but the residential
facilities standards allow for certain features
of the unit to be adaptable. For example, only
reinforcements for grab bars need to be
provided in residential dwellings, but the
actual grab bars must be installed under the
transient lodging standards. By contrast, the
residential facilities standards do require
certain features that provide greater
accessibility within units, such as usable
kitchens and an accessible route throughout
the dwelling. The residential facilities
standards also require 5 percent of the units
to be accessible to persons with mobility
disabilities, which is a continuation of the
same scoping that is currently required under
UFAS and is therefore applicable to any
educational institution that is covered by
section 504. The transient lodging standards
require a lower percentage of accessible
sleeping rooms for facilities with large
numbers of rooms than is required by UFAS.
For example, if a dormitory has 150 rooms,
the transient lodging standards would require
7 accessible rooms, while the residential
standards would require 8. In a large
dormitory with 500 rooms, the transient
lodging standards would require 13
accessible rooms, and the residential
facilities standards would require 25. There
are other differences between the two sets of
standards, including requirements for
accessible windows, alterations, kitchens, an
accessible route throughout a unit, and clear
floor space in bathrooms allowing for a side
transfer.
PO 00000
Frm 00145
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56307
In the NPRM, the Department requested
public comment on how to scope educational
housing facilities, and it asked whether the
residential facilities requirements or the
transient lodging requirements in the 2004
ADAAG would be more appropriate for
housing at places of education and asked
how the different requirements would affect
the cost of building new dormitories and
other student housing. See 73 FR 34508,
34545 (June 17, 2008).
The Department received several
comments on this issue under title III. One
commenter stated that the Department
should adopt the residential facilities
standards for housing at a place of education.
In the commenter’s view, the residential
facilities standards are congruent with
overlapping requirements imposed by HUD,
and the residential facilities requirements
would ensure dispersion of accessible
features more effectively. This commenter
also argued that while the increased number
of required accessible units for residential
facilities as compared to transient lodging
may increase the cost of construction or
alteration, this cost would be offset by a
reduced need later to adapt rooms if the
demand for accessible rooms exceeds the
supply. The commenter also encouraged the
Department to impose a visitability
(accessible doorways and necessary clear
floor space for turning radius) requirement
for both the residential facilities and
transient lodging requirements to allow
students with mobility impairments to
interact and socialize in a fully integrated
fashion. Another commenter stated that
while dormitories should be treated like
residences as opposed to transient lodging,
the Department should ensure that ‘‘all floors
are accessible,’’ thus ensuring community
integration and visitability. Another
commenter argued that housing at a place of
education is comparable to residential
housing, and that most of the housing types
used by schools do not have the same
amenities and services or function like
transient lodging and should not be treated
as such.
Several commenters focused on the length
of stay at this type of housing and suggested
that if the facilities are subject to occupancy
for greater than 30 days, the residential
standards should apply. Another commenter
supported the Department’s adoption of the
transient lodging standards, arguing this will
provide greater accessibility and therefore
increase opportunities for students with
disabilities to participate. One commenter,
while supporting the use of transient lodging
standards in this area, argued that the
Department also should develop regulations
relating to the usability of equipment in
housing facilities by persons who are blind
or visually impaired. Another commenter
argued that the Department should not
impose the transient lodging requirements on
K–12 schools because the cost of adding
elevators can be prohibitive, and because
there are safety concerns related to
evacuating students in wheelchairs living on
floors above the ground floor in emergencies
causing elevator failures.
The Department has considered the
comments recommending the use of the
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56308
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
residential facilities standards and
acknowledges that they require certain
features that are not included in the transient
lodging standards and that should be
required for housing provided at a place of
education. In addition, the Department notes
that since educational institutions often use
their academic housing facilities as shortterm transient lodging in the summers, it is
important that accessible features be installed
at the outset. It is not realistic to expect that
the educational institution will be able to
adapt a unit in a timely manner in order to
provide accessible accommodations to
someone attending a one-week program
during the summer.
The Department has determined that the
best approach to this type of housing is to
continue to require the application of
transient lodging standards but, at the same
time, to add several requirements drawn from
the residential facilities standards related to
accessible turning spaces and work surfaces
in kitchens, and the accessible route
throughout the unit. This will ensure the
maintenance of the transient lodging
standard requirements related to access to all
floors of the facility, roll-in showers in
facilities with more than 50 sleeping rooms,
and other important accessibility features not
found in the residential facilities standards,
but also will ensure usable kitchens and
access to all the rooms in a suite or
apartment.
The Department has added a new
definition to § 36.104, ‘‘Housing at a Place of
Education,’’ and has revised § 36.406(e) to
reflect the accessible features that now will
be required in addition to the requirements
set forth under the transient lodging
standards. The Department also recognizes
that some educational institutions provide
some residential housing on a year-round
basis to graduate students and staff that is
comparable to private rental housing but
contains no facilities for educational
programming. Section 36.406(e)(3) exempts
from the transient lodging standards
apartments or townhouse facilities that are
provided with a lease on a year-round basis
exclusively to graduate students or faculty
and that do not contain any public use or
common use areas available for educational
programming; instead, such housing must
comply with the requirements for residential
facilities in sections 233 and 809 of the 2010
Standards.
The regulatory text uses the term ‘‘sleeping
room’’ in lieu of the term ‘‘guest room,’’ which
is the term used in the transient lodging
standards. The Department is using this term
because it believes that for the most part, it
provides a better description of the sleeping
facilities used in a place of education than
‘‘guest room.’’ The final rule states in
§ 36.406(e) that the Department intends the
terms to be used interchangeably in the
application of the transient lodging standards
to housing at a place of education.
Section 36.406(f) Assembly Areas
In the NPRM, the Department proposed
§ 36.406(f) to supplement the assembly area
requirements of the 2004 ADAAG, which the
Department is adopting as part of the 2010
Standards. The NPRM proposed at
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
§ 36.406(f)(1) to require wheelchair spaces
and companion seating locations to be
dispersed to all levels of the facility that are
served by an accessible route. The
Department received no significant
comments on this paragraph and has decided
to adopt the proposed language with minor
modifications.
Section 36.406(f)(1) ensures that there is
greater dispersion of wheelchair spaces and
companion seats throughout stadiums,
arenas, and grandstands than would
otherwise be required by sections 221 and
802 of the 2004 ADAAG. In some cases, the
accessible route may not be the same route
that other individuals use to reach their seats.
For example, if other patrons reach their
seats on the field by an inaccessible route
(e.g., by stairs), but there is an accessible
route that complies with section 206.3 of the
2004 ADAAG that could be connected to
seats on the field, wheelchair spaces and
companion seats must be placed on the field
even if that route is not generally available
to the public.
Regulatory language that was included in
the 2004 ADAAG advisory, but that did not
appear in the NPRM, has been added by the
Department in § 36.406(f)(2). Section
36.406(f)(2) now requires an assembly area
that has seating encircling, in whole or in
part, a field of play or performance area, such
as an arena or stadium, to place wheelchair
spaces and companion seats around the
entire facility. This rule, which is designed
to prevent a public accommodation from
placing wheelchair spaces and companion
seats on one side of the facility only, is
consistent with the Department’s
enforcement practices and reflects its
interpretation of section 4.33.3 of the 1991
Standards.
In the NPRM, the Department proposed
§ 36.406(f)(2), which prohibits wheelchair
spaces and companion seating locations from
being ‘‘located on (or obstructed by)
temporary platforms * * *.’’ 73 FR 34508,
34557 (June 17, 2008). Through its
enforcement actions, the Department
discovered that some venues place
wheelchair spaces and companion seats on
temporary platforms that, when removed,
reveal conventional seating underneath, or
cover the wheelchair spaces and companion
seats with temporary platforms on top of
which they place risers of conventional
seating. These platforms cover groups of
conventional seats and are used to provide
groups of wheelchair seats and companion
seats.
Several commenters requested an
exception to the prohibition of the use of
temporary platforms for public
accommodations that sell most of their
tickets on a season-ticket or other multi-event
basis. Such commenters argued that they
should be able to use temporary platforms
because they know, in advance, that the
patrons sitting in certain areas for the whole
season do not need wheelchair spaces and
companion seats. The Department declines to
adopt such an exception. As it explained in
detail in the NPRM, the Department believes
that permitting the use of movable platforms
that seat four or more wheelchair users and
their companions have the potential to
PO 00000
Frm 00146
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
reduce the number of available wheelchair
seating spaces below the level required, thus
reducing the opportunities for persons who
need accessible seating to have the same
choice of ticket prices and amenities that are
available to other patrons in the facility. In
addition, use of removable platforms may
result in instances where last minute requests
for wheelchair and companion seating cannot
be met because entire sections of accessible
seating will be lost when a platform is
removed. See 73 FR 34508, 34546 (June 17,
2008). Further, use of temporary platforms
allows facilities to limit persons who need
accessible seating to certain seating areas,
and to relegate accessible seating to less
desirable locations. The use of temporary
platforms has the effect of neutralizing
dispersion and other seating requirements
(e.g., line of sight) for wheelchair spaces and
companion seats. Cf. Independent Living
Resources v. Oregon Arena Corp., 1 F. Supp.
2d 1159, 1171 (D. Or. 1998) (holding that
while a public accommodation may ‘‘infill’’
wheelchair spaces with removable seats
when the wheelchair spaces are not needed
to accommodate individuals with
disabilities, under certain circumstances
‘‘[s]uch a practice might well violate the rule
that wheelchair spaces must be dispersed
throughout the arena in a manner that is
roughly proportionate to the overall
distribution of seating’’). In addition, using
temporary platforms to convert unsold
wheelchair spaces to conventional seating
undermines the flexibility facilities need to
accommodate secondary ticket market
exchanges as required by § 36.302(f)(7) of the
final rule.
As the Department explained in the NPRM,
however, this provision was not designed to
prohibit temporary seating that increases
seating for events (e.g., placing temporary
seating on the floor of a basketball court for
a concert). Consequently, the final rule, at
§ 36.406(f)(3), has been amended to clarify
that if an entire seating section is on a
temporary platform for a particular event,
then wheelchair spaces and companion seats
may also be in that seating section. However,
adding a temporary platform to create
wheelchair spaces and companion seats that
are otherwise dissimilar from nearby fixed
seating and then simply adding a small
number of additional seats to the platform
would not qualify as an ‘‘entire seating
section’’ on the platform. In addition,
§ 36.406(f)(3) clarifies that facilities may fill
in wheelchair spaces with removable seats
when the wheelchair spaces are not needed
by persons who use wheelchairs.
The Department has been responsive to
assembly areas’ concerns about reduced
revenues due to unused accessible seating.
Accordingly, the Department has reduced
scoping requirements significantly—by
almost half in large assembly areas—and
determined that allowing assembly areas to
in-fill unsold wheelchair spaces with readily
removable temporary individual seats
appropriately balances their economic
concerns with the rights of individuals with
disabilities. See section 221.1 of the 2010
Standards.
For stadium-style movie theaters, in
§ 36.406(f)(4) of the NPRM the Department
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
proposed requiring placement of wheelchair
seating spaces and companion seats on a riser
or cross-aisle in the stadium section of the
theater that satisfies at least one of the
following criteria: (1) It is located within the
rear 60 percent of the seats provided in the
auditorium; or (2) It is located within the area
of the auditorium where the vertical viewing
angles are between the 40th and 100th
percentile of vertical viewing angles for all
seats in that theater as ranked from the first
row (1st percentile) to the back row (100th
percentile). The vertical viewing angle is the
angle between a horizontal line
perpendicular to the seated viewer’s eye to
the screen and a line from the seated viewer’s
eye to the top of the screen.
The Department proposed this bright-line
rule for two reasons: (1) the movie theater
industry petitioned for such a rule; and (2)
the Department has acquired expertise in the
design of stadium-style theaters during its
litigation with several major movie theater
chains. See United States. v. AMC
Entertainment, Inc., 232 F. Supp.2d 1092
(C.D. Cal. 2002), rev’d in part, 549 F.3d 760
(9th Cir. 2008); United States v. Cinemark
USA, Inc., 348 F.3d 569 (6th Cir. 2003). Two
industry commenters—at least one of whom
otherwise supported this rule—requested
that the Department explicitly state that this
rule does not apply retroactively to existing
theaters. Although this provision on its face
applies to new construction and alterations,
these commenters were concerned that the
rule could be interpreted to apply
retroactively because of the Department’s
statements in the NPRM and ANPRM that
this bright line rule, although newly
articulated, is not a new standard but ‘‘merely
codifi[es] longstanding Department
requirement[s],’’ 73 FR 34508, 34534 (June
17, 2008), and does not represent a
‘‘substantive change from the existing line-ofsight requirements’’ of section 4.33.3 of the
1991 Standards, 69 FR 58768, 58776 (Sept.
30, 2004).
Although the Department intends for
§ 36.406(f)(4) of this rule to apply
prospectively to new construction and
alterations, this rule is not a departure from,
and is consistent with, the line-of-sight
requirements in the 1991 Standards. The
Department has always interpreted the lineof-sight requirements in the 1991 Standards
to require viewing angles provided to patrons
who use wheelchairs to be comparable to
those afforded to other spectators. Section
36.406(f)(4) merely represents the application
of these requirements to stadium-style movie
theaters.
One commenter from a trade association
sought clarification whether § 36.406(f)(4)
applies to stadium-style theaters with more
than 300 seats, and argued that it should not
since dispersion requirements apply in those
theaters. The Department declines to limit
this rule to stadium-style theaters with 300
or fewer seats; stadium-style theaters of all
sizes must comply with this rule. So, for
example, stadium-style theaters that must
vertically disperse wheelchair spaces and
companion seats must do so within the
parameters of this rule.
The NPRM included a provision that
required assembly areas with more than
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
5,000 seats to provide at least five wheelchair
spaces with at least three companion seats for
each of those five wheelchair spaces. The
Department agrees with commenters who
asserted that group seating is better
addressed through ticketing policies rather
than design and has deleted that provision
from this section of the final rule.
Section 36.406(g) Medical Care Facilities
In the 1991 title III regulation, there was no
provision addressing the dispersion of
accessible sleeping rooms in medical care
facilities. The Department is aware, however,
of problems that individuals with disabilities
face in receiving full and equal medical care
when accessible sleeping rooms are not
adequately dispersed. When accessible rooms
are not fully dispersed, a person with a
disability is often placed in an accessible
room in an area that is not medically
appropriate for his or her condition, and is
thus denied quick access to staff with
expertise in that medical specialty and
specialized equipment. While the Access
Board did not establish specific design
requirements for dispersion in the 2004
ADAAG, in response to extensive comments
in support of dispersion it added an advisory
note, Advisory 223.1 General, encouraging
dispersion of accessible rooms within the
facility so that accessible rooms are more
likely to be proximate to appropriate
qualified staff and resources.
In the NPRM, the Department sought
additional comment on the issue, asking
whether it should require medical care
facilities, such as hospitals, to disperse their
accessible sleeping rooms, and if so, by what
method (by specialty area, floor, or other
criteria). All of the comments the Department
received on this issue supported dispersing
accessible sleeping rooms proportionally by
specialty area. These comments from
individuals, organizations, and a building
code association, argued that it would not be
difficult for hospitals to disperse rooms by
specialty area, given the high level of
regulation to which hospitals are subject and
the planning that hospitals do based on
utilization trends. Further, comments suggest
that without a requirement, it is unlikely that
hospitals would disperse the rooms. In
addition, concentrating accessible rooms in
one area perpetuates segregation of
individuals with disabilities, which is
counter to the purpose of the ADA.
The Department has decided to require
medical care facilities to disperse their
accessible sleeping rooms in a manner that is
proportionate by type of medical specialty.
This does not require exact mathematical
proportionality, which at times would be
impossible. However, it does require that
medical care facilities disperse their
accessible rooms by medical specialty so that
persons with disabilities can, to the extent
practical, stay in an accessible room within
the wing or ward that is appropriate for their
medical needs. The language used in this
rule (‘‘in a manner that is proportionate by
type of medical specialty’’) is more specific
than that used in the NPRM (‘‘in a manner
that enables patients with disabilities to have
access to appropriate specialty services’’) and
adopts the concept of proportionality
PO 00000
Frm 00147
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56309
proposed by the commenters. Accessible
rooms should be dispersed throughout all
medical specialties, such as obstetrics,
orthopedics, pediatrics, and cardiac care.
Subpart F—Certification of State Laws
or Local Building Codes
Subpart F contains procedures
implementing section 308(b)(1)(A)(ii) of the
ADA, which provides that on the application
of a State or local jurisdiction, the Attorney
General may certify that a State or local
building code or similar ordinance meets or
exceeds the minimum accessibility
requirements of the Act. In enforcement
proceedings, this certification will constitute
rebuttable evidence that the law or code
meets or exceeds the ADA’s requirements. In
its NPRM, the Department proposed three
changes in subpart F that would streamline
the process for public entities seeking
certification, all of which are adopted in this
final rule.
First, the Department proposed deleting
the existing § 36.603, which establishes the
obligations of a submitting authority that is
seeking certification of its code, and issue in
its place informal regulatory guidance
regarding certification submission
requirements. Due to the deletion of § 36.603,
§§ 36.604 through 36.608 are renumbered,
and § 36.603 in the final rule is modified to
indicate that the Assistant Attorney General
for the Civil Rights Division (Assistant
Attorney General) shall make a preliminary
determination of equivalency after ‘‘receipt
and review of all information relevant to a
request filed by a submitting official for
certification of a code.’’ Second, the
Department proposed that the requirement in
renumbered § 36.604 (previously § 36.605)
that an informal hearing be held in
Washington, DC, if the Assistant Attorney
General makes a preliminary determination
of equivalency be changed to a requirement
that the hearing be held in the State or local
jurisdiction charged with administration and
enforcement of the code. Third, the
Department proposed adding language to
renumbered § 36.606 (previously § 36.607) to
explain the effect of the 2010 Standards on
the codes of State or local jurisdictions that
were determined in the past to meet or
exceed the 1991 Standards. Once the 2010
Standards take effect, certifications issued
under the 1991 Standards would not have
any future effect, and States and local
jurisdictions with codes certified under the
1991 Standards would need to reapply for
certification under the 2010 Standards. With
regard to elements of existing buildings and
facilities constructed in compliance with a
code when a certification of equivalency was
in effect, the final rule requires that in any
enforcement action this compliance would be
treated as rebuttable evidence of compliance
with the standards then in effect. The new
provision added to § 36.606 may also have
implications in determining an entity’s
eligibility for the element-by-element safe
harbor.
No substantive comments were received
regarding the Department’s proposed changes
in subpart F, and no other changes have been
made to this subpart in the final rule. The
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56310
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
Department did receive several comments
addressing other issues raised in the NPRM
that are related to subpart F. Because the
2010 Standards include specific design
requirements for recreation facilities and play
areas that may be new to many title III
facilities, the Department sought comments
in the NPRM about how the certification
review process would be affected if the State
or local jurisdiction allocates the authority to
implement the new requirements to State or
local agencies that are not ordinarily
involved in administering building codes.
One commenter, an association of building
owners and managers, suggested that because
of the increased scope of the 2010 Standards,
it is likely that parts of covered elements in
the new standards will be under the
jurisdiction of multiple State or local
agencies. In light of these circumstances, the
commenter recommended that the
Department allow State or local agencies to
seek certification even if only one State or
local regulatory agency requests certification.
For example, if a State agency that regulates
buildings seeks certification of its building
code, it should be able to do so, even if
another State agency that regulates
amusement rides and miniature golf courses
does not seek certification.
The Department’s discussion of this issue
in the NPRM contemplated that all of a State
or local government’s accessibility
requirements for title III facilities would be
the subject of a request for certification. Any
other approach would require the
Department to certify only part of a State or
local government’s accessibility requirements
as compared to the entirety of the revised
ADA standards. As noted earlier, the
Attorney General is authorized by section
308(b)(1)(A)(ii) of the ADA to certify that a
State or local building code meets or exceeds
the ADA’s minimum accessibility
requirements, which are contained in this
regulation. The Department has concluded
that this is a decision that must be made on
a case-by-case basis because of the wide
variety of enforcement schemes adopted by
the States. Piecemeal certification of laws or
codes that do not contain all of the minimum
accessibility requirements could fail to
satisfy the Attorney General’s responsibility
to ensure that a State or local building code
meets or exceeds the minimum accessibility
requirements of the Act before granting
certification. However, the Department wants
to permit State and local code administrators
to have maximum flexibility, so the
Department will leave open the possibility
for case-by-case review to determine if a State
has successfully met the burden of
demonstrating that its accessibility codes or
other laws meet or exceed the ADA
requirements.
The commenter representing building
owners and managers also urged the
Department to extend the proposed effective
date for the final rule. The commenter
explained that a six-month phase-in period is
inadequate for States to begin and complete
a code amendment process. The commenter
asserted that the inadequate phase-in period
will place entities undertaking new
construction and alterations, particularly in
those States with certified codes, in a
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
difficult position because State officials will
continue to enforce previously certified State
or local accessibility requirements that may
be in conflict with the new 2010 Standards.
The Department received numerous
comments on the issue of the effective date,
many of them similar to the concerns
expressed above, in response to both the
NPRM and the ANPRM. See Appendix A
discussion of compliance dates for new
construction and alterations (§ 36.406). The
Department has been persuaded by the
concerns raised by many commenters
addressing the time and costs related to the
design process for both new construction and
alterations, and has determined that for new
construction and alterations, compliance
with the 2010 Standards will not be required
until 18 months from the date the final rule
is published. For more information on the
issue of the compliance date, refer to subpart
D—New Construction and Alterations.
One commenter, an association of theater
owners, recommended that the Department
establish a training program for State
building inspectors for those States that
receive certification to ensure more
consistent ADA compliance and to facilitate
the review of builders’ architectural plans.
The commenter also recommended that State
building inspectors, once trained, review
architectural plans, and after completion and
inspection of facilities, be authorized to
certify that the inspected building or facility
meets both the certified State and the Federal
accessibility requirements. Although
supportive of the idea of additional training
for State and local building code officials
regarding ADA compliance, the Department
believes that the approach suggested by the
commenter of allowing State and local code
officials to determine if a covered facility is
in compliance with Federal accessibility
requirements is not consistent with or
permissible under the statutory enforcement
scheme established by the ADA. As the
Department stated in the NPRM, certification
of State and local codes serves, to some
extent, to mitigate the absence of a Federal
mechanism for conducting at the national
level a review of all architectural plans and
inspecting all covered buildings under
construction to ensure compliance with the
ADA. In this regard, certification operates as
a bridge between the obligation to comply
with the 1991 Standards in new construction
and alterations, and the administrative
schemes of State and local governments that
regulate the design and construction process.
By ensuring consistency between State or
local codes and Federal accessibility
standards, certification has the additional
benefit of streamlining the regulatory
process, thereby making it easier for those in
the design and construction industry to
satisfy both State and Federal requirements.
The Department notes, however, that
although certification has the potential to
increase compliance with the ADA, this
result, however desirable, is not guaranteed.
The ADA contemplated that there could be
enforcement actions brought even in States
with certified codes, and it provided some
protection in litigation to builders who
adhered to the provisions of the code
certified to be ADA-equivalent. The
PO 00000
Frm 00148
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Department’s certification determinations
make it clear that to get the benefit of
certification, a facility must comply with the
applicable code requirements—without
relying on waivers or variances. The certified
code, however, remains within the authority
of the adopting State or local jurisdiction to
interpret and enforce: Certification does not
transform a State’s building code into Federal
law. Nor can certification alone authorize
State and local building code officials
implementing a certified code to do more
than they are authorized to do under State or
local law, and these officials cannot acquire
authority through certification to render
binding interpretations of Federal law.
Therefore, the Department, while
understanding the interest in obtaining
greater assurance of compliance with the
ADA through the interpretation and
enforcement of a certified code by local code
officials, declined in the NPRM to confer on
local officials the authority not granted to
them under the ADA to certify the
compliance of individual facilities. The
Department in the final rule finds no reason
to alter its position on this issue in response
to the comments that were received.
The commenter representing theater
owners also urged the Department to provide
a safe harbor to facilities constructed in
compliance with State or local building
codes certified under the 1991 Standards.
With regard to elements of facilities
constructed in compliance with a certified
code prior to the effective date of the 2010
Standards, and during the period when a
certification of equivalency was in effect, the
Department noted in the NPRM that its
approach would be consistent with the
approach to the safe harbor discussed in
subpart C, § 36.304 of the NPRM, with
respect to elements in existing facilities
constructed in compliance with the 1991
Standards. For example, elements in existing
facilities in States with codes certified under
the 1991 Standards would be eligible for a
safe harbor if they were constructed in
compliance with an ADA-certified code. In
this scenario, compliance with the certified
code would be treated as evidence of
compliance with the 1991 Standards for
purposes of determining the application of
the safe harbor provision to those elements.
For more information on safe harbor, refer to
subpart C, § 36.304 of the final rule.
One commenter, an advocacy group for the
blind, suggested that, similar to the
procedures for certifying a State or local
building code, the Department should
establish a program to certify an entity’s
obligation to make its goods and services
accessible to persons with sensory
disabilities. The Department believes that
this commenter was suggesting that covered
entities should be able to request that the
Department review their business operations
to determine if they have met their ADA
obligations. As noted earlier, subpart F
contains procedures implementing section
308(b)(1)(A)(ii) of the ADA, which provides
that on the application of a State or local
jurisdiction, the Attorney General may certify
that a State or local building code or similar
ordinance meets or exceeds the minimum
accessibility requirements of the ADA. The
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
only mechanism through which the
Department is authorized to ensure a covered
entity’s compliance with the ADA is the
enforcement scheme established under
section 308(b)(1)(A)(i) of the ADA. The
Department notes, however, that title III of
the ADA and its implementing regulation,
which includes the standards for accessible
design, already require existing, altered, and
newly constructed places of public
accommodation, such as retail stores, hotels,
restaurants, movie theaters, and stadiums, to
make their facilities readily accessible to and
usable by individuals with disabilities,
which includes individuals with sensory
disabilities, so that individuals with
disabilities have a full and equal opportunity
to enjoy the benefits of a public
accommodation’s goods, services, facilities,
privileges and advantages.
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Other Issues
Questions Posed in the NPRM Regarding
Costs and Benefits of Complying With the
2010 Standards
In the NPRM, the Department requested
comments on various cost and benefit issues
related to eight requirements in the
Department’s Initial RIA, that were projected
to have incremental costs that exceeded
monetized benefits by more than $100
million when using the 1991 Standards as a
comparative baseline, i.e., side reach, water
closet clearances in single-user toilet rooms
with in-swinging doors, stairs, elevators,
location of accessible routes to stages,
accessible attorney areas and witness stands,
assistive listening systems, and accessible
teeing grounds, putting greens, and weather
shelters at golf courses. 73 FR 34508, 34512
(June 17, 2008). The Department was
particularly concerned about how these costs
applied to alterations. The Department noted
that pursuant to the ADA, the Department
does not have statutory authority to modify
the 2004 ADAAG and is required instead to
issue regulations implementing the ADA that
are consistent with the Board’s guidelines. In
that regard, the Department also requested
comment about whether any of these eight
elements in the 2010 Standards should be
returned to the Access Board for further
consideration, in particular as applied to
alterations. Many of the comments received
by the Department in response to these
questions addressed both titles II and III. As
a result, the Department’s discussion of these
comments and its response are collectively
presented for both titles.
Side reach. The 1991 Standards at section
4.2.6 establish a maximum side-reach height
of 54 inches. The 2010 Standards at section
308.3.1 reduce that maximum height to 48
inches. The 2010 Standards also add
exceptions for certain elements to the
scoping requirement for operable parts.
The vast majority of comments the
Department received were in support of the
lower side-reach maximum of 48 inches in
the 2010 Standards. Most of these comments,
but not all, were received from individuals of
short stature, relatives of individuals of short
stature, or organizations representing the
interests of persons with disabilities,
including individuals of short stature.
Comments from individuals with disabilities
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
and disability advocacy groups stated that
the 48-inch side reach would permit
independence in performing many activities
of daily living for individuals with
disabilities, including individuals of short
stature, persons who use wheelchairs, and
persons who have limited upper body
strength. In this regard, one commenter who
is a business owner pointed out that as a
person of short stature there were many
occasions when he was unable to exit a
public restroom independently because he
could not reach the door handle. The
commenter said that often elevator control
buttons are out of his reach, and, if he is
alone, he often must wait for someone else
to enter the elevator so that he can ask that
person to press a floor button for him.
Another commenter, who is also a person of
short stature, said that he has on several
occasions pulled into a gas station only to
find that he was unable to reach the credit
card reader on the gas pump. Unlike other
customers who can reach the card reader,
swipe their credit or debit cards, pump their
gas, and leave the station, he must use
another method to pay for his gas. Another
comment from a person of short stature
pointed out that as more businesses take
steps to reduce labor costs—a trend expected
to continue—staffed booths are being
replaced with automatic machines for the
sale, for example, of parking tickets and other
products. He observed that the ‘‘ability to
access and operate these machines becomes
ever more critical to function in society,’’
and, on that basis, urged the Department to
adopt the 48-inch side-reach requirement.
Another individual commented that persons
of short stature should not have to carry with
them adaptive tools in order to access
building or facility elements that are out of
their reach, any more than persons in
wheelchairs should have to carry ramps with
them in order to gain access to facilities.
Many of the commenters who supported
the revised side-reach requirement pointed
out that lowering the side-reach requirement
to 48 inches would avoid a problem
sometimes encountered in the built
environment when an element was mounted
for a parallel approach at 54 inches, only to
find afterwards that a parallel approach was
not possible. Some commenters also
suggested that lowering the maximum
unobstructed side reach to 48 inches would
reduce confusion among design professionals
by making the unobstructed forward and
side-reach maximums the same (the
unobstructed forward reach in both the 1991
and 2010 Standards is 48 inches maximum).
These commenters also pointed out that the
ICC/ANSI A117.1 Standard, which is a
private sector model accessibility standard,
has included a 48-inch maximum high sidereach requirement since 1998. Many
jurisdictions have already incorporated this
requirement into their building codes, which
these commenters believed would reduce the
cost of compliance with the 2010 Standards.
Because numerous jurisdictions have already
adopted the 48-inch side-reach requirement,
the Department’s failure to adopt the 48-inch
side-reach requirement in the 2010
Standards, in the view of many commenters,
would result in a significant reduction in
PO 00000
Frm 00149
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56311
accessibility, and would frustrate efforts that
have been made to harmonize private sector
model construction and accessibility codes
with Federal accessibility requirements.
Given these concerns, they overwhelmingly
opposed the idea of returning the revised
side-reach requirement to the Access Board
for further consideration.
The Department also received comments in
support of the 48-inch side-reach
requirement from an association of
professional commercial property managers
and operators and from State governmental
entities. The association of property
managers pointed out that the revised sidereach requirement provided a reasonable
approach to ‘‘regulating elevator controls and
all other operable parts’’ in existing facilities
in light of the manner in which the safe
harbor, barrier removal, and alterations
obligations will operate in the 2010
Standards. One governmental entity, while
fully supporting the 48-inch side-reach
requirement, encouraged the Department to
adopt an exception to the lower reach range
for existing facilities similar to the exception
permitted in the ICC/ANSI A117.1 Standard.
In response to this latter concern, the
Department notes that under the safe harbor,
existing facilities that are in compliance with
the 1991 Standards, which required a 54-inch
side-reach maximum, would not be required
to comply with the lower side-reach
requirement, unless there is an alteration. See
§ 36.304(d)(2)(i).
A number of commenters expressed either
concern with, or opposition to, the 48-inch
side-reach requirement and suggested that it
be returned to the Access Board for further
consideration. These commenters included
trade and business associations, associations
of retail stores, associations of restaurant
owners, retail and convenience store chains,
and a model code organization. Several
businesses expressed the view that the lower
side-reach requirement would discourage the
use of their products and equipment by most
of the general public. In particular, concerns
were expressed by a national association of
pay phone service providers regarding the
possibility that pay telephones mounted at
the lower height would not be used as
frequently by the public to place calls, which
would result in an economic burden on the
pay phone industry. The commenter
described the lower height required for side
reach as creating a new ‘‘barrier’’ to pay
phone use, which would reduce revenues
collected from pay phones and,
consequently, further discourage the
installation of new pay telephones. In
addition, the commenter expressed concern
that phone service providers would simply
decide to remove existing pay phones rather
than incur the costs of relocating them at the
lower height. With regard to this latter
concern, the commenter misunderstood the
manner in which the safe harbor and barrier
removal obligations under § 36.304 will
operate in the revised title III regulation for
elements that comply with the 1991
Standards. The Department does not
anticipate that wholesale relocation of pay
telephones in existing facilities will be
required under the final rule where the
telephones in existing facilities already are in
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56312
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
compliance with the 1991 Standards. If the
pay phones comply with the 1991 Standards,
the adoption of the 2010 Standards does not
require retrofitting of these elements to
reflect incremental changes in the 2010
Standards. See § 36.304(d)(2). However, pay
telephones that were required to meet the
1991 Standards as part of new construction
or alterations, but do not in fact comply with
those standards, will need to be brought into
compliance with the 2010 Standards as of 18
months from the publication date of this final
rule. See § 36.406(a)(5).
The Department does not agree with the
concerns expressed by the commenter about
reduced revenues from pay phones mounted
at lower heights. The Department believes
that while given the choice some individuals
may prefer to use a pay phone that is at a
higher height, the availability of some phones
at a lower height will not deter individuals
from making needed calls.
The 2010 Standards will not require every
pay phone to be installed or moved to a
lowered height. The table accompanying
section 217.2 of the 2010 Standards makes
clear that where one or more telephones are
provided on a floor, level, or an exterior site,
only one phone per floor, level, or exterior
site must be placed at an accessible height.
Similarly, where there is one bank of phones
per floor, level, or exterior site, only one
phone per floor, level, or exterior site must
be accessible. And if there are two or more
banks of phones per floor, level, or exterior
site, only one phone per bank must be placed
at an accessible height.
Another comment in opposition to the
lower reach range requirement was submitted
on behalf of a chain of convenience stores
with fuel stops. The commenter expressed
the concern that the 48-inch side reach ‘‘will
make it uncomfortable for the majority of the
public,’’ including persons of taller stature
who would need to stoop to use equipment
such as fuel dispensers mounted at the lower
height. The commenter offered no objective
support for the observation that a majority of
the public would be rendered uncomfortable
if, as required in the 2010 Standards, at least
one of each type of fuel dispenser at a facility
was made accessible in compliance with the
lower reach range. Indeed, the Department
received no comments from any individuals
of tall stature expressing concern about
accessible elements or equipment being
mounted at the 48-inch height.
Several retail, convenience store,
restaurant, and amusement park commenters
expressed concern about the burden the
lower side-reach requirement would place on
their businesses in terms of self-service food
stations and vending areas if the 48-inch
requirement were applied retroactively. The
cost of lowering counter height, in
combination with the lack of control
businesses exercise over certain prefabricated
service or vending fixtures, outweighed, they
argued, any benefits to persons with
disabilities. For this reason, they suggested
the lower side-reach requirement be referred
back to the Access Board.
These commenters misunderstood the safe
harbor and barrier removal obligations that
will be in effect under the 2010 Standards.
Those existing self-service food stations and
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
vending areas that already are in compliance
with the 1991 Standards will not be required
to satisfy the 2010 Standards unless they
engage in alterations. With regard to
prefabricated vending machines and food
service components that will be purchased
and installed in businesses after the 2010
Standards become effective, the Department
expects that companies will design these
machines and fixtures to comply with the
2010 Standards in the future, as many have
already done in the 10 years since the 48inch side-reach requirement has been a part
of the model codes and standards used by
many jurisdictions as the basis for their
construction codes.
A model code organization commented
that the lower side-reach requirement would
create a significant burden if it required
entities to lower the mounting height for light
switches, environmental controls, and outlets
when an alteration did not include the walls
where these elements were located, such as
when ‘‘an area is altered or as a path of travel
obligation.’’ The Department believes that the
final rule adequately addresses those
situations about which the commenter
expressed concern by not requiring the
relocation of existing elements, such as light
switches, environmental controls, and
outlets, unless they are altered. Moreover,
under § 36.403 of the 1991 rule, costs for
altering the path of travel to an altered area
of primary function that exceed 20 percent of
the overall costs of the alteration will
continue to be deemed disproportionate.
The Department has determined that the
revised side-reach requirement should not be
returned to the Access Board for further
consideration based in large part on the
views expressed by a majority of the
commenters regarding the need for, and
importance of, the lower side-reach
requirement to ensure access for persons
with disabilities.
Alterations and water closet clearances in
single-user toilet rooms with in-swinging
doors. The 1991 Standards allow a lavatory
to be placed a minimum of 18 inches from
the water closet centerline and a minimum
of 36 inches from the side wall adjacent to
the water closet, which precludes side
transfers. The 1991 Standards do not allow
an in-swinging door in a toilet or bathing
room to overlap the required clear floor space
at any accessible fixture. To allow greater
transfer options, section 604.3.2 of the 2010
Standards prohibits lavatories from
overlapping the clear floor space at water
closets, except in certain residential dwelling
units. Section 603.2.3 of the 2010 Standards
maintains the prohibition on doors swinging
into the clear floor space or clearance
required for any fixture, except that they
permit the doors of toilet or bathing rooms
to swing into the required turning space,
provided that there is sufficient clearance
space for the wheelchair outside the door
swing. In addition, in single-user toilet or
bathing rooms, exception 2 of section 603.2.3
of the 2010 Standards permits the door to
swing into the clear floor space of an
accessible fixture if a clear floor space that
measures at least 30 inches by 48 inches is
available outside the arc of the door swing.
The majority of commenters believed that
this requirement would increase the number
PO 00000
Frm 00150
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
of toilet rooms accessible to individuals with
disabilities who use wheelchairs or mobility
scooters, and will make it easier for them to
transfer. A number of commenters stated that
there was no reason to return this provision
to the Access Board. Numerous commenters
noted that this requirement is already
included in other model accessibility
standards and many State and local building
codes and that the adoption of the 2010
Standards is an important part of
harmonization efforts.
Other commenters, mostly trade
associations, opposed this requirement,
arguing that the added cost to the industry
outweighs any increase in accessibility. Two
commenters stated that these proposed
requirements would add two feet to the
width of an accessible single-user toilet
room; however, another commenter said the
drawings in the proposed regulation
demonstrated that there would be no
substantial increase in the size of the toilet
room. Several commenters stated that this
requirement would require moving plumbing
fixtures, walls, or doors at significant
additional expense. Two commenters wanted
the permissible overlap between the door
swing and clearance around any fixture
eliminated. One commenter stated that these
new requirements will result in fewer
alterations to toilet rooms to avoid triggering
the requirement for increased clearances, and
suggested that the Department specify that
repairs, maintenance, or minor alterations
would not trigger the need to provide
increased clearances. Another commenter
requested that the Department exempt
existing guest room bathrooms and singleuser toilet rooms that comply with the 1991
Standards from complying with the increased
clearances in alterations.
After careful consideration of these
comments, the Department believes that the
revised clearances for single-user toilet rooms
will allow safer and easier transfers for
individuals with disabilities, and will enable
a caregiver, aide, or other person to
accompany an individual with a disability
into the toilet room to provide assistance.
The illustrations in Appendix B to this final
rule, ‘‘Analysis and Commentary on the 2010
ADA Standards for Accessible Design,’’
describe several ways for public entities and
public accommodations to make alterations
while minimizing additional costs or loss of
space. Further, in any isolated instances
where existing structural limitations may
entail loss of space, the public entity and
public accommodation may have a technical
infeasibility defense for that alteration. The
Department has, therefore, decided not to
return this requirement to the Access Board.
Alterations to stairs. The 1991 Standards
only require interior and exterior stairs to be
accessible when they provide access to levels
that are not connected by an elevator, ramp,
or other accessible means of vertical access.
In contrast, section 210.1 of the 2010
Standards requires all newly constructed
stairs that are part of a means of egress to be
accessible. However, exception 2 of section
210.1 of the 2010 Standards provides that in
alterations, stairs between levels connected
by an accessible route need not be accessible,
except that handrails shall be provided. Most
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
commenters were in favor of this requirement
for handrails in alterations, and stated that
adding handrails to stairs during alterations
was not only feasible and not cost
prohibitive, but also provided important
safety benefits. One commenter stated that
making all points of egress accessible
increased the number of people who could
use the stairs in an emergency. A majority of
the commenters did not want this
requirement returned to the Access Board for
further consideration.
The International Building Code (IBC),
which is a private sector model construction
code, contains a similar provision, and most
jurisdictions enforce a version of the IBC as
their building code, thereby minimizing the
impact of this provision on public entities
and public accommodations. The Department
believes that by requiring only the addition
of handrails to altered stairs where levels are
connected by an accessible route, the costs of
compliance for public entities and public
accommodations are minimized, while safe
egress for individuals with disabilities is
increased. Therefore, the Department has
decided not to return this requirement to the
Access Board.
Alterations to elevators. Under the 1991
Standards, if an existing elevator is altered,
only that altered elevator must comply with
the new construction requirements for
accessible elevators to the maximum extent
feasible. It is therefore possible that a bank
of elevators controlled by a single call system
may contain just one accessible elevator,
leaving an individual with a disability with
no way to call an accessible elevator and thus
having to wait indefinitely until an accessible
elevator happens to respond to the call
system. In the 2010 Standards, when an
element in one elevator is altered, section
206.6.1 will require the same element to be
altered in all elevators that are programmed
to respond to the same call button as the
altered elevator. Almost all commenters
favored the proposed requirement. This
requirement, according to these commenters,
is necessary so a person with a disability
need not wait until an accessible elevator
responds to his or her call. One commenter
suggested that elevator owners also could
comply by modifying the call system so the
accessible elevator could be summoned
independently. One commenter suggested
that this requirement would be difficult for
small businesses located in older buildings,
and one commenter suggested that this
requirement be sent back to the Access
Board.
After considering the comments, the
Department agrees that this requirement is
necessary to ensure that when an individual
with a disability presses a call button, an
accessible elevator will arrive. The IBC
contains a similar provision, and most
jurisdictions enforce a version of the IBC as
their building code, minimizing the impact of
this provision on public entities and public
accommodations. Public entities and small
businesses located in older buildings need
not comply with this requirement where it is
technically infeasible to do so. Further, as
pointed out by one commenter, modifying
the call system so the accessible elevator can
be summoned independently is another
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
means of complying with this requirement in
lieu of altering all other elevators
programmed to respond to the same call
button. Therefore, the Department has
decided not to return this requirement to the
Access Board.
Location of accessible routes to stages. The
1991 Standards, at section 4.33.5, require an
accessible route to connect the accessible
seating and the stage, as well as other
ancillary spaces used by performers. The
2010 Standards, at section 206.2.6, provide in
addition that where a circulation path
directly connects the seating area and the
stage, the accessible route must connect
directly the accessible seating and the stage,
and, like the 1991 Standards, an accessible
route must connect the stage with the
ancillary spaces used by performers.
In the NPRM, the Department asked
operators of auditoria about the extent to
which auditoria already provide direct access
to stages and whether there were planned
alterations over the next 15 years that
included accessible direct routes to stages.
The Department also asked how to quantify
the benefits of this requirement for persons
with disabilities, and invited commenters to
provide illustrative anecdotal experiences
about the requirement’s benefits.
The Department received many comments
regarding the costs and benefits of this
requirement. Although little detail was
provided, many industry and governmental
entity commenters anticipated that the costs
of this requirement would be great and that
it would be difficult to implement. They
noted that premium seats may have to be
removed and that load-bearing walls may
have to be relocated. These commenters
suggested that the significant costs would
deter alterations to the stage area for a great
many auditoria. Some commenters suggested
that ramps to the front of the stage may
interfere with means of egress and emergency
exits. Several commenters requested that the
requirement apply to new construction only,
and one industry commenter requested an
exemption for stages used in arenas or
amusement parks where there is no audience
participation or where the stage is a work
area for performers only. One commenter
requested that the requirement not apply to
temporary stages.
The final rule does not require a direct
accessible route to be constructed where a
direct circulation path from the seating area
to the stage does not exist. Consequently,
those commenters who expressed concern
about the burden imposed by the revised
requirement (i.e., where the stage is
constructed with no direct circulation path
connecting the general seating and
performing area) should note that the final
rule will not require the provision of a direct
accessible route under these circumstances.
The final rule applies to permanent stages, as
well as ‘‘temporary stages,’’ if there is a direct
circulation path from the seating area to the
stage. However, the Department recognizes
that in some circumstances, such as an
alteration to a primary function area, the
ability to provide a direct accessible route to
a stage may be costly or technically
infeasible, and the auditorium owner is not
precluded by the revised requirement from
PO 00000
Frm 00151
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56313
asserting defenses available under the
regulation. In addition, the Department notes
that since section 4.33.5 of the 1991
Standards requires an accessible route to a
stage, the safe harbor will apply to existing
facilities whose stages comply with the 1991
Standards.
Several governmental entities supported
accessible auditoria and the revised
requirement. One governmental entity noted
that its State building code already required
direct access, that it was possible to provide
direct access, and that creative solutions had
been found to do so.
Many advocacy groups and individual
commenters strongly supported the revised
requirement, discussing the acute need for
direct access to stages, as such access has an
impact on a great number of people at
important life events, such as graduations
and awards ceremonies, at collegiate and
competitive performances and other school
events, and at entertainment events that
include audience participation. Many
commenters expressed the belief that direct
access is essential for integration mandates to
be satisfied, and that separate routes are
stigmatizing and unequal. The Department
agrees with these concerns.
Commenters described the impact felt by
persons in wheelchairs who are unable to
access the stage at all when others are able
to do so. Some of these commenters also
discussed the need for the performers and
production staff who use wheelchairs to have
direct access to the stage, and they provided
a number of examples that illustrated the
importance of the rule proposed in the
NPRM. Personal anecdotes were provided in
comments and at the Department’s public
hearing on the NPRM. One mother spoke
passionately and eloquently about the
unequal treatment experienced by her
daughter, who uses a wheelchair, at awards
ceremonies and band concerts. Her daughter
was embarrassed and ashamed to be carried
by her father onto a stage at one band
concert. When the venue had to be changed
for another concert to an accessible
auditorium, the band director made sure to
comment that he was unhappy with the
switch. Rather than endure the
embarrassment and indignities, her child
dropped out of band the following year.
Another father commented about how he
was unable to speak from the stage at a PTA
meeting at his child’s school. Speaking from
the floor limited his line of sight and his
participation. Several examples were
provided of children who could not
participate on stage during graduation,
awards programs, or special school events,
such as plays and festivities. One student did
not attend his college graduation because he
would not be able to get on stage. Another
student was unable to participate in the class
Christmas programs or end-of-year parties
unless her father could attend and lift her
onto the stage. These commenters did not
provide a method to quantify the benefits
that would accrue by having direct access to
stages. One commenter stated, however, that
‘‘the cost of dignity and respect is without
measure.’’
Many industry commenters and
governmental entities suggested that the
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56314
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
requirement be sent back to the Access Board
for further consideration. One industry
commenter mistakenly noted that some
international building codes do not
incorporate the requirement and that,
therefore, there is a need for further
consideration. However, the Department
notes that both the 2003 and 2006 editions
of the IBC include scoping provisions that are
almost identical to this requirement and that
these editions of the model code are the most
frequently used. Many individuals and
advocacy group commenters requested that
the requirement be adopted without further
delay. These commenters spoke of the acute
need for direct access to stages and the
amount of time it would take to resubmit the
requirement to the Access Board. Several
commenters noted that the 2004 ADAAG
tracks recent model codes, and that there is
thus no need for further consideration. The
Department agrees that no further delay is
necessary and therefore has decided it will
not return the requirement to the Access
Board for further consideration.
Assistive listening systems. The 1991
Standards at sections 4.33.6 and 4.33.7
require assistive listening systems (ALS) in
assembly areas and prescribe general
performance standards for ALS systems. In
the NPRM, the Department proposed
adopting the technical specifications in the
2004 ADAAG for ALS that are intended to
ensure better quality and effective delivery of
sound and information for persons with
hearing impairments, especially those using
hearing aids. The Department noted in the
NPRM that since 1991, advancements in ALS
and the advent of digital technology have
made these systems more amenable to
uniform standards, which, among other
things, should ensure that a certain
percentage of required ALS systems are
hearing-aid compatible. 73 FR 34508, 34513
(June 17, 2008). The 2010 Standards at
section 219 provide scoping requirements
and at section 706 address receiver jacks,
hearing aid compatibility, sound pressure
level, signal-to-noise ratio, and peak clipping
level. The Department requested comments
specifically from arena and assembly area
administrators on the cost and maintenance
issues associated with ALS, and asked
generally about the costs and benefits of ALS,
and asked whether, based upon the expected
costs of ALS, the issue should be returned to
the Access Board for further consideration.
Commenters from advocacy organizations
noted that persons who develop significant
hearing loss often discontinue their normal
routines and activities, including meetings,
entertainment, and large group events, due to
a sense of isolation caused by the hearing
loss or embarrassment. Individuals with
longstanding hearing loss may never have
participated in group activities for many of
the same reasons. Requiring ALS may allow
individuals with disabilities to contribute to
the community by joining in government and
public events, and through increased
economic activity associated with
community activities and entertainment.
Making public events and entertainment
accessible to persons with hearing loss also
brings families and other groups that include
persons with hearing loss into more
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
community events and activities, thus
exponentially increasing the benefit from
ALS.
Many commenters noted that when a
person has significant hearing loss, that
person may be able to hear and understand
information in a quiet situation with the use
of hearing aids or cochlear implants;
however, as background noise increases and
the distance between the source of the sound
and the listener grows, and especially where
there is distortion in the sound, an ALS
becomes essential for basic comprehension
and understanding. Commenters noted that
among the 31 million Americans with
hearing loss, and with a projected increase to
over 78 million Americans with hearing loss
by 2030, the benefit from ALS is huge and
growing. Advocates for persons with
disabilities and individuals commented that
they appreciated the improvements in the
2004 ADAAG standards for ALS, including
specifications for the ALS systems and
performance standards. They noted that
providing neckloops that translate the signal
from the ALS transmitter to a frequency that
can be heard on a hearing aid or cochlear
implant are much more effective than
separate ALS system headsets, which
sometimes create feedback, often
malfunction, and may create distractions for
others seated nearby. Comments from
advocates and users of ALS systems
consistently noted that the Department’s
regulation should, at a minimum, be
consistent with the 2004 ADAAG. Although
there were requests for adjustments in the
scoping requirements from advocates seeking
increased scoping requirements, and from
large venue operators seeking fewer
requirements, there was no significant
concern expressed by commenters about the
technical specifications for ALS in the 2004
ADAAG.
Some commenters from trade associations
and large venue owners criticized the
scoping requirements as too onerous, and one
commenter asked for a remand to the Access
Board for new scoping rules. However, one
State agency commented that the 2004
ADAAG largely duplicates the requirements
in the 2006 IBC and the 2003 ANSI codes,
which means that entities that comply with
those standards would not incur additional
costs associated with ADA compliance.
According to one State office of the courts,
the costs to install either an infrared system
or an FM system at average-sized facilities,
including most courtrooms covered by title
II, would be between $500 and $2,000, which
the agency viewed as a small price in
comparison to the benefits of inclusion.
Advocacy organizations estimated wholesale
costs of ALS systems at about $250 each, and
individual neckloops to link the signal from
the ALS transmitter to hearing aids or
cochlear implants at less than $50 per unit.
Many commenters pointed out that if a
facility already is using induction neckloops,
it would already be in compliance already
and would not have any additional
installation costs. One major city commented
that annual maintenance is about $2,000 for
the entire system of performance venues in
the city. A trade association representing
very large venues estimated annual
PO 00000
Frm 00152
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
maintenance and upkeep expenses, including
labor and replacement parts, to be at most
about $25,000 for a very large professional
sports stadium.
One commenter suggested that the scoping
requirements for ALS in the 2004 ADAAG
were too stringent and that the Department
should refer them back to the Access Board
for further review and consideration. Others
commented that the requirement for new
ALS systems should mandate multichannel
receivers capable of receiving audio
description for persons who are blind, in
addition to a channel for amplification for
persons who are hard of hearing. Some
commenters suggested that the Department
should require a set schedule and protocol of
mandatory maintenance. Department
regulations already require maintenance of
accessible features at § 36.211(a) of the title
III regulation, which obligates a title III entity
to maintain ALS in good working order. The
Department recognizes that maintenance of
ALS is key to its usability. Necessary
maintenance will vary dramatically from
venue to venue based upon a variety of
factors including frequency of use, number of
units, quality of equipment, and other items.
Accordingly, the Department has determined
that it is not appropriate to mandate details
of maintenance, but notes that failure to
maintain ALS would violate § 36.211(a) of
this rule.
The NPRM asked whether the Department
should return the issue of ALS requirements
to the Access Board for further review. The
Department has received substantial feedback
on the technical and scoping requirements
for ALS and is convinced that these
requirements are reasonable—especially in
light of the fact that the requirements largely
duplicate those in the 2006 IBC and the 2003
ANSI codes already adopted in many
States—and that the benefits justify the
requirements. In addition, the Department
believes that the new specifications will
make ALS work more effectively for more
persons with disabilities, which, together
with a growing population of new users, will
increase demand for ALS, thus mooting
criticism from some large venue operators
about insufficient demand. Thus, the
Department has determined that it is
unnecessary to refer this issue back to the
Access Board for reconsideration.
Accessible teeing grounds, putting greens,
and weather shelters. The Department’s
NPRM sought public input on the proposed
requirements for accessible golf courses.
These requirements specifically relate to
accessible routes within the boundaries of
the courses, as well as the accessibility of
golfing elements (e.g., teeing grounds, putting
greens, weather shelters).
In the NPRM, the Department sought
information from the owners and operators of
golf courses, both public and private, on the
extent to which their courses already have
golf car passages, and, if so, whether they
intended to avail themselves of the proposed
accessible route exception for golf car
passages. 73 FR 34508, 34513 (June 17, 2008).
Most commenters expressed support for
the adoption of an accessible route
requirement that includes an exception
permitting golf car passage as all or part of
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
an accessible route. Comments in favor of the
proposed standard came from golf course
owners and operators, individuals,
organizations, and disability rights groups,
while comments opposing adoption of the
golf course requirements generally came from
golf courses and organizations representing
the golf course industry.
The majority of commenters expressed the
general viewpoint that nearly all golf courses
provide golf cars and have either welldefined paths or permit golf cars to drive on
the course where paths are not present—and
thus meet the accessible route requirement.
Several commenters disagreed with the
assumption in the Initial RIA that virtually
every tee and putting green on an existing
course would need to be regraded in order to
provide compliant accessible routes.
According to one commenter, many golf
courses are relatively flat with little slope,
especially those heavily used by recreational
golfers. This commenter concurred with the
Department that it is likely that most existing
golf courses have a golf car passage to tees
and greens, thereby substantially minimizing
the cost of bringing an existing golf course
into compliance with the proposed
standards. One commenter reported that golf
course access audits found that the vast
majority of public golf courses would have
little difficulty in meeting the proposed golf
course requirements. In the view of some
commenters, providing access to golf courses
would increase golf participation by
individuals with disabilities.
The Department also received many
comments requesting clarification of the term
‘‘golf car passage.’’ For example, one
commenter requesting clarification of the
term ‘‘golf car passage’’ argued that golf
courses typically do not provide golf car
paths or pedestrian paths onto the actual
teeing grounds or greens, many of which are
higher or lower than the car path. This
commenter argued that if golf car passages
were required to extend onto teeing grounds
and greens in order to qualify for an
exception, then some golf courses would
have to substantially regrade teeing grounds
and greens at a high cost.
After careful consideration of the
comments, the Department has decided to
adopt the 2010 Standards specific to golf
facilities. The Department believes that in
order for individuals with mobility
disabilities to have an opportunity to play
golf that is equal to golfers without
disabilities, it is essential that golf courses
provide an accessible route or accessible golf
car passage to connect accessible elements
and spaces within the boundary of the golf
course, including teeing grounds, putting
greens, and weather shelters.
Public Comments on Other NPRM Issues
Equipment and furniture. Equipment and
furniture are covered under the Department’s
ADA regulations, including under the
provision requiring modifications in policies,
practices, and procedures and the provision
requiring barrier removal. See 28 CFR 36.302,
36.304. The Department has not issued
specific regulatory guidance on equipment
and furniture, but proposed such regulations
in 1991. The Department decided not to
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
establish specific equipment requirements at
that time because the requirements could be
addressed under other sections of the
regulation and because there were no
appropriate accessibility standards
applicable to many types of equipment at
that time. See 28 CFR part 36, app. B (2009)
(‘‘Proposed Section 36.309 Purchase of
Furniture and Equipment’’).
In the NPRM, the Department announced
its intention not to regulate equipment,
proposing instead to continue with the
current approach. The Department received
numerous comments objecting to this
decision and urging the Department to issue
equipment and furniture regulations. Based
on these comments, the Department has
decided that it needs to revisit the issuance
of equipment and furniture regulations, and
it intends to do so in future rulemaking.
Among the commenters’ key concerns,
many from the disability community objected
to the Department’s earlier decision not to
issue equipment regulations, especially for
medical equipment. These groups
recommended that the Department list by
name certain types of medical equipment
that must be accessible, including exam
tables (that lower to 15 inches above the floor
or lower), scales, medical and dental chairs,
and radiologic equipment (including
mammography equipment). These
commenters emphasized that the provision of
medically-related equipment and furniture
also should be specifically regulated since
they are not included in the 2004 ADAAG
(while depositories, change machines, fuel
dispensers, and ATMs are) and because of
their crucial role in the provision of
healthcare. Commenters described how the
lack of accessible medical equipment
negatively affects the health of individuals
with disabilities. For example, some
individuals with mobility disabilities do not
get thorough medical care because their
health providers do not have accessible
examination tables or scales.
Commenters also said that the
Department’s stated plan to assess the
financial impact of free-standing equipment
on businesses was not necessary, as any
regulations could include a financialbalancing test. Other commenters
representing persons who are blind or have
low vision urged the Department to mandate
accessibility for a wide range of equipment—
including household appliances (stoves,
washers, microwaves, and coffee makers),
audiovisual equipment (stereos and DVD
players), exercise machines, vending
equipment, ATMs, computers at Internet
cafes or hotel business centers, reservations
kiosks at hotels, and point-of-sale devices—
through speech output and tactile labels and
controls. They argued that modern
technology allows such equipment to be
made accessible at minimal cost. According
to these commenters, the lack of such
accessibility in point-of-sale devices is
particularly problematic because it forces
blind individuals to provide personal or
sensitive information (such as personal
identification numbers) to third parties,
which exposes them to identity fraud.
Because the ADA does not apply directly to
the manufacture of products, the Department
PO 00000
Frm 00153
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56315
lacks the authority to issue design
requirements for equipment designed
exclusively for use in private homes. See
Department of Justice, Americans with
Disabilities Act, ADA Title III Technical
Assistance Manual Covering Public
Accommodations and Commercial Facilities,
III–4.4200, available at
https://www.ada.gov/taman3.html. To the
extent that equipment intended for such use
is used by a covered entity to facilitate a
covered service or activity, that covered
entity must make the equipment accessible to
the extent that it can. See id.: 28 CFR part
36, app. B (2009) (‘‘Proposed Section 36.309
Purchase of Furniture and Equipment’’).
Some commenters urged the Department to
require swimming pool operators to provide
aquatic wheelchairs for the use of persons
with disabilities when the swimming pool
has a sloped entry. If there is a sloped entry,
a person who uses a wheelchair would
require a wheelchair designed for use in the
water in order to gain access to the pool since
taking a personal wheelchair into water
would rust and corrode the metal on the
chair and damage any electrical components
of a power wheelchair. Providing an aquatic
wheelchair made of non-corrosive materials
and designed for access into the water will
protect the water from contamination and
avoid damage to personal wheelchairs or
other mobility aids.
Additionally, many commenters urged the
Department to regulate the height of beds in
accessible hotel guest rooms and to ensure
that such beds have clearance at the floor to
accommodate a mechanical lift. These
commenters noted that in recent years, hotel
beds have become higher as hotels use
thicker mattresses, thereby making it difficult
or impossible for many individuals who use
wheelchairs to transfer onto hotel beds. In
addition, many hotel beds use a solid-sided
platform base with no clearance at the floor,
which prevents the use of a portable lift to
transfer an individual onto the bed.
Consequently, individuals who bring their
own lift to transfer onto the bed cannot
independently get themselves onto the bed.
Some commenters suggested various design
options that might avoid these situations.
The Department intends to provide specific
guidance relating to both hotel beds and
aquatic wheelchairs in a future rulemaking.
For the present, the Department reminds
covered entities that they have the obligation
to undertake reasonable modifications to
their current policies and procedures and to
undertake barrier removal or provide
alternatives to barrier removal to make their
facilities accessible to persons with
disabilities. In many cases, providing aquatic
wheelchairs or adjusting hotel bed heights
may be necessary to comply with those
requirements.
Commenters from the business community
objected to the lack of clarity from the NPRM
as to which equipment must be accessible
and how to make it accessible. Several
commenters urged the Department to clarify
that equipment located in a public
accommodation need not meet the technical
specifications of ADAAG so long as the
service provided by the equipment can be
provided by alternative means, such as an
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56316
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
employee. For example, the commenters
suggested that a self-service check-in kiosk in
a hotel need not comply with the reach range
requirement so long as a guest can check in
at the front desk nearby. Several commenters
argued that the Department should not
require that point-of-sale devices be
accessible to individuals who are blind or
have low vision (although complying with
accessible route and reach range was
acceptable), especially until the Department
adopts specific standards governing such
access.
The Department has decided not to add
specific scoping or technical requirements for
equipment and furniture in this final rule.
Other provisions of the regulation, including
those requiring reasonable modifications of
policies, practices, or procedures, readily
achievable barrier removal, and effective
communication will require the provision of
accessible equipment in appropriate
circumstances. Because it is clear that many
commenters want the Department to provide
additional specific requirements for
accessible equipment, the Department plans
to initiate a rulemaking to address these
issues in the near future.
Accessible golf cars. An accessible golf car
means a device that is designed and
manufactured to be driven on all areas of a
golf course, is independently usable by
individuals with mobility disabilities, has a
hand-operated brake and accelerator, carries
golf clubs in an accessible location, and has
a seat that both swivels and raises to put the
golfer in a standing or semi-standing
position. The 1991 regulation contained no
language specifically referencing accessible
golf cars. After considering the comments
addressing the ANPRM’s proposed
requirement that golf courses make at least
one specialized golf car available for the use
of individuals with disabilities, and the
safety of accessible golf cars and their use on
golf course greens, the Department stated in
the NPRM that it would not issue regulations
specific to golf cars.
The Department received many comments
in response to its decision to propose no new
regulation specific to accessible golf cars. The
majority of commenters urged the
Department to require golf courses to provide
accessible golf cars. These comments came
from individuals, disability advocacy and
recreation groups, a manufacturer of
accessible golf cars, and representatives of
local government. Comments supporting the
Department’s decision not to propose a new
regulation came from golf course owners,
associations, and individuals.
Many commenters argued that while the
existing title III regulation covered the issue,
the Department should nonetheless adopt
specific regulatory language requiring golf
courses to provide accessible golf cars. Some
commenters noted that many local
governments and park authorities that
operate public golf courses have already
provided accessible golf cars. Experience
indicates that such golf cars may be used
without damaging courses. Some argued that
having accessible golf cars would increase
golf course revenue by enabling more golfers
with disabilities to play the game. Several
commenters requested that the Department
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
adopt a regulation specifically requiring each
golf course to provide one or more accessible
golf cars. Other commenters recommended
allowing golf courses to make ‘‘pooling’’
arrangements to meet demands for such cars.
A few commenters expressed support for
using accessible golf cars to accommodate
golfers with and without disabilities.
Commenters also pointed out that the
Departments of the Interior and Defense have
already mandated that golf courses under
their jurisdictional control must make
accessible golf cars available unless it can be
demonstrated that doing so would change the
fundamental nature of the game.
While an industry association argued that
at least two models of accessible golf cars
meet the specifications recognized in the
field, and that accessible golf cars cause no
more damage to greens or other parts of golf
courses than players standing or walking
across the course, other commenters
expressed concerns about the potential for
damage associated with the use of accessible
golf cars. Citing safety concerns, golf
organizations recommended that an industry
safety standard be developed.
Although the Department declines to add
specific scoping or technical requirements for
golf cars to this final rule, the Department
expects to address requirements for
accessible golf cars in future rulemaking. In
the meantime, the Department believes that
golfers with disabilities who need accessible
golf cars are protected by other existing
provisions in the title III regulation,
including those requiring reasonable
modifications of policies, practices, or
procedures, and readily achievable barrier
removal.
Web site accessibility. Many commenters
expressed disappointment that the NPRM did
not specifically require title III-covered
entities to make their Web sites, through
which they offer goods and services,
accessible to individuals with disabilities.
Commenters urged the Department to require
specifically that entities that provide goods
or services on the Internet make their Web
sites accessible, regardless of whether or not
these entities also have a ‘‘bricks and mortar’’
location. The commenters explained that
such clarification was needed because of the
current ambiguity caused by court decisions
as to whether web-only businesses are
covered under title III. Commenters argued
that the cost of making Web sites accessible
through Web site design is minimal, yet
critical, to enabling individuals with
disabilities to benefit from the goods and
services an entity offers through its Web site.
The Internet has become an essential tool for
many Americans and, when accessible,
provides individuals with disabilities great
independence. Commenters recommended
that, at a minimum, the Department require
covered entities to meet the Electronic and
Information Technology Accessibility
Standards issued pursuant to section 508.
Under section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act
of 1973, Federal agencies are required to
make their Web sites accessible. 29 U.S.C.
794(d); 36 CFR Part 1194.
The Department agrees that the ability to
access the goods and services offered on the
Internet through the Web sites of public
PO 00000
Frm 00154
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
accommodations is of great importance to
individuals with disabilities, particularly
those who are blind or who have low vision.
When the ADA was enacted in 1990, the
Internet was unknown to most of the public.
Today, the Internet plays a critical role in
daily life for personal, civic, commercial, and
business purposes. In light of the growing
importance of eBcommerce, ensuring
nondiscriminatory access to the goods and
services offered through the Web sites of
covered entities can play a significant role in
fulfilling the goals of the ADA.
Although the language of the ADA does not
explicitly mention the Internet, the
Department has taken the position that title
III covers access to Web sites of public
accommodations. The Department has issued
guidance on the ADA as applied to the Web
sites of public entities, which includes the
availability of standards for Web site
accessibility. See Accessibility of State and
Local Government Websites to People with
Disabilities (June 2003), available at
www.ada.gov/websites2.htm. As the
Department stated in that publication, an
agency (and similarly a public
accommodation) with an inaccessible Web
site also may meet its legal obligations by
providing an accessible alternative for
individuals to enjoy its goods or services,
such as a staffed telephone information line.
However, such an alternative must provide
an equal degree of access in terms of hours
of operation and range of options and
programs available. For example, if retail
goods or bank services are posted on an
inaccessible Web site that is available 24
hours a day, 7 days a week to individuals
without disabilities, then the alternative
accessible method must also be available 24
hours a day, 7 days a week. Additional
guidance is available in the Web Content
Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG), available
at https://www.w3.org/TR/WAIWEBCONTENT (last visited June 24, 2010),
which are developed and maintained by the
Web Accessibility Initiative, a subgroup of
the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C®).
The Department did not issue proposed
regulations as part of its NPRM, and thus is
unable to issue specific regulatory language
on Web site accessibility at this time.
However, the Department expects to engage
in rulemaking relating to Web site
accessibility under the ADA in the near
future.
Multiple chemical sensitivities. The
Department received comments from a
number of individuals asking the Department
to add specific language to the final rule
addressing the needs of individuals with
chemical sensitivities. These commenters
expressed concern that the presence of
chemicals interferes with their ability to
participate in a wide range of activities.
These commenters also urged the Department
to add multiple chemical sensitivities to the
definition of a disability.
The Department has determined not to
include specific provisions addressing
multiple chemical sensitivities in the final
rule. In order to be viewed as a disability
under the ADA, an impairment must
substantially limit one or more major life
activities. An individual’s major life
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
activities of respiratory or neurological
functioning may be substantially limited by
allergies or sensitivity to a degree that he or
she is a person with a disability. When a
person has this type of disability, a covered
entity may have to make reasonable
modifications in its policies and practices for
that person. However, this determination is
an individual assessment and must be made
on a case-by-case basis.
22. Redesignate Appendix B to part 36
as Appendix C to part 36 and add
Appendix B to part 36 to read as
follows:
■
Appendix B to Part 36—Analysis and
Commentary on the 2010 ADA
Standards for Accessible Design
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Appendix B to Part 36
Analysis and Commentary on the 2010 ADA
Standards for Accessible Design
The following is a discussion of
substantive changes in the scoping and
technical requirements for new construction
and alterations resulting from the adoption of
new ADA Standards for Accessible Design
(2010 Standards) in the final rules for title II
(28 CFR part 35) and title III (28 CFR part 36)
of the Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA). The full text of the 2010 Standards is
available for review at https://www.ada.gov.
In the Department’s revised ADA title II
regulation, 28 CFR 35.104 Definitions, the
Department defines the term ‘‘2010
Standards’’ to mean the 2010 ADA Standards
for Accessible Design. The 2010 Standards
consist of the 2004 ADA Accessibility
Guidelines (ADAAG) and the requirements
contained in 28 CFR 35.151.
In the Department’s revised ADA title III
regulation, 28 CFR 36.104 Definitions, the
Department defines the term ‘‘2010
Standards’’ to mean the 2010 ADA Standards
for Accessible Design. The 2010 Standards
consist of the 2004 ADA Accessibility
Guidelines (ADAAG) and the requirements
contained in 28 CFR part 36 subpart D.
This summary addresses selected
substantive changes between the 1991 ADA
Standards for Accessible Design (1991
Standards) codified at 28 CFR part 36, app.
A (2009) and the 2010 Standards.
Editorial changes are not discussed.
Scoping and technical requirements are
discussed together, where appropriate, for
ease of understanding the requirements. In
addition, this document addresses selected
public comments received by the Department
in response to its September 2004 Advance
Notice of Proposed Rulemaking (ANPRM)
and its June 2008 Notice of Proposed
Rulemaking (NPRM).
The ANPRM and NPRM issued by the
Department concerning the proposed 2010
Standards stated that comments received by
the Access Board in response to its
development of the ADAAG upon which the
2010 Standards are based would be
considered in the development of the final
Standards. Therefore, the Department will
not restate here all of the comments and
responses to them issued by the Access
Board. The Department is supplementing the
Access Board’s comments and responses
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
with substantive comments and responses
here. Comments and responses addressed by
the Access Board that also were separately
submitted to the Department will not be
restated in their entirety here.
Section-by-Section Analysis With Public
Comments
Application and Administration
102 Dimensions for Adults and Children
Section 2.1 of the 1991 Standards stated
that the specifications were based upon adult
dimensions and anthropometrics. The 1991
Standards did not provide specific
requirements for children’s elements or
facilities.
Section 102 of the 2010 Standards states
that the technical requirements are based on
adult dimensions and anthropometrics. In
addition, technical requirements are also
provided based on children’s dimensions and
anthropometrics for drinking fountains,
water closets and other elements located in
toilet compartments, lavatories and sinks,
dining surfaces, and work surfaces.
103 Equivalent Facilitation
This section acknowledges that nothing in
these requirements prevents the use of
designs, products, or technologies as
alternatives to those prescribed, provided
that the alternatives result in substantially
equivalent or greater accessibility and
usability.
A commenter encouraged the Department
to include a procedure for determining
equivalent facilitation. The Department
believes that the responsibility for
determining and demonstrating equivalent
facilitation properly rests with the covered
entity. The purpose of allowing for
equivalent facilitation is to encourage
flexibility and innovation while still ensuring
access. The Department believes that
establishing potentially cumbersome
bureaucratic provisions for reviewing
requests for equivalent facilitation is
inappropriate.
104 Conventions
Dimensions. Section 104.1 of the 2010
Standards notes that dimensions not stated as
a ‘‘maximum’’ or ‘‘minimum’’ are absolute.
Section 104.1.1 of the 2010 Standards
provides that all dimensions are subject to
conventional industry tolerances except
where the requirement is stated as a range
with specific minimum and maximum end
points. A commenter stated that the 2010
Standards restrict the application of
construction tolerances only to those few
requirements that are expressed as an
absolute dimension.
This is an incorrect interpretation of
sections 104.1 and 104.1.1 of the 2010
Standards. Construction and manufacturing
tolerances apply to absolute dimensions as
well as to dimensions expressed as a
maximum or minimum. When the
requirement states a specified range, such as
in section 609.4 where grab bars must be
installed between 33 inches and 36 inches
above the finished floor, that range provides
an adequate tolerance. Advisory 104.1.1 gives
further guidance about tolerances.
Section 104.2 of the 2010 Standards
provides that where the required number of
PO 00000
Frm 00155
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56317
elements or facilities to be provided is
determined by calculations of ratios or
percentages and remainders or fractions
result, the next greater whole number of such
elements or facilities shall be provided.
Where the determination of the required size
or dimension of an element or facility
involves ratios or percentages, rounding
down for values less than one-half is
permissible.
A commenter stated that it is customary in
the building code industry to round up rather
than down for values less than one-half. As
noted here, where the 2010 Standards
provide for scoping, any resulting fractional
calculations will be rounded to the next
whole number. The Department is retaining
the portion of section 104.2 that permits
rounding down for values less than one-half
where the determination of the required size
or dimension of an element or facility
involves ratios or percentages. Such practice
is standard with the industry, and is in
keeping with model building codes.
105 Referenced Standards
Section 105 lists the industry requirements
that are referenced in the 2010 Standards.
This section also clarifies that where there is
a difference between a provision of the 2010
Standards and the referenced requirements,
the provision of the 2010 Standards applies.
106 Definitions
Various definitions have been added to the
2010 Standards and some definitions have
been deleted.
One commenter asked that the term public
right-of-way be defined; others asked that
various terms and words defined by the 1991
Standards, but which were eliminated from
the 2010 Standards, plus other words and
terms used in the 2010 Standards, be defined.
The Department believes that it is not
necessary to add definitions to this text
because section 106.3 of the 2010 Standards
provides that the meanings of terms not
specifically defined in the 2010 Standards, in
the Department’s ADA regulations, or in
referenced standards are to be defined by
collegiate dictionaries in the sense that the
context implies. The Department believes
that this provision adequately addresses
these commenters’ concerns.
Scoping and Technical Requirements
202 Existing Buildings and Facilities
Alterations. Under section 4.1.6(1)(c) of the
1991 Standards if alterations to single
elements, when considered together, amount
to an alteration of a room or space in a
building or facility, the entire room or space
would have to be made accessible. This
requirement was interpreted to mean that if
a covered entity chose to alter several
elements in a room there would come a point
when so much work had been done that it
would be considered that the entire room or
space would have to be made accessible.
Under section 202.3 of the 2010 Standards
entities can alter as many elements within a
room or space as they like without triggering
a requirement to make the entire room or
space accessible based on the alteration of
individual elements. This does not, however,
change the requirement that if the intent was
to alter the entire room or space, the entire
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56318
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
room or space must be made accessible and
comply with the applicable requirements of
Chapter 2 of the 2010 Standards.
Alterations to Primary Function Areas.
Section 202.4 restates a current requirement
under title III, and therefore represents no
change for title III facilities or for those title
II facilities that have elected to comply with
the 1991 Standards. However, under the
revised title II regulation, state and local
government facilities that have previously
elected to comply with the Uniform Federal
Accessibility Standards (UFAS) instead of
the 1991 Standards will no longer have that
option, and thus will now be subject to the
path of travel requirement. The path of travel
requirement provides that when a primary
function area of an existing facility is altered,
the path of travel to that area (including
restrooms, telephones, and drinking
fountains serving the area) must also be made
accessible, but only to the extent that the cost
of doing so does not exceed twenty percent
(20%) of the cost of the alterations to the
primary function area. The UFAS
requirements for a substantial alteration,
though different, may have covered some of
the items that will now be covered by the
path of travel requirement.
Visible Alarms in Alterations to Existing
Facilities. The 1991 Standards, at sections
4.1.3(14) and 4.1.6(1)(b), and sections 202.3
and 215.1 of the 2010 Standards require that
when existing elements and spaces of a
facility are altered, the alterations must
comply with new construction requirements.
Section 215.1 of the 2010 Standards adds a
new exception to the scoping requirement for
visible alarms in existing facilities so that
visible alarms must be installed only when
an existing fire alarm system is upgraded or
replaced, or a new fire alarm system is
installed.
Some commenters urged the Department
not to include the exception and to make
visible alarms a mandatory requirement for
all spaces, both existing and new. Other
commenters said that the exception will
make the safety of individuals with
disabilities dependent upon the varying age
of existing fire alarm systems. Other
commenters suggested that including this
requirement, even with the exception, will
result in significant cost to building owners
and operators.
The Department believes that the language
of the exception to section 215.1 of the 2010
Standards strikes a reasonable balance
between the interests of individuals with
disabilities and those of the business
community. If undertaken at the time a
system is installed, whether in a new facility
or in a planned system upgrade, the cost of
adding visible alarms is reasonable. Over
time, existing facilities will become fully
accessible to individuals who are deaf or
hard of hearing, and will add minimal costs
to owners and operators.
203 General Exceptions
Limited Access Spaces and Machinery
Spaces. The 1991 Standards, at section 4.1.1,
contain an exception that exempts ‘‘nonoccupiable’’ spaces that have limited means
of access, such as ladders or very narrow
passageways, and that are visited only by
service personnel for maintenance, repair, or
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
occasional monitoring of equipment, from all
accessibility requirements. Sections 203.4
and 203.5 of the 2010 Standards expand this
exception by removing the condition that the
exempt spaces be ‘‘non-occupiable,’’ and by
separating the other conditions into two
independent exceptions: one for spaces with
limited means of access, and the other for
machinery spaces. More spaces are exempted
by the exception in the 2010 Standards.
203, 206 and 215 Employee Work Areas
Common Use Circulation Paths in
Employee Work Areas. The 1991 Standards at
section 4.1.1(3), and the 2010 Standards at
section 203.9, require employee work areas
in new construction and alterations only to
be designed and constructed so that
individuals with disabilities can approach,
enter, and exit the areas. Section 206.2.8 of
the 2010 Standards requires accessible
common use circulation paths within
employee work areas unless they are subject
to exceptions in sections 206.2.8, 403.5,
405.5, and 405.8. The ADA, 42 U.S.C. 12112
(b)(5)(A) and (B), requires employers to make
reasonable accommodations in the workplace
for individuals with disabilities, which may
include modifications to work areas when
needed. Providing increased access in the
facility at the time of construction or
alteration will simplify the process of
providing reasonable accommodations when
they are needed.
The requirement for accessible common
use circulation paths will not apply to
existing facilities pursuant to the readily
achievable barrier removal requirement. The
Department has consistently taken the
position that barrier removal requirements do
not apply to areas used exclusively by
employees because the purpose of title III is
to ensure that access is provided to clients
and customers. See Appendix B to the 1991
regulation implementing title III, 28 CFR part
36.
Several exceptions to section 206.2.8 of the
2010 Standards exempt common use
circulation paths in employee work areas
from the requirements of section 402 where
it may be difficult to comply with the
technical requirements for accessible routes
due to the size or function of the area:
• Employee work areas, or portions of
employee work areas, that are less than 300
square feet and are elevated 7 inches or more
above the ground or finish floor, where
elevation is essential to the function of the
space, are exempt.
• Common use circulation paths within
employee work areas that are less than 1,000
square feet and are defined by permanently
installed partitions, counters, casework, or
furnishings are exempt. Kitchens in quick
service restaurants, cocktail bars, and the
employee side of service counters are
frequently covered by this exception.
• Common use circulation paths within
exterior employee work areas that are fully
exposed to the weather are exempt. Farms,
ranches, and outdoor maintenance facilities
are covered by this exception.
The 2010 Standards in sections 403.5 and
405.8 also contain exceptions to the technical
requirements for accessible routes for
circulation paths in employee work areas:
PO 00000
Frm 00156
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
• Machinery and equipment are permitted
to reduce the clear width of common use
circulation paths where the reduction is
essential to the function of the work
performed. Machinery and equipment that
must be placed a certain way to work
properly, or for ergonomics or to prevent
workplace injuries are covered by this
exception.
• Handrails are not required on ramps,
provided that they can be added in the
future.
Commenters stated that the requirements
set out in the 2010 Standards for accessible
common use circulation paths in employee
work areas are inappropriate, particularly in
commercial kitchens, storerooms, and behind
cocktail bars where wheelchairs would not
be easily accommodated. These commenters
further urged the Department not to adopt a
requirement that circulation paths in
employee work areas be at least 36 inches
wide, including those at emergency exits.
These commenters misunderstand the
scope of the provision. Nothing in the 2010
Standards requires all circulation paths in
non-exempt areas to be accessible. The
Department recognizes that building codes
and fire and life safety codes, which are
adopted by all of the states, require primary
circulation paths in facilities, including
employee work areas, to be at least 36 inches
wide for purposes of emergency egress.
Accessible routes also are at least 36 inches
wide. Therefore, the Department anticipates
that covered entities will be able to satisfy
the requirement to provide accessible
circulation paths by ensuring that their
required primary circulation paths are
accessible.
Individual employee work stations, such as
a grocery checkout counter or an automobile
service bay designed for use by one person,
do not contain common use circulation paths
and are not required to comply. Other work
areas, such as stockrooms that typically have
narrow pathways between shelves, would be
required to design only one accessible
circulation path into the stockroom. It would
not be necessary to make each circulation
path in the room accessible. In alterations it
may be technically infeasible to provide
accessible common use circulation paths in
some employee work areas. For example, in
a stock room of a department store significant
existing physical constraints, such as having
to move walls to avoid the loss of space to
store inventory, may mean that it is
technically infeasible (see section 106.5
‘‘Defined Terms’’ of the 2010 Standards) to
make even the primary common use
circulation path in that stock room wide
enough to be accessible. In addition, the 2010
Standards include exceptions for common
use circulation paths in employee work areas
where it may be difficult to comply with the
technical requirements for accessible routes
due to the size or function of the areas. The
Department believes that these exceptions
will provide the flexibility necessary to
ensure that this requirement does not
interfere with legitimate business operations.
Visible Alarms. Section 215.3 of the 2010
Standards provides that where employee
work areas in newly constructed facilities
have audible alarm coverage they are
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
required to have wiring systems that are
capable of supporting visible alarms that
comply with section 702 of the 2010
Standards. The 1991 Standards, at section
4.1.1(3), require visible alarms to be provided
where audible fire alarm systems are
provided, but do not require areas used only
by employees as work areas to be equipped
with accessibility features. As applied to
office buildings, the 1991 Standards require
visible alarms to be provided in public and
common use areas such as hallways,
conference rooms, break rooms, and
restrooms, where audible fire alarm systems
are provided.
Commenters asserted that the requirements
of section 215.3 of the 2010 Standards would
be burdensome to meet. These commenters
also raised concerns that all employee work
areas within existing buildings and facilities
must be equipped with accessibility features.
The commenters’ concerns about section
215.3 of the 2010 Standards represent a
misunderstanding of the requirements
applicable to employee work areas.
Newly constructed buildings and facilities
merely are required to provide wiring so that
visible alarm systems can be added as needed
to accommodate employees who are deaf or
hard of hearing. This is a minimal
requirement without significant impact.
The other issue in the comments represents
a misunderstanding of the Department’s
existing regulatory requirements. Employee
common use areas in covered facilities (e.g.,
locker rooms, break rooms, cafeterias, toilet
rooms, corridors to exits, and other common
use spaces) were required to be accessible
under the 1991 Standards; areas in which
employees actually perform their jobs are
required to enable a person using a
wheelchair or mobility device to approach,
enter, and exit the area. The 2010 Standards
require increased access through the
accessible common use circulation path
requirement, but neither the 1991 Standards
nor the 2010 Standards require employee
work stations to be accessible. Access to
specific employee work stations is governed
by title I of the ADA.
205 and 309 Operable Parts
Section 4.1.3, and more specifically
sections 4.1.3(13), 4.27.3, and 4.27.4 of the
1991 Standards, require operable parts on
accessible elements, along accessible routes,
and in accessible rooms and spaces to
comply with the technical requirements for
operable parts, including height and
operation. The 1991 Standards, at section
4.27.3, contain an exception, ‘‘* * * where
the use of special equipment dictates
otherwise or where electrical and
communications systems receptacles are not
normally intended for use by building
occupants,’’ from the technical requirement
for the height of operable parts. Section 205.1
of the 2010 Standards divides this exception
into three exceptions covering operable parts
intended only for use by service or
maintenance personnel, electrical or
communication receptacles serving a
dedicated use, and floor electrical
receptacles. Operable parts covered by these
new exceptions are exempt from all of the
technical requirements for operable parts in
section 309. The 2010 Standards also add
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
exceptions that exempt certain outlets at
kitchen counters; heating, ventilating and air
conditioning diffusers; redundant controls
provided for a single element, other than
light switches; and exercise machines and
equipment from all of the technical
requirements for operable parts. Exception 7,
in section 205.1 of the 2010 Standards,
exempts cleats and other boat securement
devices from the accessible height
requirement. Similarly, section 309.4 of the
2010 Standards exempts gas pump nozzles,
but only from the technical requirement for
activating force.
Reach Ranges. The 1991 Standards set the
maximum height for side reach at 54 inches
above the floor. The 2010 Standards, at
section 308.3, lower that maximum height to
48 inches above the finish floor or ground.
The 2010 Standards also add exceptions, as
discussed above, to the scoping requirement
for operable parts for certain elements that,
among other things, will exempt them from
the reach range requirements in section 308.
The 1991 Standards, at sections 4.1.3,
4.27.3, and 4.2.6, and the 2010 Standards, at
sections 205.1, 228.1, 228.2, 308.3, and 309.3,
require operable parts of accessible elements,
along accessible routes, and in accessible
rooms and spaces to be placed within the
forward or side-reach ranges specified in
section 308. The 2010 Standards also require
at least five percent (5%) of mailboxes
provided in an interior location and at least
one of each type of depository, vending
machine, change machine, and gas pump to
meet the technical requirements for a forward
or a side reach.
Section 4.2.6 of the 1991 Standards
specifies a maximum 54-inch high side reach
and a minimum 9-inch low side reach for an
unobstructed reach depth of 10 inches
maximum. Section 308.3.1 of the 2010
Standards specifies a maximum 48-inch high
side reach and a minimum 15-inch low side
reach where the element being reached for is
unobstructed. Section 308.3.1, Exception 1,
permits an obstruction that is no deeper than
10 inches between the edge of the clear floor
or ground space and the element that the
individual with a disability is trying to reach.
Changes in the side-reach range for new
construction and alterations in the 2010
Standards will affect a variety of building
elements such as light switches, electrical
outlets, thermostats, fire alarm pull stations,
card readers, and keypads.
Commenters were divided in their views
about the changes to the unobstructed sidereach range. Disability advocacy groups and
others, including individuals of short stature,
supported the modifications to the proposed
reach range requirements. Other commenters
stated that the new reach range requirements
will be burdensome for small businesses to
comply with. These comments argued that
the new reach range requirements restrict
design options, especially in residential
housing.
The Department continues to believe that
data submitted by advocacy groups and
others provides compelling evidence that
lowered reach range requirements will better
serve significantly greater numbers of
individuals with disabilities, including
individuals of short stature, persons with
PO 00000
Frm 00157
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56319
limited upper body strength, and others with
limited use of their arms and fingers. The
change to the side-reach range was developed
by the Access Board over a prolonged period
in which there was extensive public
participation. This process did not produce
any significant data to indicate that applying
the new unobstructed side-reach range
requirement in new construction or during
alterations would impose a significant
burden.
206 and Chapter 4 Accessible Routes
Slope. The 2010 Standards provide, at
section 403.3, that the cross slope of walking
surfaces not be steeper than 1:48. The 1991
Standards’ cross slope requirement was that
it not exceed 1:50. A commenter
recommended increasing the cross slope
requirement to allow a maximum of 1⁄2 inch
per foot (1:24) to prevent imperfections in
concrete surfaces from ponding water. The
Department continues to believe that the
requirement that a cross slope not be steeper
than 1:48 adequately provides for water
drainage in most situations. The suggested
changes would double the allowable cross
slope and create a significant impediment for
many wheelchair users and others with a
mobility disability.
Accessible Routes from Site Arrival Points
and Within Sites. The 1991 Standards, at
sections 4.1.2(1) and (2), and the 2010
Standards, at sections 206.2.1 and 206.2.2,
require that at least one accessible route be
provided within the site from site arrival
points to an accessible building entrance and
that at least one accessible route connect
accessible facilities on the same site. The
2010 Standards also add two exceptions that
exempt site arrival points and accessible
facilities within a site from the accessible
route requirements where the only means of
access between them is a vehicular way that
does not provide pedestrian access.
Commenters urged the Department to
eliminate the exception that exempts site
arrival points and accessible facilities from
the accessible route requirements where the
only means of access between them is a
vehicular way not providing pedestrian
access. The Department declines to accept
this recommendation because the
Department believes that its use will be
limited. If it can be reasonably anticipated
that the route between the site arrival point
and the accessible facilities will be used by
pedestrians, regardless of whether a
pedestrian route is provided, then this
exception will not apply. It will apply only
in the relatively rare situations where the
route between the site arrival point and the
accessible facility dictates vehicular access—
for example, an office complex on an isolated
site that has a private access road, or a selfservice storage facility where all users are
expected to drive to their storage units.
Another commenter suggested that the
language of section 406.1 of the 2010
Standards is confusing because it states that
curb ramps on accessible routes shall comply
with 406, 405.2 through 405.5, and 405.10.
The 1991 Standards require that curb ramps
be provided wherever an accessible route
crosses a curb.
The Department declines to change this
language because the change is purely
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56320
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
editorial, resulting from the overall changes
in the format of the 2010 Standards. It does
not change the substantive requirement. In
the 2010 Standards all elements on a
required accessible route must be accessible;
therefore, if the accessible route crosses a
curb, a curb ramp must be provided.
Areas of Sport Activity. Section 206.2.2 of
the 2010 Standards requires at least one
accessible route to connect accessible
buildings, facilities, elements, and spaces on
the same site. Advisory section 206.2.2 adds
the explanation that an accessible route must
connect the boundary of each area of sport
activity (e.g., courts and playing fields,
whether indoor or outdoor). Section 206.2.12
of the 2010 Standards further requires that in
court sports the accessible route must
directly connect both sides of the court.
Limited-Use/Limited-Application
Elevators, Destination-Oriented Elevators and
Private Residence Elevators. The 1991
Standards, at section 4.1.3(5), and the 2010
Standards, at sections 206.2 and 206.6,
include exceptions to the scoping
requirement for accessible routes that exempt
certain facilities from connecting each story
with an elevator. If a facility is exempt from
the scoping requirement, but nonetheless
installs an elevator, the 1991 Standards
require the elevator to comply with the
technical requirements for elevators. The
2010 Standards add a new exception that
allows a facility that is exempt from the
scoping requirement to install a limited-use/
limited-application (LULA) elevator. LULA
elevators are also permitted in the 1991
Standards and the 2010 Standards as an
alternative to platform lifts. The 2010
Standards also add a new exception that
permits private residence elevators in multistory dwelling and transient lodging units.
The 2010 Standards contain technical
requirements for LULA elevators at section
408 and private residence elevators at section
409.
Section 407.2.1.4 of the 2010 Standards
includes an exception to the technical
requirements for locating elevator call
buttons for destination-oriented elevators.
The advisory at section 407.2.1.4 describes
lobby controls for destination-oriented
elevator systems. Many elevator
manufacturers have recently developed these
new ‘‘buttonless’’ elevator control systems.
These new, more efficient elevators are
usually found in high-rise buildings that
have several elevators. They require
passengers to enter their destination floor on
an entry device, usually a keypad, in the
elevator lobby. The system then sends the
most efficient car available to take all of the
passengers going to the sixth floor, for
example, only to the sixth floor, without
making stops at the third, fourth, and fifth
floors on the way to the sixth floor. The
challenge for individuals who are blind or
have low vision is how to know which
elevator car to enter, after they have entered
their destination floor into the keypad.
Commenters requested that the Department
impose a moratorium on the installation of
destination-oriented elevators arguing that
this new technology presents wayfinding
challenges for persons who are blind or have
low vision.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
Section 407.2.1.5 of the 2010 Standards
allows destination-oriented elevators to not
provide call buttons with visible signals to
indicate when each call is registered and
when each call is answered provided that
visible and audible signals, compliant with
407.2.2 of the 2010 Standards, indicating
which elevator car to enter, are provided.
This will require the responding elevator car
to automatically provide audible and visible
communication so that the system will
always verbally and visually indicate which
elevator car to enter.
As with any new technology, all users
must have time to become acquainted with
how to use destination-oriented elevators.
The Department will monitor the use of this
new technology and work with the Access
Board so that there is not a decrease in
accessibility as a result of permitting this
new technology to be installed.
Accessible Routes to Tiered Dining Areas
in Sports Facilities. The 1991 Standards, at
sections 4.1.3(1) and 5.4, and section 206.2.5
of the 2010 Standards require an accessible
route to be provided to all dining areas in
new construction, including raised or sunken
dining areas. The 2010 Standards add a new
exception for tiered dining areas in sports
facilities. Dining areas in sports facilities are
typically integrated into the seating bowl and
are tiered to provide adequate lines of sight
for individuals with disabilities. The new
exception requires accessible routes to be
provided to at least 25 percent (25%) of the
tiered dining areas in sports facilities. Each
tier must have the same services and the
accessible routes must serve the accessible
seating.
Accessible Routes to Press Boxes. The 1991
Standards, at sections 4.1.1(1) and 4.1.3(1),
cover all areas of newly constructed facilities
required to be accessible, and require an
accessible route to connect accessible
entrances with all accessible spaces and
elements within the facility. Section 201.1 of
the 2010 Standards requires that all areas of
newly designed and constructed buildings
and facilities and altered portions of existing
buildings and facilities be accessible.
Sections 206.2.7(1) and (2) of the 2010
Standards add two exceptions that exempt
small press boxes that are located in
bleachers with entrances on only one level,
and small press boxes that are free-standing
structures elevated 12 feet or more above
grade, from the accessible route requirement
when the aggregate area of all press boxes in
a sports facility does not exceed 500 square
feet. The Department anticipates that this
change will significantly reduce the
economic impact on smaller sports facilities,
such as those associated with high schools or
community colleges.
Public Entrances. The 1991 Standards, at
sections 4.1.3(8) and 4.1.6(1)(h), require at
least fifty percent (50%) of public entrances
to be accessible. Additionally, the 1991
Standards require the number of accessible
public entrances to be equivalent to the
number of exits required by applicable
building and fire codes. With very few
exceptions, building and fire codes require at
least two exits to be provided from spaces
within a building and from the building
itself. Therefore, under the 1991 Standards
PO 00000
Frm 00158
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
where two public entrances are planned in a
newly constructed facility, both entrances are
required to be accessible.
Instead of requiring accessible entrances
based on the number of public entrances
provided or the number of exits required
(whichever is greater), section 206.4.1 of the
2010 Standards requires at least sixty percent
(60%) of public entrances to be accessible.
The revision is intended to achieve the same
result as the 1991 Standards. Thus, under the
2010 Standards where two public entrances
are planned in a newly constructed facility,
both entrances must be accessible.
Where multiple public entrances are
planned to serve different site arrival points,
the 1991 Standards, at section 4.1.2(1), and
section 206.2.1 of the 2010 Standards require
at least one accessible route to be provided
from each type of site arrival point provided,
including accessible parking spaces,
accessible passenger loading zones, public
streets and sidewalks, and public
transportation stops, to an accessible public
entrance that serves the site arrival point.
Commenters representing small businesses
recommended retaining the 1991
requirement for fifty percent (50%) of public
entrances of covered entities to be accessible.
These commenters also raised concerns about
the impact upon existing facilities of the new
sixty percent (60%) requirement.
The Department believes that these
commenters misunderstand the 1991
Standards. As explained above, the
requirements of the 1991 Standards generally
require more than fifty percent (50%) of
entrances in small facilities to be accessible.
Model codes require that most buildings have
more than one means of egress. Most
buildings have more than one entrance, and
the requirements of the 1991 Standards
typically resulted in these buildings having
more than one accessible entrance. Requiring
at least sixty percent (60%) of public
entrances to be accessible is not expected to
result in a substantial increase in the number
of accessible entrances compared to the
requirements of the 1991 Standards. In some
very large facilities this change may result in
fewer accessible entrances being required by
the 2010 Standards. However, the
Department believes that the realities of good
commercial design will result in more
accessible entrances being provided for the
convenience of all users.
The 1991 Standards and the 2010
Standards also contain exceptions that limit
the number of accessible entrances required
in alterations to existing facilities. When
entrances to an existing facility are altered
and the facility has an accessible entrance,
the entrance being altered is not required to
be accessible, unless a primary function area
also is altered and then an accessible path of
travel must be provided to the primary
function area to the extent that the cost to do
so is not disproportionate to the overall cost
of the alteration.
Alterations to Existing Elevators. When a
single space or element is altered, the 1991
Standards, at sections 4.1.6(1)(a) and (b),
require the space or element to be made
accessible. When an element in one elevator
is altered, the 2010 Standards, at section
206.6.1, require the same element to be
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
altered in all elevators that are programmed
to respond to the same call button as the
altered elevator.
The 2010 Standards, at sections 407.2.1–
407.4.7.1.2, also contain exceptions to the
technical requirements for elevators when
existing elevators are altered that minimize
the impact of this change.
Commenters expressed concerns about the
requirement that when an element in one
elevator is altered, the 2010 Standards, at
section 206.6.1, will require the same
element to be altered in all elevators that are
programmed to respond to the same call
button as the altered elevator. Commenters
noted that such a requirement is burdensome
and will result in costly efforts without
significant benefit to individuals with
disabilities.
The Department believes that this
requirement is necessary to ensure that when
an individual with a disability presses a call
button, an accessible elevator will arrive.
Without this requirement, individuals with
disabilities would have to wait unnecessarily
for an accessible elevator to make its way to
them arbitrarily. The Department also
believes that the effort required to meet this
provision is minimal in the majority of
situations because it is typical to upgrade all
of the elevators in a bank at the same time.
Accessible Routes in Dwelling Units with
Mobility Features. Sections 4.34.1 and 4.34.2
of the UFAS require the living area, kitchen
and dining area, bedroom, bathroom, and
laundry area, where provided, in covered
dwelling units with mobility features to be
on an accessible route. Where covered
dwelling units have two or more bedrooms,
at least two bedrooms are required to be on
an accessible route.
The 2010 Standards at sections 233.3.1.1,
809.1, 809.2, 809.2.1, and 809.4 will require
all spaces and elements within dwelling
units with mobility features to be on an
accessible route. These changes exempt
unfinished attics and unfinished basements
from the accessible route requirement.
Section 233.3.5 of the 2010 Standards also
includes an exception to the dispersion
requirement that permits accessible singlestory dwelling units to be constructed, where
multi-story dwelling units are one of the
types of units provided.
Location of Accessible Routes. Section
4.3.2(1) of the 1991 Standards requires
accessible routes connecting site arrival
points and accessible building entrances to
coincide with general circulation paths, to
the maximum extent feasible. The 2010
Standards require all accessible routes to
coincide with or be located in the same
general area as general circulation paths.
Additionally, a new provision specifies that
where a circulation path is interior, the
required accessible route must also be
located in the interior of the facility. The
change affects a limited number of buildings.
Section 206.3 of the 2010 Standards requires
all accessible routes to coincide with or be
located in the same general area as general
circulation paths. Designing newly
constructed interior accessible routes to
coincide with or to be located in the same
area as general circulation paths will not
typically present a difficult design challenge
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
and is expected to impose limited design
constraints. The change will have no impact
on exterior accessible routes. The 1991
Standards and the 2010 Standards also
require accessible routes to be located in the
interior of the facility where general
circulation paths are located in the interior
of the facility. The revision affects a limited
number of buildings.
Location of Accessible Routes to Stages.
The 1991 Standards at section 4.33.5 require
an accessible route to connect the accessible
seating and the performing area. Section
206.2.6 of the 2010 Standards requires the
accessible route to directly connect the
seating area and the accessible seating, stage,
and all areas of the stage, where a circulation
path directly connects the seating area and
the stage. Both the 1991 Standards and the
2010 Standards also require an accessible
route to connect the stage and ancillary areas,
such as dressing rooms, used by performers.
The 2010 Standards do not require an
additional accessible route to be provided to
the stage. Rather, the changes specify where
the accessible route to the stage, which is
required by the 1991 Standards, must be
located.
207 Accessible Means of Egress
General. The 1991 Standards at sections
4.1.3(9); 4.1.6(1)(g); and 4.3.10 establish
scoping and technical requirements for
accessible means of egress. Section 207.1 of
the 2010 Standards reference the
International Building Code (IBC) for scoping
and technical requirements for accessible
means of egress.
The 1991 Standards require the same
number of accessible means of egress to be
provided as the number of exits required by
applicable building and fire codes. The IBC
requires at least one accessible means of
egress and at least two accessible means of
egress where more than one means of egress
is required by other sections of the building
code. The changes in the 2010 Standards are
expected to have minimal impact since the
model fire and life safety codes, which are
adopted by all of the states, contain
equivalent requirements with respect to the
number of accessible means of egress.
The 1991 Standards require areas of rescue
assistance or horizontal exits in facilities
with levels above or below the level of exit
discharge. Areas of rescue assistance are
spaces that have direct access to an exit, stair,
or enclosure where individuals who are
unable to use stairs can go to call for
assistance and wait for evacuation. The 2010
Standards incorporate the requirements
established by the IBC. The IBC requires an
evacuation elevator designed with standby
power and other safety features that can be
used for emergency evacuation of individuals
with disabilities in facilities with four or
more stories above or below the exit
discharge level, and allows exit stairways
and evacuation elevators to be used as an
accessible means of egress in conjunction
with areas of refuge or horizontal exits. The
change is expected to have minimal impact
since the model fire and life safety codes,
adopted by most states, already contain
parallel requirements with respect to
evacuation elevators.
PO 00000
Frm 00159
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56321
The 1991 Standards exempt facilities
equipped with a supervised automatic
sprinkler system from providing areas of
rescue assistance, and also exempt alterations
to existing facilities from providing an
accessible means of egress. The IBC exempts
buildings equipped with a supervised
automatic sprinkler system from certain
technical requirements for areas of refuge,
and also exempts alterations to existing
facilities from providing an accessible means
of egress.
The 1991 and 2010 Standards require signs
that provide direction to or information about
functional spaces to meet certain technical
requirements. The 2010 Standards, at section
216.4, address exit signs. This section is
consistent with the requirements of the IBC.
Signs used for means of egress are covered
by this scoping requirement. The
requirements in the 2010 Standards require
tactile signs complying with sections 703.1,
703.2 and 703.5 at doors at exit passageways,
exit discharge, and at exit stairways.
Directional exit signs and signs at areas of
refuge required by section 216.4.3 must have
visual characters and features complying
with section 703.5.
Standby Power for Platform Lifts. The 2010
Standards at section 207.2 require standby
power to be provided for platform lifts that
are permitted to serve as part of an accessible
means of egress by the IBC. The IBC permits
platform lifts to serve as part of an accessible
means of egress in a limited number of places
where platform lifts are allowed in new
construction. The 1991 Standards, at 4.1.3(5)
Exception 4(a) through (d), and the 2010
Standards, at sections 206.7.1 through
206.7.10, similarly limit the places where
platform lifts are allowed in new
construction.
Commenters urged the Department to
reconsider provisions that would require
standby power to be provided for platform
lifts. Concerns were raised that ensuring
standby power would be too burdensome.
The Department views this issue as a
fundamental life safety issue. Lift users face
the prospect of being trapped on the lift in
the event of a power failure if standby power
is not provided. The lack of standby power
could be life-threatening in situations where
the power failure is associated with a fire or
other emergency. The use of a platform lift
is generally only one of the options available
to covered entities. Covered entities that are
concerned about the costs associated with
maintaining standby power for a lift may
wish to explore design options that would
incorporate the use of a ramp.
208 and 502 Parking Spaces
General. Where parking spaces are
provided, the 1991 Standards, at sections
4.1.2(5)(a) and (7) and 7(a), and the 2010
Standards, at section 208.1, require a
specified number of the parking spaces to be
accessible. The 2010 Standards, at section
208, include an exception that exempts
parking spaces used exclusively for buses,
trucks, delivery vehicles, law enforcement
vehicles, or for purposes of vehicular
impound, from the scoping requirement for
parking spaces, provided that when these lots
are accessed by the public the lot has an
accessible passenger loading zone.
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56322
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
The 2010 Standards require accessible
parking spaces to be identified by signs that
display the International Symbol of
Accessibility. Section 216.5, Exceptions 1
and 2, of the 2010 Standards exempt certain
accessible parking spaces from this signage
requirement. The first exception exempts
sites that have four or fewer parking spaces
from the signage requirement. Residential
facilities where parking spaces are assigned
to specific dwelling units are also exempted
from the signage requirement.
Commenters stated that the first exception,
by allowing a small parking lot with four or
fewer spaces not to post a sign at its one
accessible space, is problematic because it
could allow all drivers to park in accessible
parking spaces. The Department believes that
this exception provides necessary relief for
small business entities that may otherwise
face the prospect of having between twentyfive percent (25%) and one hundred percent
(100%) of their limited parking area
unavailable to their customers because they
are reserved for the exclusive use of persons
whose vehicles display accessible tags or
parking placards. The 2010 Standards still
require these businesses to ensure that at
least one of their available parking spaces is
designed to be accessible.
A commenter stated that accessible parking
spaces must be clearly marked. The
Department notes that section 502.6 of the
2010 Standards provides that accessible
parking spaces must be identified by signs
that include the International Symbol of
Accessibility. Also, section 502.3.3 of the
2010 Standards requires that access aisles be
marked so as to discourage parking in them.
Access Aisle. Section 502.3 of the 2010
Standards requires that an accessible route
adjoin each access aisle serving accessible
parking spaces. The accessible route connects
each access aisle to accessible entrances.
Commenters questioned why the 2010
Standards would permit an accessible route
used by individuals with disabilities to
coincide with the path of moving vehicles.
The Department believes that the 2010
Standards appropriately recognize that not
all parking facilities provide separate
pedestrian routes. Section 502.3 of the 2010
Standards provides the flexibility necessary
to permit designers and others to determine
the most appropriate location of the
accessible route to the accessible entrances.
If all pedestrians using the parking facility
are expected to share the vehicular lanes,
then the ADA permits covered entities to use
the vehicular lanes as part of the accessible
route. The advisory note in section 502.3 of
the 2010 Standards, however, calls attention
to the fact that this practice, while permitted,
is not ideal. Accessible parking spaces must
be located on the shortest accessible route of
travel to an accessible entrance. Accessible
parking spaces and the required accessible
route should be located where individuals
with disabilities do not have to cross
vehicular lanes or pass behind parked
vehicles to have access to an accessible
entrance. If it is necessary to cross a
vehicular lane because, for example, local
fire engine access requirements prohibit
parking immediately adjacent to a building,
then a marked crossing running
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
perpendicular to the vehicular route should
be included as part of the accessible route to
an accessible entrance.
Van Accessible Parking Spaces. The 1991
Standards, at sections 4.1.2(5)(b), 4.6.3, 4.6.4,
and 4.6.5, require one in every eight
accessible parking spaces to be van
accessible. Section 208.2.4 of the 2010
Standards requires one in every six
accessible parking spaces to be van
accessible.
A commenter asked whether automobiles
other than vans may park in van accessible
parking spaces. The 2010 Standards do not
prohibit automobiles other than vans from
using van accessible parking spaces. The
Department does not distinguish between
vehicles that are actual ‘‘vans’’ versus other
vehicles such as trucks, station wagons, sport
utility vehicles, etc. since many vehicles
other than vans may be used by individuals
with disabilities to transport mobility
devices.
Commenters’ opinions were divided on
this point. Facility operators and others
asked for a reduction in the number of
required accessible parking spaces, especially
the number of van accessible parking spaces,
because they claimed these spaces often are
not used. Individuals with disabilities,
however, requested an increase in the
scoping requirements for these parking
spaces.
The Department is aware that a strong
difference of opinion exists between those
who use such spaces and those who must
provide or maintain them. Therefore, the
Department did not increase the total number
of accessible spaces required. The only
change was to increase the proportion of
spaces that must be accessible to vans and
other vehicles equipped to transport mobility
devices.
Direct Access Entrances From Parking
Structures. Where levels in a parking garage
have direct connections for pedestrians to
another facility, the 1991 Standards, at
section 4.1.3(8)(b)(i), require at least one of
the direct connections to be accessible. The
2010 Standards, at section 206.4.2, require all
of these direct connections to be accessible.
209 and 503 Passenger Loading Zones and
Bus Stops
Passenger Loading Zones at Medical Care
and Long-Term Care Facilities. Sections 6.1
and 6.2 of the 1991 Standards and section
209.3 of the 2010 Standards require medical
care and long-term care facilities, where the
period of stay exceeds 24 hours, to provide
at least one accessible passenger loading zone
at an accessible entrance. The 1991
Standards also require a canopy or roof
overhang at this passenger loading zone. The
2010 Standards do not require a canopy or
roof overhang.
Commenters urged the Department to
reinstate the requirement for a canopy or roof
overhang at accessible passenger loading
zones at medical care and long-term care
facilities. While the Department recognizes
that a canopy or roof overhang may afford
useful protection from inclement weather
conditions to everyone using a facility, it is
not clear that the absence of such protection
would impede access by individuals with
PO 00000
Frm 00160
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
disabilities. Therefore, the Department
declined to reinstate that requirement.
Passenger Loading Zones. Where passenger
loading zones are provided, the 1991
Standards, at sections 4.1.2(5) and 4.6.6,
require at least one passenger loading zone to
be accessible. Sections 209.2.1 and 503 of the
2010 Standards, require facilities such as
airport passenger terminals that have long,
continuous passenger loading zones to
provide one accessible passenger loading
zone in every continuous 100 linear feet of
loading zone space. The 1991 Standards and
the 2010 Standards both include technical
requirements for the vehicle pull-up space
(96 inches wide minimum and 20 feet long
minimum). Accessible passenger loading
zones must have an access aisle that is 60
inches wide minimum and extends the full
length of the vehicle pull-up space. The 1991
Standards permit the access aisle to be on the
same level as the vehicle pull-up space, or on
the sidewalk. The 2010 Standards require the
access aisle to be on the same level as the
vehicle pull-up space and to be marked so as
to discourage parking in the access aisle.
Commenters expressed concern that
certain covered entities, particularly airports,
cannot accommodate the requirements of the
2010 Standards to provide passenger loading
zones, and urged a revision that would
require one accessible passenger loading
zone located in reasonable proximity to each
building entrance served by the curb.
Commenters raised a variety of issues
about the requirements at section 503 of the
2010 Standards stating that the requirements
for an access aisle, width, length, and
marking of passenger loading zones are not
clear, do not fully meet the needs of
individuals with disabilities, may run afoul
of state or local requirements, or may not be
needed because many passenger loading
zones are typically staffed by doormen or
valet parkers. The wide range of opinions
expressed in these comments indicates that
this provision is controversial. However,
none of these comments provided sufficient
data to enable the Department to determine
that the requirement is not appropriate.
Valet Parking and Mechanical Access
Parking Garages. The 1991 Standards, at
sections 4.1.2(5)(a) and (e), and sections
208.2, 209.4, and 209.5 of the 2010 Standards
require parking facilities that provide valet
parking services to have an accessible
passenger loading zone. The 2010 Standards
extend this requirement to mechanical access
parking garages. The 1991 Standards
contained an exception that exempted valet
parking facilities from providing accessible
parking spaces. The 2010 Standards
eliminate this exception. The reason for not
retaining the provision is that valet parking
is a service, not a facility type.
Commenters questioned why the exception
for valet parking facilities from providing
accessible parking spaces was eliminated.
The provision was eliminated because valet
parkers may not have the skills necessary to
drive a vehicle that is equipped to be
accessible, including use of hand controls, or
when a seat is not present to accommodate
a driver using a wheelchair. In that case,
permitting the individual with a disability to
self-park may be a required reasonable
modification of policy by a covered entity.
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
210 and 504 Stairways
The 1991 Standards require stairs to be
accessible only when they provide access to
floor levels not otherwise connected by an
accessible route (e.g., where the accessible
route is provided by an elevator, lift, or
ramp). The 2010 Standards, at sections 210.1
and 504, require all newly constructed stairs
that are part of a means of egress to comply
with the requirements for accessible stairs,
which include requirements for accessible
treads, risers, and handrails. In existing
facilities, where floor levels are connected by
an accessible route, only the handrail
requirement will apply when the stairs are
altered. Exception 2 to section 210.1 of the
2010 Standards permits altered stairs to not
comply with the requirements for accessible
treads and risers where there is an accessible
route between floors served by the stairs.
Most commenters were in favor of this
requirement for handrails in alterations and
stated that adding handrails to stairs during
alterations would be feasible and not costly
while providing important safety benefits.
The Department believes that it strikes an
appropriate balance by focusing the
expanded requirements on new construction.
The 2010 Standards apply to stairs which are
part of a required means of egress. Few
stairways are not part of a means of egress.
The 2010 Standards are consistent with most
building codes which do not exempt
stairways when the route is also served by a
ramp or elevator.
211 and 602 Drinking Fountains
Sections 4.1.3(10) and 4.15 of the 1991
Standards and sections 211 and 602 of the
2010 Standards require drinking fountains to
be provided for persons who use wheelchairs
and for others who stand. The 1991
Standards require wall and post-mounted
cantilevered drinking fountains mounted at a
height for wheelchair users to provide clear
floor space for a forward approach with knee
and toe clearance and free standing or builtin drinking fountains to provide clear floor
space for a parallel approach. The 2010
Standards require drinking fountains
mounted at a height for wheelchair users to
provide clear floor space for a forward
approach with knee and toe clearance, and
include an exception for a parallel approach
for drinking fountains installed at a height to
accommodate very small children. The 2010
Standards also include a technical
requirement for drinking fountains for
standing persons.
212 and 606 Kitchens, Kitchenettes,
Lavatories, and Sinks
The 1991 Standards, at sections 4.24, and
9.2.2(7), contain technical requirements for
sinks and only have specific scoping
requirements for sinks in transient lodging.
Section 212.3 of the 2010 Standards requires
at least five percent (5%) of sinks in each
accessible space to comply with the technical
requirements for sinks. The technical
requirements address clear floor space,
height, faucets, and exposed pipes and
surfaces. The 1991 Standards, at section 4.24,
and the 2010 Standards, at section 606, both
require the clear floor space at sinks to be
positioned for a forward approach and knee
and toe clearance to be provided under the
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
sink. The 1991 Standards, at section 9.2.2(7),
allow the clear floor space at kitchen sinks
and wet bars in transient lodging guest rooms
with mobility features to be positioned for
either a forward approach with knee and toe
clearance or for a parallel approach.
The 2010 Standards include an exception
that permits the clear floor space to be
positioned for a parallel approach at kitchen
sinks in any space where a cook top or
conventional range is not provided, and at a
wet bar.
A commenter stated that it is unclear what
the difference is between a sink and a
lavatory, and that this is complicated by
requirements that apply to sinks (five percent
(5%) accessible) and lavatories (at least one
accessible). The term ‘‘lavatory’’ generally
refers to the specific type of plumbing fixture
required for hand washing in toilet and
bathing facilities. The more generic term
‘‘sink’’ applies to all other types of sinks
located in covered facilities.
A commenter recommended that the
mounting height of sinks and lavatories
should take into consideration the increased
use of three-wheeled scooters and some
larger wheelchairs. The Department is aware
that the use of three-wheeled scooters and
larger wheelchairs may be increasing and
that some of these devices may require
changes in space requirements in the future.
The Access Board is funding research to
obtain data that may be used to develop
design guidelines that provide access to
individuals using these mobility devices.
213, 603, 604, and 608 Toilet and Bathing
Facilities, Rooms, and Compartments
General. Where toilet facilities and bathing
facilities are provided, they must comply
with section 213 of the 2010 Standards.
A commenter recommended that all
accessible toilet facilities, toilet rooms, and
compartments should be required to have
signage indicating that such spaces are
restricted solely for the use of individuals
with disabilities. The Department believes
that it is neither necessary nor appropriate to
restrict the use of accessible toilet facilities.
Like many other facilities designed to be
accessible, accessible toilet facilities can and
do serve a wide range of individuals with
and without disabilities.
A commenter recommended that more
than one wheelchair accessible compartment
be provided in toilet rooms serving airports
and train stations because these
compartments are likely to be occupied by
individuals with luggage and persons with
disabilities often take longer to use them. The
Access Board is examining airport terminal
accessibility as part of an ongoing effort to
facilitate accessibility and promote effective
design. As part of these efforts, the Access
Board will examine requirements for
accessible toilet compartments in larger
airport restrooms. The Department declines
to change the scoping for accessible toilet
compartments at this time.
Ambulatory Accessible Toilet
Compartments. Section 213.3.1 of the 2010
Standards requires multi-user men’s toilet
rooms, where the total of toilet compartments
and urinals is six or more, to contain at least
one ambulatory accessible compartment. The
1991 Standards count only toilet stalls
PO 00000
Frm 00161
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56323
(compartments) for this purpose. The 2010
Standards establish parity between multiuser women’s toilet rooms and multi-user
men’s toilet rooms with respect to
ambulatory accessible toilet compartments.
Urinals. Men’s toilet rooms with only one
urinal will no longer be required to provide
an accessible urinal under the 2010
Standards. Such toilet rooms will still be
required to provide an accessible toilet
compartment.
Commenters urged that the exception be
eliminated. The Department believes that this
change will provide flexibility to many small
businesses and it does not alter the
requirement that all common use restrooms
must be accessible.
Multiple Single-User Toilet Rooms. Where
multiple single-user toilet rooms are
clustered in a single location, fifty percent
(50%), rather than the one hundred percent
(100%) required by the 1991 Standards, are
required to be accessible by section 213.2,
Exception 4 of the 2010 Standards. Section
216.8 of the 2010 Standards requires that
accessible single-user toilet rooms must be
identified by the International Symbol of
Accessibility where all single-user toilet
rooms are not accessible.
Hospital Patient Toilet Rooms. An
exception was added in section 223.1 of the
2010 Standards to allow toilet rooms that are
part of critical or intensive care patient
sleeping rooms to no longer be required to
provide mobility features.
Water Closet Location and Rear Grab Bar.
Section 604.2 of the 2010 Standards allows
greater flexibility for the placement of the
centerline of wheelchair accessible and
ambulatory accessible water closets. Section
604.5.2, Exception 1 permits a shorter grab
bar on the rear wall where there is not
enough wall space due to special
circumstances (e.g., when a lavatory or other
recessed fixture is located next to the water
closet and the wall behind the lavatory is
recessed so that the lavatory does not overlap
the required clear floor space at the water
closet). The 1991 Standards contain no
exception for grab bar length, and require the
water closet centerline to be exactly 18
inches from the side wall, while the 2010
Standards requirement allows the centerline
to be between 16 and 18 inches from the side
wall in wheelchair accessible toilet
compartments and 17 to 19 inches in
ambulatory accessible toilet compartments.
Water Closet Clearance. Section 604.3 of
the 2010 Standards represents a change in
the accessibility requirements where a
lavatory is installed adjacent to the water
closet. The 1991 Standards allow the nearest
side of a lavatory to be placed 18 inches
minimum from the water closet centerline
and 36 inches minimum from the side wall
adjacent to the water closet. However,
locating the lavatory so close to the water
closet prohibits many individuals with
disabilities from using a side transfer. To
allow greater transfer options, including side
transfers, the 2010 Standards prohibit
lavatories from overlapping the clear floor
space at water closets, except in covered
residential dwelling units.
A majority of commenters, including
persons who use wheelchairs, strongly
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56324
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
agreed with the requirement to provide
enough space for a side transfer. These
commenters believed that the requirement
will increase the usability of accessible
single-user toilet rooms by making side
transfers possible for many individuals who
use wheelchairs and would have been unable
to transfer to a water closet using a side
transfer even if the water closet complied
with the 1991 Standards. In addition, many
commenters noted that the additional clear
floor space at the side of the water closet is
also critical for those providing assistance
with transfers and personal care for persons
with disabilities. Numerous comments noted
that this requirement is already included in
other model accessibility standards and
many state and local building codes and its
adoption in the 2010 Standards is a
important part of harmonization efforts. The
Department agrees that the provision of
enough clear floor space to permit side
transfers at water closets is an important
feature that must be provided to ensure
access for persons with disabilities in toilet
and bathing facilities. Furthermore, the
adoption of this requirement closely
harmonizes with the model codes and many
state and local building codes.
Other commenters urged the Department
not to adopt section 604.3 of the 2010
Standards claiming that it will require singleuser toilet rooms to be two feet wider than
the 1991 Standards require, and this
additional requirement will be difficult to
meet. Multiple commentators also expressed
concern that the size of single-user toilet
rooms would be increased but they did not
specify how much larger such toilet rooms
would have to be in their estimation. In
response to these concerns, the Department
developed a series of single-user toilet room
floor plans demonstrating that the total
square footage between representative
layouts complying with the 1991 Standards
and the 2010 Standards are comparable. The
Department believes the floor plan
comparisons clearly show that size
differences between the two Standards are
not substantial and several of the 2010
Standards-compliant plans do not require
additional square footage compared to the
1991 Standards plans. These single-user
toilet room floor plans are shown below.
Several commenters concluded that
alterations of single-user toilet rooms should
be exempt from the requirements of section
604.3 of the 2010 Standards because of the
significant reconfiguration and
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
reconstruction that would be required, such
as moving plumbing fixtures, walls, and/or
doors at significant additional expense. The
Department disagrees with this conclusion
since it fails to take into account several key
points. The 2010 Standards contain
provisions for in-swinging doors, 603.2.3,
Exception 2, and recessed fixtures adjacent to
water closets, 604.5.2, Exception 1. These
provisions give flexibility to create more
compact room designs and maintain required
clearances around fixtures. As with the 1991
Standards, any alterations must comply to
the extent that it is technically feasible to do
so.
The requirements at section 604.3.2 of the
2010 Standards specify how required
clearance around the water closet can overlap
with specific elements and spaces. An
exception that applies only to covered
residential dwelling units permits a lavatory
to be located no closer than 18 inches from
the centerline of the water closet. The
requirements at section 604.3.2 of the 2010
Standards increase accessibility for
individuals with disabilities. One commenter
expressed concern about other items that
might overlap the clear floor space, such as
dispensers, shelves, and coat hooks on the
side of the water closet where a wheelchair
would be positioned for a transfer. Section
604.3.2 of the 2010 Standards allows items
such as associated grab bars, dispensers,
sanitary napkin disposal units, coat hooks,
and shelves to overlap the clear floor space.
These are items that typically do not affect
the usability of the clear floor space.
Toilet Room Doors. Sections 4.22.2 and
4.22.3 of the 1991 Standards and Section
603.2.3 of the 2010 Standards permit the
doors of all toilet or bathing rooms with inswinging doors to swing into the required
turning space, but not into the clear floor
space required at any fixture. In single-user
toilet rooms or bathing rooms, Section
603.2.3 Exception 2 of the 2010 Standards
permits the door to swing into the clear floor
space of an accessible fixture if a clear floor
space that measures at least 30 inches by 48
inches is provided outside of the door swing.
Several commenters expressed reservations
about Exception 2 of Section 603.2.3.
Concerns were raised that permitting doors of
single-user toilet or bathing rooms with inswinging doors to swing into the clearance
around any fixture will result in
inaccessibility to individuals using larger
wheelchairs and scooters. Additionally, a
commenter stated that the exception would
PO 00000
Frm 00162
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
require an unacceptable amount of precision
maneuvering by individuals who use
standard size wheelchairs. The Department
believes that this provision achieves
necessary flexibility while providing a
minimum standard for maneuvering space.
The standard does permit additional
maneuvering space to be provided, if needed.
In the NPRM, the Department provided a
series of plan drawings illustrating
comparisons of the minimum size single-user
toilet rooms. These floor plans showed
typical examples that met the minimum
requirements of the proposed ADA
Standards. A commenter was of the opinion
that the single-user toilet plans shown in the
NPRM demonstrated that the new
requirements will not result in a substantial
increase in room size. Several other
commenters representing industry offered
criticisms of the single-user toilet floor plans
to support their assertion that a 2010
Standards-compliant single-user toilet room
will never be smaller and will likely be larger
than such a toilet room required under the
1991 Standards. Commenters also asserted
that the floor plans prepared by the
Department were of a very basic design
which could be accommodated in a minimal
sized space whereas the types of facilities
their customers demand would require
additional space to be added to the rooms
shown in the floor plans. The Department
recognizes that there are many design choices
that can affect the size of a room or space.
Choices to install additional features may
result in more space being needed to provide
sufficient clear floor space for that additional
feature to comply. However, many facilities
that have these extra features also tend to
have ample space to meet accessibility
requirements. Other commenters asserted
that public single-user toilet rooms always
include a closer and a latch on the entry
door, requiring a larger clear floor space than
shown on the push side of the door shown
in Plan 1B. The Department acknowledges
that in instances where a latch is provided
and a closer is required by other regulations
or codes, the minimum size of a room with
an out-swinging door may be slightly larger
than as shown in Plan 1C.
Additional floor plans of single-user toilet
rooms are now included in further response
to the commentary received.
BILLING CODE 4410–13–P
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00163
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56325
ER15SE10.000
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00164
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
ER15SE10.001
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56326
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00165
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56327
ER15SE10.002
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00166
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
ER15SE10.003
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56328
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00167
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56329
ER15SE10.004
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
56330
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00168
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
ER15SE10.005
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
BILLING CODE 4410–13–C
BILLING CODE 4410–13–C
Toilet Paper Dispensers. The provisions for
toilet paper dispensers at section 604.7 of the
2010 Standards require the dispenser to be
located seven inches minimum and nine
inches maximum in front of the water closet
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
measured to the centerline of the dispenser.
The paper outlet of the dispenser must be
located 15 inches minimum and 48 inches
maximum above the finish floor. In the 1991
Standards the location of the toilet paper
dispenser is determined by the centerline
PO 00000
Frm 00169
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56331
and forward edge of the dispenser. In the
2010 Standards the mounting location of the
toilet paper dispenser is determined by the
centerline of the dispenser and the location
of the outlet for the toilet paper.
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
ER15SE10.006
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56332
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
One commenter discussed the difficulty of
using large roll toilet paper dispensers and
dispensers with two standard size rolls
stacked on top of each other. The size of the
large dispensers can block access to the grab
bar and the outlet for the toilet paper can be
too low or too high to be usable. Some
dispensers also control the delivery of the
toilet paper which can make it impossible to
get the toilet paper. Toilet paper dispensers
that control delivery or do not allow
continuous paper flow are not permitted by
the 1991 Standards or the 2010 Standards.
Also, many of the large roll toilet paper
dispensers do not comply with the 2010
Standards since their large size does not
allow them to be mounted 12 inches above
or 11⁄2 inches below the side grab bar as
required by section 609.3.
Shower Spray Controls. In accessible
bathtubs and shower compartments, sections
607.6 and 608.6 of the 2010 Standards
require shower spray controls to have an on/
off control and to deliver water that is 120
°F (49 °C) maximum. Neither feature was
required by the 1991 Standards, but may be
required by plumbing codes. Delivering
water that is no hotter than 120 °F (49 °C)
will require controlling the maximum
temperature at each accessible shower spray
unit.
Shower Compartments. The 1991
Standards at sections 4.21 and 9.1.2 and the
2010 Standards at section 608 contain
technical requirements for transfer-type and
roll-in shower compartments. The 2010
Standards provide more flexibility than the
1991 Standards as follows:
• Transfer-type showers are exactly 36
inches wide by 36 inches long.
• The 1991 Standards and the 2010
Standards permit a 1⁄2-inch maximum curb in
transfer-type showers. The 2010 Standards
add a new exception that permits a 2-inch
maximum curb in transfer-type showers in
alterations to existing facilities, where
recessing the compartment to achieve a
1⁄2-inch curb will disturb the structural
reinforcement of the floor slab.
• Roll-in showers are 30 inches wide
minimum by 60 inches long minimum.
Alternate roll-in showers are 36 inches wide
by 60 inches long minimum, and have a 36inch minimum wide opening on the long
side of the compartment. The 1991 Standards
require alternate roll-in showers in a portion
of accessible transient lodging guest rooms,
but provision of this shower type in other
facilities is generally permitted as an
equivalent facilitation. The 1991 Standards
require a seat to be provided adjacent to the
opening; and require the controls to be
located on the side adjacent to the seat. The
2010 Standards permit alternate roll-in
showers to be used in any facility, only
require a seat in transient lodging guest
rooms, and allow location of controls on the
back wall opposite the seat as an alternative.
Commenters raised concerns that adding a
new exception that permits a 2-inch
maximum curb in transfer-type showers in
alterations to existing facilities, where
recessing the compartment to achieve a
1⁄2-inch curb will disturb the structural
reinforcement of the floor slab, will impair
the ability of individuals with disabilities to
use transfer-type showers.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
The exception in section 608.7 of the 2010
Standards permitting a 2-inch maximum curb
in transfer-type showers is allowed only in
existing facilities where provision of a
1⁄2-inch high threshold would disturb the
structural reinforcement of the floor slab.
Whenever this exception is used the least
high threshold that can be used should be
provided, up to a maximum height of 2
inches. This exception is intended to provide
some flexibility where the existing structure
precludes full compliance.
Toilet and Bathing Rooms. Section 213 of
the 2010 Standards sets out the scoping
requirements for toilet and bathing rooms.
Commenters recommended that section
213, Toilet Facilities and Bathing Facilities,
of the 2010 Standards include requirements
that unisex toilet and bathing rooms be
provided in certain facilities. These
commenters suggested that unisex toilet and
bathing rooms are most useful as companion
care facilities.
Model plumbing and building codes
require single-user (unisex or family) toilet
facilities in certain occupancies, primarily
assembly facilities, covered malls, and
transportation facilities. These types of toilet
rooms provide flexibility for persons needing
privacy so that they can obtain assistance
from family members or persons of the
opposite sex. When these facilities are
provided, both the 1991 Standards and 2010
Standards require that they be accessible.
The 2010 Standards do not scope unisex
toilet facilities because plumbing codes
generally determine the number and type of
plumbing fixtures to be provided in a
particular occupancy and often determine
whether an occupancy must provide separate
sex facilities in addition to single-user
facilities. However, the scoping at section
213.2.1 of the 2010 Standards coordinates
with model plumbing and building code
requirements which will permit a small toilet
room with two water closets or one water
closet and one urinal to be considered a
single-user toilet room provided that the
room has a privacy latch. In this way, a
person needing assistance from a person of
the opposite sex can lock the door to use the
facility while temporarily inconveniencing
only one other potential user. These
provisions strike a reasonable balance and
impose less impact on covered entities.
A commenter recommended that in shower
compartments rectangular seats as provided
in section 610.3.1 of the 2010 Standards
should not be permitted as a substitute for Lshaped seats as provided in 610.3.2.
The 2010 Standards do not indicate a
preference for either rectangular or L-shaped
seats in shower compartments. L-shaped
seats in transfer and certain roll-in showers
have been used for many years to provide
users with poor balance additional support
because they can position themselves in the
corner while showering.
214 and 611 Washing Machines and
Clothes Dryers
Sections 214.2 (washing machines) and
214.3 (clothes dryers) of the 2010 Standards
specify the number of each type of these
machines required to be accessible (one to
two depending upon the total number of
machines provided) and section 611 specifies
PO 00000
Frm 00170
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
the technical requirements. An exception
will permit the maximum height for the tops
of these machines to be 2 inches higher than
the general requirement for maximum high
reach over an obstruction.
A commenter objected to the scoping
provision for accessible washing machines
and clothes dryers stating that the probability
is low that more than one accessible machine
would be needed at the same time in the
laundry facility of a place of transient
lodging.
The scoping in this provision is based on
the relative size of the facility. The
Department assumes that the size of the
facility (and, therefore, the number of
accessible machines provided) will be
determined by the covered entity’s
assessment of the demand for laundry
facilities. The Department declines to assume
that persons with disabilities will have less
use for accessible facilities in transient
lodging than in other public
accommodations.
216 and 703 Signs
The following types of signs, though they
are not specifically subject to the 1991
Standards requirement for signs, will now be
explicitly exempted by sections 216 and 703
of the 2010 Standards. These types of signs
include: seat and row designations in
assembly areas; occupant names, building
addresses; company names and logos; signs
in parking facilities (except those identifying
accessible parking spaces and means of
egress); and exterior signs identifying
permanent rooms and spaces that are not
located at the door to the space they serve.
This requirement also clarifies that the
exception for temporary signs applies to
signs used for seven days or less.
The 2010 Standards retain the option to
provide one sign where both visual and
tactile characters are provided or two signs,
one with visual, and one with tactile
characters.
217 and 704 Telephones
Drive-up Public Telephones. Where public
telephones are provided, the 1991 Standards,
at section 4.1.3(17)(a), and section 217.2 of
the 2010 Standards, require a certain number
of telephones to be wheelchair accessible.
The 2010 Standards add a new exception that
exempts drive-up public telephones.
Text Telephones (TTY). Section 4.1.3(17)
of the 1991 Standards requires a public TTY
to be provided if there are four or more
public pay telephones at a site and at least
one is in an interior location. Section 217.4.2
of the 2010 Standards requires that a building
or facility provide a public TTY on each floor
that has four or more public telephones, and
in each telephone bank that has four or more
telephones. Additionally, section 217.4.4 of
the 2010 Standards requires that at least one
public TTY be installed where four or more
public pay telephones are provided on an
exterior site. Section 217.4.5 of the 2010
Standards also requires that a public TTY be
provided where at least one public pay
telephone is provided at a public rest stop,
emergency roadside stop, or service plaza.
Section 217.4.6 of the 2010 Standards also
requires that a public TTY be provided at
each location where at least one public pay
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
telephone is provided serving a hospital
emergency room, a hospital recovery room,
or a hospital waiting room. Section 217.4.7
of the 2010 Standards also requires that, in
addition to the requirements for a public TTY
to be provided at each location where at least
four or more public pay telephones are
provided at a bank of pay telephones and
where at least one public pay telephone is
provided on a floor or in a public building,
where at least one public pay telephone
serves a particular entrance to a bus or rail
facility at least one public TTY must serve
that entrance. In airports, in addition to the
requirements for the provision of a public
TTY at phone banks, on floors, and in public
buildings with pay phones, where four or
more public pay phones are located in a
terminal outside the security areas, in a
concourse within the security areas, or a
baggage claim area in a terminal at least one
public TTY must be provided. Section
217.4.8 of the 2010 Standards also requires
that a TTY be provided in at least one
secured area where at least one pay
telephone is provided in a secured area used
only by detainees or inmates and security
personnel in detention and correctional
facilities.
Wheelchair Accessible Telephones
Section 217.2 of the 2010 Standards
requires that where public telephones are
provided wheelchair accessible telephones
complying with section 704.2 must be
provided in accordance with Table 217.2.
A commenter stated that requiring
installation of telephones within the
proposed reach range requirements would
adversely impact public and telephone
owners and operators. According to the
commenter, individuals without disabilities
will not use telephones that are installed
within the reach range requirements because
they may be inconvenienced by having to
stoop to operate these telephones, and,
therefore, owners and operators will lose
revenue due to less use of public telephones.
This comment misunderstands the scoping
requirements for wheelchair accessible
telephones. Section 217.2 of the 2010
Standards provides that where one or more
single units are provided, only one unit per
floor, level, or exterior site is required to be
wheelchair accessible. However, where banks
of telephones are provided, only one
telephone in each bank is required to be
wheelchair accessible. The Department
believes these scoping requirements for
wheelchair accessible telephones are
reasonable and will not result in burdensome
obligations or lost revenue for owners and
operators.
218 and 810 Transportation Facilities
Detectable Warnings. Detectable warnings
provide a distinctively textured surface of
truncated domes. The 1991 Standards at
sections 4.1.3(15), 4.7.7, 4.29.2, 4.29.5,
4.29.6, and 10.3.1(8) require detectable
warnings at curb ramps, hazardous vehicular
areas, reflecting pools, and transit platform
edges. The 2010 Standards at sections 218,
810.5, 705.1, and 705.2 only require
detectable warnings at transit platform edges.
The technical specifications for the diameter
and spacing of the truncated domes have also
VerDate Mar<15>2010
19:21 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
been changed. The 2010 Standards also
delete the requirement for the material used
to contrast in resiliency or sound-on-cane
contact from adjoining walking surfaces at
interior locations.
The 2010 Standards apply to detectable
warnings on developed sites. They do not
apply to the public right-of-way. Scoping for
detectable warnings at all locations other
than transit platform edges has been
eliminated from the 2010 Standards.
However, because detectable warnings have
been shown to significantly benefit
individuals with disabilities at transit
platform edges, the 2010 Standards provide
scoping and technical requirements for
detectable warnings at transit platform edges.
219 and 706 Assistive Listening Systems
Signs. Section 216.10 of the 2010
Standards requires each covered assembly
area to provide signs at each auditorium to
inform patrons that assistive listening
systems are available. However, an exception
to this requirement permits assembly areas
that have ticket offices or ticket windows to
display the required signs at the ticket
window.
A commenter recommended eliminating
the exception at 216.10 because, for example,
people who buy tickets through the mail, by
subscription, or on-line may not need to stop
at a ticket office or window upon arrival at
the assembly area. The Department believes
that an individual’s decision to purchase
tickets before arriving at a performance does
not limit the discretion of the assembly
operator to use the ticket window to provide
other services to its patrons. The Department
retained the exception at 216.10 to permit the
venue operator some flexibility in
determining how to meet the needs of its
patrons.
Audible Communication. The 1991
Standards, at section 4.1.3(19)(b), require
assembly areas, where audible
communication is integral to the use of the
space, to provide an assistive listening
system if they have an audio amplification
system or an occupant load of 50 or more
people and have fixed seating. The 2010
Standards at section 219 require assistive
listening systems in spaces where
communication is integral to the space and
audio amplification is provided and in
courtrooms.
The 1991 Standards require receivers to be
provided for at least four percent (4%) of the
total number of fixed seats. The 2010
Standards, at section 219.3, revise the
percentage of receivers required according to
a table that correlates the required number of
receivers to the seating capacity of the
facility. Small facilities will continue to
provide receivers for four percent (4%) of the
seats. The required percentage declines as the
size of the facility increases. The changes
also require at least twenty-five percent
(25%), but no fewer than two, of the receivers
to be hearing-aid compatible. Assembly areas
served by an induction loop assistive
listening system will not have to provide
hearing-aid compatible receivers.
Commenters were divided in their opinion
of this change. The Department believes that
the reduction in the required number of
assistive listening systems for larger assembly
PO 00000
Frm 00171
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56333
areas will meet the needs of individuals with
disabilities. The new requirement to provide
hearing-aid compatible receivers should
make assistive listening systems more usable
for people who have been underserved until
now.
Concerns were raised that the requirement
to provide assistive listening systems may
have an adverse impact on restaurants. This
comment misunderstands the scope of
coverage. The 2010 Standards define the term
‘‘assembly area’’ to include facilities used for
entertainment, educational, or civic
gatherings. A restaurant would fall within
this category only if it is presenting programs
to educate or entertain diners, and it provides
an audio amplification system.
Same Management or Building. The 2010
Standards add a new exception that allows
multiple assembly areas that are in the same
building and under the same management,
such as theaters in a multiplex cinema and
lecture halls in a college building, to
calculate the number of receivers required
based on the total number of seats in all the
assembly areas, instead of each assembly area
separately, where the receivers are
compatible with the assistive listening
systems used in each of the assembly areas.
Mono Jacks, Sound Pressure, Etc. Section
4.33.7 of the 1991 Standards does not contain
specific technical requirements for assistive
listening systems. The 2010 Standards at
section 706 require assistive listening
systems to have standard mono jacks and
will require hearing-aid compatible receivers
to have neck loops to interface with telecoils
in hearing aids. The 2010 Standards also
specify sound pressure level, signal-to-noise
ratio, and peak clipping level. Currently
available assistive listening systems typically
meet these technical requirements.
220 and 707 Automatic Teller Machines
and Fare Machines
Section 707 of the 2010 Standards adds
specific technical requirements for speech
output, privacy, tactilely-discernible input
controls, display screens, and Braille
instructions to the general accessibility
requirements set out in the 1991 Standards.
Machines shall be speech enabled and
exceptions are provided that cover when
audible tones are permitted, when
advertisements or similar information are
provided, and where speech synthesis cannot
be supported. The 1991 Standards require
these machines to be accessible to and
independently usable by persons with visual
impairments, but do not contain any
technical specifications.
221 Assembly Areas
Wheelchair Spaces/Companion Seats.
Owners of large assembly areas have
historically complained to the Department
that the requirement for one percent (1%) of
seating to be wheelchair seating is excessive
and that wheelchair seats are not being sold.
At the same time, advocates have
traditionally argued that persons who use
wheelchairs will increasingly participate in
activities at assembly areas once they become
accessible and that at least one percent (1%)
of seats should be accessible.
The 1991 Standards, at sections 4.1.3(19)(a)
and 4.33.3, require assembly areas to provide
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56334
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
wheelchair and companion seats. In
assembly areas with a capacity of more than
five hundred seats, accessible seating at a
ratio of one percent (1%) (plus one seat) of
the number of traditional fixed seats must be
provided. The 2010 Standards, at section
221.2, require assembly areas with 501 to
5000 seats to provide at least six wheelchair
spaces and companion seats plus one
additional wheelchair space for each
additional 150 seats (or fraction thereof)
between 501 through 5000. In assembly areas
with more than 5000 seats at least 36
wheelchair spaces and companion seats plus
one additional wheelchair space for each 200
seats (or fraction thereof) more than 5000 are
required. See sections 221.1 and 221.2 of the
2010 Standards.
Commenters questioned why scoping
requirements for large assembly areas are
being reduced. During the development of
the 2004 ADAAG, industry providers,
particularly those representing larger
stadium-style assembly areas, supplied data
to the Access Board demonstrating the
current scoping requirements for large
assembly areas often exceed the demand.
Based on the data provided to the Access
Board, the Department believes the reduced
scoping requirements will adequately meet
the needs of individuals with disabilities,
while balancing concerns of the industry.
Commenters representing assembly areas
supported the reduced scoping. One
commenter asked that scoping requirements
for larger assembly areas be reduced even
further. Although the commenter referenced
data demonstrating that wheelchair spaces in
larger facilities with seating capacities of
70,000 or more may not be used by
individuals with disabilities, the data was
not based on actual results, but was
calculated at least in part based on
probability assumptions. The Department is
not convinced that further reductions should
be made based upon those projections and
that further reductions would not
substantially limit accessibility at assembly
areas for persons who use wheelchairs.
Section 221.2.1.3 of the 2010 Standards
clarifies that the scoping requirements for
wheelchair spaces and companion seats are
to be applied separately to general seating
areas and to each luxury box, club box, and
suite in arenas, stadiums, and grandstands. In
assembly areas other than arenas, stadiums,
and grandstands, the scoping requirements
will not be applied separately. Thus, in
performing arts facilities with tiered boxes
designed for spatial and acoustical purposes,
the scoping requirement is to be applied to
the seats in the tiered boxes. The requisite
number of wheelchair spaces and companion
seats required in the tiered boxes are to be
dispersed among at least twenty percent
(20%) of the tiered boxes. For example, if a
performing arts facility has 20 tiered boxes
with 10 fixed seats in each box, for a total
of 200 seats, at least five wheelchair spaces
and companion seats must be provided in the
boxes, and they must be dispersed among at
least four of the 20 boxes.
Commenters raised concerns that the 2010
Standards should clarify requirements for
scoping of seating areas and that requiring
accessible seating in each luxury box, club
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
box, and suite in arenas, stadiums and
grandstands could result in no wheelchair
and companion spaces available for
individuals with disabilities in the general
seating area(s). These comments appear to
misunderstand the requirements. The 2010
Standards require each luxury box, club box,
and suite in an arena, stadium or grandstand
to be accessible and to contain wheelchair
spaces and companion seats as required by
sections 221.2.1.1, 221.2.1.2 and 221.3. In
addition, the remaining seating areas not
located in boxes must also contain the
number of wheelchair and companion
seating locations specified in the 2010
Standards based on the total number of seats
in the entire facility excluding luxury boxes,
club boxes and suites.
Wheelchair Space Overlap in Assembly
Areas. Section 4.33.3 of the 1991 Standards
and the 2010 Standards, at sections 402,
403.5.1, 802.1.4, and 802.1.5, require
walkways that are part of an accessible route
to have a 36-inch minimum clear width.
Section 802.1.5 of the 2010 Standards
specifically prohibits accessible routes from
overlapping wheelchair spaces. This change
is consistent with the technical requirements
for accessible routes, since the clear width of
accessible routes cannot be obstructed by any
object. The 2010 Standards also specifically
prohibit wheelchair spaces from overlapping
circulation paths. An advisory note clarifies
that this prohibition applies only to the
circulation path width required by applicable
building codes and fire and life safety codes
since the codes prohibit obstructions in the
required width of assembly aisles.
Section 802.1.5 of the 2010 Standards
provides that where a main circulation path
is located in front of a row of seats that
contains a wheelchair space and the
circulation path is wider than required by
applicable building codes and fire and life
safety codes, the wheelchair space may
overlap the ‘‘extra’’ circulation path width.
Where a main circulation path is located
behind a row of seats that contains a
wheelchair space and the wheelchair space is
entered from the rear, the aisle in front of the
row may need to be wider in order not to
block the required circulation path to the
other seats in the row, or a mid-row opening
may need to be provided to access the
required circulation path to the other seats.
Line of Sight and Dispersion of Wheelchair
Spaces in Assembly Areas. Section 4.33.3 of
the 1991 Standards requires wheelchair
spaces and companion seats to be an integral
part of any fixed seating plan in assembly
areas and to provide individuals with
disabilities a choice of admission prices and
lines of sight comparable to those available
to other spectators. Section 4.33.3 also
requires wheelchair spaces and companion
seats to be dispersed in assembly areas with
more than 300 seats. Under the 1991
Standards, sports facilities typically located
some wheelchair spaces and companion seats
on each accessible level of the facility. In
1994, the Department issued official
guidance interpreting the requirement for
comparable lines of sight in the 1991
Standards to mean wheelchair spaces and
companion seats in sports stadia and arenas
must provide patrons with disabilities and
PO 00000
Frm 00172
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
their companions with lines of sight over
standing spectators to the playing field or
performance area, where spectators were
expected to stand during events. See
‘‘Accessible Stadiums,’’ www.ada.gov/
stadium.pdf. The Department also
interpreted the section 4.33.3 comparable
lines of sight requirement to mean that
wheelchair spaces and companion seats in
stadium-style movie theaters must provide
patrons with disabilities and their
companions with viewing angles comparable
to those provided to other spectators.
Sections 221.2.3 and 802.2 of the 2010
Standards add specific technical
requirements for providing lines of sight over
seated and standing spectators and also
require wheelchair spaces and companion
seats (per section 221.3) to provide
individuals with disabilities choices of
seating locations and viewing angles that are
substantially equivalent to, or better than, the
choices of seating locations and viewing
angles available to other spectators. This
applies to all types of assembly areas,
including stadium-style movie theaters,
sports arenas, and concert halls. These rules
are expected to have minimal impact since
they are consistent with the Department’s
longstanding interpretation of the 1991
Standards and technical assistance.
Commenters stated that the qualitative
viewing angle language contained in section
221.2.3 is not appropriate for an enforceable
regulatory standard unless the terms of such
language are defined. Other commenters
requested definitions for viewing angles, an
explanation for precisely how viewing angles
are measured, and an explanation for
precisely how to evaluate whether one
viewing angle is better than another viewing
angle. The Department is convinced that the
regulatory language in the 2010 Standards is
sufficient to provide a performance-based
standard for designers, architects, and other
professionals to design facilities that provide
comparable lines of sight for wheelchair
seating in assembly areas, including viewing
angles. The Department believes that as a
general rule, the vast variety of sizes and
configurations in assembly areas requires it
to establish a performance standard for
designers to adapt to the specific
circumstances of the venue that is being
designed. The Department has implemented
more explicit requirements for stadium-style
movie theaters in 28 CFR 36.406(f) and
35.151(g) of the final regulations based on
experience and expertise gained after several
major enforcement actions.
Another commenter inquired as to what
determines whether a choice of seating
locations or viewing angles is better than that
available to all other spectators. The answer
to this question varies according to each
assembly area that is being designed, but
designers and venue operators understand
which seats are better and that understanding
routinely drives design choices made to
maximize profit and successful operation of
the facility, among other things. For example,
an ‘‘equivalent or better’’ line of sight in a
major league football stadium would be
different than for a 350-seat lecture hall. This
performance standard is based upon the
underlying principle of equal opportunity for
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
a good viewing experience for everyone,
including persons with disabilities. The
Department believes that for each specific
facility that is designed, the owner, operator,
and design professionals will be able to
distinguish easily between seating locations
and the quality of the associated lines of sight
from those seating locations in order to
decide which ones are better than others. The
wheelchair locations do not have to be
exclusively among the seats with the very
best lines of sight nor may they be
exclusively among the seats with the worst
lines of sight. Rather, wheelchair seating
locations should offer a choice of viewing
experiences and be located among the seats
where most of the audience chooses to sit.
Section 4.33.3 of the 1991 Standards
requires wheelchair spaces and companion
seating to be offered at a choice of admission
prices, but section 221.2.3.2 of the 2010
Standards no longer requires wheelchair
spaces and companion seats to be dispersed
based on admission prices. Venue owners
and operators commented during the 2004
ADAAG rulemaking process that pricing is
not always established at the design phase
and may vary from event to event within the
same facility, making it difficult to determine
where to place wheelchair seats during the
design and construction phase. Their concern
was that a failure by the venue owner or
operator to provide a choice of ticket prices
for wheelchair seating as required by the
1991 Standards governing new construction
could somehow unfairly subject parties
involved in the design and construction to
liability unknowingly.
Sections 221.2.3.2 and 221.3 of the 2010
Standards require wheelchair spaces and
companion seats to be vertically dispersed at
varying distances from the screen,
performance area, or playing field. The 2010
Standards, at section 221.2.3.2, also require
wheelchair spaces and companion seats to be
located in each balcony or mezzanine served
by an accessible route. The final regulations
at 28 CFR 35.151(g)(1) and 36.406(f)(1) also
require assembly areas to locate wheelchair
spaces and companion seats at all levels of
the facility that include seating and that are
served by an accessible route. The
Department interprets that requirement to
mean that wheelchair and companion seating
must be provided in a particular area even if
the accessible route may not be the same
route that other individuals use to reach their
seats. For example, if other patrons reach
their seats on the field by an inaccessible
route (e.g., by stairs), but there is an
accessible route that complies with section
206.3 that could be connected to seats on the
field, accessible seats must be placed on the
field even if that route is not generally
available to the public. The 2010 Standards,
at section 221.2.3.2, provide an exception for
vertical dispersion in assembly areas with
300 or fewer seats if the wheelchair spaces
and companion seats provide viewing angles
that are equivalent to, or better than, the
average viewing angle provided in the
facility.
Section 221.3 of the 2010 Standards
requires wheelchair spaces and companion
seats to be dispersed horizontally. In
addition, 28 CFR 35.151(g)(2) and
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
36.406(f)(2) require assembly areas that have
seating around the field of play or
performance area to place wheelchair spaces
and companion seating all around that field
of play or performance area.
Stadium-Style Movie Theaters
Pursuant to 28 CFR 35.151(g) and 36.406(f),
in addition to other obligations, stadiumstyle movie theaters must meet horizontal
and vertical dispersion requirements set forth
in sections 221.2.3.1 and 221.2.3.2 of the
2010 Standards; placement of wheelchair and
companion seating must be on a riser or
cross-aisle in the stadium section of the
theater; and placement of such seating must
satisfy at least one of the following criteria:
(i) It is located within the rear sixty percent
(60%) of the seats provided in the
auditorium; or (ii) it is located within the
area of the auditorium where the vertical
viewing angles are between the 40th and
100th percentile of vertical viewing angles
for all seats in that theater as ranked from the
first row (1st percentile) to the back row
(100th percentile). The line-of-sight
requirements recognize the importance to the
movie-going experience of viewing angles,
and the final regulations ensure that movie
patrons with disabilities are provided views
of the movie screen comparable to other
theater patrons. Some commenters supported
regulatory language that would require
stadium-style theaters to meet standards of
accessibility equal to those of non-stadiumstyle theaters, with larger theaters being
required to provide accessible seating
locations and viewing angles equal to those
offered to individuals without disabilities.
One commenter noted that stadium-style
movie theaters, sports arenas, music venues,
theaters, and concert halls each pose unique
conditions that require separate and specific
standards to accommodate patrons with
disabilities, and recommended that the
Department provide more specific
requirements for sports arenas, music venues,
theaters, and concert halls. The Department
has concluded that the 2010 Standards will
provide sufficient flexibility to adapt to the
wide variety of assembly venues covered.
Companion Seats. Section 4.33.3 of the
1991 Standards required at least one fixed
companion seat to be provided next to each
wheelchair space. The 2010 Standards at
sections 221.3 and 802.3 permit companion
seats to be movable. Several commenters
urged the Department to ensure that
companion seats are positioned in a manner
that places the user at the same shoulder
height as their companions using mobility
devices. The Department recognizes that
some facilities have created problems by
locating the wheelchair space and
companion seat on different floor elevations
(often a difference of one riser height).
Section 802.3.1 of the 2010 Standards
addresses this problem by requiring the
wheelchair space and the companion seat to
be on the same floor elevation. This solution
should prevent any vertical discrepancies
that are not the direct result of differences in
the sizes and configurations of wheelchairs.
Designated Aisle Seats. Section 4.1.3(19)(a)
of the 1991 Standards requires one percent
(1%) of fixed seats in assembly areas to be
designated aisle seats with either no armrests
PO 00000
Frm 00173
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56335
or folding or retractable armrests on the aisle
side of the seat. The 2010 Standards, at
sections 221.4 and 802.4, base the number of
required designated aisle seats on the total
number of aisle seats, instead of on all of the
seats in an assembly area as the 1991
Standards require. At least five percent (5%)
of the aisle seats are required to be
designated aisle seats and to be located
closest to accessible routes. This option will
almost always result in fewer aisle seats
being designated aisle seats compared to the
1991 Standards. The Department is aware
that sports facilities typically locate
designated aisle seats on, or as near to,
accessible routes as permitted by the
configuration of the facility.
One commenter recommended that section
221.4, Designated Aisle Seats, be changed to
require that aisle seats be on an accessible
route, and be integrated and dispersed
throughout an assembly area. Aisle seats, by
their nature, typically are located within the
general seating area, and integration occurs
almost automatically. The issue of dispersing
aisle seats or locating them on accessible
routes is much more challenging. During the
separate rulemaking on the 2004 ADAAG the
Access Board specifically requested public
comment on the question of whether aisle
seats should be required to be located on
accessible routes. After reviewing the
comments submitted during the 2004 Access
Board rulemaking, the Access Board
concluded that this could not be done
without making significant and costly
changes in the design of most assembly areas.
However, section 221.4 of the 2004 ADAAG
required that designated aisle seats be the
aisle seats closest to accessible routes. The
Department proposed the same provision and
concurs in the Access Board’s conclusion
and declines to implement further changes.
Team or Player Seating Areas. Section
221.2.1.4 of the 2010 Standards requires that
at least one wheelchair space compliant with
section 802.1 be provided in each team or
player seating area serving areas of sport
activity. For bowling lanes, the requirement
for a wheelchair space in player seating areas
is limited to lanes required to be accessible.
Lawn Seating. The 1991 Standards, at
section 4.1.1(1), require all areas of newly
constructed facilities to be accessible, but do
not contain a specific scoping requirement
for lawn seating in assembly areas. The 2010
Standards, at section 221.5, specifically
require lawn seating areas and exterior
overflow seating areas without fixed seats to
connect to an accessible route.
Aisle Stairs and Ramps in Assembly Areas.
Sections 4.1.3 and 4.1.3(4) of the 1991
Standards require that interior and exterior
stairs connecting levels that are not
connected by an elevator, ramp, or other
accessible means of vertical access must
comply with the technical requirements for
stairs set out in section 4.9 of the 1991
Standards. Section 210.1 of the 2010
Standards requires that stairs that are part of
a means of egress shall comply with section
504’s technical requirements for stairs. The
1991 Standards do not contain any
exceptions for aisle stairs in assembly areas.
Section 210.1, Exception 3 of the 2010
Standards adds a new exception that exempts
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56336
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
aisle stairs in assembly areas from section
504’s technical requirements for stairs,
including section 505’s technical
requirements for handrails.
Section 4.8.5 of the 1991 Standards
exempts aisle ramps that are part of an
accessible route from providing handrails on
the side adjacent to seating. The 2010
Standards, at section 405.1, exempt aisle
ramps adjacent to seating in assembly areas
and not serving elements required to be on
an accessible route, from complying with all
of section 405’s technical requirements for
ramps. Where aisle ramps in assembly areas
serve elements required to be on an
accessible route, the 2010 Standards require
that the aisle ramps comply with section
405’s technical requirements for ramps.
Sections 505.2 and 505.3 of the 2010
Standards provide exceptions for aisle ramp
handrails. Section 505.2 states that in
assembly areas, a handrail may be provided
at either side or within the aisle width when
handrails are not provided on both sides of
aisle ramps. Section 505.3 states that, in
assembly areas, handrails need not be
continuous in aisles serving seating.
222 and 803 Dressing, Fitting, and Locker
Rooms
Dressing rooms, fitting rooms, and locker
rooms are required to comply with the
accessibility requirements of sections 222
and 803 of the 2010 Standards. Where these
types of rooms are provided in clusters, five
percent (5%) but at least one room in each
cluster must comply. Some commenters
stated that clothing and retail stores would
have to expand and reconfigure accessible
dressing, fitting and locker rooms to meet the
changed provision for clear floor space
alongside the end of the bench. Commenters
explained that meeting the new requirement
would result in a loss of sales and inventory
space. Other commenters also expressed
opposition to the changed requirement in
locker rooms for similar reasons.
The Department reminds the commenters
that the requirements in the 2010 Standards
for the clear floor space to be beside the short
axis of the bench in an accessible dressing,
fitting, or locker room apply only to new
construction and alterations. The
requirements for alterations in the 2010
Standards at section 202.3 do not include the
requirement from the 1991 Standards at
section 4.1.6(1)(c) that if alterations to single
elements, when considered together, amount
to an alteration of a room or space in a
building or facility, the entire space shall be
made accessible. Therefore, under the 2010
Standards, the alteration requirements only
apply to specific elements or spaces that are
being altered. So providing the clear floor
space at the end of the bench as required by
the 2010 Standards instead of in front of the
bench as is allowed by the 1991 Standards
would only be required when the bench in
the accessible dressing room is altered or
when the entire dressing room area is altered.
224 and 806 Transient Lodging Guest
Rooms
Scoping. The minimum number of guest
rooms required to be accessible in transient
lodging facilities is covered by section 224 of
the 2010 Standards. Scoping requirements for
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
guest rooms with mobility features and guest
rooms with communication features are
addressed at section 224.2 and section 224.4,
respectively. Under the 1991 Standards all
newly constructed guest rooms with mobility
features must provide communication
features. Under the 2010 Standards, in
section 224.5, at least one guest room with
mobility features must also provide
communication features. Additionally, not
more than ten percent (10%) of the guest
rooms required to provide mobility features
and also equipped with communication
features can be used to satisfy the minimum
number of guest rooms required to provide
communication features.
Some commenters opposed requirements
for guest rooms accessible to individuals
with mobility disabilities stating that
statistics provided by the industry
demonstrate that all types of accessible guest
rooms are unused. They further claimed that
the requirements of the 2010 Standards are
too burdensome to meet in new construction,
and that the requirements will result in a loss
of living space in places of transient lodging.
Other commenters urged the Department to
increase the number of guest rooms required
to be accessible. The number of guest rooms
accessible to individuals with mobility
disabilities and the number accessible to
persons who are deaf or who are hard of
hearing in the 2010 Standards are consistent
with the 1991 Standards and with the IBC.
The Department continues to receive
complaints about the lack of accessible guest
rooms throughout the country. Accessible
guest rooms are used not only by individuals
using mobility devices such as wheelchairs
and scooters, but also by individuals with
other mobility disabilities including persons
who use walkers, crutches, or canes.
Data provided by the Disability Statistics
Center at the University of California, San
Francisco demonstrated that the number of
adults who use wheelchairs has been
increasing at the rate of six percent (6%) per
year from 1969 to 1999; and by 2010, it was
projected that two percent (2%) of the adult
population would use wheelchairs. In
addition to persons who use wheelchairs,
three percent (3%) of adults used crutches,
canes, walkers, and other mobility devices in
1999; and the number was projected to
increase to four percent (4%) by 2010. Thus,
in 2010, up to six percent (6%) of the
population may need accessible guest rooms.
Dispersion. The 2010 Standards, in section
224.5, set scoping requirements for
dispersion in facilities covered by the
transient lodging provisions. This section
covers guest rooms with mobility features
and guest rooms with communication
features and applies in new construction and
alterations. The primary requirement is to
provide choices of types of guest rooms,
number of beds, and other amenities
comparable to the choices provided to other
guests. An advisory in section 224.5 provides
guidance that ‘‘factors to be considered in
providing an equivalent range of options may
include, but are not limited to, room size, bed
size, cost, view, bathroom fixtures such as
hot tubs and spas, smoking and nonsmoking,
and the number of rooms provided.’’
Commenters asked the Department to
clarify what is meant by various terms used
PO 00000
Frm 00174
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
in section 224.5 such as ‘‘classes,’’ ‘‘types,’’
‘‘options,’’ and ‘‘amenities.’’ Other
commenters asked the Department to clarify
and simplify the dispersion requirements set
forth in section 224.5 of the 2010 Standards,
in particular the scope of the term
‘‘amenities.’’ One commenter expressed
concern that views, if considered an amenity,
would further complicate room categories
and force owners and operators to make an
educated guess. Other commenters stated
that views should only be a dispersion
criteria if view is a factor for pricing room
rates.
These terms are not to be considered terms
of art, but should be used as in their normal
course. For example, ‘‘class’’ is defined by
Webster’s Dictionary as ‘‘a division by
quality.’’ ‘‘Type’’ is defined as ‘‘a group of
* * * things that share common traits or
characteristics distinguishing them as an
identifiable group or class.’’ Accordingly,
these terms are not intended to convey
different concepts, but are used as synonyms.
In the 2010 Standards, section 224.5 and its
advisory require dispersion in such a varied
range of hotels and lodging facilities that the
Department believes that the chosen terms
are appropriate to convey what is intended.
Dispersion required by this section is not
‘‘one size fits all’’ and it is imperative that
each covered entity consider its individual
circumstance as it applies this requirement.
For example, a facility would consider view
as an amenity if some rooms faced
mountains, a beach, a lake, or other scenery
that was considered to be a premium. A
facility where view was not marketed or
requested by guests would not factor the
view as an amenity for purposes of meeting
the dispersion requirement.
Section 224.5 of the 2010 Standards
requires that guest rooms with mobility
features and guest rooms with
communication features ‘‘shall be dispersed
among the various classes of guest rooms,
and shall provide choices of types of guest
rooms, number of beds, and other amenities
comparable to the choices provided to other
guests. When the minimum number of guest
rooms required is not sufficient to allow for
complete dispersion, guest rooms shall be
dispersed in the following priority: guest
room type, number of beds and amenities.’’
This general dispersion requirement is
intended to effectuate Congress’ directive
that a percentage of each class of hotel rooms
is to be fully accessible to persons with
disabilities. See H.R. Rep. No. 101–485 (II) at
391. Accordingly, the promise of the ADA in
this instance is that persons with disabilities
will have an equal opportunity to benefit
from the various options available to hotel
guests without disabilities, from single
occupancy guest rooms with limited features
(and accompanying limited price tags) to
luxury suites with lavish features and
choices. The inclusion of section 224.5 of the
2010 Standards is not new. Substantially
similar language is contained in section 9.1.4
of the 1991 Standards.
Commenters raised concerns that the
factors included in the advisory to section
224.5 of the 2010 Standards have been
expanded. The advisory provides: ‘‘[f]actors
to be considered in providing an equivalent
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
range of options may include, but are not
limited to, room size, bed size, cost, view,
bathroom fixtures such as hot tubs and spas,
smoking and nonsmoking, and the number of
rooms provided.’’
As previously discussed, the advisory
materials provided in the 2010 Standards are
meant to be illustrative and do not set out
specific requirements. In this particular
instance, the advisory materials for section
224.5 set out some of the common types of
amenities found at transient lodging
facilities, and include common sense
concepts such as view, bathroom fixtures,
and smoking status. The intention of these
factors is to indicate to the hospitality
industry the sorts of considerations that the
Department, in its enforcement efforts since
the enactment of the ADA, has considered as
amenities that should be made available to
persons with disabilities, just as they are
made available to guests without disabilities.
Commenters offered several suggestions for
addressing dispersion. One option included
the flexibility to use an equivalent facilitation
option similar to that provided in section
9.1.4(2) of the 1991 Standards.
The 2010 Standards eliminated all specific
references to equivalent facilitation. Since
Congress made it clear that each class of
hotel room is to be available to individuals
with disabilities, the Department declines to
adopt such a specific limitation in favor of
the specific requirement for new construction
and alterations found in section 224.5 of the
2010 Standards.
In considering the comments of the
hospitality industry from the ANPRM and
the Department’s enforcement efforts in this
area, the Department sought comment in the
NPRM on whether the dispersion
requirements should be applied
proportionally, or whether the requirements
of section 224.5 of the 2010 Standards would
be complied with if access to at least one
guest room of each type were to be provided.
One commenter expressed concern about
requiring different guest room types to be
proportionally represented in the accessible
guest room pool as opposed to just having
each type represented. Some commenters
also expressed concern about accessible guest
rooms created in pre-1993 facilities and they
requested that such accessible guest rooms be
safe harbored just as they are safe harbored
under the 1991 Standards. In addition, one
commenter requested that the proposed
dispersion requirements in section 224.5 of
the 2010 Standards not be applied to pre1993 facilities even when they are altered.
Some commenters also offered a suggestion
for limitations to the dispersion requirements
as an alternative to safe harboring pre-1993
facilities. The suggestion included: (1) Guest
rooms’ interior or exterior footprints may
remain unchanged in order to meet the
dispersion requirements; (2) Dispersion
should only be required among the types of
rooms affected by an alteration; and (3)
Subject to (1) and (2) above and technical
feasibility, a facility would need to provide
only one guest room in each guest room type
such as single, double and suites. One
commenter requested an exception to the
dispersion criteria that applies to both
existing and new multi-story timeshare
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
facilities. This requested exception waives
dispersion based on views to the extent that
up to eight units may be vertically stacked in
a single location.
Section 224.1.1 of the 2010 Standards sets
scoping requirements for alterations to
transient lodging guest rooms. The advisory
to section 224.1.1 further explains that
compliance with 224.5 is more likely to be
achieved if all of the accessible guest rooms
are not provided in the same area of the
facility, when accessible guest rooms are
added as a result of subsequent alterations.
Some commenters requested a specific
exemption for small hotels of 300 or fewer
guest rooms from dispersion regarding
smoking rooms. The ADA requires that
individuals with disabilities be provided
with the same range of options as persons
without disabilities, and, therefore, the
Department declines to add such an
exemption. It is noted, however, that the
existence of this language in the advisory
does not require a place of transient lodging
that does not offer smoking guest rooms at its
facility to do so only for individuals with
disabilities.
Guest Rooms with Mobility Features.
Scoping provisions for guest rooms with
mobility features are provided in section
224.2 of the 2010 Standards. Scoping
requirements for alterations are included in
224.1.1. These scoping requirements in the
2010 Standards are consistent with the 1991
Standards.
One commenter expressed opposition to
the new scoping provisions for altered guest
rooms, which, according to the commenter,
require greater numbers of accessible guest
rooms with mobility features.
Section 224.1.1 of the 2010 Standards
provides scoping requirements for alterations
to guest rooms in existing facilities. Section
224.1.1 modifies the scoping requirements
for new construction in section 224 by
limiting the application of section 224
requirements only to those guest rooms being
altered or added until the number of such
accessible guest rooms complies with the
minimum number required for new
construction in section 224.2 of the 2010
Standards. The minimum required number of
accessible guest rooms is based on the total
number of guest rooms altered or added
instead of the total number of guest rooms
provided. These requirements are consistent
with the requirements in the 1991 Standards.
Language in the 2010 Standards clarifies the
provision of section 104.2 of the 2010
Standards which requires rounding up values
to the next whole number for calculations of
percentages in scoping.
Guest Rooms with Communication
Features. The revisions at section 224.4 of
the 2010 Standards effect no substantive
change from the 1991 Standards with respect
to the number of guest rooms required to
provide communication features. The
scoping requirement is consolidated into a
single table, instead of appearing in three
sections as in the 1991 Standards. The
revised provisions also limit the overlap
between guest rooms required to provide
mobility features and guest rooms required to
provide communication features. Section
224.5 of the 2010 Standards requires that at
PO 00000
Frm 00175
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56337
least one guest room providing mobility
features must also provide communications
features. At least one, but not more than ten
percent (10%), of the guest rooms required to
provide mobility features can also satisfy the
minimum number of guest rooms required to
provide communication features.
Commenters suggested that the
requirements for scoping and dispersion of
guest rooms for persons with mobility
impairments and guest rooms with
communication features are too complex for
the industry to effectively implement.
The Department believes the requirements
for guest rooms with communications
features in the 2010 Standards clarify the
requirements necessary to provide equal
opportunity for travelers with disabilities.
Additional technical assistance will be made
available to address questions before the rule
goes into effect.
Visible Alarms in Guest Rooms with
Communication Features. The 1991
Standards at sections 9.3.1 and 4.28.4 require
transient lodging guest rooms with
communication features to provide either
permanently installed visible alarms that are
connected to the building fire alarm system
or portable visible alarms that are connected
to a standard 110-volt electrical outlet and
are both activated by the building fire alarm
system and provide a visible alarm when the
single station smoke detector is activated.
Section 215.4 of the 2010 Standards no
longer includes the portable visible alarm
option and instead requires that transient
lodging guest rooms with communication
features be equipped with a fire alarm system
which includes permanently installed
audible and visible alarms in accordance
with NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
(1999 or 2002 edition). Such guest rooms
with communication features are also
required by section 806.3.2 of the 2010
Standards to be equipped with visible
notification devices that alert room
occupants of incoming telephone calls and a
door knock or bell.
The 2010 Standards add a new exception
for alterations to existing facilities that
exempts existing fire alarm systems from
providing visible alarms, unless the fire
alarm system itself is upgraded or replaced,
or a new fire alarm system is installed.
Transient lodging facilities that alter guest
rooms are not required to provide
permanently installed visible alarms
complying with the NFPA 72 if the existing
fire alarm system has not been upgraded or
replaced, or a new fire alarm system has not
been installed.
Commenters representing small providers
of transient lodging raised concerns about the
proposed changes to prohibit the use of
portable visible alarms used in transient
lodging guest rooms. These commenters
recommended retaining requirements that
allow the use of portable visible alarms.
Persons who are deaf or hard of hearing
have reported that portable visible alarms
used in transient lodging guest rooms are
deficient because the alarms are not activated
by the building fire alarm system, and the
alarms do not work when the building power
source goes out in emergencies. The 2010
Standards are consistent with the model
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56338
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
building, fire, and life safety codes as applied
to newly constructed transient lodging
facilities. One commenter sought
confirmation of its understanding of visible
alarm requirements from the Department.
This commenter interpreted the exception to
section 215.1 of the 2010 Standards and the
Department’s commentary to the NPRM to
mean that if a transient lodging facility does
not have permanently installed visible alarms
in its communication accessible guest rooms,
it will not be required to provide such alarms
until such time that its fire alarm system is
upgraded or replaced, or a new fire alarm
system is installed. In addition, this
commenter also understood that, if a hotel
already has permanently installed visible
alarms in all of its mobility accessible guest
rooms, it would not have to relocate such
visible alarms and other communication
features in those rooms to other guest rooms
to comply with the ten percent (10%) overlap
requirement until the alarm system is
upgraded or replaced.
This commenter’s interpretation and
understanding are consistent with the
Department’s position in this matter. Section
215.4 of the 2010 Standards requires that
guest rooms required to have communication
features be equipped with a fire alarm system
complying with section 702. Communication
accessible guest rooms are required to have
all of the communication features described
in section 806.3 of the 2010 Standards
including a fire alarm system which provides
both audible and visible alarms. The
exception to section 215.1 of the 2010
Standards, which applies only to fire alarm
requirements for guest rooms with
communication features in existing facilities,
exempts the visible alarm requirement until
such time as the existing fire alarm system
is upgraded or replaced, or a new fire alarm
system is installed. If guest rooms in existing
facilities are altered and they are required by
section 224 of the 2010 Standards to have
communication features, such guest rooms
are required by section 806.3 to have all other
communication features including
notification devices.
Vanity Counter Space. Section 806.2.4.1 of
the 2010 Standards requires that if vanity
countertop space is provided in inaccessible
transient lodging guest bathrooms,
comparable vanity space must be provided in
accessible transient lodging guest bathrooms.
A commenter questioned whether in
existing facilities vanity countertop space
may be provided through the addition of a
shelf. Another commenter found the term
‘‘comparable’’ vague and expressed concern
about confusion the new requirement would
cause. This commenter suggested that the
phrase ‘‘equal area in square inches’’ be used
instead of comparable vanity space.
In some circumstances, the addition of a
shelf in an existing facility may be a
reasonable way to provide a space for
travelers with disabilities to use their
toiletries and other personal items. However,
this is a determination that must be made on
a case-by-case basis. Comparable vanity
countertop space need not be one continuous
surface and need not be exactly the same size
as the countertops in comparable guest
bathrooms. For example, accessible shelving
VerDate Mar<15>2010
19:21 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
within reach of the lavatory could be stacked
to provide usable surfaces for toiletries and
other personal items.
Shower and Sauna Doors in Transient
Lodging Facilities. Section 9.4 of the 1991
Standards and section 206.5.3 of the 2010
Standards both require passage doors in
transient lodging guest rooms that do not
provide mobility features to provide at least
32 inches of clear width. Congress directed
this requirement to be included so that
individuals with disabilities could visit
guests in other rooms. See H. Rept. 101–485,
pt. 2, at 118 (1990); S. Rept. 101–116, at 70
(1989). Section 224.1.2 of the 2010 Standards
adds a new exception to clarify that shower
and sauna doors in such inaccessible guest
rooms are exempt from the requirement for
passage doors to provide at least 32 inches
of clear width. Two commenters requested
that saunas and steam rooms in existing
facilities be exempt from the section 224.1.2
requirement and that the requirement be
made applicable to new construction only.
The exemption to the section 224.1.2
requirement for a 32-inch wide clearance at
doors to shower and saunas applies only to
those showers and saunas in guest rooms
which are not required to have mobility
features. Showers and saunas in other
locations, including those in common use
areas and guest rooms with mobility features,
are required to comply with the 32-inch clear
width standard as well as other applicable
accessibility standards. Saunas come in a
variety of types: portable, pre-built, pre-cut,
and custom-made. All saunas except for
custom-made saunas are made to
manufacturers’ standard dimensions. The
Department is aware that creating the
required 32-inch clearance at existing
narrower doorways may not always be
technically feasible. However, the
Department believes that owners and
operators will have an opportunity to provide
the required doorway clearance, unless doing
so is technically infeasible, when an
alteration to an existing sauna is undertaken.
Therefore, the Department has retained these
requirements.
Platform Lifts in Transient Lodging Guest
Rooms and Dwelling Units. The 1991
Standards, at section 4.1.3(5), exception 4,
and the 2010 Standards, at sections 206.7 and
206.7.6, both limit the locations where
platform lifts are permitted to be used as part
of an accessible route. The 2010 Standards
add a new scoping requirement that permits
platform lifts to be used to connect levels
within transient lodging guest rooms and
dwelling units with mobility features.
806 Transient Lodging Guest Rooms
In the NPRM, the Department included
floor plans showing examples of accessible
guest rooms and bathrooms designs with
mobility features to illustrate how
compliance with the 2010 Standards could
be accomplished with little or no additional
space compared to designs that comply with
the 1991 Standards.
Commenters noted that the Department’s
plans showing accessible transient lodging
guest rooms compliant with the 2010
Standards were not common in the transient
lodging industry and also noted that the
plans omitted doors at sleeping room closets.
PO 00000
Frm 00176
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
The Department agrees that the
configuration of the accessible bathrooms is
somewhat different from past designs used
by the industry, but this was done to meet
the requirements of the 2010 Standards. The
plans were provided to show that, with some
redesign, the 2010 Standards do not normally
increase the square footage of an accessible
sleeping room or bathroom with mobility
features in new construction. The
Department has also modified several
accessible guest room plans to show that
doors can be installed on closets and comply
with the 2010 Standards.
A commenter stated that the Department’s
drawings suggest that the fan coil units for
heat and air conditioning are overhead, while
the typical sleeping room usually has a
vertical unit, or a packaged terminal air
conditioning unit within the room. The
Department’s drawings are sample plans,
showing the layout of the space, relationship
of elements to each other, and required clear
floor and turning spaces. It was not the intent
of the Department to provide precise
locations for all elements, including heating
and air conditioning units.
Commenters noted that in guest rooms
with two beds, each bed was positioned close
to a wall, reducing access on one side.
Another commenter stated that additional
housekeeping time is needed to clean the
room when beds are placed closer to walls.
The 2010 Standards require that, when two
beds are provided, there must be at least 36
inches of clear space between the beds. The
plans provided in the NPRM showed two bed
arrangements with adequate clear width
complying with the 1991 Standards and the
2010 Standards. Additional space can be
provided on the other side of the beds to
facilitate housekeeping as long as the clear
floor space between beds is at least 36 inches
wide.
Commenters stated that chases in sleeping
room bathrooms that route plumbing and
other utilities can present challenges when
modifying existing facilities. In multi-story
facilities, relocating or re-routing these
elements may not be possible, limiting
options for providing access. The Department
recognizes that relocating mechanical chases
in multi-story facilities may be difficult or
impossible to accomplish. While these issues
do not exist in new facilities, altered existing
facilities must comply with the 2010
Standards to the extent that it is technically
feasible to do so. When an alteration cannot
fully comply because it is technically
infeasible to do so, the alteration must still
be designed to comply to the greatest extent
feasible.
Commenters noted that on some of the
Department’s plans where a vanity is located
adjacent to a bathtub, the vanity may require
more maintenance due to exposure to water.
The Department agrees that it would be
advisable that items placed next to a bathtub
or shower be made of materials that are not
susceptible to water damage.
Transient Lodging Guest Room Floor Plans
and Related Text. The Department has
included the following floor plans showing
application of the requirements of the 2010
Standards without significant loss of guest
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
56339
room living space in transient lodging
compared to the 1991 Standards.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00177
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
ER15SE10.007
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
BILLING CODE 4410–13–P
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00178
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
ER15SE10.008
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56340
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00179
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56341
ER15SE10.009
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00180
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
ER15SE10.010
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56342
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00181
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56343
ER15SE10.011
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00182
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
ER15SE10.012
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56344
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00183
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56345
ER15SE10.013
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00184
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
ER15SE10.014
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56346
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00185
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56347
ER15SE10.015
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00186
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
ER15SE10.016
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56348
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
56349
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
PO 00000
Frm 00187
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
ER15SE10.017
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
BILLING CODE 4410–13–C
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
BILLING CODE 4410–13–C
225 and 811 Storage
Section 225 of the 2010 Standards provides
that where storage is provided in accessible
spaces, at least one of each type shall comply
with the 2010 Standards. Self-service
shelving is required to be on an accessible
route, but is not required to comply with the
reach range requirements. These
requirements are consistent with the 1991
Standards.
Section 225.3 adds a new scoping
requirement for self-storage facilities.
Facilities with 200 or fewer storage spaces
will be required to make at least five percent
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
(5%) of the storage spaces accessible.
Facilities with more than 200 storage spaces
will be required to provide ten accessible
storage spaces, plus two percent (2%) of the
total storage spaces over 200.
Sections 225.2.1 and 811 of the 2010
Standards require lockers to meet
accessibility requirements. Where lockers are
provided in clusters, five percent (5%) but at
least one locker in each cluster will have to
comply. Under the 1991 Standards, only one
locker of each type provided must be
accessible.
Commenters recommended that the
Department adopt language requiring public
PO 00000
Frm 00188
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
accommodations to provide access to all selfservice shelves and display areas available to
customers. Other commenters opposed this
requirement as too burdensome to retail and
other entities and claimed that significant
revenue would be lost if this requirement
were to be implemented.
Other commenters raised concerns that
section 225.2.2 of the 2010 Standards scopes
only self-service shelving whereas section
4.1.3(12)(b) of the 1991 Standards applies to
both ‘‘shelves or display units.’’
Although ‘‘display units’’ were not
included in the 2010 Standards under the
belief that displays are not to be touched and
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
ER15SE10.018
56350
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
therefore by definition cannot be ‘‘selfservice,’’ both the 2010 Standards and the
1991 Standards should be read broadly to
apply to all types of shelves, racks, hooks,
and similar self-service merchandising
fittings, including self-service display units.
Such fixtures are permitted to be installed
above or below the reach ranges possible for
many persons with disabilities so that space
available for merchandising is used as
efficiently as possible.
226 and 902 Dining Surfaces and Work
Surfaces
Section 226.1 of the 2010 Standards
require that where dining surfaces are
provided for the consumption of food or
drink, at least five percent (5%) of the seating
spaces and standing spaces at the dining
surfaces comply with section 902. Section
902.2 requires the provision of accessible
knee and toe clearance.
Commenters stated that basing accessible
seating on seating spaces and standing spaces
potentially represents a significant increase
in scoping, particularly given the ambiguity
in what represents a ‘‘standing space’’ and
urged a return to the 1991 Standard of
requiring accessible seating based on fixed
dining tables. The scoping change merely
takes into account that tables may vary in
size so that basing the calculation on the
number of tables rather than on the number
of individuals that may be accommodated by
the tables could unnecessarily restrict
opportunities for persons with disabilities.
The revised scoping permits greater
flexibility by allowing designers to disperse
accessible seating and standing spaces
throughout the dining area. Human factors
data, which is readily available to designers,
provides information about the amount of
space required for both eating and drinking
while seated or standing.
227 and 904 Sales and Service
Check-Out Aisles and Sales and Service
Counters. The 1991 Standards, at section 7.2,
and the 2010 Standards, at section 904.4,
contain technical requirements for sales and
service counters. The 1991 Standards
generally require sales and service counters
to provide an accessible portion at least 36
inches long and no higher than 36 inches
above the finish floor. The nondiscrimination
requirements of the ADA regulations require
the level of service provided at the accessible
portion of any sales and service counter to be
the same as the level of service provided at
the inaccessible portions of the counter.
The 2010 Standards specify different
lengths for the accessible portion of sales and
service counters based on the type of
approach provided. Where a forward
approach is provided, the accessible portion
of the counter must be at least 30 inches long
and no higher than 36 inches, and knee and
toe space must be provided under the
counter. The requirement that knee and toe
space be provided where only clear floor
space for a forward approach to a sales and
service counter is provided is not a new
requirement. It is a clarification of the
ongoing requirement that part of the sales
and service counter be accessible. This
requirement applies to the entire accessible
part of sales and service counters and
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
requires that the accessible clear floor or
ground space adjacent to those counters be
kept clear of merchandise, equipment, and
other items so that the accessible part of the
counter is readily accessible to and usable by
individuals with disabilities. The accessible
part of the counter must also be staffed and
provide an equivalent level of service as that
provided to all customers.
Where clear floor space for a parallel
approach is provided, the accessible portion
of the counter must be at least 36 inches long
and no higher than 36 inches above the finish
floor. A clear floor or ground space that is at
least 48 inches long x 30 inches wide must
be provided positioned for a parallel
approach adjacent to the 36-inch minimum
length of counter.
Section 904.4 of the 2010 Standards
includes an exception for alterations to sales
and service counters in existing facilities. It
permits the accessible portion of the counter
to be at least 24 inches long, where providing
a longer accessible counter will result in a
reduction in the number of existing counters
at work stations or existing mailboxes,
provided that the required clear floor or
ground space is centered on the accessible
length of the counter.
Section 904.4 of the 2010 Standards also
clarifies that the accessible portion of the
counter must extend the same depth as the
sales or service counter top. Where the
counter is a single-height counter, this
requirement applies across the entire depth
of the counter top. Where the counter is a
split-height counter, this requirement applies
only to the customer side of the counter top.
The employee-side of the counter top may be
higher or lower than the customer-side of the
counter top.
Commenters recommended that the
Department consider a regulatory alternative
exempting small retailers from the new knee
and toe clearance requirement and retaining
existing wheelchair accessibility standards
for sales and service counters. These
commenters believed that the knee and toe
clearance requirements will cause a
reduction in the sales and inventory space at
check-out aisles and other sales and service
counters.
Both the 1991 and the 2010 Standards
permit covered entities to determine whether
they will provide a forward or a parallel
approach to sales and service counters. So
any facility that does not wish to provide the
knee or toe clearance required for a front
approach to such a counter may avoid that
option. However, the Department believes
that permitting a forward approach without
requiring knee and toe clearance is not
adequate to provide accessibility because the
person using a wheelchair will be prevented
from coming close enough to the counter to
see the merchandise or to transact business
with a degree of convenience that is
comparable to that provided to other
customers.
A parallel approach to sales and service
counters also can provide the accessibility
required by the 2010 Standards. Individuals
using wheelchairs can approach sales and
service counters from the side, and, assuming
the necessary elements, features, or
merchandise necessary to complete a
PO 00000
Frm 00189
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56351
business transaction are within the reach
range requirements for a side approach, the
needs of individuals with disabilities can be
met effectively.
Section 227 of the 2010 Standards clarifies
the requirements for food service lines.
Queues and waiting lines serving counters or
check-out aisles, including those for food
service, must be accessible to individuals
with disabilities.
229 Windows
A new requirement at section 229.1 of the
2010 Standards provides that if operable
windows are provided for building users,
then at least one window in an accessible
space must be equipped with controls that
comply with section 309.
Commenters generally supported this
provision but some commenters asked
whether the maximum five-pounds (5 lbs.) of
force requirement of section 309 applies to
the window latch itself or only to the force
required to open the window. Section 309
applies to all controls and operating
mechanisms, so the latch must comply with
the requirement to operate with no more than
five pounds of force (5 lbf).
230 and 708 Two-Way Communication
Systems
New provisions of the 2010 Standards at
sections 230.1 and 708 require two-way
communications systems to be equipped
with visible as well as audible signals.
231 and 808 Judicial Facilities and
Courtrooms
Section 231 of the 2010 Standards adds
requirements for accessible courtrooms,
holding cells, and visiting areas.
Accessible Courtroom Stations. Sections
231.2, 808, 304, 305, and 902 of the 2010
Standards provide increased accessibility at
courtroom stations. Clear floor space for a
forward approach is required for all
courtroom stations (judges’ benches, clerks’
stations, bailiffs’ stations, deputy clerks’
stations, court reporters’ stations, and
litigants’ and counsel stations). Other
applicable specifications include accessible
work surface heights and toe and knee
clearance.
Accessible Jury Boxes, Attorney Areas, and
Witness Stands. Section 206.2.4 of the 2010
Standards requires, in new construction and
alterations, at least one accessible route to
connect accessible building or facility
entrances with all accessible spaces and
elements within the building or facility that
are connected by a circulation path unless
they are exempted by Exceptions 1–7 of
section 206.2.3. Advisory 206.2.4 Spaces and
Elements Exception 1 explains that the
exception allowing raised courtroom stations
to be used by court employees, such as
judge’s benches, to be adaptable does not
apply to areas of the courtroom likely to be
used by members of the public such as jury
areas, attorney areas, or witness stands.
These areas must be on an accessible route
at the time of initial construction or
alteration.
Raised Courtroom Stations Not for
Members of the Public. Section 206.2.4,
Exception 1 of the 2010 Standards provides
that raised courtroom stations that are used
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56352
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
by judges, clerks, bailiffs, and court reporters
will not have to provide full vertical access
when first constructed or altered if they are
constructed to be easily adaptable to provide
vertical accessibility.
One commenter suggested that a sufficient
number of accessible benches for judges with
disabilities, in addition to requiring
accessible witness stands and attorney areas,
be required. The Department believes that the
requirements regarding raised benches for
judges are easily adaptable to provide vertical
access in the event a judge requires an
accessible bench. Section 206.2.4 of the 2010
Standards provides that raised courtroom
stations used by judges and other judicial
staff do not have to provide full vertical
access when first constructed or altered as
long as the required clear floor space,
maneuvering space, and electrical service,
where appropriate, is provided at the time of
new construction or can be achieved without
substantial reconstruction during alterations.
A commenter asserted that there is nothing
inherent in clerks’ stations, jury boxes, and
witness stands that require them to be raised.
While it would, of course, be easiest to
provide access by eliminating height
differences among courtroom elements, the
Department recognizes that accessibility is
only one factor that must be considered in
the design process of a functioning
courtroom. The need to ensure the ability of
the judge to maintain order, the need to
ensure sight lines among the judge, the
witness, the jury, and other participants, and
the need to maintain the security of the
participants all affect the design of the space.
The Department believes that the 2010
Standards have been drafted in a way that
will achieve accessibility without unduly
constraining the ability of a designer to
address the other considerations that are
unique to courtrooms.
Commenters argued that permitting
courtroom stations to be adaptable rather
than fully accessible at the time of new
construction likely will lead to
discrimination in hiring of clerks, court
reporters, and other court staff. The
Department believes that the provisions will
facilitate, not hinder, the hiring of court
personnel who have disabilities. All
courtroom work stations will be on accessible
routes and will be required to have all fixed
elements designed in compliance with the
2010 Standards. Elevated work stations for
court employees may be designed to add
vertical access as needed. Since the original
design must provide the proper space and
electrical wiring to install vertical access, the
change should be easily accomplished.
232 Detention Facilities and Correctional
Facilities
Section 232 of the 2010 Standards
establishes requirements for the design and
construction of cells, medical care facilities,
and visiting areas in detention facilities and
in correctional facilities. Section 35.151(k) of
the Department’s title II rule provides
scoping for newly constructed general
holding cells and general housing cells
requiring mobility features compliant with
section 807.2 of the 2010 Standards in a
minimum of three percent (3%) of cells, but
no fewer than one cell. Section 232.2 of the
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
2010 Standards provides scoping for newly
constructed cells with communications
features requiring a minimum of two percent
(2%) of cells, but at least one cell, to have
communication features.
The Department’s title II rule at § 35.151(k)
also specifies scoping for alterations to
detention and correctional facilities.
Generally a minimum of three percent (3%),
but no fewer than one, of the total number
of altered cells must comply with section
807.2 of the 2010 Standards and be provided
within each facility. Altered cells with
mobility features must be provided in each
classification level, including administrative
and disciplinary segregation, each use and
service area, and special program. The
Department notes that the three percent (3%),
but no fewer than one, requirement is a
minimum. As corrections systems plan for
new facilities or alterations, the Department
urges planners to include in their population
estimates a projection of the numbers of
inmates with disabilities so as to have
sufficient numbers of accessible cells to meet
inmate needs.
233 Residential Facilities
Homeless Shelters, Group Homes, and
Similar Social Service Establishments.
Section 233 of the 2010 Standards includes
specific scoping and technical provisions
that apply to new construction and alteration
of residential facilities. In the 1991 Standards
scoping and technical requirements for
homeless shelters, group homes, and similar
social service establishments were included
in section 9 Transient Lodging. These types
of facilities will be covered by section 233 of
the 2010 Standards and by 28 CFR 35.151(e)
and 36.406(d) and will be subject to
requirements for residential facilities rather
than the requirements for transient lodging.
This approach will harmonize federal
accessibility obligations under both the ADA
and section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of
1973, as amended. In sleeping rooms with
more than 25 beds that are covered by
§ 36.406(d) a minimum of five percent (5%)
of the beds must have clear floor space
compliant with section 806.2.3 of the 2010
Standards. In large facilities with more than
50 beds, at least one roll-in shower compliant
with section 608.2.2 or section 608.2.3 of the
2010 Standards must be provided. Where
separate shower facilities are provided for
men and for women, at least one roll-in
shower must be provided for each gender.
Housing Operated By or On Behalf of
Places of Education. Housing at a place of
education includes: Residence halls,
dormitories, suites, apartments, or other
places of residence operated by or on behalf
of places of education. Residence halls or
dormitories operated by or on behalf of
places of education are covered by the
provisions in sections 224 and 806 of the
2010 Standards. The Department has
included in the title III rule at § 36.406(e)
requirements that apply to housing at places
of education that clarify requirements for
residence halls and dormitories and other
types of student housing. Requirements for
housing at a place of education covered by
the title II rule are included at § 35.151(f).
Kitchens and Kitchenettes. Section 4.34.2
of the UFAS requires a clear turning space at
PO 00000
Frm 00190
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
least 60 inches in diameter or an equivalent
T-shaped turning space in kitchens. Section
4.34.6 requires a clearance between opposing
base cabinets, counters, appliances, or walls
of at least 40 inches except in a U-shaped
kitchen where the minimum clearance is 60
inches.
Section 804 of the 2010 Standards provides
technical requirements for kitchens and
kitchenettes. Section 804.2.1 requires that
pass through kitchens, which have two
entries and counters, appliances, or cabinets
on two opposite sides or opposite a parallel
wall, provide at least 40 inches minimum
clearance. Section 804.2.2 requires that Ushaped kitchens, which are enclosed on three
continuous sides, provide at least 60 inches
minimum clearance between all opposing
base cabinets, countertops, appliances, or
walls within kitchen work areas. Kitchens
that do not have a cooktop or conventional
range are exempt from the clearance
requirements but still must provide an
accessible route.
If a kitchen does not have two entries, the
2010 Standards require the kitchen to have
60 inches minimum clearance between the
opposing base cabinets, counters, appliances,
or walls.
One commenter supported the provisions
of section 804 of the 2010 Standards but
sought clarification whether this section
applies to residential units only, or to lodging
and office buildings as well. Section 212
makes section 804 applicable to all kitchens
and kitchenettes in covered buildings.
Residential Facilities. Section 4.1.4(11) of
the UFAS contains scoping requirements for
the new construction of housing. Under the
1991 title II regulation, state and local
governments had the option of complying
with the UFAS or the 1991 Standards. After
the compliance date for the 2010 Standards,
state and local governments will no longer
have the option of complying with the UFAS,
but will have to use the 2010 Standards for
new construction and alterations.
Sections 233.1, 233.2, 233.3, 233.3.1, and
233.3.2 of the 2010 Standards differentiate
between entities subject to the United States
Department of Housing and Urban
Development (HUD) regulations
implementing section 504 of the
Rehabilitation Act of 1973 and entities not
subject to the HUD regulations. The HUD
regulations apply to recipients of federal
financial assistance through HUD, and
require at least five percent (5%) of dwelling
units in multi-family projects of five or more
dwelling units to provide mobility features
and at least two percent (2%) of the dwelling
units to provide communication features.
The HUD regulations define a project unique
to its programs as ‘‘one or more residential
structures which are covered by a single
contract for federal financial assistance or
application for assistance, or are treated as a
whole for processing purposes, whether or
not located on a common site.’’ To avoid any
potential conflicts with the HUD regulations,
the 2010 Standards require residential
dwelling units subject to the HUD regulations
to comply with the scoping requirements in
the HUD regulations, instead of the scoping
requirements in the 2010 Standards.
For entities not subject to the HUD
regulations, the 2010 Standards require at
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
least five percent (5%) of the dwelling units
in residential facilities to provide mobility
features, and at least two percent (2%) of the
dwelling units to provide communication
features. The 2010 Standards define facilities
in terms of buildings located on a site. The
2010 Standards permit facilities that contain
15 or fewer dwelling units to apply the
scoping requirements to all the dwelling
units that are constructed under a single
contract, or are developed as whole, whether
or not located on a common site.
Alterations to Residential Facilities.
Section 4.1.6 of the UFAS requires federal,
state, and local government housing to
comply with the general requirements for
alterations to facilities. Applying the general
requirements for alterations to housing can
result in partially accessible dwelling units
where single elements or spaces in dwelling
units are altered.
The 2010 Standards, at sections 202.3
Exception 3, 202.4, and 233.3, contain
specific scoping requirements for alterations
to dwelling units. Dwelling units that are not
required to be accessible are exempt from the
general requirements for alterations to
elements and spaces and for alterations to
primary function areas.
The scoping requirements for alterations to
dwelling units generally are based on the
requirements in the UFAS:
• Where a building is vacated for purposes
of alterations and has more than 15 dwelling
units, at least five percent (5%) of the altered
dwelling units are required to provide
mobility features and at least two percent
(2%) of the dwelling units are required to
provide communication features.
• Where a bathroom or a kitchen is
substantially altered in an individual
dwelling unit and at least one other room is
also altered, the dwelling unit is required to
comply with the scoping requirements for
new construction until the total number of
dwelling units in the facility required to
provide mobility features and
communication features is met.
As with new construction, the 2010
Standards permit facilities that contain 15 or
fewer dwelling units to apply the scoping
requirements to all the dwelling units that
are altered under a single contract, or are
developed as a whole, whether or not located
on a common site. The 2010 Standards also
permit a comparable dwelling unit to provide
mobility features where it is not technically
feasible for the altered dwelling unit to
comply with the technical requirements.
234 and 1002 Amusement Rides
New and Altered Permanently Installed
Amusement Rides. Section 234 of the 2010
Standards sets out scoping requirements and
section 1002 sets out the technical
requirements for the accessibility of
permanently installed amusement rides.
These requirements apply to newly designed
and constructed amusement rides and used
rides when certain alterations are made.
A commenter raised concerns that smaller
amusement parks tend to purchase used rides
more frequently than new rides, and that the
conversion of a used ride to provide the
required accessibility may be difficult to
ensure because of the possible complications
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
in modifying equipment to provide
accessibility.
The Department agrees with this
commenter. The Department notes, however,
that the 2010 Standards will require
modifications to existing amusement rides
when a ride’s structural and operational
characteristics are altered to the extent that
the ride’s performance differs from that
specified by the manufacturer or the original
design. Such an extensive alteration to an
amusement ride may well require that new
load and unload areas be designed and
constructed. When load and unload areas
serving existing amusement rides are newly
designed and constructed they must be level,
provide wheelchair turning space, and be on
an accessible route compliant with Chapter 4
of the 2010 Standards except as modified by
section 1002.2 of the 2010 Standards.
Mobile or Portable Amusement Rides. The
exception in section 234.1 of the 2010
Standards exempts mobile or portable
amusement rides, such as those set up for
short periods of time at carnivals, fairs or
festivals, from having to comply with the
2010 Standards. However, even though the
mobile/portable ride itself is not subject to
the Standards, these facilities are still subject
to the ADA’s general requirement to ensure
that individuals with disabilities have an
equal opportunity to enjoy the services and
amenities of these facilities.
Subject to these general requirements,
mobile or portable amusement rides should
be located on an accessible route and the
load and unload areas serving a ride should
provide a level wheelchair turning space to
provide equal opportunity for individuals
with disabilities to be able to participate on
the amusement ride to the extent feasible.
One commenter noted that the exception in
Section 234.1 of the 2010 Standards for
mobile or portable amusement rides limits
the opportunities of persons with disabilities
to participate on amusement rides because
traveling or temporary amusement rides by
their nature come to their customers’ town or
a nearby town rather than the customer
having to go to them and so are less
expensive than permanent amusement parks.
While the Department understands the
commenter’s concerns, the Department notes
that most amusement rides are too complex
to be reasonably modified or re-engineered to
accommodate the majority of individuals
with disabilities and that additional
complexities and safety concerns are added
when the rides are mobile or portable.
A commenter asked that section 234 of the
2010 Standards make clear that the
requirements for accessible routes include
the routes leading up to and including the
loading and unloading areas of amusement
rides. Sections 206.2.9 and 1002.2 of the
2010 Standards clarify that the requirements
for accessible routes include the routes
leading up to and including the loading and
unloading areas of amusement rides.
A commenter requested that the final rule
specifically allow for wheelchair access
through the exit or other routes, or alternate
means of wheelchair access routes to
amusement rides. The commenter stated that
the concept of wheelchair access through the
exit or alternate routes was a base
PO 00000
Frm 00191
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56353
assumption for the 2010 Standards. The
commenter noted that the concept is
apparent in the signage and load/unload area
provisions in Section 216.12 (‘‘ * * * where
accessible unload areas also serve as
accessible load areas, signs indicating the
location of the accessible load and unload
areas shall be provided at entries to queues
and waiting lines’’). The Department agrees
with the commenter that accessible load and
unload areas may be the same where signs
that comply with section 216.12 are
provided.
Wheelchair Space or Transfer Seat or
Transfer Device. Sections 234.3 and 1002.4–
1002.6 of the 2010 Standards provide that
each new and altered amusement ride, except
for mobile/portable rides and a few
additional excepted rides, will be required to
provide at least one type of access by means
of one wheelchair space or one transfer seat
or one transfer device (the design of the
transfer device is not specified).
Commenters urged the Department to
revise the requirements for wheelchair spaces
and transfer seats and devices because most
amusement rides are too complex to be
reasonably modified or re-engineered to
accommodate the majority of individuals
with disabilities. They argued that the
experience of amusement rides will be
significantly reduced if the proposed
requirements are implemented.
The 2004 ADAAG, which the Department
adopted as part of the 2010 Standards, was
developed with the assistance of an advisory
committee that included representation from
the design staffs of major amusement venues
and from persons with disabilities. The
Department believes that the resulting 2004
ADAAG reflected sensitivity to the complex
problems posed in adapting existing rides by
focusing on new rides that can be designed
from the outset to be accessible.
To permit maximum design flexibility, the
2010 Standards permit designers to
determine whether it is more appropriate to
permit individuals who use wheelchairs to
remain in their chairs on the ride, or to
provide for transfer access.
Maneuvering Space in Load and Unload
Areas. Sections 234.2 and 1002.3 of the 2010
Standards require that a level wheelchair
turning space be provided at the load and
unload areas of each amusement ride. The
turning space must comply with sections
304.2 and 304.3.
Signs Required at Waiting Lines to
Amusement Rides. Section 216.12 of the
2010 Standards requires signs at entries to
queues and waiting lines identifying type
and location of access for the amusement
ride.
235 and 1003 Recreational Boating
Facilities
These sections require that accessible boat
slips and boarding piers be provided. Most
commenters approved of the requirements for
recreational boating facility accessibility and
urged the Department to keep regulatory
language consistent with those provisions.
They commented that the requirements
appropriately reflect industry conditions.
Individual commenters and disability
organizations agreed that the 2010 Standards
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56354
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
achieve acceptable goals for recreational
boating facility access.
Accessible Route. Sections 206.2.10 and
1003.2 of the 2010 Standards require an
accessible route to all accessible boating
facilities, including boat slips and boarding
piers at boat launch ramps. Section 1003.2.1
provides a list of exceptions applicable to
structures such as gangways, transition
plates, floating piers, and structures
containing combinations of these elements
that are affected by water level changes. The
list of exceptions specifies alternate design
requirements applicable to these structures
which, because of water level variables,
cannot comply with the slope, cross slope,
and handrail requirements for fixed ramps
contained in sections 403.3, 405.2, 405.3,
405.6, and 405.7 of the 2010 Standards.
Exceptions 3 and 4 in Section 1003.2.1,
which permit a slope greater than that
specified in Section 405.2, are available for
structures that meet specified length
requirements. Section 206.7.10 permits the
use of platform lifts as an alternative to
gangways that are part of accessible routes.
Commenters raised concerns that because
of water level fluctuations it may be difficult
to provide accessible routes to all accessible
boating facilities, including boat slips and
boarding piers at boat launch ramps. One of
the specific concerns expressed by several
commenters relates to the limits for running
slope permitted on gangways that are part of
an accessible route as gangways may
periodically have a steeper slope than is
permitted for a fixed ramp. The exceptions
contained in section 1003.2 of the 2010
Standards modify the requirements of
Chapter 4. For example, where the total
length of a gangway or series of gangways
serving as an accessible route is 80 feet or
more an exception permits the slope on
gangways to exceed the maximum slope in
section 405.2.
Some commenters suggested that
permissible slope variations could be
reduced further by introducing a formula that
ties required gangway length to anticipated
water level fluctuations. Such a formula
would incorporate predictions of tidal level
changes such as those issued by the National
Oceanographic and Atmospheric
Administration (NOAA) and the United
States Geologic Survey (USGS). This
suggested approach would be an alternative
to the gangway length exceptions and limits
in section 1003.2.1 of the 2010 Standards.
These commenters noted that contemporary
building materials and techniques make
gangways of longer length and alternative
configurations achievable. These commenters
provided at least one example of a regional
regulatory authority using this type of
formula. While this approach may be
successfully implemented and consistent
with the goals of the ADA, the example
provided was applied in a highly developed
area containing larger facilities. The
Department has considered that many
facilities do not have sufficient resources
available to take advantage of the latest
construction materials and design
innovations. Other commenters supported
compliance exceptions for facilities that are
subject to extreme tidal conditions. One
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
commenter noted that if a facility is located
in an area with limited space and extreme
tidal variations, a disproportionately long
gangway might intrude into water travel
routes. The Department has considered a
wide range of boating facility characteristics
including size, water surface areas, tidal
fluctuations, water conditions, variable
resources, whether the facility is in a highly
developed or remote location, and other
factors. The Department has determined that
the 2010 Standards provide sufficient
flexibility for such broad application.
Additionally, the length requirement for
accessible routes in section 1003.2.1 provides
an easily determinable compliance standard.
Accessible Boarding Piers. Where boarding
piers are provided at boat launch ramps,
sections 235.3 and 1003.3.2 of the 2010
Standards require that at least five percent
(5%) of boarding piers, but at least one, must
be accessible.
Accessible Boat Slips. Sections 235.2 and
1003.3.1 of the 2010 Standards require that
a specified number of boat slips in each
recreational boating facility meet specified
accessibility standards. The number of
accessible boat slips required by the 2010
Standards is set out in a chart in section
235.2. One accessible boat slip is required for
facilities containing 25 or fewer total slips.
The number of required accessible boat slips
increases with the total number of slips at the
facility. Facilities containing more than one
thousand (1000) boat slips are required to
provide twelve (12) accessible boat slips plus
one for each additional one hundred slips at
the facility.
One commenter asserted the need for
specificity in the requirement for dispersion
of accessible slips. Section 235.2.1 of the
2010 Standards addresses dispersion and
requires that boat slips ‘‘shall be dispersed
throughout the various types of boat slips
provided.’’ The commenter was concerned
that if a marina could not put accessible slips
all on one pier, it would have to reconstruct
the entire facility to accommodate accessible
piers, gangways, docks and walkways. The
provision permits required accessible boat
slips to be grouped together. The Department
recognizes that economical and structural
feasibility may produce this result. The 2010
Standards do not require the dispersion of
the physical location of accessible boat slips.
Rather, the dispersion must be among the
various types of boat slips offered by the
facility. Section 235.2.1 of the 2010
Standards specifies that if the required
number has been met, no further dispersion
is required. For example, if a facility offers
five different ‘types’ of boat slips but is only
required to provide three according to the
table in Section 235.2, that facility is not
required to provide more than three
accessible boat slips, but the three must be
varied among the five ‘types’ of boat slips
available at the facility.
236 and 1004 Exercise Machines and
Equipment
Accessible Route to Exercise Machines and
Equipment. Section 206.2.13 of the 2010
Standards requires an accessible route to
serve accessible exercise machines and
equipment.
PO 00000
Frm 00192
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Commenters raised concerns that the
requirement to provide accessible routes to
serve accessible exercise machines and
equipment will be difficult for some facilities
to provide, especially some transient lodging
facilities that typically locate exercise
machines and equipment in a single room.
The Department believes that this
requirement is a reasonable one in new
construction and alterations because
accessible exercise machines and equipment
can be located so that an accessible route can
serve more than one piece of equipment.
Exercise Machines and Equipment. Section
236 of the 2010 Standards requires at least
one of each type of exercise machine to meet
clear floor space requirements of section
1004.1. Types of machines are generally
defined according to the muscular groups
exercised or the kind of cardiovascular
exercise provided.
Several commenters were concerned that
existing facilities would have to reduce the
number of available exercise equipment and
machines in order to comply with the 2010
Standards. One commenter submitted
prototype drawings showing equipment and
machine layouts with and without the
required clearance specified in the 2010
Standards. The accessible alternatives all
resulted in a loss of equipment and
machines. However, because these prototype
layouts included certain possibly erroneous
assumptions about the 2010 Standards, the
Department wishes to clarify the
requirements.
Section 1004.1 of the 2010 Standards
requires a clear floor space ‘‘positioned for
transfer or for use by an individual seated in
a wheelchair’’ to serve at least one of each
type of exercise machine and equipment.
This requirement provides the designer
greater flexibility regarding the location of
the clear floor space than was employed by
the commenter who submitted prototype
layouts. The 2010 Standards do not require
changes to exercise machines or equipment
in order to make them more accessible to
persons with disabilities. Even where
machines or equipment do not have seats and
typically are used by individuals in a
standing position, at least one of each type
of machine or equipment must have a clear
floor space. Therefore, it is reasonable to
assume that persons with disabilities wishing
to use this type of machine or equipment can
stand or walk, even if they use wheelchairs
much of the time. As indicated in Advisory
1004.1, ‘‘the position of the clear floor space
may vary greatly depending on the use of the
equipment or machine.’’ Where exercise
equipment or machines require users to stand
on them, the clear floor space need not be
located parallel to the length of the machine
or equipment in order to provide a lateral
seat-to-platform transfer. It is permissible to
locate the clear floor space for such machines
or equipment in the aisle behind the device
and to overlap the clear floor space and the
accessible route.
Commenters were divided in response to
the requirement for accessible exercise
machines and equipment. Some supported
requirements for accessible machines and
equipment; others urged the Department not
to require accessible machines and
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
equipment because of the costs involved. The
Department believes that the requirement
strikes an appropriate balance in ensuring
that persons with disabilities, particularly
those who use wheelchairs, will have the
opportunity to use the exercise equipment.
Providing access to exercise machines and
equipment recognizes the need and desires of
individuals with disabilities to have the same
opportunity as other patrons to enjoy the
advantages of exercise and maintaining
health.
237 and 1005 Fishing Piers and Platforms
Accessible Route. Sections 206.2.14 and
1005.1 of the 2010 Standards require an
accessible route to each accessible fishing
pier and platform. The exceptions described
under Recreational Boating above also apply
to gangways and floating piers. All
commenters supported the requirements for
accessible routes to fishing piers and
platforms.
Accessible Fishing Piers and Platforms.
Sections 237 and 1005 of the 2010 Standards
require at least twenty-five percent (25%) of
railings, guards, or handrails (if provided) to
be at a 34-inch maximum height (so that a
person seated in a wheelchair can cast a
fishing line over the railing) and to be located
in a variety of locations on the fishing pier
or platform to give people a variety of
locations to fish. An exception allows a guard
required to comply with the IBC to have a
height greater than 34 inches. If railings,
guards, or handrails are provided, accessible
edge protection and clear floor or ground
space at accessible railings are required.
Additionally, at least one turning space
complying with section 304.3 of the 2010
Standards is required to be provided on
fishing piers and platforms.
Commenters expressed concerns about the
provision for fishing piers and platforms at
the exception in section 1005.2.1 of the 2010
Standards that allows a maximum height of
42 inches for a guard when the pier or
platform is covered by the IBC. Two
commenters stated that allowing a 42-inch
guard or railing height for facilities covered
by another building code would be difficult
to enforce. They also thought that this would
hinder access for persons with disabilities
because the railing height would be too high
for a person seated in a wheelchair to reach
over with their fishing pole in order to fish.
The Department understands these concerns
but believes that the railing height exception
is necessary in order to avoid confusion
resulting from conflicting accessibility
requirements, and therefore has retained this
exception.
238 and 1006 Golf Facilities
Accessible Route. Sections 206.2.15,
1006.2, and 1006.3 of the 2010 Standards
require an accessible route to connect all
accessible elements within the boundary of
the golf course and, in addition, to connect
golf car rental areas, bag drop areas, teeing
grounds, putting greens, and weather
shelters. An accessible route also is required
to connect any practice putting greens,
practice teeing grounds, and teeing stations at
driving ranges that are required to be
accessible. An exception permits the
accessible route requirements to be met,
VerDate Mar<15>2010
19:21 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
within the boundaries of the golf course, by
providing a ‘‘golf car passage’’ (the path
typically used by golf cars) if specifications
for width and curb cuts are met.
Most commenters expressed the general
viewpoint that nearly all golf courses provide
golf cars and have either well-defined paths
or permit the cars to drive on the course
where paths are not present, and thus meet
the accessible route requirement.
The Department received many comments
requesting clarification of the term ‘‘golf car
passage.’’ Some commenters recommended
additional regulatory language specifying
that an exception from a pedestrian route
requirement should be allowed only when a
golf car passage provides unobstructed access
onto the teeing ground, putting green, or
other accessible element of the course so that
an accessible golf car can have full access to
those elements. These commenters cautioned
that full and equal access would not be
provided if a golfer were required to navigate
a steep slope up or down a hill or a flight
of stairs in order to get to the teeing ground,
putting green, or other accessible element of
the course.
Conversely, another commenter requesting
clarification of the term ‘‘golf car passage’’
argued that golf courses typically do not
provide golf car paths or pedestrian paths up
to actual tee grounds or greens, many of
which are higher or lower than the car path.
This commenter argued that if golf car
passages were required to extend onto teeing
grounds and greens in order to qualify for an
exception, then some golf courses would
have to substantially regrade teeing grounds
and greens at a high cost.
Some commenters argued that older golf
courses, small nine-hole courses, and
executive courses that do not have golf car
paths would be unable to comply with the
accessible route requirements because of the
excessive cost involved. A commenter noted
that, for those older courses that have not yet
created an accessible pedestrian route or golf
car passage, the costs and impacts to do so
should be considered.
A commenter argued that an accessible
route should not be required where natural
terrain makes it infeasible to create an
accessible route. Some commenters
cautioned that the 2010 Standards would
jeopardize the integrity of golf course designs
that utilize natural terrain elements and
elevation changes to set up shots and create
challenging golf holes.
The Department has given careful
consideration to the comments and has
decided to adopt the 2010 Standards
requiring that at least one accessible route
connect accessible elements and spaces
within the boundary of the golf course
including teeing grounds, putting greens, and
weather shelters, with an exception provided
that golf car passages shall be permitted to be
used for all or part of required accessible
routes. In response to requests for
clarification of the term ‘‘golf car passage,’’
the Department points out that golf car
passage is merely a pathway on which a
motorized golf car can operate and includes
identified or paved paths, teeing grounds,
fairways, putting greens, and other areas of
the course. Golf cars cannot traverse steps
PO 00000
Frm 00193
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56355
and exceedingly steep slopes. A nine-hole
golf course or an executive golf course that
lacks an identified golf car path but provides
golf car passage to teeing grounds, putting
greens, and other elements throughout the
course may utilize the exception for all or
part of the accessible pedestrian route. The
exception in section 206.2.15 of the 2010
Standards does not exempt golf courses from
their obligation to provide access to
necessary elements of the golf course; rather,
the exception allows a golf course to use a
golf car passage for part or all of the
accessible pedestrian route to ensure that
persons with mobility disabilities can fully
and equally participate in the recreational
activity of playing golf.
Accessible Teeing Grounds, Putting Greens,
and Weather Shelters. Sections 238.2 and
1006.4 of the 2010 Standards require that golf
cars be able to enter and exit each putting
green and weather shelter. Where two teeing
grounds are provided, the forward teeing
ground is required to be accessible (golf car
can enter and exit). Where three or more
teeing grounds are provided, at least two,
including the forward teeing ground, must be
accessible.
A commenter supported requirements for
teeing grounds, particularly requirements for
accessible teeing grounds, noting that
accessible teeing grounds are essential to the
full and equal enjoyment of the golfing
experience.
A commenter recommended that existing
golf courses be required to provide access to
only one teeing ground per hole. The
majority of commenters reported that most
public and private golf courses already
provide golf car passage to teeing grounds
and greens. The Department has decided that
it is reasonable to maintain the requirement.
The 2010 Standards provide an exception for
existing golf courses with three or more
teeing grounds not to provide golf car passage
to the forward teeing ground where terrain
makes such passage infeasible.
Section 1006.3.2 of the 2010 Standards
requires that where curbs or other
constructed barriers prevent golf cars from
entering a fairway, openings 60 inches wide
minimum shall be provided at intervals not
to exceed 75 yards.
A commenter disagreed with the
requirement that openings 60 inches wide
minimum be installed at least every 75 yards,
arguing that a maximum spacing of 75 yards
may not allow enough flexibility for terrain
and hazard placements. To resolve this
problem, the commenter recommended that
the standards be modified to require that
each golf car passage include one 60-inch
wide opening for an accessible golf car to
reach the tee, and that one opening be
provided where necessary for an accessible
golf car to reach a green. The requirement for
openings where curbs or other constructed
barriers may otherwise prevent golf cars from
entering a fairway allows the distance
between openings to be less than every 75
yards. Therefore, the Department believes
that the language in section 1006.3.2 of the
2010 Standards allows appropriate
flexibility. Where a paved path with curbs or
other constructed barrier exists, the
Department believes that it is essential that
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
56356
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
openings be provided to enable golf car
passages to access teeing grounds, fairways
and putting greens, and other required
elements. Golf car passage is not restricted to
a paved path with curbs. Golf car passage
also includes fairways, teeing grounds,
putting greens, and other areas on which golf
cars operate.
Accessible Practice Putting Greens,
Practice Teeing Grounds, and Teeing
Stations at Driving Ranges. Section 238.3 of
the 2010 Standards requires that five percent
(5%) but at least one of each of practice
putting greens, practice teeing grounds, and
teeing stations at driving ranges must permit
golf cars to enter and exit.
239 and 1007 Miniature Golf Facilities
Accessible Route to Miniature Golf Course
Holes. Sections 206.2.16, 239.3, and 1007.2
of the 2010 Standards require an accessible
route to connect accessible miniature golf
course holes and the last accessible hole on
the course directly to the course entrance or
exit. Accessible holes are required to be
consecutive with an exception permitting
one break in the sequence of consecutive
holes provided that the last hole on the
miniature golf course is the last hole in the
sequence.
Many commenters supported expanding
the exception from one to multiple breaks in
the sequence of accessible holes. One
commenter noted that permitting accessible
holes with breaks in sequence would enable
customers with disabilities to enjoy the
landscaping, water and theme elements of
the miniature golf course. Another
commenter wrote in favor of allowing
multiple breaks in accessible holes with a
connecting accessible route.
Other commenters objected to allowing
multiple breaks in the sequence of miniature
golf holes. Commenters opposed to this
change argued that allowing any breaks in
the sequence of accessible holes at a
miniature golf course would disrupt the flow
of play for persons with disabilities and
create a less socially integrated experience. A
commenter noted that multiple breaks in
sequence would not necessarily guarantee
the provision of access to holes that are most
representative of those with landscaping,
water elements, or a fantasy-like experience.
The Department has decided to retain the
exception without change. Comments did not
provide a sufficient basis on which to
conclude that allowing multiple breaks in the
sequence of accessible holes would
necessarily increase integration of accessible
holes with unique features of miniature golf
courses. Some designs of accessible holes
with multiple breaks in the sequence might
provide equivalent facilitation where persons
with disabilities gain access to landscaping,
water or theme elements not otherwise
represented in a consecutive configuration of
accessible holes. A factor that might
contribute to equivalent facilitation would be
an accessible route designed to bring persons
with disabilities to a unique feature, such as
a waterfall, that would otherwise not be
served by an accessible route connecting
consecutive accessible holes.
Specified exceptions are permitted for
accessible route requirements when located
on the playing surfaces near holes.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
Accessible Miniature Golf Course Holes.
Sections 239.2 and 1007.3 of the 2010
Standards require at least fifty percent (50%)
of golf holes on miniature golf courses to be
accessible, including providing a clear floor
or ground space that is 48 inches minimum
by 60 inches minimum with slopes not
steeper than 1:48 at the start of play.
240 and 1008 Play Areas
Section 240 of the 2010 Standards provides
scoping for play areas and section 1008
provides technical requirements for play
areas. Section 240.1 of the 2010 Standards
sets requirements for play areas for children
ages 2 and over and covers separate play
areas within a site for specific age groups.
Section 240.1 also provides four exceptions
to the requirements that apply to family child
care facilities, relocation of existing play
components in existing play areas,
amusement attractions, and alterations to
play components where the ground surface is
not altered.
Ground Surfaces. Section 1008.2.6 of the
2010 Standards provides technical
requirements for accessible ground surfaces
for play areas on accessible routes, clear floor
or ground spaces, and turning spaces. These
ground surfaces must follow special rules,
incorporated by reference from nationally
recognized standards for accessibility and
safety in play areas, including those issued
by the American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM).
A commenter recommended that the
Department closely examine the
requirements for ground surfaces at play
areas. The Department is aware that there is
an ongoing controversy about play area
ground surfaces arising from a concern that
some surfaces that meet the ASTM
requirements at the time of installation will
become inaccessible if they do not receive
constant maintenance. The Access Board is
also aware of this issue and is working to
develop a portable field test that will provide
more relevant information on installed play
surfaces. The Department would caution
covered entities selecting among the ground
surfacing materials that comply with the
ASTM requirements that they must
anticipate the maintenance costs that will be
associated with some of the products.
Permitting a surface to deteriorate so that it
does not meet the 2010 Standards would be
an independent violation of the Department’s
ADA regulations.
Accessible Route to Play Components.
Section 206.2.17 of the 2010 Standards
provides scoping requirements for accessible
routes to ground level and elevated play
components and to soft contained play
structures. Sections 240.2 and 1008 of the
2010 Standards require that accessible routes
be provided for play components. The
accessible route must connect to at least one
ground level play component of each
different type provided (e.g., for different
experiences such as rocking, swinging,
climbing, spinning, and sliding). Table
240.2.1.2 sets requirements for the number
and types of ground level play components
required to be on accessible routes. When
elevated play components are provided, an
accessible route must connect at least fifty
percent (50%) of the elevated play
PO 00000
Frm 00194
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
components. Section 240.2.1.2, provides an
exception to the requirements for ground
level play components if at least fifty percent
(50%) of the elevated play components are
connected by a ramp and at least three of the
elevated play components connected by the
ramp are different types of play components.
The technical requirements at section 1008
include provisions where if three or fewer
entry points are provided to a soft contained
play structure, then at least one entry point
must be on an accessible route. In addition,
where four or more entry points are provided
to a soft contained play structure, then at
least two entry points must be served by an
accessible route.
If elevated play components are provided,
fifty percent (50%) of the elevated
components are required to be accessible.
Where 20 or more elevated play components
are provided, at least twenty five percent
(25%) will have to be connected by a ramp.
The remaining play components are
permitted to be connected by a transfer
system. Where less than 20 elevated play
components are provided, a transfer system
is permitted in lieu of a ramp.
A commenter noted that the 2010
Standards allow for the provision of transfer
steps to elevated play structures based on the
number of elevated play activities, but
asserted that transfer steps have not been
documented as an effective means of access.
The 2010 Standards recognize that play
structures are designed to provide unique
experiences and opportunities for children.
The 2010 Standards provide for play
components that are accessible to children
who cannot transfer from their wheelchair,
but they also provide opportunities for
children who are able to transfer. Children
often interact with their environment in ways
that would be considered inappropriate for
adults. Crawling and climbing, for example,
are integral parts of the play experience for
young children. Permitting the use of transfer
platforms in play structures provides some
flexibility for creative playground design.
Accessible Play Components. Accessible
play components are required to be on
accessible routes, including elevated play
components that are required to be connected
by ramps. These play components must also
comply with other accessibility
requirements, including specifications for
clear floor space and seat heights (where
provided).
A commenter expressed concerns that the
general requirements of section 240.2.1 of the
2010 Standards and the advisory
accompanying section 240.2.1 conflict. The
comment asserts that section 240.2.1 of the
2010 Standards provides that the only
requirement for integration of equipment is
where there are two or more required ground
level play components, while the advisory
appears to suggest that all accessible
components must be integrated.
The commenter misinterprets the
requirement. The ADA mandates that
persons with disabilities be able to
participate in programs or activities in the
most integrated setting appropriate to their
needs. Therefore, all accessible play
components must be integrated into the
general playground setting. Section 240.2.1 of
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
the 2010 Standards specifies that where there
is more than one accessible ground level play
component, the components must be both
dispersed and integrated.
241 and 612 Saunas and Steam Rooms
Section 241 of the 2010 Standards sets
scoping for saunas and steam rooms and
section 612 sets technical requirements
including providing accessible turning space
and an accessible bench. Doors are not
permitted to swing into the clear floor or
ground space for the accessible bench. The
exception in section 612.2 of the 2010
Standards permits a readily removable bench
to obstruct the required wheelchair turning
space and the required clear floor or ground
space. Where they are provided in clusters,
five percent (5%) but at least one sauna or
steam room in each cluster must be
accessible.
Commenters raised concerns that the safety
of individuals with disabilities outweighs the
usefulness in providing accessible saunas
and steam rooms. The Department believes
that there is an element of risk in many
activities available to the general public. One
of the major tenets of the ADA is that
individuals with disabilities should have the
same opportunities as other persons to
decide what risks to take. It is not
appropriate for covered entities to prejudge
the abilities of persons with disabilities.
242 and 1009 Swimming Pools, Wading
Pools, and Spas
Accessible Means of Entry to Pools. Section
242 of the 2010 Standards requires at least
two accessible means of entry for larger pools
(300 or more linear feet) and at least one
accessible entry for smaller pools. This
section requires that at least one entry will
have to be a sloped entry or a pool lift; the
other could be a sloped entry, pool lift, a
transfer wall, or a transfer system (technical
specifications for each entry type are
included at section 1009).
Many commenters supported the scoping
and technical requirements for swimming
pools. Other commenters stated that the cost
of requiring facilities to immediately
purchase a pool lift for each indoor and
outdoor swimming pool would be very
significant especially considering the large
number of swimming pools at lodging
facilities. One commenter requested that the
Department clarify what would be an
‘‘alteration’’ to a swimming pool that would
trigger the obligation to comply with the
accessible means of entry in the 2010
Standards.
Alterations are covered by section 202.3 of
the 2010 Standards and the definition of
‘‘alteration’’ is provided at section 106.5. A
physical change to a swimming pool which
affects or could affect the usability of the
pool is considered to be an alteration.
Changes to the mechanical and electrical
systems, such as filtration and chlorination
systems, are not alterations. Exception 2 to
section 202.3 permits an altered swimming
pool to comply with applicable requirements
to the maximum extent feasible if full
compliance is technically infeasible.
‘‘Technically infeasible’’ is also defined in
section 106.5 of the 2010 Standards.
The Department also received comments
suggesting that it is not appropriate to require
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
two accessible means of entry to wave pools,
lazy rivers, sand bottom pools, and other
water amusements where there is only one
point of entry. Exception 2 of Section 242.2
of the 2010 Standards exempts pools of this
type from having to provide more than one
accessible means of entry provided that the
one accessible means of entry is a swimming
pool lift compliant with section 1009.2, a
sloped entry compliant with section 1009.3,
or a transfer system compliant with section
1009.5 of the 2010 Standards.
Accessible Means of Entry to Wading
Pools. Sections 242.3 and 1009.3 of the 2010
Standards require that at least one sloped
means of entry is required into the deepest
part of each wading pool.
Accessible Means of Entry to Spas.
Sections 242.4 and 1009.2, 1009.4, and
1009.5 of the 2010 Standards require spas to
meet accessibility requirements, including an
accessible means of entry. Where spas are
provided in clusters, five percent (5%) but at
least one spa in each cluster must be
accessible. A pool lift, a transfer wall, or a
transfer system will be permitted to provide
the required accessible means of entry.
243 Shooting Facilities with Firing
Positions
Sections 243 and 1010 of the 2010
Standards require an accessible turning space
for each different type of firing position at a
shooting facility if designed and constructed
on a site. Where firing positions are provided
in clusters, five percent (5%), but at least one
position of each type in each cluster must be
accessible.
Additional Technical Requirements
302.1 Floor or Ground Surfaces
Both section 4.5.1 of the 1991 Standards
and section 302.2 of the 2010 Standards
require that floor or ground surfaces along
accessible routes and in accessible rooms and
spaces be stable, firm, slip-resistant, and
comply with either section 4.5 in the case of
the 1991 Standards or section 302 in the case
of the 2010 Standards.
Commenters recommended that the
Department apply an ASTM Standard (with
modifications) to assess whether a floor
surface is ‘‘slip resistant’’ as required by
section 302.1 of the 2010 Standards. The
Department declines to accept this
recommendation since, currently, there is no
generally accepted test method for the slipresistance of all walking surfaces under all
conditions.
304 Turning Space
Section 4.2.3 of the 1991 Standards and
Section 304.3 of the 2010 Standards allow
turning space to be either a circular space or
a T-shaped space. Section 304.3 permits
turning space to include knee and toe
clearance complying with section 306.
Section 4.2.3 of the 1991 Standards did not
specifically permit turning space to include
knee and toe clearance. Commenters urged
the Department to retain the turning space
requirement, but exclude knee and toe
clearance from being permitted as part of this
space. They argued that wheelchairs and
other mobility devices are becoming larger
and that more individuals with disabilities
PO 00000
Frm 00195
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
56357
are using electric three and four-wheeled
scooters which cannot utilize knee clearance.
The Department recognizes that the
technical specifications for T-shaped and
circular turning spaces in the 1991 and 2010
Standards, which are based on manual
wheelchair dimensions, may not adequately
meet the needs of individuals using larger
electric scooters. However, there is no
consensus about the appropriate dimension
on which to base revised requirements. The
Access Board is conducting research to study
this issue in order to determine if new
requirements are warranted. For more
information, see the Access Board’s Web site
at https://www.access-board.gov/research/
current-projects.htm#suny. The Department
plans to wait for the results of this study and
action by the Access Board before
considering any changes to the Department’s
rules. Covered entities may wish to consider
providing more than the minimum amount of
turning space in confined spaces where a
turn will be required. Appendix section
A4.2.3 and Fig. A2 of the 1991 Standards
provide guidance on additional space for
making a smooth turn without bumping into
surrounding objects.
404 Doors, Doorways, and Gates
Automatic Door Break Out Openings. The
1991 Standards do not contain any technical
requirement for automatic door break out
openings. The 2010 Standards at sections
404.1, 404.3, 404.3.1, and 404.3.6 require
automatic doors that are part of a means of
egress and that do not have standby power
to have a 32-inch minimum clear break out
opening when operated in emergency mode.
The minimum clear opening width for
automatic doors is measured with all leaves
in the open position. Automatic bi-parting
doors or pairs of swinging doors that provide
a 32-inch minimum clear break out opening
in emergency mode when both leaves are
opened manually meet the technical
requirement. Section 404.3.6 of the 2010
Standards includes an exception that
exempts automatic doors from the technical
requirement for break out openings when
accessible manual swinging doors serve the
same means of egress.
Maneuvering Clearance or Standby Power
for Automatic Doors. Section 4.13.6 of the
1991 Standards does not require
maneuvering clearance at automatic doors.
Section 404.3.2 of the 2010 Standards
requires automatic doors that serve as an
accessible means of egress to either provide
maneuvering clearance or to have standby
power to operate the door in emergencies.
This provision has limited application and
will affect, among others, in-swinging
automatic doors that serve small spaces.
Commenters urged the Department to
reconsider provisions that would require
maneuvering clearance or standby power for
automatic doors. They assert that these
requirements would impose unreasonable
financial and administrative burdens on all
covered entities, particularly smaller entities.
The Department declines to change these
provisions because they are fundamental lifesafety issues. The requirement applies only
to doors that are part of a means of egress that
must be accessible in an emergency. If an
emergency-related power failure prevents the
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
56358
Federal Register / Vol. 75, No. 178 / Wednesday, September 15, 2010 / Rules and Regulations
WReier-Aviles on DSKGBLS3C1PROD with RULES2
operation of the automatic door, a person
with a disability could be trapped unless
there is either adequate maneuvering room to
open the door manually or a back-up power
source.
Thresholds at Doorways. The 1991
Standards, at section 4.13.8, require the
height of thresholds at doorways not to
exceed 1⁄2 inch and thresholds at exterior
sliding doors not to exceed 3⁄4 inch. Sections
404.1 and 404.2.5 of the 2010 Standards
require the height of thresholds at all
doorways that are part of an accessible route
not to exceed 1⁄2 inch. The 1991 Standards
and the 2010 Standards require raised
thresholds that exceed 1⁄4 inch in height to
be beveled on each side with a slope not
steeper than 1:2. The 2010 Standards include
an exception that exempts existing and
altered thresholds that do not exceed 3⁄4 inch
in height and are beveled on each side from
the requirement.
505 Handrails
The 2010 Standards add a new technical
requirement at section 406.3 for handrails
along walking surfaces.
The 1991 Standards, at sections 4.8.5,
4.9.4, and 4.26, and the 2010 Standards, at
section 505, contain technical requirements
for handrails. The 2010 Standards provide
more flexibility than the 1991 Standards as
follows:
• Section 4.26.4 of the 1991 Standards
requires handrail gripping surfaces to have
edges with a minimum radius of 1⁄8 inch.
Section 505.8 of the 2010 Standards requires
handrail gripping surfaces to have rounded
edges.
• Section 4.26.2 of the 1991 Standards
requires handrail gripping surfaces to have a
diameter of 11⁄4 inches to 11⁄2 inches, or to
provide an equivalent gripping surface.
Section 505.7 of the 2010 Standards requires
handrail gripping surfaces with a circular
cross section to have an outside diameter of
11⁄4 inches to 2 inches. Handrail gripping
surfaces with a non-circular cross section
must have a perimeter dimension of 4 inches
to 61⁄4 inches, and a cross section dimension
of 21⁄4 inches maximum.
• Sections 4.8.5 and 4.9.4 of the 1991
Standards require handrail gripping surfaces
to be continuous, and to be uninterrupted by
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:25 Sep 14, 2010
Jkt 220001
newel posts, other construction elements, or
obstructions. Section 505.3 of the 2010
Standards sets technical requirements for
continuity of gripping surfaces. Section 505.6
requires handrail gripping surfaces to be
continuous along their length and not to be
obstructed along their tops or sides. The
bottoms of handrail gripping surfaces must
not be obstructed for more than twenty
percent (20%) of their length. Where
provided, horizontal projections must occur
at least 11⁄2 inches below the bottom of the
handrail gripping surface. An exception
permits the distance between the horizontal
projections and the bottom of the gripping
surface to be reduced by 1⁄8 inch for each 1⁄2
inch of additional handrail perimeter
dimension that exceeds 4 inches.
• Section 4.9.4 of the 1991 Standards
requires handrails at the bottom of stairs to
continue to slope for a distance of the width
of one tread beyond the bottom riser nosing
and to further extend horizontally at least 12
inches. Section 505.10 of the 2010 Standards
requires handrails at the bottom of stairs to
extend at the slope of the stair flight for a
horizontal distance at least equal to one tread
depth beyond the last riser nosing. Section
4.1.6(3) of the 1991 Standards has a special
technical provision for alterations to existing
facilities that exempts handrails at the top
and bottom of ramps and stairs from
providing full extensions where it will be
hazardous due to plan configuration. Section
505.10 of the 2010 Standards has a similar
exception that applies in alterations.
A commenter noted that handrail
extensions are currently required at the top
and bottom of stairs, but the proposed
regulations do not include this requirement,
and urged the Department to retain the
current requirement. Other commenters
questioned the need for the extension at the
bottom of stairs.
Sections 505.10.2 and 505.10.3 of the 2010
Standards require handrail extensions at both
the top and bottom of a flight of stairs. The
requirement in the 1991 Standards that
handrails extend horizontally at least 12
inches beyond the width of one tread at the
bottom of a stair was changed in the 2004
ADAAG by the Access Board in response to
public comments. Existing horizontal
PO 00000
Frm 00196
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 9990
handrail extensions that comply with 4.9.4(2)
of the 1991 Standards should meet or exceed
the requirements of the 2010 Standards.
Commenters noted that the 2010 Standards
will require handrail gripping surfaces with
a circular cross section to have an outside
diameter of 2 inches, and that this
requirement would impose a physical barrier
to individuals with disabilities who need the
handrail for stability and support while
accessing stairs.
The requirement permits an outside
diameter of 11⁄4 inches to 2 inches. This range
allows flexibility in meeting the needs of
individuals with disabilities and designers
and architects. The Department is not aware
of any data indicating that an outside
diameter of 2 inches would pose any adverse
impairment to use by individuals with
disabilities.
Handrails Along Walkways. The 1991
Standards do not contain any technical
requirement for handrails provided along
walkways that are not ramps. Section 403.6
of the 2010 Standards specifies that where
handrails are provided along walkways that
are not ramps, they shall comply with certain
technical requirements. The change is
expected to have minimal impact.
23. Revise the heading to Appendix C
to read as follows:
■
Appendix C to Part 36—Guidance on ADA
Regulation on Nondiscrimination on the
Basis of Disability by Public
Accommodations and in Commercial
Facilities originally published on July 26,
1991.
24. Revise the heading to Appendix D
to read as follows:
■
Appendix D to Part 36—1991 Standards for
Accessible Design as Originally Published on
July 26, 1991.
Dated: July 23, 2010.
Eric H. Holder, Jr.,
Attorney General.
[FR Doc. 2010–21824 Filed 9–14–10; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 4410–13–P
E:\FR\FM\15SER2.SGM
15SER2
Agencies
[Federal Register Volume 75, Number 178 (Wednesday, September 15, 2010)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 56236-56358]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Printing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 2010-21824]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
DEPARTMENT OF JUSTICE
28 CFR Part 36
[CRT Docket No. 106; AG Order No. 3181-2010]
RIN 1190-AA44
Nondiscrimination on the Basis of Disability by Public
Accommodations and in Commercial Facilities
AGENCY: Department of Justice, Civil Rights Division.
ACTION: Final rule.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: This final rule revises the Department of Justice (Department)
regulation that implements title III of the Americans with Disabilities
Act
[[Page 56237]]
(ADA), relating to nondiscrimination on the basis of disability by
public accommodations and in commercial facilities. The Department is
issuing this final rule in order to adopt enforceable accessibility
standards under the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA) that
are consistent with the minimum guidelines and requirements issued by
the Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board, and to
update or amend certain provisions of the title III regulation so that
they comport with the Department's legal and practical experiences in
enforcing the ADA since 1991. Concurrently with the publication of the
final rule for title III, the Department is publishing a final rule
amending its ADA title II regulation, which covers nondiscrimination on
the basis of disability in State and local government services.
DATES: Effective Date: March 15, 2011.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Janet L. Blizard, Deputy Chief, or
Christina Galindo-Walsh, Attorney Advisor, Disability Rights Section,
Civil Rights Division, U.S. Department of Justice, at (202) 307-0663
(voice or TTY). This is not a toll-free number. Information may also be
obtained from the Department's toll-free ADA Information Line at (800)
514-0301 (voice) or (800) 514-0383 (TTY).
This rule is also available in an accessible format on the ADA Home
Page at https://www.ada.gov. You may obtain copies of this rule in large
print or on computer disk by calling the ADA Information Line listed
above.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
The Roles of the Access Board and the Department of Justice
The Access Board was established by section 502 of the
Rehabilitation Act of 1973. 29 U.S.C. 792. The Board consists of 13
public members appointed by the President, the majority of whom must be
individuals with disabilities, and the heads of 12 Federal departments
and agencies specified by statute, including the heads of the
Department of Justice and the Department of Transportation (DOT).
Originally, the Access Board was established to develop and maintain
accessibility guidelines for facilities designed, constructed, altered,
or leased with Federal dollars under the Architectural Barriers Act of
1968 (ABA). 42 U.S.C. 4151 et seq. The passage of the ADA expanded the
Access Board's responsibilities.
The ADA requires the Access Board to ``issue minimum guidelines
that shall supplement the existing Minimum Guidelines and Requirements
for Accessible Design for purposes of subchapters II and III of this
chapter * * * to ensure that buildings, facilities, rail passenger
cars, and vehicles are accessible, in terms of architecture and design,
transportation, and communication, to individuals with disabilities.''
42 U.S.C. 12204. The ADA requires the Department to issue regulations
that include enforceable accessibility standards applicable to
facilities subject to title II or title III that are consistent with
the ``minimum guidelines'' issued by the Access Board, 42 U.S.C.
12134(c), 12186(c), but vests in the Attorney General sole
responsibility for the promulgation of those standards that fall within
the Department's jurisdiction and enforcement of the regulations.
The ADA also requires the Department to develop regulations with
respect to existing facilities subject to title II (Subtitle A) and
title III. How and to what extent the Access Board's guidelines are
used with respect to the barrier removal requirement applicable to
existing facilities under title III of the ADA and to the provision of
program accessibility under title II of the ADA are solely within the
discretion of the Department.
Enactment of the ADA and Issuance of the 1991 Regulations
On July 26, 1990, President George H.W. Bush signed into law the
ADA, a comprehensive civil rights law prohibiting discrimination on the
basis of disability.\1\ The ADA broadly protects the rights of
individuals with disabilities in employment, access to State and local
government services, places of public accommodation, transportation,
and other important areas of American life. The ADA also requires newly
designed and constructed or altered State and local government
facilities, public accommodations, and commercial facilities to be
readily accessible to and usable by individuals with disabilities. 42
U.S.C. 12101 et seq. Section 306(a) of the ADA directs the Secretary of
Transportation to issue regulations for demand responsive or fixed
route systems operated by private entities not primarily engaged in the
business of transporting people (sections 302(b)(2)(B) and (C)) and for
private entities that are primarily engaged in the business of
transporting people (section 304). See 42 U.S.C. 12182(b), 12184,
12186(a). Section 306(b) directs the Attorney General to promulgate
regulations to carry out the provisions of the rest of title III. 42
U.S.C. 12186(b).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ On September 25, 2008, President George W. Bush signed into
law the Americans with Disabilities Amendments Act of 2008 (ADA
Amendments Act), Public Law 110-325. The ADA Amendments Act amended
the ADA definition of disability to clarify its coverage of persons
with disabilities and to provide guidance on the application of the
definition. This final rule does not contain regulatory language
implementing the ADA Amendments Act. The Department intends to
publish a supplemental rule to amend the regulatory definition of
``disability'' to implement the changes mandated by that law.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Title II applies to State and local government entities, and, in
Subtitle A, protects qualified individuals with disabilities from
discrimination on the basis of disability in services, programs, and
activities provided by State and local government entities. Title II
extends the prohibition on discrimination established by section 504 of
the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, 29 U.S.C. 794 (section
504), to all activities of State and local governments regardless of
whether these entities receive Federal financial assistance. 42 U.S.C.
12131-65.
Title III, which this rule addresses, prohibits discrimination on
the basis of disability in the activities of places of public
accommodation (businesses that are generally open to the public and
that fall into one of 12 categories listed in the ADA, such as
restaurants, movie theaters, schools, day care facilities, recreation
facilities, and doctors' offices) and requires newly constructed or
altered places of public accommodation--as well as commercial
facilities (privately owned, nonresidential facilities such as
factories, warehouses, or office buildings)--to comply with the ADA
Standards. 42 U.S.C. 12181-89.
On July 26, 1991, the Department issued rules implementing title II
and title III, which are codified at 28 CFR part 35 (title II) and part
36 (title III). Appendix A of the 1991 title III regulation, which is
republished as Appendix D to 28 CFR part 36, contains the ADA Standards
for Accessible Design (1991 Standards), which were based upon the
version of the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines
(1991 ADAAG) published by the Access Board on the same date. Under the
Department's 1991 title III regulation, places of public accommodation
and commercial facilities currently are required to comply with the
1991 Standards with respect to newly constructed or altered facilities.
The Access Board's publication of the 2004 ADA/ABA Guidelines was
the culmination of a long-term effort to facilitate ADA compliance by
eliminating, to the extent possible, inconsistencies among Federal
accessibility requirements and between
[[Page 56238]]
Federal accessibility requirements and State and local building codes.
In support of this effort, the Department is amending its regulation
implementing title III and adopting standards consistent with ADA
Chapter 1, ADA Chapter 2, and Chapters 3 through 10 of the 2004 ADA/ABA
Guidelines. The Department is also amending its title II regulation,
which prohibits discrimination on the basis of disability in State and
local government services, concurrently with the publication of this
rule in this issue of the Federal Register.
Development of the 2004 ADA/ABA Guidelines
In 1994, the Access Board began the process of updating the 1991
ADAAG by establishing an advisory committee composed of members of the
design and construction industry, the building code community, and
State and local government entities, as well as individuals with
disabilities. In 1998, the Access Board added specific guidelines on
State and local government facilities, 63 FR 2000 (Jan. 13, 1998), and
building elements designed for use by children, 63 FR 2060 (Jan. 13,
1998). In 1999, based largely on the report and recommendations of the
advisory committee, the Access Board issued a notice of proposed
rulemaking (NPRM) to update and revise its ADA and ABA Accessibility
Guidelines. See 64 FR 62248 (Nov. 16, 1999). In 2000, the Access Board
added specific guidelines on play areas. See 65 FR 62498 (Oct. 18,
2000). The Access Board released an interim draft of its guidelines to
the public on April 2, 2002, 67 FR 15509, in order to provide an
opportunity for entities with model codes to consider amendments that
would promote further harmonization. In September of 2002, the Access
Board set forth specific guidelines on recreation facilities. 67 FR
56352 (Sept. 3, 2002).
By the date of its final publication on July 23, 2004, the 2004
ADA/ABA Guidelines had been the subject of extraordinary review and
public participation. The Access Board received more than 2,500
comments from individuals with disabilities, affected industries, State
and local governments, and others. The Access Board provided further
opportunity for participation by holding public hearings.
The Department was involved extensively in the development of the
2004 ADA/ABA Guidelines. As a Federal member of the Access Board, the
Attorney General's representative voted to approve the revised
guidelines. ADA Chapter 1 and ADA Chapter 2 of the 2004 ADA/ABA
Guidelines provide scoping requirements for facilities subject to the
ADA; ``scoping'' is a term used in the 2004 ADA/ABA Guidelines to
describe requirements that prescribe which elements and spaces--and, in
some cases, how many--must comply with the technical specifications.
ABA Chapter 1 and ABA Chapter 2 provide scoping requirements for
facilities subject to the ABA (i.e., facilities designed, built,
altered, or leased with Federal funds). Chapters 3 through 10 of the
2004 ADA/ABA Guidelines provide uniform technical specifications for
facilities subject to either the ADA or the ABA. This revised format is
designed to eliminate unintended conflicts between the two sets of
Federal accessibility standards and to minimize conflicts between the
Federal regulations and the model codes that form the basis of many
State and local building codes. For the purposes of this final rule,
the Department will refer to ADA Chapter 1, ADA Chapter 2, and Chapters
3 through 10 of the 2004 ADA/ABA Guidelines as the 2004 ADAAG.
These amendments to the 1991 ADAAG have not been adopted previously
by the Department as ADA Standards. Through this rule, the Department
is adopting revised ADA Standards consistent with the 2004 ADAAG,
including all of the amendments to the 1991 ADAAG since 1998. For the
purposes of this part, the Department's revised standards are entitled
``The 2010 Standards for Accessible Design'' and consist of the 2004
ADAAG and the requirements contained in subpart D of 28 CFR part 36.
Because the Department has adopted the 2004 ADAAG as part of its title
II and title III regulations, once the Department's final rules become
effective, the 2004 ADAAG will have legal effect with respect to the
Department's title II and title III regulations and will cease to be
mere guidance for those areas regulated by the Department. In 2006, DOT
adopted the 2004 ADAAG. With respect to those areas regulated by DOT,
these guidelines, as adopted by DOT, have had legal effect since 2006.
Under this regulation, the Department of Justice covers passenger
vessels operated by private entities not primarily engaged in the
business of transporting people with respect to the provision of goods
and services of a public accommodation on the vessel. For example, a
vessel operator whose vessel departs from Point A, takes passengers on
a recreational trip, and returns passengers to Point A without ever
providing for disembarkation at a Point B (e.g., a dinner or harbor
cruise, a fishing charter) is a public accommodation operated by a
private entity not primarily engaged in the business of transporting
people. This regulation covers those aspects of the vessel's operation
relating to the use and enjoyment of the public accommodation,
including, for example, the boarding process, safety policies,
accessible routes on the vessel, and the provision of effective
communication. Persons with complaints or concerns about discrimination
on the basis of disability by vessel operators who are private entities
not primarily engaged in the business of transporting people, or
questions about how this regulation applies to such operators and
vessels, should contact the Department of Justice.
Vessels operated by private entities primarily engaged in the
business of transporting people and that provide the goods and services
of a public accommodation are covered by this regulation and the
Department of Transportation's passenger vessel rule, 49 CFR part 39. A
vessel operator whose vessel takes passengers from Point A to Point B
(e.g., a cruise ship that sails from Miami to one or more Caribbean
islands, a private ferry boat between two points on either side of a
river or bay, a water taxi between two points in an urban area) is most
likely a private entity primarily engaged in the business of
transporting people. Persons with questions about how this regulation
applies to such operators and vessels may contact the Department of
Justice or the Department of Transportation for guidance or further
information. However, the Department of Justice has enforcement
authority for all private entities under title III of the ADA, so
individuals with complaints about noncompliance with part 39 should
provide those complaints to the Department of Justice.
The provisions of this rule and 49 CFR part 39 are intended to be
substantively consistent with one another. Consequently, in
interpreting the application of this rule to vessel operators who are
private entities not primarily engaged in the business of transporting
people, the Department of Justice views the obligations of those vessel
operators as being similar to those of private entities primarily
engaged in the business of transporting people under the provisions of
49 CFR part 39.
The Department's Rulemaking History
The Department published an advance notice of proposed rulemaking
(ANPRM) on September 30, 2004, 69 FR
[[Page 56239]]
58768, for two reasons: (1) To begin the process of adopting the 2004
ADAAG by soliciting public input on issues relating to the potential
application of the Access Board's revisions once the Department adopts
them as revised standards; and (2) to request background information
that would assist the Department in preparing a regulatory analysis
under the guidance provided in Office of Management and Budget (OMB)
Circular A-4 sections D (Analytical Approaches) and E (Identifying and
Measuring Benefits and Costs) (Sept. 17, 2003), available at https://www.whitehouse.gov/OMB/circulars/a004/a-4.pdf (last visited June 24,
2010). While underscoring that the Department, as a member of the
Access Board, already had reviewed comments provided to the Access
Board during its development of the 2004 ADAAG, the Department
specifically requested public comment on the potential application of
the 2004 ADAAG to existing facilities. The extent to which the 2004
ADAAG is used with respect to the barrier removal requirement
applicable to existing facilities under title III (as well as with
respect to the program access requirement in title II) is within the
sole discretion of the Department. The ANPRM dealt with the
Department's responsibilities under both title II and title III.
The public response to the ANPRM was substantial. The Department
extended the comment deadline by four months at the public's request.
70 FR 2992 (Jan. 19, 2005). By the end of the extended comment period,
the Department had received more than 900 comments covering a broad
range of issues. Many of the commenters responded to questions posed
specifically by the Department, including questions regarding the
Department's application of the 2004 ADAAG once adopted by the
Department and the Department's regulatory assessment of the costs and
benefits of particular elements. Many other commenters addressed areas
of desired regulation or of particular concern.
To enhance accessibility strides made since the enactment of the
ADA, commenters asked the Department to focus on previously unregulated
areas, such as ticketing in assembly areas; reservations for hotel
rooms, rental cars, and boat slips; and captioning. They also asked for
clarification on some issues in the 1991 regulations, such as the
requirements regarding service animals. Other commenters dealt with
specific requirements in the 2004 ADAAG or responded to questions
regarding elements scoped for the first time in the 2004 ADAAG,
including recreation facilities and play areas. Commenters also
provided some information on how to assess the cost of elements in
small facilities, office buildings, hotels and motels, assembly areas,
hospitals and long-term care facilities, residential units, recreation
facilities, and play areas. Still other commenters addressed the
effective date of the proposed standards, the triggering event by which
the effective date is calculated for new construction, and variations
on a safe harbor that would excuse elements built in compliance with
the 1991 Standards from compliance with the proposed standards.
After careful consideration of the public comments in response to
the ANPRM, on June 17, 2008, the Department published an NPRM covering
title III. 73 FR 34508. The Department also published an NPRM on that
day covering title II. 73 FR 34466. The NPRMs addressed the issues
raised in the public's comments to the ANPRM and sought additional
comment, generally and in specific areas, such as the Department's
adoption of the 2004 ADAAG, the Department's regulatory assessment of
the costs and benefits of the rule, its updates and amendments of
certain provisions of the existing title II and III regulations, and
areas that were in need of additional clarification or specificity.
A public hearing was held on July 15, 2008, in Washington, DC.
Forty-five individuals testified in person or by phone. The hearing was
streamed live over the Internet. By the end of the 60-day comment
period, the Department had received 4,435 comments addressing a broad
range of issues, many of which were common to the title II and title
III NPRMs, from representatives of businesses and industries, State and
local government agencies, disability advocacy organizations, and
private individuals.
The Department notes that this rulemaking was unusual in that much
of the proposed regulatory text and many of the questions asked across
titles II and III were the same. Consequently, many of the commenters
did not provide separate sets of documents for the proposed title II
and title III rules, and in many instances, the commenters did not
specify which title was being commented upon. As a result, where
comments could be read to apply to both titles II and III, the
Department included them in the comments and responses for each final
rule.
Most of the commenters responded to questions posed specifically by
the Department, including what were the most appropriate definitions
for terms such as ``wheelchair,'' ``mobility device,'' and ``service
animal''; how to quantify various benefits that are difficult to
monetize; what requirements to adopt for ticketing and assembly areas;
whether to adopt safe harbors for small businesses; and how best to
regulate captioning. Some comments addressed specific requirements in
the 2004 ADAAG or responded to questions regarding elements scoped for
the first time in the 2004 ADAAG, including recreation facilities and
play areas. Other comments responded to questions posed by the
Department concerning certain specific requirements in the 2004 ADAAG.
Relationship to Other Laws
The Department of Justice regulation implementing title III, 28 CFR
36.103, provides the following:
(a) Rule of interpretation. Except as otherwise provided in this
part, this part shall not be construed to apply a lesser standard than
the standards applied under title V of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973
(29 U.S.C. 791) or the regulations issued by Federal agencies pursuant
to that title.
(b) Section 504. This part does not affect the obligations of a
recipient of Federal financial assistance to comply with the
requirements of section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (29
U.S.C. 794) and regulations issued by Federal agencies implementing
section 504.
(c) Other laws. This part does not invalidate or limit the
remedies, rights, and procedures of any other Federal, State, or local
laws (including State common law) that provide greater or equal
protection for the rights of individuals with disabilities or
individuals associated with them.
These provisions remain unchanged by the final rule. The Department
recognizes that public accommodations subject to title III of the ADA
may also be subject to title I of the ADA, which prohibits
discrimination on the basis of disability in employment; section 504 of
the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 and other Federal statutes that prohibit
discrimination on the basis of disability in the programs and
activities of recipients of Federal financial assistance; and other
Federal statutes such as the Air Carrier Access Act (ACAA), 49 U.S.C.
41705 et seq., and the Fair Housing Act (FHAct), 42 U.S.C. 3601 et seq.
Compliance with the Department's title II and title III regulations
does not ensure compliance with other Federal statutes.
Public accommodations that are subject to the ADA as well as other
Federal disability discrimination laws
[[Page 56240]]
must be aware of the requirements of all applicable laws and must
comply with these laws and their implementing regulations. Although in
many cases similar provisions of different statutes are interpreted to
impose similar requirements, there are circumstances in which similar
provisions are applied differently because of the nature of the covered
entity or activity, or because of distinctions between the statutes.
For example, emotional support animals that do not qualify as service
animals under the Department's title III regulations may nevertheless
qualify as permitted reasonable accommodations for persons with
disabilities under the FHAct and the ACAA. See, e.g., Overlook Mutual
Homes, Inc. v. Spencer, 666 F. Supp. 2d 850 (S.D. Ohio 2009). Public
accommodations that operate housing facilities must ensure that they
apply the reasonable accommodation requirements of the FHAct in
determining whether to allow a particular animal needed by a person
with a disability into housing and may not use the ADA definition as a
justification for reducing their FHAct obligations. In addition,
nothing in the ADA prevents a public accommodation subject to one
statute from modifying its policies and providing greater access in
order to assist individuals with disabilities in achieving access to
entities subject to other Federal statutes. For example, a quick
service restaurant at an airport is, as a public accommodation, subject
to the title III requirements, not to the ACAA requirements.
Conversely, an air carrier that flies in and out of the same airport is
required to comply with the ACAA, but is not covered by title III of
the ADA. If a particular animal is a service animal for purposes of the
ACAA and is thus allowed on an airplane, but is not a service animal
for purposes of the ADA, nothing in the ADA prohibits an airport
restaurant from allowing a ticketed passenger with a disability who is
traveling with a service animal that meets the ACAA's definition of a
service animal to bring that animal into the facility even though under
the ADA's definition of service animal the animal lawfully could be
excluded.
Organization of This Rule
Throughout this rule, the original ADA Standards, which are
republished as Appendix D to 28 CFR part 36, will be referred to as the
``1991 Standards.'' The original title III regulation, codified at 28
CFR part 36 (2009), will be referred to as the ``1991 regulation'' or
the ``1991 title III regulation.'' ADA Chapter 1, ADA Chapter 2, and
Chapters 3 through 10 of the 2004 ADA/ABA Guidelines, 36 CFR part 1191,
app. B and D (2009), will be referred to as the ``2004 ADAAG.'' The
Department's Notice of Proposed Rulemaking, 73 FR 34508 (June 17,
2008), will be referred to as the ``NPRM.'' As noted above, the 2004
ADAAG, taken together with the requirements contained in subpart D of
28 CFR part 36 (New Construction and Alterations) of the final rule,
will be referred to as the ``2010 Standards.'' The amendments made to
the 1991 title III regulation and the adoption of the 2004 ADAAG, taken
together, will be referred to as the ``final rule.''
In performing the required periodic review of its existing
regulation, the Department has reviewed the title III regulation
section by section, and, as a result, has made several clarifications
and amendments in this rule. Appendix A of the final rule, ``Guidance
on Revisions to ADA Regulation on Nondiscrimination on the Basis of
Disability by Public Accommodations and Commercial Facilities,''
codified as Appendix A to 28 CFR part 36, provides the Department's
response to comments and its explanations of the changes to the
regulation. The section entitled ``Section-by-Section Analysis and
Response to Comments'' in Appendix A provides a detailed discussion of
the changes to the title III regulation. The Section-by-Section
Analysis follows the order of the 1991 title III regulation, except
that regulatory sections that remain unchanged are not referenced. The
discussion within each section explains the changes and the reasoning
behind them, as well as the Department's response to related public
comments. Subject areas that deal with more than one section of the
regulation include references to the related sections, where
appropriate. The Section-by-Section Analysis also discusses many of the
questions asked by the Department for specific public response. The
section of Appendix A entitled ``Other Issues'' discusses public
comment on several issues of concern to the Department that were the
subject of questions that are not specifically addressed in the
Section-by-Section Analysis.
The Department's description of the 2010 Standards, as well as a
discussion of the public comments on specific sections of the 2004
ADAAG, is found in Appendix B of this final rule, ``Analysis and
Commentary on the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design,'' codified
as Appendix B to 28 CFR part 36.
The provisions of this rule generally take effect six months from
its publication in the Federal Register. The Department has determined,
however, that compliance with the requirements related to new
construction and alterations and reservations at a place of lodging
shall not be required until 18 months from the publication date of this
rule. These exceptions are set forth in Sec. Sec. 36.406(a) and
36.302(e)(3), respectively, and are discussed in greater detail in
Appendix A. See discussions in Appendix A entitled ``Section 36.406
Standards for New Construction and Alterations'' and ``Section
36.302(e) Hotel Reservations.''
This final rule only addresses issues that were identified in the
NPRM as subjects the Department intended to regulate through this
rulemaking proceeding. Because the Department indicated in the NPRM
that it did not intend to regulate certain areas, including equipment
and furniture, accessible golf cars, and movie captioning and video
description, as part of this rulemaking proceeding, the Department
believes it would be appropriate to solicit more public comment about
these areas prior to making them the subject of a rulemaking. The
Department intends to engage in additional rulemaking in the near
future addressing accessibility in these areas and others, including
next generation 9-1-1 and accessibility of Web sites operated by
covered public entities and public accommodations.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:
Regulatory Process Matters (SBREFA, Regulatory Flexibility Act, and
Executive Orders)
The Department must provide two types of assessments as part of its
final rule: An analysis of the costs and benefits of adopting the
changes contained in this rule, and a periodic review of its existing
regulations to consider their impact on small entities, including small
businesses, small nonprofit organizations, and small governmental
jurisdictions. See E.O. 12866, 58 FR 51735, 3 CFR, 1994 Comp., p. 638,
as amended; Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980 (RFA), 5 U.S.C. 601 et
seq., as amended by the Small Business Regulatory Enforcement Fairness
Act of 1996 (SBREFA), 5 U.S.C. 610(a); OMB Circular A-4, available at
https://www.whitehouse.gov/OMB/circulars/a004/a-4.pdf (last visited June
24, 2010); E.O. 13272, 67 FR 53461, 3 CFR, 2003 Comp., p. 247.
In the NPRM, the Department kept open the possibility that, if
warranted by public comments received on an issue raised by the 2004
ADAAG or by the results of the Department's Initial Regulatory Impact
Analysis (Initial RIA), available at https://www.ada.gov/NPRM2008/ria.htm, showing that the
[[Page 56241]]
likely costs of making a particular feature or facility accessible were
disproportionate to the benefits (including both monetized and non-
monetized benefits) to persons with disabilities, the Attorney General,
as a member of the Access Board, could return the issue to the Access
Board for further consideration. After careful consideration, the
Department has determined that it is unnecessary to return any issues
to the Access Board for additional consideration.
Executive Order 12866
This rule has been reviewed by the Office of Management and Budget
(OMB) under Executive Order 12866. The Department has evaluated its
existing regulations for title II and title III section by section, and
many of the provisions in the final rule for both titles reflect its
efforts to mitigate any negative effects on small entities. A Final
Regulatory Impact Analysis (Final RIA or RIA) was prepared by the
Department's contractor, HDR[bond]HLB Decision Economics, Inc. (HDR).
In accordance with Executive Order 12866, as amended, and OMB Circular
A-4, the Department has reviewed and considered the Final RIA and has
accepted the results of this analysis as its assessment of the benefits
and costs of the final rules.
Executive Order 12866 refers explicitly not only to monetizable
costs and benefits but also to ``distributive impacts'' and ``equity,''
see E.O. 12866, section 1(a), and it is important to recognize that the
ADA is intended to provide important benefits that are distributional
and equitable in character. The ADA states, ``[i]t is the purpose of
this [Act] (1) to provide a clear and comprehensive national mandate
for the elimination of discrimination against individuals with
disabilities; [and] (2) to provide clear, strong, consistent,
enforceable standards addressing discrimination against individuals
with disabilities[.]'' 42 U.S.C. 12101(b). Many of the benefits of this
rule stem from the provision of such standards, which will promote
inclusion, reduce stigma and potential embarrassment, and combat
isolation, segregation, and second-class citizenship of individuals
with disabilities. Some of these benefits are, in the words of
Executive Order 12866, ``difficult to quantify, but nevertheless
essential to consider.'' E.O. 12866, section 1(a). The Department has
considered such benefits here.
Final Regulatory Impact Analysis
The Final RIA embodies a comprehensive benefit-cost analysis of the
final rules for both title II and title III and assesses the
incremental benefits and costs of the 2010 Standards relative to a
primary baseline scenario (1991 Standards). In addition, the Department
conducted additional research and analyses for requirements having the
highest negative net present values under the primary baseline
scenario. This approach was taken because, while the 1991 Standards are
the only uniform set of accessibility standards that apply to public
accommodations, commercial facilities, and State and local government
facilities nationwide, it is also understood that many State and local
jurisdictions have already adopted IBC/ANSI model code provisions that
mirror those in the 2004 ADAAG. The assessments based on this approach
assume that covered entities currently implementing codes that mirror
the 2004 ADAAG will not need to modify their code requirements once the
rules are finalized. They also assume that, even without the final
rules, the current level of compliance would be unchanged. The Final
RIA contains specific information, including data in chart form,
detailing which States have already adopted the accessibility standards
for this subset of six requirements. The Department believes that the
estimates resulting from this approach represent a reasonable upper and
lower measure of the likely effects these requirements will have that
the Department was able to quantify and monetize.
The Final RIA estimates the benefits and costs for all new
(referred to as ``supplemental'') requirements and revised requirements
across all types of newly constructed and existing facilities. The
Final RIA also incorporates a sophisticated risk analysis process that
quantifies the inherent uncertainties in estimating costs and benefits
and then assesses (through computer simulations) the relative impact of
these factors when varied simultaneously. A copy of the Final RIA will
be made available online for public review on the Department's ADA Home
Page (https://www.ada.gov).
From an economic perspective (as specified in OMB Circular A-B4),
the results of the Final RIA demonstrate that the Department's final
rules increase social resources and thus represent a public good
because monetized benefits exceed monetized costs--that is, the
regulations have a positive net present value (NPV). Indeed, under
every scenario assessed in the Final RIA, the final rules have a
positive NPV. The Final RIA's first scenario examines the incremental
impact of the final rules using the ``main'' set of assumptions (i.e.,
assuming a primary baseline (1991 Standards), that the safe harbor
applies, and that for title III entities barrier removal is readily
achievable for 50 percent of elements subject to supplemental
requirements).
Expected Impact of the Rules 2
[In billions]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Total
Discount rate Expected expected PV expected PV
NPV (benefits) (costs)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
3%............................... $40.4 $66.2 $25.8
7................................ 9.3 22.0 12.8
------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\2\ The analysis assumes these regulations will be in force for
15 years. Incremental costs and benefits are calculated for all
construction, alterations, and barrier removal that is expected to
occur during these 15 years. The analysis also assumes that any new
or revised ADA rules enacted 15 years from now will include a safe
harbor provision. Thus, any facilities constructed in year 14 of the
final rules are assumed to continue to generate benefits to users,
and to incur any operating or replacement costs for the life of
these buildings, which is assumed to be 40 years.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Under this set of assumptions, the final rules have an expected NPV
of $9.3 billion (7 percent discount rate) and $40.4 billion (3 percent
discount rate). See Final RIA, table ES-1 & figure ES-2.
Water Closet Clearances
The Department gave careful consideration to the costs and benefits
of its adoption of the standards relating to water closet clearances in
single-user toilet rooms. The primary effect of the Department's
proposed final rules governing water closet clearances in single-user
toilet rooms with in-swinging and out-swinging doors is to allow
sufficient room for ``side'' or ``parallel'' methods of transferring
from a wheelchair to a toilet. Under the current 1991 Standards, the
requisite clearance space in single-user toilet rooms between and
around the toilet and the lavatory does not permit these methods of
transfer. Side or parallel transfers are used by large numbers of
persons who use wheelchairs and are regularly taught in rehabilitation
and occupational therapy. Currently, persons who use side or parallel
transfer methods from their wheelchairs are faced with a stark choice
at establishments with single-user toilet rooms--i.e., patronize the
establishment but run the risk of needing assistance when using the
restroom, travel with someone who would be able to provide assistance
in toileting, or forgo the visit entirely. The revised water closet
clearance regulations would make single-user toilet rooms accessible to
all persons
[[Page 56242]]
who use wheelchairs, not just those with the physical strength,
balance, and dexterity and the training to use a front-transfer method.
Single-user toilet rooms are located in a wide variety of public and
private facilities, including restaurants, fast-food establishments,
schools, retail stores, parks, sports stadiums, and hospitals. Final
promulgation of these requirements might thus, for example, enable a
person who uses a side or parallel transfer method to use the restroom
(or use the restroom independently) at his or her local coffee shop for
the first time.
Because of the complex nature of its cost-benefit analysis, the
Department is providing ``plain language'' descriptions of the benefits
calculations for the two revised requirements with the highest
estimated total costs: Water closet clearance in single-user toilet
rooms with out-swinging doors (RIA Req. 28) (section 604.3 of
the 2010 Standards) and water closet clearance in single-user toilet
rooms with in-swinging doors (RIA Req. 32) (sections 604.3 and
603.2.3 Exception 2 of the 2010 Standards). Since many of the concepts
and calculations in the Final RIA are highly technical, it is hoped
that, by providing ``lay'' descriptions of how benefits are monetized
for an illustrative set of requirements, the Final RIA will be more
transparent and afford readers a more complete understanding of the
benefits model generally. Because of the widespread adoption of the
water closet clearance standards in existing State and local building
codes, the following calculations use the IBC/ANSI baseline.
General description of monetized benefits for water closet
clearance in single-user toilet rooms--out-swinging doors (Req. #28).
In order to assess monetized benefits for the requirement covering
water closet clearances in single-user toilet rooms with out-swinging
doors, a determination needed to be made concerning the population of
users with disabilities who would likely benefit from this revised
standard. Based on input received from a panel of experts jointly
convened by HDR and the Department to discuss benefits-related
estimates and assumptions used in the RIA model, it was assumed that
accessibility changes brought about by this requirement would benefit
persons with any type of ambulatory (i.e., mobility-related)
disability, such as persons who use wheelchairs, walkers, or braces.
Recent census figures estimate that about 11.9 percent of Americans
ages 15 and older have an ambulatory disability, or about 35 million
people. This expert panel also estimated that single-user toilet rooms
with out-swinging doors would be used slightly less than once every
other visit to a facility with such toilet rooms covered by the final
rules (or, viewed another way, about once every two hours spent at a
covered facility assumed to have one or more single-user toilet rooms
with out-swinging doors) by an individual with an ambulatory
disability. The expert panel further estimated that, for such
individuals, the revised requirement would result in an average time
savings of about five and a half minutes when using the restroom. This
time savings is due to the revised water closet clearance standard,
which permits, among other things, greater flexibility in terms of
access to the toilet by parallel or side transfer, thereby perhaps
reducing the wait for another person to assist with toileting and the
need to twist or struggle to access the toilet independently. Based on
average hourly wage rates compiled by the U.S. Department of Labor, the
time savings for Req. 28 is valued at just under $10 per hour.
For public and private facilities covered by the final rules, it is
estimated that there are currently about 11 million single-user toilet
rooms with out-swinging doors. The majority of these types of single-
user toilet rooms, nearly 7 million, are assumed to be located at
``Indoor Service Establishments,'' a broad facility group that
encompasses various types of indoor retail stores such as bakeries,
grocery stores, clothing stores, and hardware stores. Based on
construction industry data, it was estimated that approximately 3
percent of existing single-user toilet rooms with out-swinging doors
would be altered each year, and that the number of newly constructed
facilities with these types of toilet rooms would increase at the rate
of about 1 percent each year. However, due to the widespread adoption
at the State and local level of model code provisions that mirror Req.
28, it is further understood that about half of all existing
facilities assumed to have single-user toilet rooms with out-swinging
doors already are covered by State or local building codes that require
equivalent water closet clearances. Due to the general element-by-
element safe harbor provision in the final rules, no unaltered single-
user toilet rooms that comply with the current 1991 Standards will be
required to retrofit to meet the revised clearance requirements in the
final rules.
With respect to new construction, it is assumed that each single-
user toilet room with an out-swinging door will last the life of the
building, about 40 years. For alterations, the amount of time such a
toilet room will be used depends upon the remaining life of the
building (i.e., a period of time between 1 and 39 years).
Summing up monetized benefits to users with disabilities across all
types of public and private facilities covered by the final rules, and
assuming 46 percent of covered facilities nationwide are located in
jurisdictions that have adopted the relevant equivalent IBC/ANSI model
code provisions, it is expected that the revised requirement for water
closet clearance in single-user toilet rooms with out-swinging doors
will result in net benefits of approximately $900 million over the life
of these regulations.
General description of monetized benefits for water closet
clearance in single-user toilet rooms--in-swinging doors (Req. # 32).
For the water closet clearance in single-user toilet rooms with the in-
swinging door requirement (Req. 32), the expert panel
determined that the primary beneficiaries would be persons who use
wheelchairs. As compared to single-user toilet rooms with out-swinging
doors, those with in-swinging doors tend to be larger (in terms of
square footage) in order to accommodate clearance for the in-swinging
door and, thus, are already likely to have adequate clear floor space
for persons with disabilities who use other types of mobility aids such
as walkers and crutches.
The expert benefits panel estimated that single-user toilet rooms
with in-swinging doors are used less frequently on average--about once
every 20 visits to a facility with such a toilet room by a person who
uses a wheelchair--than their counterpart toilet rooms with out-
swinging doors. This panel also determined that, on average, each user
would realize a time savings of about 9 minutes as a result of the
enhanced clearances required by this revised standard.
The RIA estimates that there are about 4 million single-user toilet
rooms with in-swinging doors in existing facilities. About half of the
single-user toilet rooms with in-swinging doors are assumed to be
located in single-level stores, and about a quarter of them are assumed
to be located in restaurants. Based on construction industry data, it
was estimated that approximately 3 percent of existing single-user
toilet rooms with in-swinging doors would be altered each year, and
that the number of newly constructed facilities with these types of
toilet rooms would increase at the rate of about 1 percent each year.
However, due to the widespread adoption at the State and local level of
model code provisions that mirror Req. 32, it is further
understood that slightly more than 70 percent of all
[[Page 56243]]
existing facilities assumed to have single-user toilet rooms with in-
swinging doors already are covered by State or local building codes
that require equivalent water closet clearances. Due to the general
element-by-element safe harbor provision in the final rules, no
unaltered single-user toilet rooms that comply with the current 1991
Standards will be required to retrofit to meet the revised clearance
requirements in the final rules.
Similar to the assumptions for Req. 28, it is assumed that
newly constructed single-user toilet rooms with in-swinging doors will
last the life of the building, about 40 years. For alterations, the
amount of time such a toilet room will be used depends upon the
remaining life of the building (i.e., a period of time between 1 and 39
years). Over this time period, the total estimated value of benefits to
users of water closets with in-swinging doors from the time they will
save and decreased discomfort they will experience is nearly $12
million.
Additional benefits of water closet clearance standards. The
standards requiring sufficient space in single-user toilet rooms for a
wheelchair user to effect a side or parallel transfer are among the
most costly (in monetary terms) of the new provisions in the Access
Board's guidelines that the Department adopts in this rule--but also,
the Department believes, one of the most beneficial in non-monetary
terms. Although the monetized costs of these requirements substantially
exceed the monetized benefits, the additional benefits that persons
with disabilities will derive from greater safety, enhanced
independence, and the avoidance of stigma and humiliation--benefits
that the Department's economic model could not put in monetary terms--
are, in the Department's experience and considered judgment, likely to
be quite high. Wheelchair users, including veterans returning from our
Nation's wars with disabilities, are taught to transfer onto toilets
from the side. Side transfers are the safest, most efficient, and most
independence-promoting way for wheelchair users to get onto the toilet.
The opportunity to effect a side transfer will often obviate the need
for a wheelchair user or individual with another type of mobility
impairment to obtain the assistance of another person to engage in what
is, for most people, among the most private of activities. Executive
Order 12866 refers explicitly not only to monetizable costs and
benefits but also to ``distributive impacts'' and ``equity,'' see E.O.
12866, section 1(a), and it is important to recognize that the ADA is
intended to provide important benefits that are distributional and
equitable in character. These water closet clearance provisions will
have non-monetized benefits that promote equal access and equal
opportunity for individuals with disabilities, and will further the
ADA's purpose of providing ``a clear and comprehensive national mandate
for the elimination of discrimination against individuals with
disabilities.'' 42 U.S.C. 12101(b)(1).
The Department's calculations indicated that, in fact, people with
the relevant disabilities would have to place only a very small
monetary value on these quite substantial benefits for the costs and
benefits of these water closet clearance standards to break even. To
make these calculations, the Department separated out toilet rooms with
out-swinging doors from those with in-swinging doors, because the costs
and benefits of the respective water closet clearance requirements are
significantly different. The Department estimates that, assuming 46
percent of covered facilities nationwide are located in jurisdictions
that have adopted the relevant equivalent IBC/ANSI model code
provisions, the costs of the requirement as applied to toilet rooms
with out-swinging doors will exceed the monetized benefits by $454
million, an annualized net cost of approximately $32.6 million. But a
large number of people with disabilities will realize benefits of
independence, safety, and avoided stigma and humiliation as a result of
the requirement's application in this context. Based on the estimates
of its expert panel and its own experience, the Department believes
that both wheelchair users and people with a variety of other mobility
disabilities will benefit. The Department estimates that people with
the relevant disabilities will use a newly accessible single-user
toilet room with an out-swinging door approximately 677 million times
per year. Dividing the $32.6 million annual cost by the 677 million
annual uses, the Department concludes that for the costs and benefits
to break even in this context, people with the relevant disabilities
will have to value safety, independence, and the avoidance of stigma
and humiliation at just under 5 cents per visit. The Department
believes, based on its experience and informed judgment, that 5 cents
substantially understates the value people with the relevant
disabilities would place on these benefits in this context.
There are substantially fewer single-user toilet rooms with in-
swinging doors, and substantially fewer people with disabilities will
benefit from making those rooms accessible. While both wheelchair users
and individuals with other ambulatory disabilities will benefit from
the additional space in a room with an out-swinging door, the
Department believes, based on the estimates of its expert panel and its
own experience, that wheelchair users likely will be the primary
beneficiaries of the in-swinging door requirement. The Department
estimates that people with the relevant disabilities will use a newly
accessible single-user toilet room with an in-swinging door
approximately 8.7 million times per year. Moreover, the alteration
costs to make a single-user toilet room with an in-swinging door
accessible are substantially higher (because of the space taken up by
the door) than the equivalent costs of making a room with an out-
swinging door accessible. Thus, the Department calculates that,
assuming 72 percent of covered facilities nationwide are located in
jurisdictions that have adopted the relevant equivalent IBC/ANSI model
code provisions, the costs of applying the toilet room accessibility
standard to rooms with in-swinging doors will exceed the monetized
benefits of doing so by $266.3 million over the life of the
regulations, or approximately $19.14 million per year. Dividing the
$19.14 million annual cost by the 8.7 million annual uses, the
Department concludes that for the costs and benefits to break even in
this context, people with the relevant disabilities will have to value
safety, independence, and the avoidance of stigma and humiliation at
approximately $2.20 per visit. The Department believes, based on its
experience and informed judgment, that this figure approximates, and
probably understates, the value wheelchair users place on safety,
independence, and the avoidance of stigma and humiliation in this
context.
Alternate Scenarios
Another scenario in the Final RIA explores the incremental impact
of varying the assumptions concerning the percentage of existing
elements subject to supplemental requirements for which barrier removal
would be readily achievable. Readily achievable barrier removal rates
are modeled at 0 percent, 50 percent, and 100 percent levels. The
results of this scenario show that the expected NPV is positive for
each readily achievable barrier removal rate and that varying this
assumed rate has little impact on expected NPV. See Final RIA, figure
ES-3.
A third set of analyses in the Final RIA demonstrates the impact of
using alternate baselines based on model codes instead of the primary
baseline.
[[Page 56244]]
The IBC model codes, which have been widely adopted by State and local
jurisdictions around the country, are significant because many of the
requirements in the final rules mirror accessibility provisions in the
IBC model codes (or standards incorporated therein by reference, such
as ANSI A117.1). The actual economic impact of the Department's final
rules is, therefore, tempered by the fact that many jurisdictions
nationwide have already adopted and are enforcing portions of the final
rules--indeed, this was one of the goals underlying the Access Board's
efforts to harmonize the 2004 ADAAG Standards with the model codes.
However, capturing the economic impact of this reality poses a
difficult modeling challenge due to the variety of methods by which
States and localities have adopted the IBC/ANSI model codes (e.g., in
whole, in part, and with or without amendments), as well as the lack of
a national ``facility census'' establishing the location, type, and age
of existing ADA-covered facilities.
As a result, in the first set of alternate IBC baseline analyses,
the Final RIA assumes that all of the three IBC model codes--IBC 2000,
IBC 2003, and IBC 2006--have been fully adopted by all jurisdictions
and apply to all facilities nationwide. As with the primary baseline
scenarios examined in the Final RIA, use of these three alternate IBC
baselines results in positive expected NPVs in all cases. See Final
RIA, figure ES-4. These results also indicate that IBC 2000 and IBC
2006 respectively have the highest and lowest expected NPVs. These
results are due to changes in the make-up of the set of requirements
that is included in each alternative baseline.
Additionally, a second, more limited alternate baseline analysis in
the Final RIA uses a State-specific and requirement-specific alternate
IBC/ANSI baseline in order to demonstrate the likely actual incremental
impact of an illustrative subset of 20 requirements under current
conditions nationwide. For this analysis, research was conducted on a
subset of 20 requirements in the final rules that have negative net
present values under the primary baseline and readily identifiable IBC/
ANSI counterparts to determine the extent to which they each
respectively have been adopted at the State or local level. With
respect to facilities, the population of adopting jurisdictions was
used as a proxy for facility location. In other words, it was assumed
that the number of ADA-covered facilities respectively compliant with
these 20 requirements was equal to the percentage of the United States
population (based on statistics from the Census Bureau) currently
residing in those States or local jurisdictions that have adopted the
IBC/ANSI counterparts to these requirements. The results of this more
limited analysis, using State-specific and requirement-specific
alternate IBC/ANSI baselines for these 20 requirements, demonstrate
that the widespread adoption of IBC model codes by States and
localities significantly lessens the financial impact of these specific
requirements. Indeed, the Final RIA estimates that, if the NPVs for
these 20 requirements resulting from the requirement-specific alternate
IBC/ANSI baseline are substituted for their respective results under
the primary baseline, the overall NPV for the final rules increases
from $9.2 billion to $12.0 billion. See Final RIA, section 6.2.2 &
table 10.
Benefits Not Monetized in the Formal Analysis
Finally, the RIA recognizes that additional benefits are likely to
result from the new standards. Many of these benefits are more
difficult to quantify. Among the potential benefits that have been
discussed by researchers and advocates are reduced administrative costs
due to harmonized guidelines, increased business opportunities,
increased social development, and improved health benefits. For
example, the final rules will substantially increase accessibility at
newly scoped facilities such as recreation facilities and judicial
facilities, which previously have been very difficult for persons with
disabilities to access. Areas where the Department believes entities
may incur benefits that are not monetized in the formal analysis
include, but may not be limited to, the following:
Use benefits accruing to persons with disabilities. The final rules
should improve the overall sense of well-being of persons with
disabilities, who will know that public entities and places of public
accommodation are generally accessible, and who will have improved
individual experiences. Some of the most frequently cited qualitative
benefits of increased access are the increase in one's personal sense
of dignity that arises from increased access and the decrease in
possibly humiliating incidents due to accessibility barriers.
Struggling to join classmates on a stage, to use a bathroom with too
little clearance, or to enter a swimming pool all negatively affect a
person's sense of independence and can lead to humiliating accidents,
derisive comments, or embarrassment. These humiliations, together with
feelings of being stigmatized as different or inferior from being
relegated to use other, less comfortable or pleasant elements of a
facility (such as a bathroom instead of a kitchen sink for rinsing a
coffee mug at work), all have a negative effect on persons with
disabilities.
Use benefits accruing to persons without disabilities. Improved
accessibility can affect more than just the rule's target population;
persons without disabilities may also benefit from many of the
requirements. Even though the requirements were not designed to benefit
persons without disabilities, any time savings or easier access to a
facility experienced by persons without disabilities are also benefits
that should properly be attributed to that change in accessibility.
Curb cuts in sidewalks make life easier for those using wheeled
suitcases or pushing a baby stroller. For people with a lot of luggage
or a need to change clothes, the larger bathroom stalls can be highly
valued. A ramp into a pool can allow a child (or adult) with a fear of
water to ease into that pool. All are examples of ``unintended''
benefits of the rule. And ideally, all should be part of the calculus
of the benefits to society of the rule.
Social benefits. Evidence supports the notion that children with
and without disabilities benefit in their social development from
interaction with one another. Therefore, there will likely be social
development benefits generated by an increase in accessible play areas.
However, these benefits are nearly impossible to quantify for several
reasons. First, there is no guarantee that accessibility will generate
play opportunities between children with and without disabilities.
Second, there may be substantial overlap between interactions at
accessible play areas and interactions at other facilities, such as
schools and religious facilities. Third, it is not certain what the
unit of measurement for social development should be.
Non-use benefits. There are additional, indirect benefits to
society that arise from improved accessibility. For instance, resource
savings may arise from reduced social service agency outlays when
people are able to access centralized points of service delivery rather
than receiving home-based care. Home-based and other social services
may include home health care visits and welfare benefits. Third-party
employment effects can arise when enhanced accessibility results in
increasing rates of consumption by disabled and non-disabled
populations, which in turn results in reduced unemployment.
[[Page 56245]]
Two additional forms of benefits are discussed less often, let
alone quantified: Option value and existence value. Option value is the
value that people with and without disabilities derive from the option
of using accessible facilities at some point in the future. As with
insurance, people derive benefit from the knowledge that the option to
use the accessible facility exists, even if it ultimately goes unused.
Simply because an individual is a non-user of accessible elements today
does not mean that he or she will remain so tomorrow. In any given
year, there is some probability that an individual will develop a
disability (either temporary or permanent) that will necessitate use of
these features. For example, the 2000 Census found that 41.9 percent of
adults 65 years and older identified themselves as having a disability.
Census Bureau figures, moreover, project that the number of people 65
years and older will more than double between 2000 and 2030--from 35
million to 71.5 million. Therefore, even individuals who have no direct
use for accessibility features today get a direct benefit from the
knowledge of their existence should such individuals need them in the
future.
Existence value is the benefit that individuals get from the plain
existence of a good, service or resource--in this case, accessibility.
It can also be described as the value that people both with and without
disabilities derive from the guarantees of equal treatment and non-
discrimination that are accorded through the provision of accessible
facilities. In other words, people value living in a country that
affords protections to individuals with disabilities, whether or not
they themselves are directly or indirectly affected. Unlike use
benefits and option value, existence value does not require an
individual ever to use the resource or plan on using the resource in
the future. There are numerous reasons why individuals might value
a